Home

Slick V3.3 Computer Accessories User Manual

1. r Matches carriage return t Matches tab character b Matches backspace character f Matches form feed character od Matches any 2 byte DBCS character This escape is only valid in a match set od Mod matches any single byte character excluding end of line characters When used to search Unicode text this escape does nothing om Turns on multi line matching This enhances the match character set or match any character primit ives to support matching end of line characters For example om matches the rest of the buffer Note Test the regular expression on a very small file before using it on a large file This option may cause the editor to use a lot of memory 529 SlickEdit Regular Expressions SlickEdit Regular Expression Definition ol Turns off multi line matching default You can still use n to create regular expressions which match one or more lines However expressions like will not match multiple lines This is much safer and usually faster than using the om option char Declares character after slash to be literal For ex ample represents the colon character char Matches predefined expression corresponding to char The predefined expressions are e a A Za z0 9 Matches an alphanumeric char acter ib t Matches blanks note that b is not like the Perl NET s e A Za z Matches a
2. Pressing Enter at the cursor here location results in the following automatic completion ET CURSOR_HE oa DO oa param length param width param height return int xj int setDimensions int length int width int height XMLdoc Format To use the XMLdoc comment format select the start characters and the lt param gt style Using the fol lowing code sample CURSOR_HERE int setDimensions int length int width int height Pressing Enter at the cursor here location results in the following automatic completion lt summary gt CURSOR_HERE lt summary gt lt param name length gt lt param gt 7 lt param name width gt lt param gt lt param name height gt lt param gt lt vreturns gt int lt returns gt int setDimensions int length int width int height 179 String Editing Doxygen Format To use a Doxygen comment format select the start characters or based on your preference and the param style Using the following code sample CURSOR_HERE int setDimensions int length int width int height Pressing Enter at the cursor here location results in the following automatic completion El CURSOR_HERE param length param width param height return int int setDimensions int le
3. Pressing Enter will result in The quick brown fox CURSOR_HERE jumped over the lazy dog e Extend line comments If selected when you press Enter at the end of a line containing a line com ment and there is also an aligned line comment on the line before or after the current line a new line comment will automatically be started on the new line For example The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog CURSOR_HERE Pressing Enter will result in The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog CURSOR_HERE e Join comments when joining lines If selected when you press Delete at the end of a line contain ing a line comment to join the current line with the next line and the next line is also a line comment the line comment characters will automatically be deleted For example The quick brown fox CURSOR_HERE jumped over the lazy dog Pressing Delete will result in 410 Extension Options Dialog The quick brown fox CURSOR_HERE jumped over the lazy dog String Editing If Split strings on Enter is selected when you press Enter to split a line when the cursor is inside of a string the closing and opening quotes and if necessary operators will automatically be inserted and the string will be aligned with the original string For example String x The quick brown fox CURSOR_HERE jumped over t
4. Pressing Enter will result in This is my comment CURSOR HERE E e For start characters Use this box to specify the comment start characters that will trigger the style of reference tags that are automatically inserted as part of the doc comment skeleton The characters se lected here use the reference tag style specified in the Use style box For comments formatted in 409 Extension Options Dialog Javadoc select For XMLdoc select For Doxygen select or See Doc Comment Examples for more information Use style Select the tag style to use for the corresponding start characters This tag style is used when SlickEdit Core creates skeleton doc comments beginning with the matching start characters For comments formatted in Javadoc select the param style For XMLdoc select the lt param gt style For Doxygen select the param style You can click through the start characters assigning each one with a particular style and the settings will be remembered See Doc Comment Examples for more informa tion Comment Editing The following options control comment editing behaviors These options will be unavailable for non applicable extensions e Split line comments If selected when you press Enter in the middle of a line comment a new line comment will automatically be started on the new line For example The quick brown fox CURSOR_HERE jumped over the lazy dog
5. X n1 Maximal match of at least n1 occurrences of X X n1 n2 Maximal match of at least n1 occurrences but not more than n2 occurrences of X X n1 Minimal match of at least n1 occurrences of X X n1 n2 Minimal match of at least n1 occurrences but not more than n2 occurrences of X X Search fails if expression X is matched The ex pression 4 if matches the beginning of all lines that do not start with if X Matches sub expression X X Matches sub expression X and specifies a new tagged expression See Using Tagged Search Ex pressions for more information dX Matches sub expression X and specifies to use tagged expression number d where 0 lt d lt 9 X Y Matches X or Y char set Matches any one of the characters specified by char set A dash character may be used to specify ranges The expression A Z matches any uppercase letter Backslash may be used inside the square brackets to define literal characters or define ASCII characters For example specifies a literal dash character The expression 0 27 matches ASCII character codes 0 27 The expres sion matches no characters In UNIX regular ex pressions matches a right bracket In both syn taxes the expression matches a right bracket The expression matches a caret character in both syntaxes char set Matches any character not specified by char set A dash character may be used to specify ra
6. Version Creating Templates Creating templates is very much like writing code To create a new code template complete the following steps 1 Create the template source files 2 Insert substitution parameters into the template files 3 Use the Template Manager to create a new template 4 Add the template files to the newly defined template Create the Template Source Files This is the same process as writing any source file Use SlickEdite Core to write a file from scratch or to modify an existing file Make sure your file is syntactically correct to minimize compile errors after it is in stantiated In many languages the name syntax used by Code Templates is legal for identifiers so you will be able to compile and run your template source files prior to instantiating them In other languages you will have to use temporary identifier names while writing the templates and then put in the substitution para meters once you are sure the source is correct You can store these source files in any directory and copy them to the templates directory during Step 4 Insert Substitution Parameters into the Template Files Use substitution parameters for any part of the source code that can differ from instantiation to instanti ation This includes class names author names if several people are sharing the same template files or creation dates In our sample we put in a substitution for copyright statement Se
7. 499 Using the ISPF and EDIT Emu lations Editing Menus To select a menu for editing from the main menu click Macro Menus or use the open_menu com mand Select the menu to edit from the list then click Open The Menu Editor will be displayed See Menu Editor Dialog for a list of the available options Defining Menu Item Aliases The Menu Item Alias dialog box allows you to define aliases which are similar commands for the com mand that is being executed This dialog box can be accessed by clicking the Alias button on the Menu Editor Enter each alias command on a separate line If one of the alias commands are bound to a key that key name will be displayed to the right of the menu item For example the e and edit commands are absolutely identically in function except that the e command requires fewer characters to type The gui_open command is identical to the edit command except that it prompts the user with a dialog box whereas the edit command prompts for files on the command line These two examples illustrate the best reasons for using aliases Enabling Disabling Menu Items SlickEdite Core has some attributes for enabling disabling predefines that you can specify for any com mand When these predefined auto enabling attributes are not enough you need to implement a callback which determines the enable or disable state of the command See the Sick Ge Macro Programming Guide for information on enabling and disabli
8. 540 Unicode Character Blocks for Regular Expressions Range Block Name 0B80 0BFF Tamil 0C00 0C7F Telugu 0C80 0CFF Kannada 0D00 0D7F Malayalam 0D80 0DFF Sinhala OE00 0E7F Thai OE80 0EFF Lao OFOO OFFF Tibetan 1000 109F Myanmar 10A0 10FF Georgian 1100 11FF HangulJamo 1200 137F Ethiopic 13A0 13FF Cherokee 1400 167F UnifiedCanadianAboriginalSyllabics 1680 169F Ogham 16A0 16FF Runic 1780 17FF Khmer 1800 18AF Mongolian 1E00 14EFF LatinExtendedAdditional 1F00 1FFF GreekExtended 2000 206F GeneralPunctuation 2070 209F SuperscriptsandSubscripts 541 Unicode Character Blocks for Regular Expressions Range Block Name 20A0 20CF CurrencySymbols 20D0 20FF CombiningMarksforSymbols 2100 214F LetterlikeSymbols 2150 218F NumberForms 2190 21FF Arrows 2200 22FF MathematicalOperators 2300 23FF Miscellaneous Technical 2400 243F ControlPictures 2440 245F OpticalCharacterRecognition 2460 24FF EnclosedAlphanumerics 2500 257F BoxDrawing 2580 259F BlockElements 25A0 25FF GeometricShapes 2600 26FF MiscellaneousSymbols 2700 27BF Dingbats 2800 28FF BraillePatterns 2E80 2EFF CJKRadicalsSupplement 2F00 2FDF KangxiRadicals 2FFO 2FFF IdeographicDescriptionCharacters 3000 303F CJKSymbolsandPunctuation 3040 309F Hiragana 30A0 30FF
9. Indent Tags Attributes Values Comments Advanced Schemes Beautify Scheme None SlickEdit XHMTL SlickEdit XML Data Help SlickEdit XML IE Style Delete Scheme Cancel Save Scheme Rename Scheme Save Settings Sync extension options To define a new scheme use the Beautifier to set the various beautify options and then press the Save Scheme button on the Schemes tab User defined schemes are stored in uformat ini DTD Caching When you open an XML document that has a document type definition of DOCTYPE that refers to a re mote external DTD the DTD file is downloaded and cached locally The DTD is processed to provide Context Tagging and better color coding Currently only HTTP and not FTP remote files are suppor ted This automatic caching allows you to work offline and edit XML documents that reference remote DTDs when you do not have an Internet connection If you want to force re caching of the DTD for the current XML document right click to open the context menu and select Apply DTD changes Applying DTD changes is necessary after you create a new XML document and complete the document type defin ition 1DOCTYPE Opening DTD Files from XML To open the external DTD referenced by document type definition 1DOCTYPE place the cursor any where on the IDOCTYPE tag and press Alt 1 or right click to display the context menu and select Go to Error Include File URL Mappings 264 X
10. Parameter Prompting Parameters can be set up for aliases so that when the alias is expanded you are prompted with a dialog to input the values This is useful for reducing even more key strokes for repetitive tasks when using ali ases that may require different values each time they are used To use parameter prompting first define the parameters then use them in your alias values by typing ParamName where ParamName is the name of the parameter that you have defined see Creating an Alias for Parameter Prompting below When the alias is used and expanded the Parameter Entry dialog will appear prompting you for the parameter values which will then be inserted into your text Creating an Alias for Parameter Prompting To create an alias for parameter prompting first select the alias file as described in the section Choosing the Alias File then use the Alias Editor to complete the following steps 1 Click New then enter the new alias name In the aliases list box on the left side of the Alias Editor make sure the new alias is selected 2 Click the Add button below the Parameters group box The Enter Alias Parameter dialog is displayed 3 Enter the following values e Parameter Name Enter the name that you wish to use in the alias value e Prompt Enter the text that you wish to be prompted with This is the label that will appear on the Parameter Entry dialog that prompts for values after the alias is expanded e Ini
11. def_vc_advanced_options Set to this variable to 0 to remove advanced options 482 Directories and Files Configuration Variable Description that decrease performance when using ClearCase version control def_vtg_tornado Set this variable value to 0 to prevent Context Tag ging of Tornado files def_xml_no_schema _list To prevent the editor from accessing the Internet to validate and get color coding information from DTD s add your XML extension to this variable Set the value to a list of space delimited extensions that you want excluded for actual schema validation For example ml xsl xsd This will prevent the editor from attempting to connect to the Internet for these extensions 483 Configuration Directory Directories and Files Configuration Directory Your SlickEdit Core configuration directory contains configuration files representing the changes you have made through setting editor options and it preserves the state of SlickEdit Core by using the state file vslick sta Directory Location By default the configuration directory is located inMy Documents My SlickEdit Core Config lt Version gt on Windows and SHOME secore lt Version gt on Linux You can view the path to the config directory by clicking Help About SlickEdit Core Changing the Configuration Directory If you would like to use a different directory for your config files you can p
12. 219 Reviewing Refactoring Changes Reviewing Refactoring Changes When a refactoring finishes the Refactoring results dialog box is displayed allowing you to review the changes Figure 6 52 Refactoring Results WW Refactoring results Originat Read ony Modified fie onent get ChildCount lassComponent Children Jonent Adachild Ge chi lA onent RemoveChild NEE e onent J get ChildCount lassComponent Children fonent AddChild MyBaseW shiateas ck gonent RemoveChild yBase ASE H Modified files a C projects cpp ImageE ditor M ainwindow h 2 C projects cpp ImageE ditorsMyClass h BEC projects cpp Image ditor MyClassComponent cpp E C projects cpp Image ditor MyClassComposite cpp There are three panes in this window e The left pane is read only and shows the original file s e The right pane shows the refactored file s For convenience this pane can be edited 220 Java Refactoring e The bottom pane lists all files that have been modified by the refactoring Clicking on any file in this list brings that file into view where it can be reviewed and edited Click Save All at the bottom of this window to save all the refactoring and editing changes that were made on all files Click Cancel to discard changes and have all files remain the way they were before the refactoring process Click Nex
13. 453 Font Configuration Dialog Attribute HTML only This is the color used for a recognized attribute of an HTML tag For ex ample the sre attribute of the img tag gets this color e Cursor This screen element is displayed in the active edit window when the cursor is placed on the command line It is not the color of the blinking cursor e Current Line Current Selected Line Selection SlickEdit Core will attempt to render these ele ments using your normal color settings for the Foreground color The selected Foreground color will only be used if there is not enough contrast between the font colors to be readable It is best to specify a Background color for these elements that is as close as possible to your normal back ground color ensuring that the color coded fonts are still easy to read Foreground Background Click the color squares to change colors for the selected element The Col or Picker dialog is displayed allowing you to pick a color from the palette or set your own custom color using RGB values Use system default When this option is selected the operating system s default colors are used Currently this check box is only available for the Status and Message fields For UNIX the system de fault colors are selected by the editor and not the operating system Sync backgrounds Click to apply the current Background color as the Background color for other elements The Select Colors to Update dialog appe
14. Classic Mac line endings are a single carriage return ASCII 13 Backup Tab The Backup tab is not available in SlickEdit Core See File History and Backups for more information AutoSave Tab The AutoSave tab shown below contains settings for automatically saving files Figure 10 43 File Options AutoSave Tab 426 File Options Dialog File Options Save after period of inactivity 1 O Seconds _ Exit SlickEdit upon autosave Save after period of time 1 i Seconds AutoSave directory La Save to Largest file to AutoSave K 500 Gei Save to different directory Same name different extension Same name The following options are available AutoSave activated Activates AutoSave which prevents you from losing data when an abnormal ed itor exit occurs possibly from a power loss The AutoSave temporary files are placed in a directory named autosave in the configuration directory Usually the AutoSave temporary files are deleted when you exit SlickEdit Core After a file is saved or closed the AutoSave temporary file is deleted the next time AutoSave occurs AutoSave temporary files are only needed for files that are modified The current implementation of AutoSave does not save files that have are not named In addition AutoRestore does not restore files that do not exist on the disk drive of your system Save your file at least one time to ensure that the file has a file
15. Click OK to save new aliases The above steps replace the default Syntax Expansion templates for these keywords The C brace style options will not affect defined aliases For more information on working with aliases using the Alias Editor or using alias escape sequences see Extension Specific Aliases Adding Syntax Expansion for Other Languages 160 Dynamic Surround and Sur round With To add syntax expansion and indenting for other languages complete the following steps 1 Use the prg e macro as a template This file is located in the macros subdirectory of your installation directory Make a copy of it and give it another name 2 Change the define constants EXTENSION and MODE_NAME near the top of the file to reflect the new extension and mode name respectively Do not use any spaces in these constants 3 Change the name of the first five characters of the _command functions dbase_mode dbase_enier and dbase_space to use the value given to the MODE_NAME constant in Step 2 4 Modify the prg_expand_enter function to provide the Enter key the desired support 5 Modify the prg_expand_space function to provide the spacebar key the desired support If you can rely on extension specific aliases follow the comment in this function 6 Use the load command Macro Load Module to load new macro modules Steps 4 and 5 require a good understanding of the Slick C language and what this specific macro is do ing See
16. End tags Has end tag Insert end tag on gt Match tag style of Scheme uses case sensitive tag search It contains the following general settings e End tags settings These options control how the end tags for the selected tag are formatted e Has end tag This option tells SlickEdit Core whether or not the specified tag is intended to be closed with an end tag This information is used for SlickEdit Core to know when to start or stop cal culating information based on the tag For example the lt div gt tag in HTML has a start and end tag while the lt br gt tag does not have an end tag Insert end tags on gt When selected SlickEdit Core automatically inserts the end tag after you type the closing brace gt of the start tag For example when you type lt div gt lt div gt is automatically inserted The placement of the inserted tag depends on other settings you have specified such as whether or not the end tag should be on a separate line specified on the Tag Layout tab e Match tag style of Select this option if you want the selected tag s settings to match the style of an other tag then pick the tag to use from the drop down list This can be a time saver when adding a batch of new tags that should all have the same settings e Scheme uses case sensitive tag search When this option is selected tags in the Tags column are displayed in the list exactly as you have typed them with the case preser
17. e Target file name When a file is created from a template as when adding an item template from the Add New Item dialog the file name of the file that is created on disk is formed from the target file name in the location you specify Use the menu button to the right of this field to insert common pre defined substitution parameters For example fileinputname is the item name provided on the Add New Item dialog when adding an item template to your project e Replace parameters in target file content Check this option if you want substitution parameters em bedded in the content of the target file to be replaced when the file is created from the template as when adding an item template to your project from the Add New Item dialog e Preview Previews how the file would be copied when creating the file from a template as if the source file name and target file name were fully resolved Add Parameter Dialog Used to add a custom substitution parameter to a template This dialog is launched when performing an Add operation from the Custom Parameters tab of the Template Manager Dialog When files are created 111 Add New Item Dialog from a template as when adding an item template to your project from the Add New Item dialog box you can configure your template to replace all substitution parameters with values For a list of pre defined substitution parameters see Predefined Substitution Parameters The Add Parameter dialog co
18. lt div gt 287 Formatting Settings e Preserve content When selected content between start and end tags is not wrapped but the tags are laid out properly with the parent tag This could be useful for tags such as lt pre gt where the content needs to be rendered exactly as it appears in the code Note e When Treat as content is selected the wrapping options in the Tag content width group box as well as options on the Tag Layout tab are unavailable e When Preserve content is selected the wrapping options in the Tag content width group box are unavailable Tag Content Width Settings When Wrap tag content is selected content between tags is wrapped according to the settings specified in this group box The options Fixed width Automatic width and Fixed right margin are mutually ex clusive e Fixed width When selected tag content is formatted to the specified width The original left margin of the content is maintained and the right margin is adjusted to meet the target width If Maximum right column is used lines will be wrapped when they reach the specified column even if they have not reached the specified fixed width This is useful if coding standards mandate that text should not exceed a specified column e Automatic width When selected the width of the longest multi line paragraph in the tag s content is used as the width This is useful for preserving the formatting of existing cont
19. 358 Selective Display Dialog Search Text Select Search text to specify a search string and display lines containing the search string specified or lines not containing the search string specified Click the right pointing arrow button to the right of the field to display a menu containing specific search syntax options such as Character in Range Beginning of Line and Decimal Digit The following settings are available e Match case When checked a case sensitive search is performed e Match whole word When checked a word search is performed Before a search is considered suc cessful the characters to the left and right of the occurrence of the search string found are checked to be non word characters The default word characters are A Za z0 9_ and may be changed by the Extension Options dialog box from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting and select the Ad vanced Tab Regular expression When checked a regular expression search is performed See Find and Re place with Regular Expressions for more information e Reset selective display When checked all lines are made visible and Plus and or Minus bitmaps are removed before a search is performed e Hide matched lines When checked lines containing the search pattern are hidden Function Definitions Select Function definitions to display only function head
20. CHheveuminilibbarcctibae ene cvrminh 2 d dbinchidetetiteciansl Add Files Add Tree Remove Tag File Remove Src File Add Tag File Retag Src Files Rebuild Tag File Auto Tag The left pane of the dialog lists all of your tag files separated into categories see Tag File Categories be low A tag file having a File bitmap with blue arrows indicates the tag file is built with support for cross referencing The right pane of the dialog lists all the source files indexed by the currently selected tag file For information about the buttons available see Context Tagging Tag Files Dialog Tag File Categories The Tag File categories described below are listed on the left side of the Context Tagging Tag Files dialog Tools Tag Files e Workspace Tag Files The tag files for the current active workspace Each project in the workspace has a separate tag file Visible only if a workspace is open e Auto Updated Tag Files These tag files are designed to be shared by multiple users of the editor on a network You can use the vsmktags utility to rebuild these tag files as part of your nightly build pro cess When SlickEdit Core detects that a newer version of an auto updated tag file is available it will automatically copy in the newer version and begin using it e C Compiler Configuration Tag Files These tag files correspond to one of the C C compiler con figurations These may be config
21. CodeWright CodeWarrior C Xcode BBEdit The CUA Common User Access keyboard emulation uses a command set similar to that used in Microsoft Word and Notepad You should save custom key mouse bindings for the current emulation before switching emulations You can do this by exporting your custom bindings using the Key Bindings dialog see Exporting and Importing Bindings or you can save using the prompt that appears when switching emulations Figure 4 2 Emulation Prompt 42 Determining Keys Functions SlickEdit Save custom key bindings for this emulation Change of emulation without saving will result in loss of all custom key assignments Select Yes to save custom key assignments Select No to continue without saving By saving your custom key bindings when you switch emulations when you return to the original emula tion those bindings are automatically available For example if you have created and saved custom bind ings in the CUA emulation and then switch to Vim switching back to CUA will make your custom bind ings for CUA available again To remove custom key bindings for an emulation resetting to the defaults select the Restore to default key bindings option in the Emulation settings See Managing Bindings for more information on working with custom bindings Determining Keys Functions When if you switch emulations the key bindings that are assigned to commands change according to the
22. Defining Special Characters To define what characters to display when viewing special characters from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting and select the Special Characters Tab Enter the character codes that you wish to use To view the differences between a DOS format text file and another format when View New Line Chars is active choose something other than a space for the End Of Line 2 character Under Win dows the recommended choices are 13 for End Of Line 1 and 10 for End Of Line 2 To change the colors and styles of special characters from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Color setting Select Special Characters from the screen element drop down list For more information on color settings see Setting Fonts and Colors Selective Display Selective Display also known as code folding is a convenient way to display or hide regions of your code so that you can view and manage only those regions that are relevant to your current editing ses sion Use the Selective Display dialog to activate this feature and to specify the type of regions to display or 224 Selective Display hide This dialog is displayed by clicking Display Selective Display or by using the selective_display command When Selective Display is active a Plus
23. If a C C source file is open when a tagging related operation is performed the tag files are searched in the following order 1 Workspace tag file providing it contains other C C source files 2 Auto updated tag files containing other C C source files 3 The C Compiler Configuration tag file corresponding to your default C compiler configuration as spe cified in your project C C Refactoring C C Compiler Options or global default 4 Extension specific C tag files in the order that they are listed in the Context Tagging Tag Files Dialog Note that if you have a C Compiler Configuration tag file cpp vt g will be excluded from this list Rebuilding Tag Files The Rebuild Tag File dialog box contains options for rebuilding the selected file To display the Rebuild Tag File dialog click Tools Tag Files When the Context Tagging Tag Files Dialog is displayed se lect a file to rebuild then click Rebuild Tag File Figure 5 10 Rebuild Tag File Dialog 72 Context Tagging Options Rebuild Tag File Generate References Remove all deleted files without prompting Keep all deleted files without prompting The following settings are available e Retag modified files only If checked SlickEdit Core will incrementally rebuild the tag file only re tagging files that have been modified since the last time they were tagged If not checked SlickEdit Core will rebuild the entire tag file
24. Options are available for the PL I language file extension for changing smart indenting and styles for tem plate editing To access these options from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting Choose the PL I language extension you wish to work with from the Extension drop down list then click the Options button The Formatting Options dialog specific to the file extension you have selected will be displayed Note Languages similar to PL I have similar Formatting Options dialogs which are not specifically doc umented The PL I Formatting Options dialog is pictured below Figure 7 39 PL I Formatting Options Dialog 303 Python PL I Formatting Options DO END style IF expr THEN DO IF expr THEN IF expr statements DO THEN DO END statements statements END END O Style 2 O Style 3 V Insert DO END immediately _ Insert blank line between DO END Keyword case Indent WHEN from SELECT L SPF style line numbering columns 73 80 Lower case Upper case Capitalize first letter O None Auto case keywords The following options are available DO END style Select the syntax expansion style that indicates whether syntax expansion should place the DO on a separate line then select from the following options e Insert DO END immediately Indicates whether syntax expansion should au
25. Table 6 9 Incremental Search Key Keys Function Ctrl R Search in reverse for the next occurrence of the search string Ctrl S Search forward for the next occurrence of the search string Ctrl T Toggle regular expression pattern matching on off Ctrl W Toggle word searching on and off To change the word characters for a specific extension from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup seiting Choose your extension from the Extension drop down list then select the Advanced Tab Ctrl Shift W Copy complete word at cursor to search string Ctrl C Toggle case sensitivity The key bound to the Brief emulation command case_toggle will also toggle the case sensitivity Ctrl M Toggle searching within selection Ctrl O Toggle incremental search mode Ctrl Q Quote the next character typed Ctrl S or F5 Brief emulation Search forward for the next occur rence of the search string Ctrl R or Alt F5 Brief emulation Search in reverse for the next oc currence of the search string Ctrl W GNU Emacs emulation Copy complete word at cursor to search string 183 Find and Replace Commands Keys Function Ctrl Shift W GNU Emacs emulation Toggle word searching on and off Incremental searching stops when you press a key that does not insert a character You can press E
26. slick C Tag Files C cygwiniliblaccli686 pe cyqwin 3 4 4include stdarg h C Documents and Settinas RhuffiMy Documents My SlickEdit C cyqwin lib gcc i686 pc cyqwin 3 4 4 include stdbool h XML Tag Files C cyqwin lib gcc i686 pc cyqwin 3 4 4 include stddef bh Gs 1 Cr cygwin lib gec i686 pc cygwin 3 4 4 include syslimits h C Documents and Settings Rhuff My Documents My SlickEdit C cygwinilib gccli686 pc cyawin 3 4 4 includeunwind h Java Tag Files C cyqwin lib gcc i686 pe cygwin 3 4 4 include yvarargs h C cyqwin lib gcc i686 pc cyqwin 3 4 4 include xmmintrin h C cyqwin lib gcc i686 pc cygwin 3 4 4 include c algorithm C cyqwinilib gcc i686 pc cyqwin 3 4 4 include c bitset C cygwin lib gcc i686 pc cyqwin 3 4 4 include c cassert C cygwin lib gcc i686 pc cygwin 3 4 4 include c cctype C cyqwin lib gcc i686 pe cygwin 3 4 4 include c cerrna C cyqwin lib gcc i686 pc cygwin 3 4 4 include c cfloat C cyqwinilib acc i686 pe cyqwin 3 4 4 include c ciso646 C cyqwin lib acc i686 pc cyqwin 3 4 4 include c climits C cygwin lib gcc i686 pe cygwin 3 4 4 include c clocale C cygwin lib gcc i686 pc cygwin 3 4 4 include c cmath C cyqwin lib gcc i686 pe cyqwin 3 4 4 include c complex C cyqwin lib gcc i686 pe cyqwin 3 4 4 include c csetimp CHheveuainilibbacctibae enec cvrminh 2 d dinchidetetiteciansl Add Files Add Tree Remove Tag File Remove Src File Add Tag File Retag Src Files Rebuild Tag File Auto T
27. trailing comment The resulting code would be if i 1 lt four characters gt trailing comment i 4 lt four characters gt trailing lt four characters gt comment lt four characters gt Other Tab This tab contains the preprocessing and pad condition options Figure 7 9 C C Beautifier Other Tab C C Beautifier lt ees Begin End Style Indenting Comments Other Schemes Beautify Preprocessing Pad condition Indent preprocessing Insert padding C Indent inside block dal Indent inside special ifndef Remove padding Eat spaces after if x Beset Leave alone Force parens on return Save Settings rict to selection Syne extension options 242 C C Beautifier The following options are available Indent preprocessing When this option is selected the indent before the character of prepro cessing is set to indicate the preprocessing nesting level Indent inside block When this option is selected preprocessing inside brace block is indented when inside preprocessing Otherwise preprocessing within a brace block start in column 1 Indent inside special ifndef Many C C header files starts with the following lines of code ifndef myheader_h define myheader_h endif When this option is selected preprocessing inside this special ifndef case is indented Eat spaces after When this option is selected the spaces
28. 294 Ada Beautifier tions have their colons vertically aligned For example before beautify procedure foo A_Var Boolean Another Var Boolean After beautify procedure foo A_Var Boolean Another Var Boolean e Align on declaration in out When checked the modes of parameter specifications in the formal part of a subprogram declaration are vertically aligned For example before beautify procedure foo A_Var in Boolean Another Var in out Boolean After beautify procedure foo A_Var in Boolean Another Var in out Boolean Blank Lines Tab The following options are available on the Blank Lines tab e Item Syntactic item to which blank lines settings get applied e Subprogram declaration Procedure or Function declaration e Subprogram body Procedure or Function body e Type declaration Any declaration that begins with the reserved word TYPE e for use Aspect clause For example for Medium Size use 2 Byte e Subunit comment header The comment block that appears just before a subunit e g Procedure body etc begin end Any line that starts with the reserved words begin or end if elsif else The if elsif and else parts of an if statement e return Any line that starts with the reserved word return e Loops Loop statements e g loop while for 295 Ada Beautifier e Nested paren list item A parenthesized item that is itself enc
29. If selected the options specified in the Search Tab of the General Options dia log are used instead of the options selected in the Find and Replace view Clear All Options Clears all options that are selected in the Find and Replace view Set Current Options as Default If selected the options that are selected on the view window replace the settings in the Search Tab of the General Options dialog Hide Show Tabs Toggles the display of the tabs on the Find and Replace view Clear Highlights Removes all highlighting from text that was highlighted during a search or replace operation Allow Docking If selected the Find and Replace view can be docked Find Tab This tab on the Find and Replace View provides fields and options for searching and finding text Figure 10 5 Find and Replace Find Tab 344 Find and Replace View Find and Replace Find Find in Files Replace Replace in Files Search for Loak in lt Curert Buffer E Search options Match caze Wrap at beginningrend Match whole ward Place cursor at end Use Search backward Dealer expression Unis Search hidden text Highlight matches Bookmark matches Incremental search Colors Mone Find Al Search for Enter the string you want to search for here You can retrieve previous search strings by clicking the drop down list button Strings may be text or regular expressions and can inc
30. Name is a required child element of TemplateDetails Specifies the name for the template item See the example below Attributes None Child elements None Parent elements TemplateDetails e Value Text value is required The text value specifies the name of the template item The name is shown in the Templates list on the Add New Item dialog box Example The following example illustrates the metadata for an item template for a custom Java class lt xml version 1 0 gt lt DOCTYPE SETemplate SYSTEM http www slickedit com dtd vse setemplate 1 0 setemplate dtd gt lt SETemplate Version 1 0 Type Item gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt Name gt My Java Class lt Name gt lt Description gt My custom Java class lt Description gt lt DefaultName gt MyClass java lt DefaultName gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt TemplateContent gt lt Files gt lt File gt MyClass java lt File gt lt Files gt lt TemplateContent gt lt SETemplate gt 120 Code Template Metadata File Reference Parameter Parameter is an optional child element of Parameters Specifies a custom substitution parameter for the template item For a list of pre defined substitution parameters see Predefined Substitution Parameters See the example below e Attributes e Name Parameter name This is the name of the substitution parameter WITHOUT delimiters For example if the delimiter is
31. To get an operating system prompt type the command dos with no arguments or from the main menu click Tools OS Shell Command Line Prompting 32 Common SlickEdit Core Com mands Many commands that display dialog boxes have equivalent commands that prompt for arguments on the command line or on the Eclipse message area For faster prompting than the dialog boxes allow you can choose to be prompted for arguments on the command line instead To set this option from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the General Tab then select the option Com mand line prompting To be more selective than this option permits change the key bindings For ex ample to be prompted only on the command line when opening files bind the edit command to Ctrl O which is bound to the gui_open command by default The following table contains a partial list of user interface commands and their command line counter parts Table 3 1 UI Commands vs Command Line Counterpart Graphical Command Command Line Version gui_open edit gui_find find gui_replace replace gui_write_selection put gui_append_selection append gui_margins margins gui_tabs tabs gui_find_proc find_proc Common SlickEdit Core Commands Commands are essentially the names of functions The following is a list of c
32. able for changing the colors of screen elements To use a different color scheme double click the Col or setting Click the Schemes button and select a scheme that you like from the Color scheme drop down list To change the fonts used for screen elements go back to the Preferences dialog and double click the Font setting Extension Specific Options Extension Specific Options These options are specific to file extensions and are available on the Extension Options dialog open the Preferences dialog expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting When the Extension Options dialog is displayed before setting the options select the ex tension you wish to affect from the Extension drop down list In addition to the options described below more settings for the selected language extension are avail able by pressing the Options button on the Extension Options dialog Because each of these dialogs is different based on the selected extension we recommend that you look through these dialogs for any set tings that you may want to make To see a listing of all of the option dialogs and their descriptions see topics in Chapter 10 SlickEdit Core Dialogs Changing the brace style To change the brace style used for C C C Java and other languages that use braces click the Options button on the Extension Options dialog then specify the Begin End Style that you want to use
33. e Changing the tab and indent styles e Indenting with spaces By default when you press the Tab key to indent literal spaces are inser ted This is a feature called Syntax Indent To change the amount of spaces select the Indent tab make sure the Indent style is set to Auto then specify the amount of spaces in the Syntax indent text box Indenting with tabs If you plan to indent your code using tabs or if you will be editing files that already contain tabs specify your tab preferences on the Indent tab Select the option Indent with tabs then specify the amount of spaces tab characters should have in the Tabs text box Note For C C Java and similar languages you can find more indenting options by clicking the Op tions button on the Extension Options dialog Enabling disabling Syntax Expansion When you type a keyword such as if or for press the space bar to expand that syntax element inserting the rest of the if or for statement This feature is called Syntax Expansion To turn it off select the Indent tab then deselect the option Syntax expansion Setting symbol navigation For C and C by default with each attempt to navigate to a definition Cirl Dot or Search gt Go to Definition you will be prompted for whether you wish to navigate to the definition proc or the declaration proto To specify that Go to Definition always navigates to one or the other select the Context Tagging tab then se
34. gt SES cyguwin lib gcc i686 pc cyqwin 3 4 4 include mmintrin C Documents and Settings RhuffiMy Documents My SlickEdit C eygwintlib gccti686 pc cygwin 3 4 4 includelpmmintrin h slick C Tag Files C cygwiniliblaccli686 pe cyqwin 3 4 4tinclude stdarg h C Documents and Settings RhuffiMy Documents My SlickEdit C cyqwin lib gcc i686 pc cyqwin 3 4 4 include stdbool h XML Tag Files C cyqwinilib gcc i686 pc cyqwin 3 4 4 include stddef bh ey i 1 Cr cygwin lib gec i686 pc cygwin 3 4 4 include syslimits h C Documents and Settings Rhuff My Documents My SlickEdit C cygwinilib gccli686 pc cyqwin 3 4 4 includeunwind h Java Tag Files C cyqwin lib gcc i686 pe cyqwin 3 4 4 include yarargs h C cyqwinilib gcc i686 pe cygwin 3 4 4 include xmmintrin h C cyqwin lib gcc i686 pc cygwin 3 4 4 include c algorithm C cygwin lib gcc i686 pc cygwin 3 4 4 include c bitset C cygwin lib gcc i686 pc cyqwin 3 4 4 include c cassert C cygwin lib gcc i686 pc cygwin 3 4 4 include c cctype C cyqwin lib gcc i686 pc cygwin 3 4 4 include c cerrna C icygwinilib gcc i686 pc cygwin 3 4 4 include c cfloat C cyqwin lib acc i686 pe cyqwin 3 4 4 include c ciso646 C cygwin lib gcc i686 pc cygwin 3 4 4include c climits C cygwin lib gcc i686 pe cygwin 3 4 4 include c clocale C cyqwin lib gcc i686 pc cygwin 3 4 4 include c cmath C cyqwin lib gcc i686 pe cyqwin 3 4 4 include c complex C cyqwin lib gcc i686 pe cyqwin 3 4 4 include c icsetimp
35. macro You can also display the dialog by using the gui_save_macro command The following options are available e Macro Name Specifies the name for the recorded macro e Requires editor control Select this option if your macro can only operate if the target is an editor control e Allow in read only mode Select this option if your macro does not modify the current buffer e Allow when window is iconized You will probably NOT want this option selected if your macro modi fies the current buffer Whether to select this option is more a matter of personal taste e Allow in non MDI editor control Select this option if your macro should be allowed in a non MDI ed itor control This is typical for commands which require an editor control but do not open or close editor windows buffers e Save Saves the recorded macro and displays the Key Bindings dialog so you can bind the macro toa key sequence See Binding Recorded Macros to Keys for more information Edit Alt E Displays the macro source code in a new editor window To save it click Macro gt Save last macro The Key Bindings dialog will not appear automatically if you use this save operation In stead to bind the macro to a key use the menu item Macro List Macros The Edit button is not available for saved macros See Saving and Editing Recorded Macros for more information e Delete Deletes the recorded macro List Macros Dialog The List Macros dialog is used t
36. sssessseesseesseesssrtesetssntesnntttnrtnnstnnttnnsttnnsnnnstnnttnnsstnnsnnntnnnnsnnnt 459 Web Browser Setup Dialog cccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeceeeeesaeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeseeee 459 FTP Options Dialogi sisie a vice teed tan Altay eee dey a ein ieda We ieee 461 Reflow Comment Dialog eiiiai aaa ent ricttesraedietichivteieteead a aaa aaa Aa EE EEA 466 Current Document Options Dialog seeeseeseeseseeieesiesrirssrissrresrnnsrnssinsssrnssrnnsrnnsnnnnnt 467 NR ee ET a E EA yl 469 Encoding iii oaia re EE eee eel adel aes Have lag etn dae 470 Using UMCG E ieee ated ene Reed dele idea ee atte ated ated teed 470 Environment Variables AAA 475 Setting Environment Variables in vslick ini ccceecceceeeeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseseeeeesseeeaaeens 477 Using the set COmMANG sieui an endeeee eke iiaii a i i 477 SlickEdit Core v3 3 for Eclipse Configuration Variables cccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeecaaeeeseaeeeeeeeecaaaeeseaeeseeaeeesaaesseaeeescaeeesnaeeseaes 479 Viewing Configuration Variables eccccecceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseceeeeceaeeeeeeeeseeeesaaeeneneeees 479 Setting Changing Configuration Variables ccccccccceceseneeceeseseeeeesseeeeeeesseeeesseeaaeess 479 Table of Configuration Variables cccccccccccsesceceecsseeeeecseeeeeceseeeeeeeeseeeeeesseseaeessenaaees 479 Directories and e UE 484 Configuration Directory iinei ienie iiei aai iiia aiit iaiia 484 System Confi
37. ActionScript Ada AWK C C C CFML CF Script Ch COBOL Fortran HTML IDL Install Script J Java JavaScript JSP Objective C Pas cal Perl PHP PL SQL PV WAVE Python REXX Ruby SAS Slick C Tcl Transact SQL VBScript Verilog VHDL Visual Basic Visual Basic NET XML XSD Supported Languages and File Types Embedded Languages SlickEdit Core recognizes languages embedded in HTML COBOL Perl scripts and UNIX shell scripts When editing embedded languages all language sensitive features are supported including Context Tag ginge SmartPastee Syntax Expansion Syntax Indenting and Color Coding In fact Context Tagging picks up embedded tags For example the Outline view displays function names if any exist Embedded language colors are user defined Embedded Languages in HTML SlickEdite Core supports any embedded language in HTML However Web browsers usually only sup port VBScript JavaScript and or Java while Web servers typically support VBScript Java or PHP The following screen is an example of VBScript JavaScript and Java embedded in HTML Figure 1 1 Embedded Languages in HTML lt x LANGUAGE UBSCRIPT z gt lt setupParams gt lt if request form Add gt Ad then addRecord gt lt zif vequest form Delete gt Delete then deleteRecords gt lt p gt lt x OPTION EXPLICIT DIM L_Guesthook L_Guesthook Guest Book 4 Pate Z 421 lt Mo
38. C C Preprocessing define MYNAMESPACEDECL name namespace name define MYPACKEDMACRO __ packed define MTYPELESS void define MYPOINTER t EF define MYNULL void 0 define MYENDNAMESPACE Among them the only two that are harmless are MYTYPELESS and MYNULL because they just create name aliases snippet to be for types or constants However the other four are troublesome and cause the entire code unparsable unless you configure SlickEdit Core to be aware of these preprocessor macros To do so complete the following steps 1 From the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting The Extension Options dialog is displayed 2 From the Extension drop down list select the C extension 3 Click the Options button at the bottom of the dialog The C C Formatting Options dialog is dis played 4 Select the Other tab 5 Click the C C Preprocessing button to display the C C Preprocessing dialog Figure 7 12 C C Preprocessing Dialog E C C Preprocessing c temp defaultconfig usercpp h define abstract H aesmelarg H zttrbuteip H zttrbute pi H _basedibase H boxfobject H cdecl H cplusplus H _declspecitype H delegate undef 6 Click New to add new preprocessing macros Arguments are allowed for example mymacro a b c
39. Character set intersection Matches all characters in char set1 that are also in char set2 For ex ample x 0 x 7f amp p L matches all letters between 0 and 127 x hhhh Matches up to 31 bit Unicode hexadecimal charac ter specified by hhhh p UnicodeCategorySpec Only valid in character set Matches characters in UnicodeCategorySpec Where UnicodeCat egorySpec uses the standard general categories specified by the Unicode consortium For example p L matches all letters p Lu matches all up percase letters See Unicode Category Specifica tions for Reqular Expressions P UnicodeCategorySpec Only valid in character set Matches characters not in UnicodeCategorySpec For example P L matches all characters that are not letters This is equivalent to 4 p L P Lu matches all charac ters that are not uppercase letters See Unicode Category Specifications for Regular Expressions p UnicodeIsBlockSpec Only valid in character set Matches characters in UnicodeIsBlockSpec Where UnicodeIsB lockSpec one of the standard character blocks specified by the Unicode consortium For example p isGreek matches Unicode characters in the Greek block See Unicode Character Blocks for Regular Expressions P UnicodeIsBlockSpec Only valid in character set Matches characters not in UnicodeIsBlockSpec For example P isGreek matches all characters that are not in 522 UNIX
40. Configuration Dialog RE 455 XML HTML Formatting Dialog e ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaaeeesseaeeeeeneaaes 457 Proxy Settings Dialog isimi iirst iea a aai aaa Na tiie ieee 458 Network Options Dialog EE 459 Web Browser Setup Dialog ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeceneeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaaeeseneeeseaeeesaaeeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeseneees 460 FTP Options General Tab ipini iranran aadi idien anaa i ada Aa aiian 461 FTP Options Advanced Tab rioei siiiriisiiiiaiiiiiaii iaiia diii iiia oiiaii 462 FTP Options Firewall Proxy Tab er araa aaa aaa aana ea a aaaea Ae ah REET ig 463 FTP Options SSH SFTP Tab a a A E a E a aS 465 xvi SlickEdit Core v3 3 for Eclipse 10 66 FTP Options Debug Tab eececcceccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeecaaeeseaaeeseeeeecaeeeseaeeseeeeeeeaeeeeaeessaees 465 10 67 Reflow Comment Dialogs ssii iuc iiini ia aritna iriad aa iaa iaia vaa iai 466 10 68 Current Document Options Dialog eccececceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeseeeeeesaaeeseaeeeseeeesaeeeeneees 468 11 1 Configuration Directory Preferences ccccceceeeceeeceeeeeceeeeeeeaaeeeeneeseaeeeesaaeseeaeeesnaeeeeuaeeseaes 484 TA2 ISP Options Dialog RE 501 xvii xviii List of Tables 1 1 Supported Languages and File Types 0 cccecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeesnaeeneneees 6 3 1 Ul Commands vs Command Line Counterpart 0 0 eccccceccececeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeset
41. Continuation indent The value in this field specifies how much to indent lines of statements that con tinue to the next line This has no effect on assignment statements or parenthesized expressions Lines that are a continuation of an assignment statement are indented after the first equal sign Lines that are a continuation of a parenthesized expression are indented after the open paren Given the following ex ample unsigned int i The result would be unsigned lt Continuation Indent gt int i e Align on parens When this option is selected the text for parenthesized expressions that spans mul tiple lines is aligned on the first non blank after the parenthesis or on the parenthesis itself e Align on equal When this option is selected the text for multi line assignment is aligned on the first non blank after the equals sign or on the equal sign itself Comments Tab This tab contains options for setting the parameters that you want for the trailing comments Figure 7 8 C C Beautifier Comments Tab 240 C C Beautifier C C Beautifier Begin End Style Indenting Comments Other Schemes Beautify Indent stand alone comments C Indent column 1 comments Trailing comments Specific column Original absolute column Original relative indent Save Settings Syne extension options The following options are available e Indent stand alone comments Indicates whether com
42. Editors SlickEdit Core provides the ability to switch from the SlickEdit Core editor to several other Eclipse editors for the current buffer These commands are provided in the right click context menu of the editor e Switch to Java Editor Changes to the JDT editor Visible only for Java files 23 Menus e Switch to C C Editor Changes to the CDT editor Visible only for C C files e Switch to Ant Editor Changes to the Eclipse Ant build xml editor Visible only for build xml files e Switch to Plug in Manifest Editor Changes to the Eclipse plugin am editor Visible only for plu gin xml files Similarly you can also switch from any Eclipse editor to the SlickEdit Core editor for the current buffer To do this use the Switch To SlickEdit accessible from the right click context menu in the Eclipse editor Menus If a menu specific to SlickEdit Core is not visible such as the Format menu then close the open files or classes and re open with the SlickEdit Core editor To open with the SlickEdit Core editor complete the following steps 1 Right click on the desired file or class and select Open With 2 Select the SlickEdit Core editor even if it appears to have already been chosen 3 If this is the first time opening the editor prompts appear to tag the run time libraries 4 Follow the remaining prompts The following menus are specific to or affected by SlickEdit Core e File e Edit e
43. Extract Method 0 cceeeceeeeeeeceneeeeeaeeeeeeee eae eeeeaeeseeeeeeeeaeeteaeeeeeeeetaeeeeeneeeed 201 6 33 C Refactoring Modify Parameter List ccccccsseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaaeeeeaeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeee 202 6 34 C Refactoring Push Down to Derived Class c cceccceseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeee 203 6 35 C Refactoring Push Down Selecting Members to Move ssssssssssssssssressrrsssrrsrrnssrrsreses 204 6 36 C Refactoring Pull Up to Super Casse 205 6 37 C Refactoring Pull Up Selecting Members to Move ccccccccsscceceessneeeeeessueeeeessneeeeenees 206 6 38 C Refactoring Encapsulate Field 207 6 39 C Refactoring Extract Class 208 6 40 C Refactoring Extract Class 2 208 6 41 C Refactoring Extract Super Class ccceeeccceteeeeececeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaaeeeeaaeeseeeesaeeeseneeee 209 6 42 C Refactoring Move Method 1 o ceeeceeeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaaeeseaaeeseeeesaeeeeeneeee 210 6 43 C Refactoring Move Method 2 o cceecseeeseeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeseneeeeeaeeeeaaeesneeesaeeeeeneeee 211 6 44 C Refactoring Move Static Field 211 6 45 C Refactoring Convert Global to Static Field cccececececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeseaeeeeeeeeees 212 6 46 C Refactoring Convert Local to Field cccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeseeeeeseaeeseeeeeeed 213 6 47 C Refactoring Replace Literal with Con
44. L Copy Close Default Options Manage your FTP connection profiles from this dialog Each profile stores the settings required to successfully connect to a particular FTP site Use the Add Delete and Edit buttons to create delete and modify connection profiles respectively Click on the Default Options button to set global and default FTP options Firewall Prosy Users Click on the Default Options button and set up support for vour firewall proxy before creating anew connection profile 2 Click Add to create a new profile The Add FTP Profile dialog box is displayed 3 Click Edit to Edit a profile The Edit FTP Profile dialog box is displayed See Setting FTP Options for information about the options on the Add or Edit FTP Profile dialogs Starting a Connection To start a new connection use the FTP view described above and complete the following steps 1 Click the FTP button dh to start a new session 2 The FTP Profile Manager dialog box appears From the Profiles list select the profile name to connect to 319 Setting FTP Options 3 Click Connect The FTP view displays the content of the remote directory 4 Toggle the ASCII Transfer mode button to transfer text files When in ASCII transfer mode line ending characters may be translated 5 Toggle the Binary Transfer mode button oer ep to transfer images and executables SES 6 To stop the current operation click the Stop
45. Load partial if larger than When selected if the file being loaded is greater than the size specified in the Load partial if larger than text box the entire file is not read into memory Since the file handle re mains open to your file Auto Reload does not work until the file is saved The line indicator might be blank unless the Fast line count on partial load option is selected Auto reload When selected the editor detects when files being edited have been modified by other applications and prompt or automatically replace the file with the new copy on disk Suppress prompt unless modified When selected files being edited that have been modified by other applications will automatically be replaced with the new copy on disk Auto read only When selected the editor detects when other applications change the read only at tribute of the file and turns the read only mode on and off Reload on switch buffer When selected the editor will detect when the file has been modified by other applications when the file is switched to the active editor window If the option is not selected the default check is still performed when you switch from another application Fast line count on partial load When selected this option indicates that the editor is to count the number of lines when files are opened The line number is always displayed in the line indicator area of the editor This option is much faster than the Count number of lines opti
46. MyComponent ttribute cpp Figure 6 40 C Refactoring Extract Class 2 208 C Refactoring MS Extract Class Class Members signed int AddChild MyClassB ase signed int RermoveChild MyClassB ase v2 void doSomething const char signed int char name signed int name alue Dependencies for doSomething Extract Super Class Breaks a large class into a better abstraction by moving some responsibilities into a new class interface The extracted class becomes the super class of the original class Figure 6 41 C Refactoring Extract Super Class 209 C Refactoring MS Extract Super Class Class Members a T void dot omething const char siqned int E char name oO signed int name alue Dependencies for doS omething E signed int printf conet Char Move Method Moves a method from one class to another and updates references accordingly The original method may be converted to a delegate method if there are references to the original method that cannot be converted to a reference to the moved method Figure 6 42 C Refactoring Move Method 1 210 C Refactoring Move Method Delegate Fieferences chid 0 M pClass laze Method name d oSomething Access modifier Co public protected private If the method is static you will be prompted for the target class Figure 6 43 C Refactoring Move Method 2 Move
47. Requires fileman mode Indicates that this command should be disabled if the current buffer is not in Fileman mode e Requires unicode buffer Indicates that this command should be disabled if the current buffer is not Unicode e Allow in non MDI editor control Indicates that this command should be allowed in a non MDI editor control Requires block selection Indicates that this command should be disabled if there is no selection or the current selection is not a type of block or column 367 Tools Dialogs e Requires a clipboard Indicates that this command should be disabled if there is no editor control clip board available e Requires a selection Indicates that this command should be disabled if there is no selection 368 Organize Imports Options Dialog Tools Dialogs This section describes SlickEdit Core dialogs related to tools and utilties See Chapter 8 Tools and Utilit ies for more information Organize Imports Options Dialog The behavior of the Organize Imports and Add Import features is controlled by the options on the Organ ize Imports Options dialog box pictured below This dialog can be accessed by right clicking in the editor and selecting Imports Options Figure 10 17 Organize Imports Options Dialog W Organize imports Refactoring Package explicit import limit before using wildcard Add blank line between groups of imports Number of package nesting levels bo group impor
48. See Key and Mouse Bindings for more information For information about other items that can be automatically completed see Completions Disabling Command Line Completions To disable command line completions from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the General Tab Uncheck the option List command line completions Note that this op tion does not apply to the Vim command line Using Shortcuts Inside the Command Line The command line is a text box control just like the text boxes that appear in various dialog boxes For a list of key shortcuts that can be used inside the command line and other text boxes within SlickEdit Core see Key Shortcuts in Text Boxes Using the Command Line to View Key Binding Associations 31 Starting a Program from the Command Line Shelling You can use the SlickEdit Core command line to determine what keys are associated with what com mands and vice versa Tip Alternatively you can use the Key Bindings dialog click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Key Bindings setting or use the gui_keybindings command to see a list of command key binding associations See Key Bind ings Dialog for more information Determining the Command of a Key Binding To determine the function of a k
49. Selections Command Key Sequence or Menu Item Description log click the More Tab then set the Line insert style to Before fill_ selection gui_fill_ selection Edit Fill Fills the selected text with a char acter indent_selection Tab Indents the selected text by the indent for each level or by one tab stop Indenting will be with tab or space characters depending upon whether the Indent with tabs check box is on unindent_selection Shift Tab Unindents each line of selected text by the indent for each level or by one tab stop Not all editing modes have an indent for each level lowcase_selection Edit gt Other gt Lowcase Converts the selected text to lowercase upcase_selection Edit Other Upcase Converts the selected text to up percase shift_selection_left Shift F7 Shifts the text within the selection to the left Supports the line and block text selection methods If a character selection is used it is converted to a line selection shift_selection_right Shift F8 Shifts the text within the selection to the right Supports line and block selections If a character se lection is used it is converted to a line selection overlay_block Edit Other Overlay block Overlays selected text at the curs or Supports block selection only adjust_block Edit Other Adjust block Overlays selected text at
50. Visual Basico Visual Basic NET XML XSD Code Beautifier ActionScript Ada C C C CFML HTML Java JavaScript JSP Slick C XML XSD Color Coding Context Tagging Auto List Members Auto Parameter Info ActionScript Ada ANTLR AppleScripte Assembly Language AWK Bourne shell scripts C C Shell C C CFML CFScript Ch CICS COBOL De DTD Fortran High Level Assembler HTML IDL InstallScript J Java JavaScript JCL JSP Lex Modula 2 Objective C Pascal Perl PHP PL I PL SQL PowerNP Assembler Progress 4GL PV WAVE Python REXX Ruby SAS Slick C Tcl Transact SQL VBScript Verilog VHDL Visual Ba sic Visual Basic NET Windows batch files x86 Assembly XML XSD Yacc ActionScript Ada C C C CFML CFScript Ch CICS COBOL DTD High Level Assembler HTML IDL InstallScript J Java JavaScript JSP Objective C Pascal Perl PHP PL I PV WAVE Python Ruby Slick C VBScript Verilog VHDL Visual Basic NET XML XSD Context Tagging Auto List Parameters ActionScript C C Ch J Java Slick C 6 Supported Languages and File Types Feature Languages Javadoc Editor ActionScript C C C J Java JavaScript Slick C Select Hide Code Block ActionScript Ada C C C CFML Ch COBOL DB2 Fortran High Level Assembler HTML IDL InstallScript J Java JavaScript Modula 2 Ob jective C Pascal Per
51. X Maximal match of zero or one occurrences of X X n1 Match exactly n1 occurrences of X X n1 Maximal match of at least n1 occurrences of X X n2 Maximal match of at least zero occurrences but not more than n2 occurrences of X X n1 n2 Maximal match of at least n1 occurrences but not more than n2 occurrences of X X Minimal match of one or more occurrences of X X Minimal match of zero or more occurrences of X X Minimal match of zero or one occurrences of X X n1 Matches exactly n1 occurrences of X 520 UNIX Regular Expressions UNIX Regular Expression Definition X n1 Minimal match of at least n1 occurrences of X X n2 Minimal match of at least zero occurrences but not more than n2 occurrences of X X n1 n2 Minimal match of at least n1 occurrences but not more than n2 occurrences of X X Search fails if expression X is matched The ex pression 4 if matches the beginning of all lines that do not start with if X Matches sub expression X and specifies a new tagged expression see Using Tagged Search Ex pressions No more tagged expressions are defined once an explicit tagged expression number is specified as shown below dX Matches sub expression X and specifies to use tagged expression number d where 0 lt d lt 9 No more tagged expressions are defined by the sub expression syntax X once this sub expression syntax is used This is the best way to make sur
52. clicking buttons including parentheses Almost all the editing keys including undo next word and previ ous word are supported The calculator uses a slightly enhanced C expression syntax The calculator supports specifying binary numbers and allows just an x prefix when specifying hexadecimal numbers For example to add the decimal numbers 135 and 288 type 135 288 Press the character to evaluate the expression and place the result on the next line To see the result in a different base click Hex Dec Oct or Bin Calculating Expressions with Mixed Bases 323 Math Commands To add hex FF with octal 77 with binary 111 with decimal 99 complete the following steps 1 Click Hex then type or click FF 2 Click 3 Click Octal and type or click 77 4 Click 5 Click Bin and type or click 111 6 Click 7 Click Dec and type or click 99 8 Select the output base by clicking one of the base buttons and type or click to compute the result Math Commands Evaluate mathematical expressions by selecting expressions in a buffer and executing the add command or by executing one of the math commands on the command line followed by an expression These commands support the same expression input The syntax of the math command is math expression The math command evaluates the Slick C language expression given and places the results in the mes sage line You can specify octal numbers by prefixing the number wit
53. e Backspace The following commands are available for binding to the Backspace key Rubout Deletes the character to the left of the cursor If Word Wrap is on Window gt Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting and select the Word Wrap Tab the cursor will wrap to the previous line when the left margin is reached Otherwise the cursor is not wrapped to the previous line Linewrap Rubout Deletes the character to the left of the cursor The cursor always wraps to the previous line when the left margin is reached If you want line wrapping to occur when column one is reached select the option Line wrap on text on this dialog e Delete The following commands are available for binding to the Delete key Delete Char Deletes the character at the cursor If Word Wrap is on Window Preferences ex pand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting and select the Word Wrap Tab and no more characters exist on the current line the next line is joined to the current line Linewrap Delete Char Deletes the character at the cursor If no more characters exist on the cur rent line the next line is joined to the current line e End The following commands are available for binding to the End key End line Moves the cursor to the end of the line End Line Text Toggle Toggles the cursor between the end of the current
54. gt would be beautified to lt td ALIGN right gt Under normal cir cumstances you will want to preserve the case of your XML attributes but for certain special cases e g XHTML you may want to change this setting e Word value case Not available for XML e Hex value case Not available for XML e Quote word values Specifies whether you want word values enclosed in double quotes after the of an attribute inside the body of a tag For example lt td align right gt would be beautified to lt td align right gt Select Preserve if you want word values left alone Under normal circumstances you will want to preserve your XML values but for certain special cases e g XHTML you may want to change this setting e Quote number values Specifies whether you want number values enclosed in double quotes after the of an attribute inside the body of a tag For example lt td width 590 gt would be beautified to lt td width 590 gt Select Preserve if you want number values left alone Under normal circumstances you will want to preserve your XML values but for certain special cases e g XHTML you may want to change this setting Quote all values When on all values will be quoted after the of an attribute inside the body of a tag For example lt td align right gt would be beautified to lt td align right gt Under normal circumstances you will want to preserve your XML values but for certain special cases e g XHTML you
55. java 114 Manually Creating a Template class safeitemnames 1 Creating a Multi file Template A multi file template is a template item that creates more than one file Multi file templates require the use of substitution parameters to ensure that file name and extension parts are used when creating each file of the template item For example a C class typically consists of e A h file that contains the class definition e A cpp file that contains the class implementation Since you can only enter one name into the Name field on the Add New Item dialog box you need a way to specify the target file name for each file created by the multi file template In the C class example be low the h and cpp files are created with the name you provide while their extensions are preserved To create a multi file item template from the Template Manager dialog click File SlickEdit Template Manager To manually create a multi file item template 1 Create the item template the same way a single file template would be created For more information on manually creating a template item see Manually Creating a Template 2 Add TargetFilename attributes to each of the File elements in your template metadata file setemplate Set the value of each TargetFilename attribute to fileinputname lt extension gt where lt extension gt is the file extension of the target file name being created When the files are cre ated th
56. lt four characters gt lt trailing comment gt lt TD gt lt TR gt The resulting code would be lt TR gt lt TD gt lt four characters gt lt trailing comment gt lt TD gt lt TR gt Advanced Tab Figure 7 29 HTML Beautifier Advanced Tab HTML Beautifier Indent Tags Attributes Values Comments Advanced Schemes Beautify End previous lt P gt tag when Beautify JavaScript Hitting another lt P gt tag Cancel Edit JavaScript Settings Help Hitting a standalone tag C Remove blank lines Save Settings Restrict to selection Sync extension options The following options are available on the Advanced tab e End previous lt P gt tag when Select from the following options e Hitting another lt P gt tag When on the beautifier will interpret a lt P gt tag as a signal of the end of 277 XML HTML Formatting any previous paragraphs Hitting a standalone tag When on the beautifier will interpret a standalone tag as a signal of the end of any previous paragraphs For example in the following content the lt TABLE gt tag assuming that the lt TABLE gt tag is a standalone tag signals the end of the previous lt P gt paragraph This has the benefit of cleaning up unwanted and unexpected indenting For example lt P gt This is a paragraph of content The paragraph will be ended by the start of the table below it lt TABLE gt lt TR gt
57. make and save the changes then from the main menu click Macro Load Module F12 or gui_load command Find and select the e file you just edited and click Open The message Mod ule s loaded appears on the message line and SlickEdit Core will now honor the changes you made to the e file when you use the corresponding key sequence Deleting Recorded Macros To delete a macro that has been recorded and saved from the main menu click Macro List Macros or use the list_macros command Select the macro you want to delete and click Delete To delete a macro that you recorded and bound to a key sequence using execute_last_macro_key browse to your configuration directory and delete Lastmac lt key gt e and its corresponding last mac lt key gt ex file where lt key gt matches the key you used when creating the binding keys 0 9 A Z or F1 F12 Using Macros to Discover and Control Options Recording macros provides a good starting point for discovering variables in Slick C code that control the behavior of SlickEdit Core Since responses to dialog boxes such as when you select deselect options are recorded as Slick C source you can use recorded macros to discover and change these variables quickly For example per haps you frequently switch line insert styles Instead of every time clicking Window Preferences ex panding SlickEdit and clicking General in the tree then double clicking the General setting and selecting the
58. n Unexclude expose the first n lines of an excluded block e SS Unexclude expose an entire excluded block Remarks Expose one or more lines having the leftmost indentation level in a block of excluded lines The SS line command exposes the entire block of lines and is to S m where mis the number of lines in the block of excluded lines See Also ispf_exclude ispf_reset ISPF Line Command First ISPF Line Command Last ISPF Line Com mand Exclude ISPF Insert Tabs Ruler TABS or TABL Usage TABS TABL Remarks Displays the tab definition line After this line is inserted the marks may be moved in order to adjust the tab positions Note that if you have multiple tabs lines and you change one the subsequent tabs lines will also be changed See Also ispf_tabs tabs ISPF Insert Text TE Usage TE n Remarks Inserts one or more blank lines to allow power typing for text entry This command is identical to the insert I command except that it switches the mode to wrap lines See Also ispf_enter ISPF Line Command I ISPF Line Command MASK ISPF Insert Lines TF Usage 514 ISPF Line Commands TF Remarks Reflows paragraphs according to the current column boundary settings See Also reflow_paragraph ISPF Join Lines TJ Usage TJ Remarks Join this line with the next line See Also ISPF Line Command TS join_line ISPF Split Line TS Usage TS Remarks Divides a line so that data can
59. operates on text within the edit boundary columns There are two forms to this command The first form LC n specifies that the line and the subsequent n 1 lines are to be converted The second block form LCLC or LCC is placed on the first and last lines of the block to be converted See Also ispf_caps ISPF Line Command Uppercase lowcase upcase ISPF Expose Last Lines L and LL Usage e L n Unexclude expose the last n lines of an excluded block e LL Unexclude expose an entire excluded block identical to FF Remarks Expose one or more lines at the end of a block of excluded lines The LL line command exposes the en tire block of lines and is to L m where mis the number of lines in the block of excluded lines See Also ispf_exclude ispf_reset ISPF Line Command First ISPF Line Command Show ISPF Line Com 511 ISPF Line Commands mand Exclude ISPF Move Lines M and MM for blocks Usage e M n Move n lines starting with the line with the command e MM Move a block of lines must match another MM Remarks Specify lines to be moved to another location There are two forms to this command The first form M n specifies that the line and the subsequent n 1 lines are to be moved The second block form MM is placed on the first and last lines of the block to be moved There can be only one move block specified Furthermore you cannot have both a move block and a copy block specified at the s
60. signed int Required By D H signed int printiconst char Derived class that members need to be moved to Class MyClassComponent C Documents and S Pull Up to Super Class Automates moving members from a selected class to one of its directly inherited base classes Figure 6 36 C Refactoring Pull Up to Super Class 205 C Refactoring E Pull Up Select super class to move members to File to move definitions to MyClassComponent cppd L Class members are pulled up one level at a time Constructors and destructors cannot be moved Any de pendencies that are not part of the original class will not be moved to the new base class and might not be accessible thereby causing compilation errors This occurs for example when a function being moved uses a Static global variable that is defined in the original class cpp file when the definitions are moved to a different cpp file Figure 6 37 C Refactoring Pull Up Selecting Members to Move 206 C Refactoring E Select members to move Move members from class Mu losst omponert to class MyClassB ase Class Members signed int get_ChildCount E MyClasalter Children signed int AddChild MyClassB ase signed int RemoveChild MyClassB ase 2 oid doSomething const char signed int Dependencies Encapsulate Field Generates get and set functions for the specified variable and makes that varia
61. the default then a substitution parameter that inserts a copyright string would be defined as copyright and NOT as copyright e Value Parameter value This is the value that the substitution parameter evaluates to when a string or File is created from the template e Child elements None e Parent elements Parameters e Value N A Example The following example illustrates the metadata for an item template for a custom Java class When MyClass java is used to create the file from the template all occurrences of copyright in the created file will be replaced with c 2005 2006 lt xml version 1 0 gt lt DOCTYPE SETemplate SYSTEM http www slickedit com dtd vse setemplate 1 0 setemplate dtd gt lt SETemplate Version 1 0 Type Item gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt Name gt My Java Class lt Name gt lt Description gt My custom Java class lt Description gt lt DefaultName gt MyClass java lt DefaultName gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt TemplateContent gt lt Parameters gt lt Parameter Name copyright Value c 2005 2006 gt Parameters gt A A Files gt lt File gt MyClass java lt File gt lt Files gt lt TemplateContent gt lt SETemplate gt 121 Code Template Metadata File Reference Parameters Parameters is a required child element of TemplateContent Specifies custom substitution parameters for the template item For a list of pr
62. user id and password are re quired USER remote_userid remote_host is sent to the firewall after logon e OPEN site When this option is selected host and port are required User ID and password are ig nored OPEN remote_host is sent to the firewall when connecting e Router When this option is selected host port user id and password are ignored Router based fire walls are transparent with the exception that connections can only be established one way out through the firewall Because incoming connections are not allowed PASV is turned on automatically e Passive transfers PASV When this option is selected transfers are initiated by SlickEdit Core 464 FTP Options Dialog SSH SFTP Tab This tab on the FTP Options Dialog is used to set the location of the client program used to establish con nections with the SSH server Figure 10 65 FTP Options SSH SFTP Tab FIP Options General Advanced Firewall Proxy SSH SFTP Debug SSH executable PS ces Example c ycygwinibin ssh exe Subsystem Service name SSH executable The location of the SSH client program that is used to establish the secure connec tion with the SSH server SFTP support requires the OpenSSH client program to operate Windows users can obtain the SSH cli ent by downloading and installing the Cygwin package hito Avww cyqwin com and making sure to choose the openssh package during install Subsystem Servic
63. vslick sta and vrestore slkis 1 Configuration directory The configuration directory is defined by the VSLICKCONFIG environment variable 2 If VSLICKCONFIG is not defined then My Documents My SlickEdit Core Config is used 3 Current directory 4 Paths specified in VSLICKPATH environment variable 5 Paths specified in PATH environment variable Search Order for Executable Files The search order for executable files batch macro programs and miscellaneous files is 1 Current directory 2 Configuration directory The configuration directory is defined by the VSLICKCONFIG environment variable 3 If VSLICKCONFIG is not defined then My Documents My SlickEdit Core Config is used 4 Paths specified in VSLICKPATH environment variable 5 Paths specified in PATH environment variable 489 VLX File and Color Coding VLX File and Color Coding For more basic information about using Color Coding see Color Coding To modify the color coding for VLX files use one of the following methods Use the Color Coding Setup dialog box Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Color Coding setting Modify the vslick v1 x file Or create a new VLX file The vslick vx file defines language specific coloring support for the following languages Ada Assembler AWK Cc C CFScript CICS COBOL dBASE Delphi Fortran HTML Java Modula 2 Pascal Perl P
64. vunxobjs e A text file that contains user defined dialog boxes and menus in Slick C syntax vusrs e UNIX vunxs e A text file that contains system modified dialog boxes and menus These changes are NOT auto matically transferred unless the version encoding matches For example vusrsl10e e System Configuration Files System configuration files are located in the SlickEdit Core installation directory Typically these files are only modified by SlickEdit Inc or OEM customers OEM customers might want to modify one of these files to ship a customized version of SlickEdit Core Table of System Configuration Files The table below provides a list of the system configuration files Table 11 4 System Configuration File System Config File Description alias slk A text file that contains default global aliases for example directory aliases box ini A text file that contains default box and line com ment styles This file is NOT modified by the dialogs and is not preserved when a new editor is installed 487 File Search Order System Config File Description format ini print ini A text file that contains default beautifier schemes A text file that contains default printing schemes This file is NOT modified by the dialogs and is not preserved when a new editor is installed prjtemplates vpt A text file that contains default project packages This file is NOT
65. when you type the word procedure and the Keyword case is set to Upper case the editor changes procedure to PROCEDURE e Syntax Select the type of syntax to use COBOL 74 and COBOL 2000 syntax are mutually exclusive options Embedded SQL Dialect Specifies the specific type of SQL that is embedded in your COBOL source This affects embedded SQL language color coding e Line Numbering Choose the line numbering style from the following options e COBOL style line numbering When selected expect line numbers in columns one through six when renumbering lines e SPF style line numbering When selected expect line numbers in columns 73 through 80 when re numbering lines 300 Pascal Formatting Options Pascal This section describes some of the advanced options that are available for Pascal Pascal Formatting Options Options are available for the Pascal language file extension for changing smart indenting and styles for template editing To access these options from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting Choose the Pascal language extension you wish to work with from the Extension drop down list then click the Op tions button The Formatting Options dialog specific to the file extension you have selected will be dis played Note Languages similar to Pascal have similar Formatting Options dialogs which
66. 301 el E WEE 303 PL I Formatting Options isc teecctas ih cease venta aan aa e ira taai anes a aaa AEE ESS 303 PRON EE 305 Begin End Structure Matching for Python 0 ccc cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeeeaes 305 8 TOONS and RR EE 307 Comparing and Merging ccccccceeseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceaeeecaaaeseneeceaaeeesaaeseeeeeesaeeeeaeeeseeeesiaeeseeeees 308 Bil al 308 Way MOQ EE 314 File History ANd BACKUPS 317 Compare Two Backup History Elements Using DIFF Zilla c cccsseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 317 Compare a Local Backup History Element with the Current Version Using DIFFzilla 317 ei GEET 318 Working with Fall E EE ER 318 Setting FTP Options i a a A a a a Ta a e a aa iS 320 The Regex Evaluator s naa e ni AEE ERE ER E EEA EAE TERR 321 Using the Regex Evaluator ccc ceeccceeeeenneeeeeeeceeeeeesaeeeeeesaaeeeseeeaeeeseeaaeeeeeenaeeeeeneaaes 321 Using the Calculator and Math Commands ccccccceeeceeceneeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeseeeesaeeeeeneeees 323 ae E e 323 Math Command EE 324 OA Fil EINE ETE E E E E 327 9 Macros and Macro Programming ssasssssununnnennnnnunnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nunnan nnna 329 Recorded Be 330 Recorded Macro Operations sessssesstessiresirssitnettnsttnstttnstrnsttnsttnustnutnnnnnnntn nen nnenn tnt 330 Using Macros to Discover and Control Options 0 00 eee ee eee eee eee eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 335 Programmable Macros rune noriea so Nen a a
67. Completions Command Line History The command line maintains a command history allowing you to quickly reuse previously entered com mands Once the command line is open use the arrow keys to scroll up and down in the command his tory Command Line Completions As you type a command a list of matching completions is displayed including any command line argu ments used in a previous command Use Tab or the Down arrow to move to the next command in the list and Shift Tab or the Up arrow to move to the previous command Press the Enter key to select the cur rent command Some commands like set var prompt for arguments SlickEdit Core maintains a history of arguments used for each command Use the same completion and history mechanism as described above for com mands to complete arguments Typically the most recent argument you typed is automatically displayed Tip Command completions are useful for discovering other useful operations For instance to find all operations that begin with find type find in the command line and a list of those commands is displayed Some search commands do not begin with find like gui_find so you may not dis cover all related commands this way To find all commands containing the word find use the Key Bindings dialog click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Key Bindings setting alternatively use the gui_keybindings com mand
68. Ctrl X followed by the command 50 Cursor Mouse and Scroll Set tings bound to Ctrl C rather than the command bound to Ctrl X Ctrl C To change this option click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the More Tab In the Key message delay spin box enter the amount to delay before a prefix key in tenths of a second The prefix key is not displayed if the next key is pressed before the delay specified in this text box Using Shorter Key Names in Menus The main menu displays the key bindings for commands associated with each menu entry These bind ings can be condensed for non CUA emulations See Menus for more information 51 Setting the Cursor Style Cursor Mouse and Scroll Settings This section describes settings for the cursor mouse and scroll style For cursor navigation information see Cursor Navigation Setting the Cursor Style You can use a text mode style cursor instead of a vertical cursor To set this option from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Gen eral setting On the General Options dialog select the More Tab then select the option Use block curs or Hiding the Mouse Pointer To hide the mouse pointer when typing from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click Genera
69. Dialog e Run This button runs the selected command or user recorded macro e Remove This button clears the binding for the selected command macro You can also press Delete to clear the binding Add This button is used to initiate a new binding displaying the Bind Key dialog See Creating Bind ings and Bind Key Dialog for more information Close Closes the Key Bindings dialog You can also press Esc to close the dialog Message line A message line under the buttons displays contextual instructions for using the dialog Bind Key Dialog The Bind Key dialog is used to bind a command to a key sequence or mouse event It is displayed when you click Add on the Key Bindings dialog to add a new binding Figure 10 46 Bind Key Dialog Bind Key Command Jsurround with Key Sequence ua 8 m ee Bind to mode XML The Bind Key dialog contains the following e Command This field shows the command that you have selected to bind e Key Sequence This field is used to enter the key sequence or mouse event that you want bound to the command For example to enter the key sequence Ctrl W literally press the Ctrl and W keys to gether It accepts literal keyboard mouse input so you cannot edit the text or use key functions such as backspacing or tabbing in and out of the field You must use the red X button to clear the filter e Bind After entering the key sequence or mouse event click this button to save
70. ENEE avait ENEE EES d e Leed ee de Wendin ieee 21 POLSPOClIVES eege Anche dee dE guid EEN dE dE dee 21 The SlickEdit Core Editor ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaaaeeseaeeseeeeesaaeeseaeeeseeeesaeeeseneeee 21 Switching Between the SlickEdit Core Editor and Eclipse Editors ceeeeeeeeee 23 En EE 24 VIE 25 Status Areda Beene nr Baier eee dee ee Ehe ee 25 NEI e iis ei ae a aa al AA a oa nia ies 25 COMMANG Bn 26 elle Giele 27 Opening SlickEdit Core Views 0 ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeceeeeeeaaeeeeeeeesaeeeesaaeseeeeeseeaeeesaaeeeeaees 27 Available SlickEdit Core Views o ccececcceceeeeceeneceeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeceeeeesaaeeeseaeeseeeeeniaeeneeeeseas 27 The SlickEdit Core Command Line eccceeeeececeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeaeeesaaeeeeeeeeseeeesaaeseenees 30 Activating the Command Line c ccececeeeeeeceeeeeeceneeeeaaeeeeneeseeeeesaaeeseaeeeseeeesaeeeeeneeee 30 Command Eine HIStory geet Ee ANE ee sate 31 Command Line Completions cccccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeseaeeesaaeeseeeeescaeeeeeeeeeaes 31 Using Shortcuts Inside the Command Line c ccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaaeeeenees 31 SlickEdit Core v3 3 for Eclipse Using the Command Line to View Key Binding Associations c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 31 Starting a Program from the Command Line Shelling cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeeees 32 Command Line Prompting tsi rehier
71. Extension Options dialog Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting The color of the rectangle box guide is controlled by the Block Matching screen element on the Color Settings dialog Window Preferences expand SlickEd it and click General in the tree then double click the Color setting See Syntax Indent for more informa tion on setting indent styles and Colors for more information on changing the colors of screen elements Syntax Expansion must be on for Dynamic Surround to work Both options are on by default To turn off either of these options click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting Choose your extension from the Extension drop down list then select the Indent Tab Deselect the option s Use Dynamic Surround and or Syntax ex pansion If you need to move or modify existing text you can manually enter Dynamic Surround mode by using the dynamic_surround command This will cause the code block under the cursor to be selected and you can use the navigation keys as described above to pull in statements By default this command is not as sociated with a key binding See Creating Bindings for information on creating your own Surround With Surround With makes it fast and easy to wrap existing lines of code in a new block structure Surround With is supported for
72. Figure 7 15 XML Formatting Options Dialog 254 XML XML Formatting Options Case for inserted tags Uppercase Lowercase Capitalize Case for inserted attributes Uppercase Lowercase O Capitalize Preserve Case for inserted single word values C Uppercase Lowercase Capitalize Preserve Auto validate on open The following settings are available e Case for inserted tags This option is to specify if you want your tag names to be lowercase or upper case For example if you select Uppercase then lt tag gt would become lt TAG gt Under normal circum stances preserve the case of your XML tags but for certain special cases e g XHTML you might want to change this setting e Case for inserted attributes This option is to specify if you want attributes cased inside the body of a tag For example if you select Uppercase then lt td align right gt becomes lt td ALIGN right gt Under normal circumstances preserve the case of your XML attributes but for certain special cases e g XHTML you might want to change this setting e Case for inserted single word values This option is to specify if the case used when inserting the single word values that appear after the equals sign of an attribute inside the body of a tag This affects any attribute that has an enumerated type for its attribute values Under normal circumstances you will want to preserve the case of your XML single word values
73. File File is an optional child element of Files Specifies a file for the template item See the example below e Attributes e ReplaceParameters Optional Specifies whether parameter substitution takes place on the file con tents when the file is created from the template Note that parameter substitution always takes place on the TargetFilename attribute value example TargetFilename fileinputname cpp Pos sible values are 1 true or 0 false Defaults to 1 true TargetFilename Optional Specifies the actual name of the item that is created from the template This attribute is especially useful when creating a multi file template where file names of files created from the template are assembled by parameter substitution e Child elements None e Parent elements TemplateContent e Value Text value is required Value is the path of a file in the template item 118 Code Template Metadata File Reference Example The following example illustrates the metadata for an item template for a C class that creates a header file n and implementation file cpp lt xml version 1 0 gt lt DOCTYPE SETemplate SYSTEM http www slickedit com dtd vse setemplate 1 0 setemplate dtd gt lt SETemplate Version 1 0 Type Item gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt Name gt My C Class lt Name gt lt Description gt My complete C class header and implementation lt Description gt lt Def
74. General Options Dialog Alt menu hotkeys Not available in SlickEdit Core If checked Alt prefixed keyboard shortcuts will display the corresponding drop down menu If unchecked you can be more selective about key bind ings because you are permitted to bind Alt keys you normally could not such as AIt F Do not check this option if you bind Alt keys that are normally menu keys because you will lose these key bindings This option is unavailable using the CUA emulation Command line prompting Many commands that display dialog boxes have equivalent commands that prompt for arguments on the command line For faster prompting than the dialog boxes allow check this option See Command Line Prompting for more information List command line completions If checked when typing a command on the command line a list of possible commands and argument completions will be displayed above or below the command line See Command Line Completions for more information Alt menu Not available in SlickEdit Core If checked when the Alt key is pressed without following it with another key the cursor will pop to the menu bar Change directory Not available in SlickEdit Core If checked the current directory is changed in the editor when the directory is changed in the Change Directory dialog File Change Directory and the Open and Save As dialogs File gt Open and File Save As Show files beginning with a dot Not available in
75. Global Static Method Class MyClass Component wi Method doSomethind Access modifier Co public protected private Move Static Field Moves a static data member from one class to another and updates references accordingly Figure 6 44 C Refactoring Move Static Field 211 C Refactoring Move Static Field Fick class to move field to Mainindaw MyClassB ase MyClassLomponent MyClassComposite Move instance to class Mu losst omponert Convert Static to Instance Method Changes a static method to an instance method and updates any references to change how the method is accessed Convert Global to Static Field Moves globally declared variables into a static field in a class and updates references to refer to the new static variable Figure 6 45 C Refactoring Convert Global to Static Field 212 C Refactoring Convert Global Variable to Static Field fx Access modifier public protected Co private Convert Local to Field Moves a local variable from the body of a method into an instance member variable in the current class References to the local variable are replaced with references to the new data member This refactoring cannot be used to convert a method parameter to a field Figure 6 46 C Refactoring Convert Local to Field Convert Local Variable to Field Field name mArgumentCouni Access modifier public C prot
76. Level Expands everything one level below the current symbol e Expand 2 Levels Expands everything two levels below the current symbol e Display Non taggable Files Disabled in SlickEdit Core Displays files that are open in the editor that are not taggable such as text files Properties Displays the Symbol Properties View showing the properties of the selected item such as visibility whether it s static or final etc Note that you cannot use this window to change the properties e Arguments Displays the return type and arguments for functions methods in the Symbol Properties View References Displays the list of references for the selected symbol just as if you pressed Cirl in the editor window See Symbol Navigation for more information Show Call Tree Displays a tree of symbols used by the selected symbol for example other functions called by the current function See Viewing Symbol Uses with the Calling Tree for more information Contents Displays the following menu of save and print operations for the Outline view tree e Save Writes the items displayed in the Outline view to a text file prompting you for a file name and directory location The text file will then be displayed in the editor e Print Displays the Print dialog where you can configure options for printing the tree e Save Subtree and Print Subtree These options function similarly to the above except they apply to the selected subtree
77. More tab then selecting the option you can record those steps as a macro and bind it to a key se quence Now you have an easy way to toggle a feature on and off You can also view the source of a recorded macro without naming or saving it if you just want to see the code See Saving and Editing Recorded Macros for more information 335 Loading Macros Programmable Macros Many of the actions performed using SlickEdite Core are performed using Slick C macros Slick C func tions are mapped to menus buttons and keys and perform the action behind an event Use Slick C to customize modify and bind functions to other shortcuts Loading Macros To load a Slick C macro file from the main menu click Macro gt Load Module or use the gui_load command The Open dialog box is displayed prompting you for a file Setting Macro Variables You can set Slick C macro variables to specific values using the Set Variable dialog box Macro Set Macro Variable or gui_set_var command Figure 9 2 Set Variable Dialog Set Variable Variable yacehist Values 9 p Enter the name of Slick C global variable in the Variable text field You may use the spacebar and completion to assist you in entering the name Click the drop down arrow to select a variable from the list Enter the new value of the variable in the Value text box Click Edit to display the Variable Editor used for editing complex variables such as arrays
78. O Fixed right margin Javadoc The following options are available e Enable comment wrap When selected comments are allowed to be wrapped You must still specify the type of comments that you want wrapped by selecting one or more of the Enable options for block line and doc comments e Start wrapping on line This setting pertains to line comments only Make sure line comment wrap ping is turned on then type or select the number of consecutive line comments that must be present before wrapping is activated If your code contains many one line descriptive comments you may want to set this to 2 or more so that comment wrapping will not affect these short line comments e Comment width There are three types of width settings for comments e Fixed width If selected comments are formatted to the specified width This is useful since com ments are typically indented with the corresponding code This option maintains the original left mar gin of the comment and adjusts the right margin to meet the target width If Maximum right column is used comment lines will be wrapped when they reach the specified column even if they have not reached the specified fixed width This is useful if coding standards mandate that text should not exceed a specified column e Automatic width If selected the width of the longest multi line paragraph in the comment block is used as the width for block comments This is useful for preserving the forma
79. Options dialog is pictured below Figure 7 13 Java Options Dialog 248 Java Formatting Options Java Formatting Options Begin end style ope if if O if Ot 7 1 1 D D O Style 2 O Style 3 Insert braces immediately Insert blank line between braces Indent first level of code L Indent CASE from SWITCH C No space before paren C Insert padding between parens C Use continuation indent on function parameters The following settings are available Begin End Styles Specify the brace style to be used for template editing and smart indenting then choose from the following options e Insert braces immediately Specifies whether template should be inserted with braces e Insert blank line between braces Specifies whether a blank line should be inserted between braces when a template expands with braces Indent first level of code Specifies whether smart indenting should indent the cursor after declara tions such as functions Indent CASE from SWITCH When checked template editing places the case statement indented from the switch statement column No space before paren Determines whether a space is placed between a keyword such as if for or while and the open paren when syntax expansion occurs Example if or if Insert padding between parens When checked a space is placed after the open paren and before the close paren providing padding for the enclosed text For example
80. Paren Match Style As you type a closing parenthesis highlight and matching options are available To specify these options click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Gen eral setting On the General Options dialog select the More Tab then select one of the Paren match style options The Highlight style option temporarily block selects the text within the parenthesis pair The Cursor to Begin Pair style option temporarily places the cursor on the matching begin parenthesis Select Highlight matching blocks to automatically highlight the corresponding parenthesis brace bracket or begin end word pairs under the cursor To customize the highlighting color click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Color setting Select the Block Matching screen element To adjust the delay in milliseconds before the highlighting is up dated go to Macro Set Macro Variable and modify the variable def_match_paren_idle See Setting Colors for Screen Elements and Setting Macro Variables for more information Cursor Navigation These cursor navigation methods pertain to simple cursor movement within files We recommend creating key bindings for commands that you use frequently if a key binding doesn t already exist by default Navigating in Pages and Files The following commands control cursor navigation in pages and files e top_of_window
81. Primary Commands The table below shows ISPF primary commands that are not supported in the ISPF emulation mode The unsupported commands fall into two categories First some ISPF commands are made obsolete by more powerful features such as recovery profile and setundo Second some commands reflect features that we chose not to implement for the emulation such as ISPF macros PDF statistics model and pack Table 11 10 Unsupported ISPF Primary Commands Command Description autolist Control the automatic printing of data to the ISPF list data set builtin Process a built in command even if overloaded by a macro define Define a name as an alias or macro 517 ISPF Line Commands Command Description imacro Save the name of an initial macro in the edit profile level Set the modification level number in PDF library statistics model Copy a model into the buffer or defines a model class notes Control whether the MODEL command display notes or not nulls Control null spaces pack Control whether data is to be stored compressed or not profile Display edit profile recovery Specify edit recovery options rmacro Save a recovery macro in the edit profile setundo Control the UNDO mode stats Generate library statistics version Set the version number in the PDF library statistics view Save as browse command but prompts on save The follo
82. See UNIX Regular Expressions for a list of backslash options See Using Tagged Search Expressions for information on specifying tagged expressions in the replace string e SlickEdit regular expressions When regular expressions are turned on for a search and replace command the number sign character and backslash have special meaning in the replace string A backslash in the replace string has the same meaning as in the search string except that c char and wd are not supported See SlickEdit Regular Expressions for a list of backslash options See Using Tagged Search Expressions for information on specifying tagged expressions in the replace string using the number sign character Brief regular expressions When regular expressions are turned on for a search and replace com mand the backslash character has special meaning in that backslash in the replace string has the same meaning as in the search string except that c and char are not supported See Brief Regular Expressions for a list of backslash options See Using Tagged Search Expressions for information on specifying tagged expressions in the replace string The following table contains some examples of replace operations using regular expressions Table 6 13 Examples of Replacing Using Regular Expressions Example Description Search For hat Search for occurrences of the string hat that occur Replace With cat at the end of aline and replace
83. Selections centers the text enclosed in the selection align_selection_right None For block selections only see Block Selections aligns the text enclosed in the selection to the right edge of the selection 132 Selections Adding Numbers to a Selection Enumeration You can automatically add incrementing numbers to a selection of code by using the enumerate com mand To configure enumeration properties from the main menu click Edit Other Enumerate For a list of the options that are available on the Enumerate dialog see Enumerate Dialog Counting Selected Lines and Characters SlickEdit Core automatically counts the number of lines and characters in a selection This is useful to measure the length of a word or string or the number of lines in a function An indicator located in the bottom edge of the editor displays the following information based on your current selection e When nothing is selected the indicator is dimmed and displays the text No Selection e When the current selection is a character selection e If the character selection is contained on one line the indicator displays the number of columns se lected Note Because columns are virtual the number of columns displayed by the indicator is not necessar ily the actual number of characters or bytes in the selection if the selection includes tab charac ters unicode characters or extends beyond the end of th
84. SlickEdit Core This option controls the default value of the Show hidden files option on the UNIX File Open and Save dialogs and the Open tool window for all platforms Check this option to have the Show hidden files option checked by default each time the dialogs tool window are displayed The value of Show hidden files is controlled by the global variable def_filelist_show_dotfiles By default this option is on for Windows and off for UNIX platforms Automatically close visited files If selected a visited file will be automatically closed when it is nav igated away from If not selected the auto close feature will be turned off If left in the mixed state you will be prompted whether or not you want to close files A file is considered visited if it is opened as a result of a symbol navigation or search operation and not modified and subsequently navigated away from for example by using pop bookmark Ctrl Comma Top of file line Not available in SlickEdit Core If selected each buffer displays a line which contains the text Top of File This indicator for the location of the top of the file is displayed at line 0 which does not affect lines of code Rather than using the Top of file line option you can use Ctrl Shift Enter Ctrl Enter in Visual C and Visual Studio emulation to insert a new line above the line where the cursor is located Horizontal scroll bar Not available in SlickEdit Core If checked each edit wi
85. Syntax Indent for more information on setting extension specific indent styles e Match content indent When selected SlickEdit Core indents the selected tag to the same level as its parent content e Insert line breaks settings The values for Before open tag and After close tag specify the number of line breaks that are inserted before and after begin and end tags Note that in order to insert one or 290 Ada more blank lines the values should be set to 2 or higher More Settings The XML HTML Formatting dialog contains two buttons along the bottom that allow you to configure even more settings for these languages These buttons are shortcuts to the extension options that are usually accessed through the Options button on the Extension Options dialog See XML Formatting Options and HTML Formatting Options for more information on these dialogs 291 Ada Formatting Options Ada This section describes some of the features and options that are available for Ada including extension spe cific options and the Ada Beautifier Ada Formatting Options Keyword casing options are available for Ada language file extensions To access these options from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog choose the language extension you wish to work with from the Extension drop down list then click
86. Template Manager The Add New Item dialog contains the following e Categories Lists a hierarchy of item categories for installed and user template items e Templates Lists the template items for the currently selected category When you select a template item a brief description for that item is displayed just above the Name field e Name Enter the name of the file you want to create Note For single file templates templates that create a single file this is the name of the file Multi file templates use the name of the item entered to form names of files in the template For more in formation about creating multi file templates see Creating a Multi file Template 112 Locating Templates e Location Enter the location to which to save the item e Add to current project When selected the new item is added to the current project e Add After you have selected a template item provided a name and a location click Add to instantiate the template item Locating Templates Installed Templates Templates that are installed with the product are located at lt SlickEditCoreInstallDir gt eclipse plugins com slickedit core_VERSION sysconfig templates ItemTemplates For example the following directory under Windows contains item templates for the C language c SlickEdit Core eclipse plugins com slickedit core_VERSION sysconfig templates ItemTempla tes C t User Templates
87. The Vim emulation contains special keys and key sequences that are case sensitive A plus sign separates the simultaneous key presses For example the key binding Ctrl x k which closes the current file indicates to press at the same time the Ctrl key and lowercase x release then press k to insert the lowercase k Another example is the key binding gP which pastes the text before the cursor Press the G key which inserts a lowercase g release then press Shift plus p at the same time which inserts the uppercase P Visual C 6 Visual Studio The key bindings provided for the Visual Studio emulation are not the same as the key bindings used in Visual C but there might be some overlap If Microsoft Visual Studio does not 41 Changing Emulations provide a default key binding for a particular SlickEdit Core command the corresponding Visual C key binding is used e Xcode Changing Emulations After SlickEdit Core is installed you are prompted to choose an emulation CUA is the default emulation mode Key bindings and shortcuts mentioned in our documentation are based on this emulation You can change emulation modes at any time Click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click Gener al in the tree then double click the Emulation setting Figure 4 1 Emulation Options Emulation C vim SlickEdit text mode edition GNU Emacs Epsilon C ISPF Visual Studio Visual C 6 C Brief
88. Unicode let 525 SlickEdit Regular Expressions Sample UNIX Expression Description x 6587 ters in the Greek block Matches Unicode character with hexadecimal value 6587 Character set intersection Matches all Uni code letters in the Greek block pi low Matches all Unicode letters except q and w p L Matches all Unicode letters p Lul Matches all Unicode uppercase and lowercase let ters P L Matches all Unicode characters that are not letters p isGreek Matches all Unicode characters in the Greek block SlickEdit Regular Expressions SlickEdit regular expressions are defined in the following table Table 11 14 SlickEdit Regular Expressions SlickEdit Regular Expression Definition A Matches beginning of line Matches end of line Matches any character except newline X Minimal match of one or more occurrences of X See Minimal versus Maximal Matching for more in formation X Maximal match of one or more occurrences of X L Minimal match of zero or more occurrences of X Mon Maximal match of zero or more occurrences of X X n1 Matches exactly n1 occurrences of X Use to 526 SlickEdit Regular Expressions SlickEdit Regular Expression Definition avoid ambiguous expressions For example a 9 1 searches for nine instance of the letter a followed bya
89. User templates are templates that the user creates and are located at lt ConfigDir gt templates ItemTemplates Tip You can locate your configuration directory by clicking Help About SlickEdit Core Manually Creating a Template Code Templates are represented as files stored in specific directories A template is composed of the source file or files for the template and a metadata template file that provides additional information Since these are just files you can write them using SlickEdit Core To manually create an item template 1 Choose a category folder under the user templates directory Your user templates directory is at lt ConfigDir gt templates ItemTemplates Tip You can locate your configuration directory by clicking Help About SlickEdit Core All files will be created relative to the folder you choose For more information about how templates are 113 Manually Creating a Template 6 7 organized see Organizing Templates Create or edit a code file e g cpp java etc Replace occurrences of substitutable text with substitution parameter names For example you might want to make the name of a C or Java class into a substitution parameter in which case you could use the safeitemname substitution paramet er For more information on substitution parameters see Substitution Parameters Create an XML file and give it an extension of setemp
90. Variable Description VSLICKPATH must also contain the directories lis ted here VSLICKBITMAPS One or more directories separated with a semicolon or a colon on UNIX that contain bitmap files bmp VSLICKPATH must also contain the dir ectories listed here VSLICKMISC One or more directories separated with a semicolon or a colon on UNIX that contain miscel laneous files including v1lx slk api idx vslick sta UNIX vslick stu hlp scommon lst main dct pif ini except for vslick ini and 1st VSLICK PATH must also contain the directories listed here VSLICKALIAS VSLICKTAGS One or more file names separated with a semicolon or a colon on UNIX that contain alias defini tions Specifies global tag files One or more file names separated with a semicolon or a colon on UNIX that contain tags Do not put this environ ment variable in vslick ini VSLICKBACKUP Directory to place backup files Affects D default and D backup configurations only VSLICKSAVE Allows save options to be specified per drive VSLICKLOAD Allows load options to be specified per drive VSLICKXTERM VSUSER UNIX only Allows you to specify the default xterm program and arguments used by the dos command and shell function The complete path to the xterm program must be specified You may not specify the e option in the command string For
91. a pop up Use this button during macro recording to create a command which runs a menu by displaying it as a pop up If you bind the command to a left or right button mouse event the menu will be displayed at the cursor position You can use the Menu Editor to create a new menu or modify the SlickEdit Core menu bar or an existing menu resource which can be displayed as a pop up or menu bar Creating a New Menu Resource Use the Menu Editor to create a new menu resource From the main menu click Macro Menus or use the open menu command then click New on the Open Menu dialog The Menu Editor is displayed See Menu Editor Dialog for more information To create a command which runs a menu by displaying it as a pop up after creating a menu while macro recording click the Show button on the Open Menu dialog box If you bind the recorded command to a left or right mouse button event the menu will be displayed at the cursor position You DO NOT need to specify key bindings for menu items because the Menu Editor automatically determines the key bindings for you To choose between short and long key names from the main menu click Window Prefer ences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the More Tab and change the option Short key names See the Slick C Macro Programming Guide for information on creating forms with menu bars or ad vanced information
92. about bindings Key Shortcuts in Text Boxes Key shortcuts for text operations such as Cut Copy and Paste can be used inside of all text boxes with in SlickEdit Core including the command line Tip The CUA emulation contains the shortcuts Ctrl X Ctrl C and Ctrl V for Cut Copy and Paste respectively If you are not using the CUA emulation by default these key bindings still work in side of text boxes To deactivate this feature from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the More Tab then clear the option CUA Text Box Text Box Editing Keys The table below contains a list of the key shortcuts based on the CUA emulation that can be used inside the command line and other text boxes within SlickEdit Core Table 3 3 Text Box Editing Key Key or Key Sequence Operation Insert Insert mode toggle Spacebar Expand partially typed parameter or insert a space 35 Key Shortcuts in Text Boxes Key or Key Sequence Operation List matches to partially typed parameter Ctrl Shift O Expand alias Ctrl E Cut to end of line Ctrl Backspace Cut line Ctrl K Copy word to clipboard Ctrl Shift K Cut word Ctrl Shift L Lowercase word Citrl Left arrow Previous word Ctrl Right arrow Next word Ctrl V Past
93. actual tags with that tag you can configure that set of tags by changing the settings for the base tag The sample HTML schemes included with SlickEdit Core include two base tags block and semi block When creating your own base tags be sure to use unique tag names that are not used in formatting to make it easy to spot them The block tag is useful as a base tag for tags like lt div gt where you want the start and end tags on sep arate lines from the content and aligned vertically By default this style indents nested tags and content according to your extension indent style and content is wrapped to a fixed right margin at column 80 Be cause this is a common style in HTML the block tag has the same settings as the default tag The semi block tag is useful as a base tag for tags such as lt h1 gt where you want the start and end tags on the same line as the content The default settings for semi block are the same as for block except for the start and end tags Use the Preview area at the bottom of the dialog to see how tags based on these base tags will be 284 Formatting Settings formatted in your code The following are examples lt div gt Sample text of a tag set to block style lt div gt lt hl gt Sample text of a tag set to semi block style Notice how wrapping occurs within this tag lt hl gt Adding and Deleting Tags To add individual tags to a selected scheme right click in the Ta
94. additional decoration fill in the upper left and lower right fields with the characters to begin and end a block comment To draw a box around the comment fill in additional characters in the other fields For example you might put an asterisk in each of the other fields to draw a box of asterisks around the block comment The Comment line group box contains fields for you to specify the characters to be inserted at left and 177 Creating Doc Comments right sides of a line comment For code examples and descriptions of the other available options see Comments Tab Creating Doc Comments Doc comments are specially formatted comments that are processed by tools that extract and present the information in a formatted manner Doc comments follow a predefined structure based on the program ming language and the tool processing the comments SlickEdit Core supports the most common doc comment formats Javadoc XMLdoc and Doxygen When you type the start characters for one of these comment formats and press Enter on a line directly above a function class or variable SlickEdit Core can automatically insert a skeleton doc comment for that style Note In C you do not need to press Enter as the skeleton comment is inserted after you type the third slash To activate and configure automatic completion of doc comment skeletons complete the following steps 1 From the main menu click Format Comment Setup or
95. against the left margin of the editor window as shown in the previous example The indent levels are not changed This provides better visibility for your com ments and a way to clearly see the indent level relative to lines that are not commented out e At level of indent Places and aligns characters vertically at the current indent level For example if enabled tabState TIS_DISABLED e Start in column Specifies in which column to start the comment for a line selection This is useful for column oriented languages such as COBOL Type or use the spin box to select the desired column number The left comment characters are placed at the specified column Doc Comments Select from the following options e Automatically expand doc comments When this option is selected SlickEdit Core automatically inserts a skeleton doc comment when you type comment start characters and then press Enter on a line directly above a function class or variable The type of skeleton that is inserted is based on your start characters and style settings specified in the For start characters and Use style boxes Note In C you do not need to press Enter as the skeleton comment is inserted after you type the third slash Insert leading If selected when you press Enter inside a doc comment a leading asterisk is auto matically inserted on the next line For example s This is my comment CURSOR HERE
96. are not specifically documented The Pascal Formatting Options dialog is pictured below Figure 7 38 Pascal Formatting Options Dialog Pascal Formatting Options Begin end style 1f expr then begin if expr then statements begin Statements end O Style 2 Insert begin end pairs Keyword case OL C Indent constant from case Lower case ecole Use Delphi expansions Capitalize first letter 301 PL I The following options are available e Begin end style Specify the begin end style used by template editing and smart indenting For each style select from the following options e Insert begin end pairs Specifies whether template should be inserted with begin and end e Begin End comments Specifies whether a comment is appended after the end keyword to indicate the type of loop or case it terminates In addition the begin and end for procedures and functions are commented No comment is appended to the begin end pair of an if statement e Keyword case Specifies the case of keywords used by template editing e Indent constant from case Specifies whether constants of a case statement are indented or aligned to the case keyword e Use Delphi expansions Specify whether Delphie style expansions should be used 302 PL I Formatting Options PL I This section describes some of the advanced options that are available for the PL I language PL I Formatting Options
97. be prompted whether or not to retag all source files Rebuild Tag File Displays the Rebuild Tag File dialog box containing options for rebuilding the selec ted file See Rebuilding Tag Files Auto Tag Displays the Create Tag Files for Run Time Libraries dialog box used to automatically cre ate run time library tag files for C Java and NET see Creating Tag Files for Run Time Libraries 379 General Options Dialog Options Dialogs This section describes SlickEdit Core dialogs and views related to options General Options Dialog Many common user preferences can be set from the General Options dialog To work with this dialog from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting There are seven categories tabs available listed below Information about working with these general options is located throughout the documentation on a contextual basis e General Tab The General tab contains general option settings e Search Tab This tab contains options to control your searching preferences Selections Tab The Selections tab allows you to set text selection style preferences Special Characters Tab Activating view of special characters inserts characters into your file to show such items as tabs spaces and line endings When characters are defined in the Special Characters tab they are displayed instead of the original charact
98. be set include the following e Emulation modes see Emulations e Fonts and colors see Setting Fonts and Colors e Auto Restore settings see Restoring Settings on Startup Other global preferences such as search settings selection styles etc can be configured by using the General Options dialog click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting These options are described in the documentation on a contextual basis For a flat listing of the options on the General Options dialog see General Options Dialog Extension Specific Preferences The behavior of the editor can be customized for files based on specific language extensions Indent Word Wrap Commenting Auto Complete Context Tagging and other code style settings are all exten sion specific These settings are located on the Extension Options dialog click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting The options are described in the documentation on a contextual basis For a flat listing of the options on the Extension Options dialog see Extension Options Dialog For more information about working with language extensions see Language Specific Editing Overview 40 Supported Emulations Emulations Emulation is the process of imitating another program SlickEdit Core provides emulations of key bind ings for 13 edito
99. between more than two files but it is not the Windows standard which means you re prob ably not used to it It s similar to the way SlickEdit Core reorders buffers No window reordering If selected newly opened windows are inserted after the current window like in all settings Activating an existing window pressing Ctrl Tab or pressing Ctrl Shift Tab does not reorder windows This option is best if you like to memorize the hot key numbers on the Window menu for example Alt W 1 because it attempts to keep the hot key numbers the same e Use block cursor If selected a text mode style cursor is used instead of a vertical cursor e Window left margin inch If selected this specifies the space between the left edge of the window and the editor text in inches This value has no effect when there are bitmaps displayed in the left mar gin since more space is necessary e Max clipboards Specifies the maximum number of clipboards saved By default a stack of your last 50 clipboards are kept any one of which can be pasted with Ctrl Shift V Word help filename Specifies the Word Help file names used by the wh command Help F1 Index Help or Ctrl F1 wh2 command Ctrl F2 and wh3 command Exit Tab The Exit tab contains settings that occur when exiting the editor To access these settings click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Opti
100. boxes at the top see Viewing and Filtering Bindings 2 With the command macro row selected click Remove or press Delete You are prompted to confirm the unbind operation Exporting and Importing Bindings Key and mouse bindings can be exported out of the editor and imported in useful for creating backups sharing with other team members or taking with you should you switch computers Exporting Bindings When you export bindings using the Key Bindings dialog custom bindings for all language editing modes in the current emulation are exported into an XML file with a name and location that you can specify To export your bindings 1 Click the Export button on the Key Bindings dialog The Save As dialog is displayed 49 Key Binding Settings 2 If you want change the directory location and change the file name to something more meaningful to you such aS myname_cua xml 3 Click Save Importing Bindings Imported bindings override any existing bindings for the selected emulation For example if you have the surround_with command bound to Cirl W and import surround_with bound to Cirl Q then Cirl Q is now the binding for that command in the selected emulation When you import for the selected emulation SlickEdit Core resets the key bindings to the default then loads the user key bindings If you import a key bindings file from a different emulation than the one currently selected a warning is displayed that prom
101. build window is automatically exited when the buf fer is closed or when exiting the editor e Edit A B C start on file A If selected the first file opened becomes the active buffer e Short key names If selected key names in the MDI menu bar are condensed non CUA For long CUA key names clear this check box Reflow next If selected the reflow_paragraph command places the cursor on the next paragraph after it has reformatted the current paragraph Otherwise the cursor is kept at the same location within the current paragraph Protect read only mode If selected the editor will not let you modify a file that is in read only mode The save command always prompts for a different output file name if the file is in read only mode CUA text box If selected the keys Ctrl X Ctrl C and Ctrl V perform cut copy and paste com mands respectively for a text box other than the command line In addition the dialog manager takes over the keys AIt A through Alt Z for selecting controls Note Do not mark this check box if you want all of the keys to operate the same in a text box as they do in the command line and edit windows Paren match style This feature always uses fast brace matching Select from the following options the first three are mutually exclusive Highlight When selected typing a closing parenthesis temporarily block selects the text within the parenthesis pair Cursor to begin paren When sel
102. but for certain special cases e g XHTML you may want to change this setting e Auto validate on open When this option is selected XML files are automatically validated when they are opened The result of the validation is displayed on the SlickEdit Core Output view XMLdoc Editor Use the XMLdoc Editor to generate Microsoft XML syntax comments for C C C Java JavaScript 255 XML and Slick C Note that by default when creating a new comment the Javadoc Editor is displayed for all file types except C To work around this limitation start an XML comment with and then right click in the edit window and select Edit XML Comments Unknown XML tags are left as is and not removed XML Beautifier To beautify XML source code from the main menu click Format Beautify or use the gui_beautify command The XML Beautifier dialog appears where you can specify preferences for how the code is beautified Caution The XML Beautifier is not affected by XML HTML Formatting If you run the beautifier on docu ments that have been automatically formatted through XML HTML Formatting you may find un expected results You can use the commands xml_beautify or xml_beautify_selection to instantly beautify the file or the selection according to the settings on the Beautifier dialog Note The XSD Beautifier contains the same options and settings as the XML Beautifier The following buttons an
103. click the Color Coding setting The Color Coding Setup box is displayed Figure 6 17 Color Coding Setup Tokens Tab 140 Color Coding Configuration Color Coding Setup Lexer name HI k New Tokens Numbers Strings Language Comments Tags Keywords CCS keywords oC Preprocessor O Punctuation Lib Symbols O Operators User Defined Identifiers Case sensitive ID start characters ID Follow characters O Select the language that you wish to work with from the Lexer name drop down list Click New to prompt for a lexer name to start a new language specific color coding definition see Creat ing Color Coding for a New Language Click Colors at the bottom of the dialog to display the Color Settings dialog which allows you to specify the color for color coding elements and other editor elements see Setting Colors for Screen Elements The tabs on the Color Coding Setup dialog are described in the section Color Coding Setup Dialog Advanced Color Coding Configuration The vslick v1x file defines language specific coloring support For information about modifying this file 141 Color Coding Settings and how to create a new lexer name see VLX File and Color Coding Color Coding Settings There are several extension specific settings that can be made to affect Color Coding To access these options from the main menu click Window Preferences SlickEdit Ge
104. con figure color coding from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click Gen eral in the tree then double click the Color Coding setting The Color Coding Setup box is displayed Figure 10 49 Color Coding Setup Dialog 439 Color Coding Setup Dialog Color Coding Setup Lexer name HI k New Tokens Numbers Strings Language Comments Tags Ce Keywords CCS keywords oC Preprocessor O Punctuation Lib Symbols O Operators User Defined Identifiers Case sensitive ID start characters ID Follow characters O General settings on this dialog box are described below see Color Coding Setup Options General Dia log Settings Other options are categorized into the following tabs e Tokens Tab e Numbers Tab e Strings Tab e Language Tab e Comments Tab 440 Color Coding Setup Dialog e Tags Tab Color Coding Setup Options General Dialog Settings The following fields and buttons are available on the Color Coding Setup dialog e Lexer name Select the language that you wish to work with from the Lexer name drop down list Be sure to select the lexer you wish to affect before using the tabs to make settings e New Click this button located next to Lexer name to prompt for a lexer name to start a new lan guage specific color coding definition see Creating Color Coding for a New Language e Delete Click this button located next to L
105. cursor Click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting Choose the Extension from the drop down list then select the Auto Complete Tab and check the option Alias expansion See Completions for more information Creating an Extension Specific Alias When you define a new alias for a file extension each time that you open or create a file with that exten sion the aliases will be available Choosing the Alias File Before defining a new alias you must specify the file in which the alias is to be stored The quickest way to do this is to click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Alias setting and pick an alias file from the predefined list After you select the alias file the Alias Editor dialog appears allowing you to create the aliases If you wish to specify your own file to store aliases or if you are using an extension that does not have a predefined file in the list complete the following steps 152 Extension Specific Aliases 1 From the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting The Extension Options dialog appears 2 Select the General Tab 3 In the Extension drop down list select the file extension that you wish to work with 4 Note the Alias file name If you wish to sto
106. cursor and fills the source selected text with blanks Supports block selec tion only reflow_selection Source Format Selection Word wraps the text within the se 131 Selections Command Key Sequence or Menu Item Description lected area Line selections are word wrapped with current margin settings Block selections are word wrapped within the columns of the block Character selection is not supported execute_selection Alt Executes each line or sub line of the selected text as if entered on the command line put lt filename gt gui_write_selection None Writes the selected text to file name Use File Insert a File to insert a file append lt filename gt gui_append_selection sort_within_selection None None Appends the selected text to the file s file name Sorts lines within a selected area sort_on_selection None Sorts lines of text based on text within columns specified add None Adds selected text and inserts result below the last line of the se lection Addition is performed for each adjacent line If no operator exists between two adjacent num bers addition is assumed align_selection_left None For block selections only see Block Selections aligns the text enclosed in the selection to the left edge of the selection align_selection_center None For block selections only see Block
107. d 52 Hiding the Mouse Pointer y ogra earan aa E AAA AEA A ARa aE ETa 52 Displaying Tool We CEET 52 Scroll Style Setting S ietis anaa ea he Eugen 52 Setting Fonts and Colors o eeccceccceeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseaeseeeeeesaeeeeaeeseeeeesiaeeeeeneeees 53 UE 53 EE 55 Setting Colors for Screen Elements AA 56 Restoring Settings on Startup cceccececeeeceeneeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaeeesaaeeseeeeesaeeeseaeeeeaes 59 TE A D Pa e setae eect tes tte ee kt Se ee aa ee 61 Context Tagging Overview ou eeececeseceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeseeeeeesaaeeesaaeeseeeesaeeeeeneeee 62 Tag Driven Navigation EE 62 EISti M MDGrs eigene eege Ate eet ave sete et EE ae ae 62 Parameter Information ccceeseecceseeseeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseaneeeeeeaaeeeeeaaaneeseeaaeeeeeeeseneeseeeeeneeees 63 Auto List Compatible Parameters cc ccccsceeeseeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseaeeseaeeeseeeesaeeeseneeee 64 GOMPICTIONS E 65 SYMbOl BrOWSING 20 See REENEN Ee 65 Statement Level Tagging ccccceccecccseseeeeeeeeeeaeceeeneeceeeeeeaaaeegeneeceeaeeseaaesseeeeesaeeseaeeenaees 66 Building and Managing Tag Files eeruan a a a a e 67 Bunding Tag FUES irana ea E ag E E E E 67 Managing Tag H UE 70 Context Tagging e Options ssssssseesseesseesssesssesssessnesiesrensrnssrnnsressrnnstnessrensrensrnnssrensrnnt 73 6 Editing Features E 75 Navigation oeeie a AE EA E AOT eee PAN A AE EAE 76 Code Naviga tO WEE 7
108. determining the color coding of symbols in the line When the checkfirst option is specified start_symbol is limited to one character in length leading specifies that symbol is considered a line comment only if it appears as the first non blank character Space or tab charac ters are considered blanks Currently end_symbol may not be a valid identifier lastchar specifies that end_symbo1 must appear as the last character on a line to terminate the comment No more than two multi line comments may be defined mickeywords keyword keyword Defines keywords for the last micomment state ment When one of these keywords follows the start_symbo1 defined for the last mlcomment statement the keyword color is used to color the comment instead of comment color Keywords do not have to be valid identifiers This statement is useful for tag languages like HTML See the HTML definition in the file vslick v1x for an example keywordattrs mlckeyword attribute at tribute Defines attributes for the mlckeyword specified which belongs to the last mlicomment statement Currently this statement only supports HTML syntax attributes and requires that the HTML style be spe cified For example keywordattrs SCRIPT LAN GUAGE SRC linecomment symbol col col start_col end_co1 checkfirst leading Defines a line comment symbo1 defines the char acter s which start this line comment If no column limits are spec
109. dialog box is shown below Figure 6 11 Add New Item Dialog 103 Instantiating a Template E Add New Item Categories _ Templates _ Installed Templates all Ja E E C Composite CO Application C Derived Class Cl Class E C Header File CJ DesignPatterns C Main Entry Point C Observer 2 HTML C Singleton Class Java Application Class CO DesignPatterns E Web CJ Slick c J wins2 LD ene Tamnlakar C class header and implementation Files Name ClassName Location CiideviRectangles C Add to current project C Confirm files before adding We call the process of creating new files from a template instantiating a template When a template is instantiated you are prompted for the name of the new item This name is often used heavily in the tem plate For a class template the name will likely be the class name or a part of the class name In the sample template safeitemnames is a form of this name that strips out any spaces making it safe to use as part of an identifier This value can even be used as part of the file name when the template is in stantiated If any of the values in the template are not known at instantiation time the Parameter Entry dialog box shown below will prompt you for values Figure 6 12 Parameter Entry Dialog 104 Creating Templates Parameter Entry author copyright l package
110. e ID com jrefinery chart ui 8 com jrefinery data 8 com jrefinery date 8 com jrefinery io E bi com jrefinery layout E FI com jrefinery ui private int getOrderData D bi com jrefinery ui about t 8 com keypoint _bts new BasicTimeSeries order data public class OrdersChart private Document document private BasicTimeSeries bts private String title e JD javax xml parsers 2 ery eB E org apache html dom DOMParser parser new DOMParser E org apache wml parser setFeature http apache org xml features dom E org apache wml dom parser setFeature http apache org xml features con E E org apache xerces dom f f c demo app orderschart orders xml E bi org apache xerces dom events id E ora apache xerces dom3 parser parse C demo app orderschart orders xml e 8 org apache xerces dom3 as s j gt 8 org apache xerces dom3 ls E bi org apache xerces impl s a ID org apache xerces impl dtd Symbol rg apache xerces parsers DOMParser Func w DS in 1 4 Files C Samples WSEJavaDemo OrderChart OrdersChart java 56 Ry Problems References Pa Preview a 8 org apache xerces impl dtd model j fH org apache xerces impl dv i J _bts new BasicTimeSeries order data 8 org apache xerces impl dv dtd B CachingParserPool java try e ID org apache xerces impl dv util FcreateDOMParser A org apache xerces impl dv xs E DocumentBuilderImpl
111. e Wildcards See Find and Replace with Regular Expressions for more information e Color Displays the Color Coding Search Options dialog This dialog lets you pick various syntactic elements to filter a search These are the same elements used by the Color Coding engine Using these filters helps to reduce the number of false positives you find in a search Each check box has three states Neutral the default All check boxes start in the neutral state These elements will be used in a search until deselected or until one or more other elements are selected Putting a check in any check box essentially deselects all non checked boxes Selected If the check box is selected the search will be restricted to this element and any other se lected elements There is no need to deselect any other elements if any elements are selected If any elements are selected only selected elements will be searched For example to search for the word result only in comments put a check only in the Comment check box All other syntactic elements will be ignored as part of this search Deselected If the check box is clear these elements will not be searched For example if you want to find the word result anywhere in your code except for in comments clear the Comment check box Click the Reset button to mark all items as neutral Note Not all languages have all color coding elements defined For example dBase and Pascal do not have pr
112. except after the punctuation characters period and that get two spaces To have only one space after the period question mark and exclamation point punctuation characters turn on 1 space after period e Left Left justification with respect for space characters between words This setting requires the Save options to be set such that trailing spaces are not stripped when a buffer is saved See Save Tab for more information on save options e Justified Full justification Left and right edges of text will align exactly at margins e Word wrap This option activates deactivates word wrapping When selected the editor keeps the cursor within the margins when entering text moving the cursor and deleting characters e Soft wrap Soft Wrap makes it easy to view long lines of code without scrolling Each line is wrapped as though a carriage return was inserted however the file itself is not modified The options are as fol 403 Extension Options Dialog lows Wrap long lines to window width This option activates Soft Wrap A curved arrow is displayed at the end of each line along the right hand border of the edit pane indicating that the text continues on the next line The horizontal scrollbar disappears as it is no longer needed Break on word boundary Breaks the text at the end of the line so that words are kept whole This makes for easier reading especially in text files Affects all extensions When sele
113. for To change the Syntax Indent spacing complete the following steps 1 Click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting The Extension Options dialog is displayed 2 From the Extension drop down list box select the file extension that you wish to affect 3 Select the Indent Tab 4 Change the value in the Syntax indent text box Indenting with Tabs By default when you press the Tab key to indent literal spaces are inserted If you plan to indent your code using tab characters or if you will be editing files that already contain tabs you will need to specify these preferences To activate tab indenting from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog select the Indent Tab From the Extension drop down list box select the file extension that you wish to affect Then select the option Indent with tabs Setting Tab Spacing The default value of the Tab key is eight spaces You can change this value in the Tabs text box In gen eral the Tabs setting should match the Syntax indent value For example by default for the C language extension the Syntax indent value is set to 4 and the Tabs setting is set to 4 The plus sign indic ates that the editor will automatically expand the stops by four By default the Tab
114. for blocks Usage e D n Delete n lines starting with the line with the command e DD Delete a block of lines must match another DD Remarks Deletes one or more lines There are two forms to this command The first form D n specifies that the line and the subsequent n 1 lines are to be deleted The second block form DD is placed on the first and last lines of the block to be deleted See Also ispf_delete ISPF Expose First Lines F and FF Usage e F n Unexclude expose the first n lines of an excluded block e FF Unexclude expose an entire excluded block Remarks Expose one or more lines at the beginning of a block of excluded lines The FF line command exposes the entire block of lines and is to F m where mis the number of lines in the block of excluded lines See Also ispf_exclude ispf_reset ISPF Line Command Last ISPF Line Command Show ISPF Line Com 510 ISPF Line Commands mand Exclude ISPF Insert Lines Usage I n Remarks Insert one or more blank data entry lines See Also ispf_enter ISPF Line Command TE ISPF Lowercase Lines LC LCC and LCLC for blocks Usage e LC n Lowercase n lines starting with the line with the command e LCC Lowercase a block of lines must match another LCC or LCLC e LCLC Lowercase a block of lines must match another LCC or LCLC Remarks Converts all uppercase letter alphabetic characters in one or more lines to lowercase This command only
115. from scratch Generate References If checked the tag file will be built with support for cross referencing Tag files with support for references are slightly larger and take slightly more time to build They will also be in cluded in all symbol references searches which may not be necessary especially for third party librar ies Remove all deleted files without prompting If checked and the tag file contains a source file which no longer exists on disk the source file will be removed from the tag file without prompting for confirma tion Keep all deleted files without prompting If checked and the tag file contains a source file which no longer exists on disk the source file will not be removed from the tag file without prompting for confirm ation Note The options Remove all deleted files without prompting and Keep all deleted files without prompting are mutually exclusive selecting one will deselect the other Context Tagging Options General Context Tagging Options The Context Tagging Options Dialog allows you to set general parameters for the Context Tagging fea ture set Here you designate how tagging is done how the references function within the application and you can also tune the application to maximize performance To display this dialog click Window Pref erences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Context Tagging Op 73 Context Tagging Options
116. if becomes if 249 Java Formatting Options e Use continuation indent on function parameters Determines whether function parameters should always use the continuation indent By default we format multi line function parameters as follows myLongMethodName firstarg secondarg thirdarg i myLongMethodName firstarg new ActionListener public void actionPerformed ActionEvent e createdButtonFired buttonIndex thirdarg i myLongMethodName new ActionListener special case anonymous class first argument public void actionPerformed ActionEvent e createdButtonFired buttonIndex secondarg thirdarg i myLongMethodName secondarg new ActionListener public void actionPerformed ActionEvent e createdButtonFired buttonIndex thirdarg 1 If Use continuation indent on function parameters is selected the format will change as follows myLongMethodName firstarg secondarg thirdarg 1 myLongMethodName firstarg new ActionListener public void actionPerformed ActionEvent e createdButtonFired buttonIndex 250 Java Beautifier thirdarg i myLongMethodName new ActionListener special case anonymous class first argument public void actionPerformed ActionEvent e createdButtonFired buttonIndex secondarg thirdarg 1 Java Beautifier To beautify Java source code from the main me
117. if your macro can only operate if the target is an editor control e Allow in read only mode Check this box if your macro does not modify the current buffer e Allow when window is iconized You will probably NOT want this box checked if your macro modi fies the current buffer Whether to check this box is more a matter of personal taste e Allow in non MDI editor control Check this box if your macro should be allowed in a non MDI ed itor control This is typical for commands which require an editor control but do not open or close ed itor windows buffers 7 Click Save The List Macros Dialog is displayed from which you can run the macro edit the source delete it or choose to bind it to a key sequence If you plan to use the macro often it s best to go ahead and create a key binding for it now See Binding Recorded Macros to Keys for more information Binding Recorded Macros to Keys To use recorded macros most effectively create key bindings for them so they can be executed quickly when you want to use them Macros can be bound through the Key Bindings dialog see Binding Macros Using the Key Bindings Dialog or by using the instant stop recording and bind method associated with 331 Recorded Macro Operations the execute_last_macro_key command see Binding Macros Using execute last macro key Binding Macros Using the Key Bindings Dialog After recording a new macro the List Macros Dialog is automatically displa
118. in a run time library tag file you need to generate references for the tag file To do this display the Context Tagging Tag Files Dialog Tools Tag Files or gui_make_tags command choose the tag file right click to display the context menu and select Generate References See Tagging Run Time Libraries for more in formation The left pane displays a tree view of the files and locations that contain the symbol references Hover the mouse over the bitmap of a symbol to see a tooltip that shows the symbol s signature and scope To jump to the location of a symbol reference in the code pushing a bookmark in the process double click on it Press Ctrl Comma to go back The right pane displays a preview of that location in the source The number of instances found and the file name and line number are displayed at the top Use the size bar to resize either pane Use the buttons located at the top right corner of the view window to toggle the preview pane on and off Because source can also be previewed in the Preview View you may find it more efficient to use the Ref erences view with the preview pane off 92 Symbols View References View Options Right click on a symbol or file in the left pane of the References view to display the following options e Contents Displays the following menu of save and print operations for the references browser tree e Save Writes the items displayed in the references browser to a t
119. in prepro cessor color The first character of a preprocessor keyword must not be a valid identifer Prepro cessing keywords must appear as the first non blank symbol in the line symbol1 keyword keyword Defines words that should be displayed in symbol1 color Keywords do not have to be valid identifiers symbol2 keyword keyword Defines words that should be displayed in symbol2 color Keywords do not have to be valid identifiers symbol3 keyword keyword Defines words that should be displayed in symbol3 color Keywords do not have to be valid identifiers symbol4 keyword keyword Defines words that should be displayed in symbol4 color Keywords do not have to be valid identifiers Table of style Values The table below describes the style values that can be used Table 11 6 Table of style Value Value of style Description linenum Line numbers may be found as the first non blank symbol of a line like BASIC dqbackslash Color double quoted strings Characters following a backslash in a double quoted string are included in the string like C 494 Creating a Lexer Name and a New VLX File Value of style Description dqbackslashml Color double quoted strings If a double quoted string ends in a backslash it continues the string to the next line like C dqmultiline Color double quoted strings String ma
120. information in the problem report e A code snippet to help us reproduce it if possible 14 Chapter 2 Quick Start SlickEdit Core provides numerous configuration options so you can customize your environment accord ing to your working style and preferences To help get you up and running as quickly as possible the Quick Start describes commonly used option settings that are found in most programming editors The options fall into two categories General Options and Extension Specific Options 15 Extension Specific Options General Options General options affect all language extensions You may want to look through all of the dialogs mentioned to see if there are any other settings you want to make To see a listing of all of the option dialogs and their descriptions see the appropriate topics in Chapter 10 SlickEdit Core Dialogs Use the Preferences dialog to access SlickEdit Core options described below To display the Prefer ences dialog from the main menu click Window Preferences In the tree expand SlickEdit and click General e Changing the emulation During the product installation you are prompted to choose the editor emu lation The default is CUA To change the emulation at any time double click the Emulation setting and specify the desired emulation Expanding collapsing with a single click Selective Display Plus and Minus bitmaps can be expan ded or collapsed with a single click rather tha
121. is an additional dialog not listed here that contains search options the Search tab of the General Options dialog Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting See Search Tab for a description of these settings Find and Replace View This view is displayed when you click one of the find or replace items on the Search menu See Find and Replace for information about searching and replacing Figure 10 4 Find and Replace View Find and Replace Find Find in Files f Replace Replace in Files Search for Loak in lt Curent Buffer E Search options Match caze Wrap at beginningrend Match whole ward Place cursor at end Use Search backward Requiar expression LI nix l d Search hidden text Highlight matches Bookmark matches Incremental search Colors Mone Find Al The Find and Replace view contains a right click context menu and four tabs 343 Find and Replace View Find Tab Find in Files Tab Replace Tab Replace in Files Tab Find and Replace View Context Menu Right click in the background of the Find and Replace View to access the following items Saved Search Expressions See Saving Search and Replace Values Configure Options Displays the Search Tab of the General Options dialog from which you can set the default search options that the Find and Replace view should use Use Default Options
122. item return 1 Pressing the Down arrow key pulls the code block into the statement indented to the correct levels as shown below Figure 6 23 Dynamic Surround Example 3 164 Dynamic Surround amp C Lab sample cpp int sortedSearch const int item const int pList int numItems if f f Binary search for the specified item in the array const int middleItem int first 0 last numItems i middle while first lt last middle first last gt gt 1 middleItem amp pList middle if item middleItem return middle J else if item lt middleItem last middle 1 else first middle 1 H ff did not find the item return 1 The finished code is shown as follows Figure 6 24 Dynamic Surround Example 4 165 Surround With amp C Lab sample cpp int sortedSearch const int item const int pList int numItems if pList NULL f f Binary search for the specified item in the array const int middleItem int first 0 last numItems 1 middle while first lt last J middle first last gt gt 1 middleItem epList middle if item middleItem return i middle j else if item lt middleItem last middle 1 else first middle 1 ff did not find the item return i1 Statements that are pulled into the block are indented according to your settings on the Indent Tab of the
123. java D Ki org apache xerces impl io DocumentBuilderImpl DocumentBullderFactory lt STEE DOMParser parser new DOMParser parser setFeature http apache org xml gt IE I writable Dialogs Although SlickEdite Core shares a heritage with our stand alone editor SlickEdit dialogs within SlickEdit Core may contain options that are not available when the functionality is not applicable to the Eclipse en 25 Command Line vironment By the same token some SlickEdit commands may not be available See Chapter 10 SlickEdit Core Dialogs for descriptions of each dialog specific to SlickEdit Core broken into the following categories e Editing Dialogs e Search Dialogs e Editing Dialogs e Dialogs Related to Viewing and Displaying e Macro Dialogs e Tools Dialogs e Options Dialogs Command Line To activate the SlickEdit Core command line press Esc in CUA emulation Ctrl A in Vim emulation or Alt X in GNU Emacs emulation See The SlickEdit Core Command Line for more information 26 Opening SlickEdit Core Views SlickEdit Views Views complement the file opened in the editor You can move resize and customize views easily All the views and perspectives have live connectivity meaning that if a file name or property in one view is modified then that change stays true for that item in every area of the workspace Views support editors and provide alternative presentations a
124. key to delete through tab characters one column at a time select this option e Treat leading spaces as tabs If selected the commands cursor_left and cursor_right will move the cursor by tab stops when within leading space If deselected the cursor_left and cursor_right com mands will move the cursor over by one physical character The purpose of this option is to emulate the feel of real tab characters even if you only use spaces for indentation Context Tagging Options Dialog The Context Tagging Options dialog allows you to set general parameters for the Context Tagging fea tures Here you designate how the Context Tagging is done how the references function within the ap plication and you can also tune the application to maximize performance To set options from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Tagging Options setting The dialog box is displayed as shown below See Building and Managin Tag Files for more information on this topic Figure 10 48 Context Tagging Options Dialog Context Tagging Options References Background tagging of open files V Build workspace tag file with references Start after seconds idle _ Find references incrementally faster Update tool windows after ms idle C Update references and call tree on single click Max size of files to tag bytes C Go to Reference only lists references Max number
125. line and the last non whitespace character This is useful for trimming extra spaces from long lines because it gives you a natural and quick way to get to your vertical line column and the last non blank column e Enter The following commands are available for binding to the Enter key Nosplit Insert Line Inserts a blank line after the current line and aligns the cursor with the first non blank character of the original line The current line is not split Split Insert Line Splits the current line at the cursor Enough blanks are inserted at the beginning of the new line to align it with the first non blank character of the original line Maybe Split Insert Line If the option Start in insert mode is on Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting and select the More Tab the current line is split at the cursor Enough blanks are appended to the beginning of the new line to align it with the first non blank character of the original line If Start in insert mode is off the cursor is moved to column one of the next line Note When changing the key binding for the Enter key the binding for Ctrl Enter will automatically 434 Redefine Common Keys Dialog switch to the opposite setting depending on whether it is bound to Split Insert Line or Nosplit Insert Line e Home The following commands are available for binding to the Home
126. more code faster than you ever have before e Keep your hands on the keyboard Time is wasted each time you reach for the mouse SlickEdit Core contains 13 editor emulations with predefined key bindings that are ready for use in performing common tasks Define your own key bindings or invoke editor operations from the SlickEdit Core com mand line For more information see Using the Mouse and Keyboard Type as little as possible SlickEdit Core contains many features that reduce the number of key strokes you type including automatic completions syntax expansion aliases macros code templates and code generators For information about these features see the topics in Chapter 6 Editing Fea tures e Rapidly navigate code Instantly jump from a symbol to its definition or view a list of references Pre view definitions for the current symbol without having to open the file Use bookmarks to mark important locations in the code SlickEdit Core includes powerful browse and search capabilities allowing you to quickly find the code you want See Navigation for more information e Access information quickly SlickEdit Core uses visual indicators to provide you with information about your code including syntax highlighting and color coding Special views are also available for looking up information about files classes symbols definitions and more To learn more see SlickEdit Views Symbol Browsing and other topics in Chapter 6 Editin
127. name and exists on the disk drive Save after period of inactivity The value that you enter in this field specifies the amount of idle time in minutes or seconds when modified files should be saved Set this value to 0 if you do not want this option ignored Exit SlickEdit on AutoSave When this option is selected Eclipse with SlickEdit Core closes after an AutoSave Save after period of time Specifies amount of time in minutes or seconds when modified files should be saved Set this value to 0 if you want this option ignored AutoSave directory The directory that you specify in this field is the AutoSave directory if the Save to 427 File Options Dialog different directory option has been selected If the AutoSave directory is blank lt configuration_directory gt autosave is used The configuration directory is defined by the VSLICKCONFIG environment variable If the VSLICKCONFIG environment variable is not set the dir ectory in the editor executable directory is used as the configuration directory Save to different directory Setting this option specifies that all AutoSave temporary files be placed in the directory specified by the AutoSave directory text box Use this option to clean up or find all of the AutoSave files if an abnormal editor exit occurs Note When editing two files with the same name but in different directories one AutoSave temporary file is overwritten by the other Same name
128. not want the embedded Java or VBScript inside the lt gt to be beautified Preserve tag position When on the position of the tag within the document is preserved This is es pecially useful with JSP ASP tags where reindenting the tag would interrupt the flow of the script code Line breaks Select the way lines are broken e Before open tag Specify the number of line breaks before the opening tag For example if you were to set the number of line breaks before the opening tag to 3 for the lt TD gt tag and the original content was lt TR gt lt TD gt lt TD gt lt TR gt The resulting content would be lt TR gt 273 HTML lt TD gt lt TD gt lt TR gt Please note that the number of line breaks is not the same as the number of blank lines If you wanted three blank lines then you would set the number of line breaks to 4 After close tag Specify the number of line breaks after the closing tag For example if you were to set the number of line breaks after the closing tag to 3 for the lt TD gt tag and the original content was lt TR gt lt TD gt lt TD gt lt TR gt The resulting content would be lt TR gt lt TD gt lt TD gt lt TR gt Please note that the number of line breaks is not the same as the number of blank lines If you wanted three blank lines then you would set the number of line breaks to 4 Stand alone When on the sele
129. numbers check box 227 228 Chapter 7 Language Specific Editing 229 Language Editing Modes Language Specific Editing Overview Many features in SlickEdit Core are language specific and based on the language editing mode You can also configure different settings for different languages See Language Editing Modes and Extension Options below for more information This chapter also includes specific information about extension options beautifiers and more for the fol lowing languages Ada e Cand C e XML and HTML Language Editing Modes SlickEdite Core uses the extension of the current file to determine what language you are using thereby only making available the options and features that are possible in that language If you have a file with a non standard extension or no extension at all you will need to manually specify the editing mode To spe cify a mode from the main menu click Format Select Mode or use the select_mode command The Select Mode dialog is displayed with a list of modes from which to select Changing and Creating Modes To change or create modes from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting Select the General Tab If you want to change the name of an existing mode select the language extension from the Extension drop down list Then enter the new name in the Mode nam
130. of lines which contain tags An example of a trailing comment is lt TD gt lt trailing comment gt e Original absolute column When on trailing comments are placed at the same column as the ori 262 XML ginal source file By trailing comments we mean comments which appear at the end of lines which contain tags e Original relative column When on trailing comments are indented by reusing the indent after the last character of the end of the statement or declaration of the original source file By trailing com ments we mean comments which appear at the end of lines which contain tags The following is an example of code before beautifying trailing comments lt Outer gt lt Inner gt lt four characters gt lt trailing comment gt lt Inner gt lt Outer gt The resulting code would be lt Outer gt lt Inner gt lt four characters gt lt trailing comment gt lt Inner gt lt Outer gt Advanced Tab Figure 7 20 XML Beautifier Advanced Tab XML Beautifier Indent Tags Attributes Values Comments Advanced Schemes l Beautify End previous lt P gt tag when Canal Help C Remove blank lines Save Settings He d ele Sync extension options The following option is available on the Advanced tab 263 XML e Remove blank lines When on blank lines are deleted Schemes Tab Figure 7 21 XML Beautifier Schemes Tab XML Beautifier
131. off with one of the follow ing methods e Click the recording indicator REC located along the bottom edge of the editor When a macro is be ing recorded the recording indicator is active not dimmed e In CUA emulation press Ctrl F11 the key binding associated with the record_macro_toggle com mand e On the SlickEdit Core command line type record_macro_toggle See Recording a Macro for more information e To run the last macro that you recorded click Macro Execute last macro press Ctrl F12 or use the record_macro_end_execute command See Running a Recorded Macro for more information e To display a list of your recorded macros from which you can edit run delete or bind to a key se quence click Macro List Macros or use the list_macros command Note List Macros only shows your saved macros not your last recorded macro or macros created us ing execute_last_macro_key Recording a Macro To record a macro simply start the recording enter the keystrokes you want to record then end the re cording The instructions below outline the steps 330 Recorded Macro Operations 1 From the main menu click Macro gt Record Macro or use one of the toggle methods to start record ing as described under Recorded Macro Operations above 2 Enter the keystrokes that you want to record For example to record a macro of the cursor moving three spaces to the right press the right arrow key thr
132. on the next previous tag definition skipping any tags filtered out by the Outline view next_proc prev_proc Places the cursor on the next previous function heading e find_tag Displays a list of tags in the Select a Tag dialog allowing you to pick the tag to which you want to navigate e goto_tag Prompts for a procedure tag name and places the cursor on the definition of the procedure name specified This command is available in GNU Emacs emulation mode only end_tag Places the cursor at the end of the current symbol definition This is useful if you are in the middle of a large function or class definition and you want to jump to the end of it In a class definition in C the end is where inline function definitions are usually stored e end_proc Moves the cursor to the end of the current procedure e next_statement prev_statement Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next previous statement e begin_statement end_statement Places the cursor at the beginning end of the current statement next_sibling prev_sibling Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next previous sibling These are similar to the next_statement prev_statement commands except they stay at one level of nesting e goto_parent Moves the cursor to the beginning of the enclosing statement or symbol scope relative to the current cursor position e begin_statement_block end_statement_block Moves the cursor to the beginning end of the current state
133. option to Always just delete line when cut_line or de lete_line operations are invoked Selecting this option will prevent the dialog from appearing when these operations are used To see the dialog again use the cut_code_block command 171 Named Bookmarks Bookmarks Bookmarks are used to save the current edit location so you can quickly return to it later There are two types of bookmarks e Named Bookmarks Used to mark long term meaningful locations in the code or to quickly set a tem porary named bookmark on the current line e Pushed Bookmarks Used to set temporary breadcrumbs as you explore the code Named Bookmarks There are various ways to use named bookmarks e Give them a specific name This is the best way to mark long term meaningful locations in the code For example you could set a bookmark named main to save the location of the main function e Allow automatic naming This is the quickest way to set temporary named bookmarks if you don t care to spend the time naming them yourself e Use a key binding shortcut for the name Bookmarks can be named according to a specific key binding For example you could bind Ctrl 1 so that it instantly sets a bookmark named 1 Bookmarks can be set through a variety of methods depending on which way you want to use them A green Bookmark bitmap displayed in the left margin of the editor window indicates a set bookmark Naming Bookmarks To set a bo
134. options e User defined This option is for setting your own selection preferences Any changes that are made to the CUA behaviors automatically select User Defined Selecting CUA automatically resets the se 387 General Options Dialog lect behaviors e CUA default When this style is selected selected text is deleted before a paste or character is in serted unless the selection is locked Pressing the Backspace or Delete keys deletes the selection unless the selection is locked Advanced selections those selections not started with the mouse or Shift lt arrow keys gt are extended as the cursor moves Locking a selection requires one of the emulation commands select_line select_block or select_char To access these commands from Edit pull down menu select this option in any emulation SlickEdit default When this style is selected SlickEdit Core uses the default styles that are en abled when the product is installed Extend selection as cursor moves When checked the selection is extended to cursor position This option is not available if using Brief or Emacs emulation Deselect after copy Indicates whether copied text is selected This is not available if using Brief or Emacs emulation Deselect after paste Indicates whether pasted text is selected This is not available if using Brief or Emacs emulation Inclusive character selection When checked a character selection includes the character following
135. page data Opening Unicode Files To open a Unicode file complete the following steps 1 Use the Open dialog File Open 2 Specify the encoding if necessary 3 Press Enter Surrogate Support Unicode data is stored as UTF 8 and not UTF 16 Since the Windows Win32 calls are used to implement some Unicode features there are some issues By default Windows does not support surrogates You must use the regedit program to turn on surrogate support To turn on surrogate support run the regedit program and go to the following key location HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Microsoft Windows NT CurrentVersion LanguagePack Set the value for SURROGATE to 0x00000002 Casing features uppercase lowercase ignore case do not support surrogates Windows is used for cas ing support and Windows casing features do not support surrogates Converting Unicode to UCN You can convert a selection from Unicode to UCN or vice versa SlickEdit Core conversion features are located on the Edit Other menu The Unicode to UCN conversion feature is most useful for specifying Unicode character strings in SBCS DBCS active code page source files For example here are the steps to store some UCN in a Java source file 1 Open the Unicode file containing the Unicode characters or create a new Unicode file and enter the characters you want to convert 2 Select the Unicode characters you want to convert 3 Execute the Java C UTF 16 UHHHH
136. performing a multi file diff because mismatching files will have a plus sign in front of them so that you can diff all of the symbols Comparing Two Directories You can differences two source trees to determine what files have been added or removed and generate a list of file names When the source tree difference is complete click Save to generate a list file To diff two source trees complete the following steps 1 From the main menu click Tools File Difference or use the diff command 2 Mark the Recurse into subdirectories check box to compare subdirectories 3 Enter the two directories in the Path 1 and Path 2 text boxes 4 Fill in the Filespecs text box with the files that you want processed 5 Click OK The Multi File Diff Output dialog is displayed If a file exists in one tree but not the other a plus sign is displayed in the one tree and a minus sign in the other You can customize the files to view with the context menu To display the context menu right click in the left or right tree If you move the mouse over the Plus or Minus bitmap next to the item in the tool tree a tooltip is displayed indicating what the bitmap means For descriptions of the buttons on the Multi File Diff Output dialog see Multi File Diff Output Dialog Generating File Lists DIFFzilla can be used to find only the files that have been changed and can generate file lists The Save button in the Multi File Diff Output dialog c
137. same as the explore command If you are editing a document the file manager will be rooted in that file s directory otherwise it will default to the current working directory Using the option after the command for example explore will ignore any file directory or working directory and go to the system root 327 328 Chapter 9 Macros and Macro Programming 329 Recorded Macro Operations Recorded Macros There are two types of macros in SlickEdit Core macros that you record described below and macros that are available for programming see Programmable Macros You can automate repetitive tasks by recording a series of SlickEdit Core operations in a macro After you create a macro you can run it save it bind it to a key sequence and or modify the macro s source code Recording a macro generates Slick C code for performing the action being recorded Therefore record ing a macro is also a useful way to discover and implement Slick C code that controls the behavior of SlickEdit Core See Using Macros to Discover and Control Options for information Recorded Macro Operations Macros can be recorded executed and saved from the Macro menu or you can use commands or pre defined key bindings to perform macro operations e To start or end macro recording from the main menu click Macro gt Record Macro or Macro Stop Recording Macro respectively Alternately you can toggle recording on and
138. select the next or previous occurrence Figure 5 1 List Members Example 1 String 8s f copyValueOfQ A sl f endswithO em Compares this string to the specified object The result is f true if and only if the argument is not null and isa a F equalsignoreCase v The example below shows the display after typing a Dot when entering C source code The stack class is one of the C standard template library classes Figure 5 2 List Members Example 2 Stack const char gt contextStack CONTERtStack Container std stack c CR P the underlying container i const_reference al container _type protected F empty k Parameter Information The prototype for a function is automatically displayed when typing a function operator such as the open parenthesis This also highlights the current argument within the displayed prototype When working with C parameter info is also automatically displayed when typing a template argument operator such as lt The following example shows the result of pressing Alt Comma inside the argument list of the Java API String method startsWith The Javadoc comments are displayed in a mini HTML browser To view docu mentation for Java APIs you must install the source files as part of the JDK If clicking on a URL the de fault HTML browser starts Clicking on other hypertext links will navigate within the comment window The startsWith method has two overloa
139. selected an active C C compiler comiguration Default C C Compiler Configuration Change Cygwitl 3 2 1686 pc cyowin Compiler Emulation Header File Edit Ci slickedit vi1z2 0 0 sysconfig vsparser gt win h Compiler Include Search Directories Edit Csyeyqwin usr inc lude c 35 2 Doa mamini user ine linde mtg Fi AAA eerste ph lt gt Copy To Clipboard Help wt 216 C Refactoring The following example shows a warning that is not severe enough to prevent parsing of the file Figure 6 50 Test Parsing Configuration Example 2 217 C Refactoring W C Refactoring Configuration Test Configuration settings to be used to parse this file Current file Cryslickeditiviz 0 0 samples cpp cpp Current workspace Open Cryslickeditiyvi2 0 0 SampleProjects ucpp cpp vpw Effective project Change Cryslickeditiwi2 0 05 SampleProjects ucppy cpp vp7 Warning The jfile CAsickedi yi2 0 Osamplesiopp cpp is Rolin d project im this workspace Aftemmiing to use seifines from ihe current project Macro Definitions Edit User Include Search Directories Ect Active C C Compiler Configuration Change Cygwin 3 2 1686 pc cygwain Default C C Compiler Configuration Change Cygwin 3 2 1686 pc cygwain Compiler Emulation Header File Edit Cryslickeditiwiz 0 0 syscontfig vaparser gt win h Compiler Include Search Directories Edit C yeyq
140. shows how word completion is used if pWindowView gt pBuffer gt LineNum gt 100 pwW lt Cursor is Here gt Press Ctrl Shift Comma Cirl Shift Space Ctrl Shift Space to obtain the following result if pWindowView gt pBuffer gt LineNum gt 100 pWindowView gt pBuffer gt LineNum lt Cursor is Here gt Pressing Ctrl Shift Comma matched pWindowView in the previous line If you wanted to match an earlier occurrence beginning with pW press Ctrl Shift Comma to find the next previous match This also changed pW on the second line to the matching text pWindowView Pressing Ctrl Shift Space extends that selection matching pWindow gt pBuffer Pressing Ctrl Shift Space again extends the se lection to include pWindow gt pBuffer gt LineNum You can easily see how this would save time typing in multiple lines that access structs class members arrays etc Configuring Completion Settings 148 Aliases To configure Auto Complete settings from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting Choose the extension you wish to work with from the Extension drop down list then select the Auto Complete tab For a listing of these options and descriptions see Auto Complete Tab 149 Directory Aliases Aliases Aliases are identifiers that you can quickly type which are then expanded into snippets of
141. specified number of columns has been reached For more details on comment wrapping configuration see Comment Wrap Tab Reflowing Comments After configuring comment wrap settings you can use the Reflow Comment dialog to reflow block com ments paragraphs or a selection of the current file To display this dialog click Format Reflow Com ment For more information on the available options see Reflow Comment Dialog 181 Quick Search and Replace Find and Replace SlickEdit Core provides several different ways to search and replace e For the fastest method of searching and replacing use Quick Search and Replace e To find and replace text on the fly or as you type use Incremental Searching e If you are more comfortable with keystrokes you may prefer command line searching with Find and Re place Commands e Use the Find and Replace View if you prefer working within an interface e To search for symbols use the Find Symbol View Both the Find and Replace view and command line searching provide the same search and replace op tions for single or multiple files and for searching and replacing text wildcards and regular expressions so you can choose which method works best for you This section also includes the topics Find and Replace with Regular Expressions and Undoing Redoing Replacements Quick Search and Replace Quick Search The fastest way to search is by using Quick Search Quick Search looks thro
142. start and end the comment Specify nesting if the lexer should look for another occurrence of start_symbol when looking for the end comment symbol The fol lowedby idchars is used to require certain char acters to follow start_symbol You can use a dash character to specify a range such as A Z which specifies uppercase letters To specify a dash or backslash character as a valid word character place a backslash before the character followedby is ignored when the html style is spe cified Currently start_symbol and end_symbol may not be valid identifiers No more than four multi line comments may be defined colorname can be used to indicate that a different color such as keyword color be used instead of comment color when a match is found colorname may be keywordcolor numbercolor stringcolor com mentcolor ppkeywordcolor linenumcolor sym bolicolor symbol2color symbol3color or sym bol4color micomment start_symbol start_col checkfirst leading end_symbo1 lastchar Defines a multi line comment This construct was designed to handle comments for the ATLAS lan guage start_symbo1 and end_symbo1 define strings which start and end the comment start_symbol is only considered the start of a comment if it appears in column start_col checkfirst specifies that the lexer should check if 492 Creating a Lexer Name and a New VLX File Statement Description the line is a comment before
143. system under Event Names You can also list the key names of the keys through the Help by invoking the command help Event Names To run this batch program type the name vusrdefs without the exten sion on the command line The path is not necessary if it is included in your VSLICKPATH or PATH en vironment variable 498 Creating and Editing Menus Menu Editing For information about accessing SlickEdit Core menus and associated options see Menus Creating and Editing Menus SlickEdite Core menus are controlled by Slick C macro files You can customize menus by editing these files If you plan to customize your menu items be sure to back up your configuration directory before installing any updates or new versions of SlickEdit Core as they will overwrite your changes Menus can be managed using the Open Menu dialog From this dialog you can pick a menu to edit cre ate a new menu run a menu as a pop up To access the dialog from the main menu click Macro gt Menus or use the open_menu command The following buttons are available e Open Opens the menu specified in the combo box for editing with the Menu Editor If the menu spe cified does not already exist it is created e New Creates a new menu with a unique name for editing with the Menu Editor The Menu Editor al lows you to change the name of the menu e Delete Deletes the specified menu from the combo box e Show Runs the menu by displaying it as
144. tax Expansion For example if this is set to 3 then two letter keywords such as if will not be expanded Word Wrap Tab The Word Wrap tab contains options for controlling how text is wrapped To access these options click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Ex tension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog select the Word Wrap tab Figure 10 33 Extension Options Word Wrap Tab 402 Extension Options Dialog Extension Options Extension C a5 Indent Word Wrap General Comments Comment Wrap Advanced Auto Complete Context Tagging Margins Justify style Left 1 Left and respace Right Ia C 1 space after period New paragraph 1 O Left Indicator Color Sa O Justified C Word wrap Soft wrap C Wrap long lines to window width _ Break on word boundary C Affect all extensions The following settings are available e Margins Sets the left right and new paragraph margins Specify the column number at which each margin should begin Click the colored box next to the Indicator Color label to set the color of the mar gin indicator The margin indicator will only appear if the Word wrap option is selected which activates word wrapping e Justify style Select from the following justification styles e Left and respace Left justification with space character reformatting One space is placed between words
145. the Diff dialog box Launch multi file diffs in a separate process When selected source trees are diffed in a separate process so you can continue working Starting position Determines whether to place the cursor at the top of the file or at the first difference when the Diff dialog box is displayed This option has no effect on interleaved output Dialog initialization Determines whether the DIFFzilla dialog box restores previous dialog settings 376 Multi File Diff Output Dialog history or just places the current buffer name into the Path 1 text box Press F7 F8 to restore the pre vious next dialog settings respectively Multi File Diff Output Dialog When using DIFFzilla to perform a directory comparison Multi File diff type the results are presented in the Multi File Diff Output dialog Figure 10 22 Multi File Diff Output Dialog WW Multi File Diff Output C dev C lab Path 1 C dev Path 2 C ab a welcome html a WHATSNEW Si C dev Ant apache ant 1 6 5 pin 5l C dev Ant apache ant 1 6 5 docs 5 C dev Ant apache ant 1 6 5 etc l C dev Ant apache ant 1 6 5 ib C dev DifF Wi Diff vpwhist W Diff vtg C dev docs C dev docs coolfeatures_a i coolfeatures_a dtd i coolfeatures_a xml d i readme html i C dev docs coolfeatures b I welcome html i WHATSNEW l C Vab Ant apache ant 1 6 Sin l C ab Ant apache ant 1 6 5 docs C a
146. the Slick C Macro Programming Guide for more information 161 Dynamic Surround Dynamic Surround and Surround With Two SlickEdit Core features that allow you to surround text with text are Dynamic Surround which lets you surround existing statements with block statements and Surround With which lets you surround any selected text with predefined language structures or any text that you specify Unsurround is also avail able to remove outer code block structures from statements Dynamic Surround Dynamic Surround provides a convenient way to surround a group of statements with a block statement indented to the correct levels according to your preferences This feature works in conjunction with the syntax and alias expansion features see Syntax Expansion and Extension Specific Aliases and is de signed to help you keep your hands on the keyboard thereby improving your speed and efficiency Dynamic Surround is supported for any language that uses block statements Note that this feature is line oriented and will not work for character or block selections SlickEdite Core enters Dynamic Surround mode automatically immediately after you expand a block statement for instance by typing if then pressing Space After expanding the statement a box is drawn around it as a visual guide and you can pull the subsequent lines of code or whole statements into the block by using the Up Down PgUp or PgDn keys Pressing any other key o
147. the binding and close the dialog Prior to clicking Bind you may want to assign the binding to a specific language editing 432 Redefine Common Keys Dialog mode see below e Cancel Click this button to cancel the binding operation and close the dialog e Advanced Click this button to expand the language editing mode settings e Bind to mode By default all new bindings are assigned to the default language editing mode which means that the binding will work in all modes To assign the binding to a specific language editing mode select this option and click the language editing mode from the drop down list Click Bind when finished See Creating Bindings for more information Redefine Common Keys Dialog The Redefine Common Keys dialog Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Redefine Common Keys setting allows you to change the behavior of certain common keys For more information about redefining keys see Redefining Common Keys Figure 10 47 Redefine Common Keys Dialog Redefine Common Keys Command Dubout Linewrap Rubouk Cursor wrap Up Down on text Upi Down within soft wrapped lines Line wrap on text Jump over tab characters Pull chars backspace C_ Hack tabs backspace C Treat leading spaces as tabs 433 Redefine Common Keys Dialog Redefinable Keys The redefinable keys and their available commands are described below
148. tions setting See Context Tagging Options Dialog for descriptions of the options Tip To improve tagging performance you may need to adjust the Tag file cache size on the Virtual Memory tab of the General Options dialog click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting See Virtual Memory Tab for more information Extension Specific Context Tagging Options Context Tagging options can be configured for each file extension type This allows you to activate and deactivate particular features on a per language basis To set options from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog select the Context Tagging tab then from the Exten sion drop down list select the extension you wish to work with Options are described in the section Con text Tagging Tab 74 Chapter 6 Editing Features Code Navigation Navigation There are two types of navigation in SlickEdite Core Code Navigation which provides in depth symbol navigation and structure matching and Cursor Navigation which pertains to more simple movements within text and files Code Navigation Some of the most powerful features in SlickEdit Core are its code navigation methods particularly Sym bol Navigation These features allow you to navigate your co
149. to complete a search e Search backward If checked searches are performed from the end to the beginning e Place cursor at end If checked the cursor is placed at the end of the occurrence found Search hidden text Check this option to search for text hidden by Selective Display Matches found that were set to be hidden by Selective Display will be revealed To set Selective Display op tions from the main menu click View Selective Display See Selective Display for more informa tion e Find and Replace view options The following options on the Search tab pertain to the Find and Re place view see Find and Replace View e Close after Find Replace If checked the Find and Replace view is closed after finding text in the buffer Initialize with default options If checked the search options in the Find and Replace view will be reset to the default options each time it is launched By default this option is unchecked and search options are retained when the Find and Replace view is closed and re opened The window will re tain the current set of options as long as it remains open this includes auto hide when docked e Search string initialization options The following options on the Search tab provide starting values for when a search and replace operation is activated e History retrieval If selected the Find and Replace view uses the last item that was searched for the word used when performing a search e W
150. uncheck those items For example if you want both Tag Layout and Content Wrap enabled for XML files but you only want Content Wrap enabled for HTML files place a check next to Enable XML Formatting and its submenu items Tag Layout and Content Wrap then place a check next to Enable HTML Formatting and its submenu item Content Wrap The xml_formatting_toggle and html_formatting_toggle commands can also be used to toggle all re spective formatting features on off For use in macros two more commands are available xml_formatting and html_formatting When you use any of these commands the command line prompts for yes Y or no N When these commands are used to enable disable XML HTML Formatting both Tag Layout and Content Wrap are enabled disabled for both XML and HTML files on a global basis Enabling Disabling for the Current Document Current document options are available so that you can turn off aspects of global formatting for just the current document For example if you have both aspects of HTML formatting enabled globally but you need to edit an old HTML file and do not want automatic tag layout to occur you can disable HTML Tag Layout for that specific file The current document settings are remembered each time you open that file To change XML or HTML formatting for just the current document click Format gt XML HTML Format ting Current Document Options or use the xml_html_document_options command The Current Document
151. undo and specifies a 32000 step max Save Restore file pos Max files When Save Restore file pos is selected when you open a file the cursor position is restored to its previous location when the file was closed The Max files box specifies the maximum number of cursor positions saved The most recently closed file positions are stored Encoding Unicode support required Specifies the global non extension specific file encoding This setting is overridden if an extension specific encoding is defined Both the extension specific and global setting are overridden if you specify an encoding in the Open dialog SlickEdit Core records the en coding used to override default encoding settings and reuses this setting the next time you open the same file This provides you with per file encoding support Encoding is also supported for Microsoft project files vcproj csproj vboproj that are XML files but that default to active code page encod ing and not UTF 8 like XML See Encoding for more information Save Tab The Save tab shown below contains options that affect how files are saved To access save options click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Options setting On the File Options dialog select the Save tab Figure 10 42 File Options Save Tab 424 File Options Dialog File Options Load Save Backup AutoSave File Filters Check Append Rem
152. use the comment_setup command The Extension Options dialog is displayed open to the Comments Tab 2 Select the extension you want to affect from the Extension drop down list 3 In the Doc comments box check the option Automatically expand doc comments 4 In the For start characters box select the start characters for the doc comment style you plan to use for the selected extension These are the characters that you type that will trigger automatic completion of the doc comment skeleton For comments formatted in Javadoc select For XMLdoc select For Doxygen select or 5 In the Use style box select the tag style to use for the corresponding start characters that you selected in Step 4 This tag style is used when SlickEdit Core creates skeleton doc comments beginning with the matching start characters Comments formatted in Javadoc usually use the param style XMLdoc uses the lt param gt style Doxygen can read the param style Tip You can repeat Steps 4 and 5 to assign a style for each start character set and the setting will be remembered 6 Click OK on the Extension Options dialog Doc Comment Examples 178 Creating Doc Comments Javadoc Format To use the Javadoc commenting format select the start characters and use style param Check In sert leading Using the following code sample CURSOR_HERE int setDimensions int length int width int height
153. which ends the multi line comment Currently the first character of this string cannot be a valid identifier character 450 Color Coding Setup Dialog Nesting allowed When this option is selected this multi line comment may have this multi line comment inside it e Only if first non blank character in line Indicates the start delimiter must be the first non blank character in the line in order to be considered the start of a comment This check box is available only when the Only when start delimiter is in column text box is completed e Check for start delimiter first When this option is selected the lexer checks for the start delimiter before looking for other items When this option is specified the start delimiter is limited to one char acter in length e End delimiter must be the last character on the line When this option is selected the end delim iter text must occur at the end of a line to terminate the comment e Only when start delimiter is in column Indicates that the start delimiter text starts a comment only when found in the column specified e Color as Specifies color used for this comment This color is not used when the start delimiter is im mediately followed by one of the Comment Keywords When the start delimiter is immediately fol lowed by one of the Comment Keywords keyword color is used Tags Tab The Tags tab is used to set color coding attributes when working with tagged based language
154. whitespace only on the line below it spaces or tabs the whitespace is removed entirely acting as a line delete def_linux1_ shell To use an alternate shell set this variable to the shell that you want to run for example bin bash i This will cause the editor to use your process shell def_max_filehist Increases the number of files displayed in the file history of the File menu Enter the number of files you want to see in the history def_max_mffind_output This variable is set for performance reasons You can increase the amount of information displayed in the SlickEdit Core Output view during a multi file search by changing this to your desired setting def_max_workspace_hist Increases the length of the Workspace history list in the Project menu Enter the number of files you want to see in the history def_modal_paste Default is 0 If non zero commands that insert a BLOCK type clipboard will overwrite the destination text if the cursor is in Replace mode 481 Table of Configuration Variables Configuration Variable Description def_plusminus_blocks When the value is set to 1 the plusminus com mand will try to find code blocks to expand or col lapse if the cursor is on a line that does not have a Plus or Minus bitmap on it The default is 1 def_preplace Default is 1 If the value is set to 0 the save com mand will NOT prompt you if you are inadvertently overwr
155. will toggle display of modified lines in a different color on off You can bind the color_toggle command to a key as well This command toggles between current line modified line and language specific color ing individually Resetting Modified Lines on Save SlickEdite Core can clear the modified and inserted line color when you save a file To activate this fea ture select the Reset line modify option on the Save Tab of the File Options dialog Window Prefer ences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Options setting Adding Color Coded Keywords to Supported Languages You can add color coded keywords to a supported language To add color coded keywords to a suppor ted language complete the following steps 1 From the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Color Coding setting 2 Select the Tokens Tab 3 Choose the language you want to modify from the Lexer Name combo box list 4 Click New 5 Enter the new keywords separated with a space character 6 Click OK 7 Click OK on the Color Coding Setup dialog box For more information see Color Coding Configuration 139 Color Coding Configuration Creating Color Coding for a New Language To create color coding support for your language complete the following steps 1 From the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click
156. within the current buffer ispf_chg Replace one string with another within the current buffer ispf_compare Compare the file you are editing with another file 503 ISPF Primary Commands Command Description ispf_copy Insert the contents of a file or PDS member into the buffer ispf_create Create a new file or PDS member containing the contents of the buffer ispf_cut Cut lines out of the current buffer and place them in the clipboard ispf_delete Delete lines in the given line range or the entire buffer ispf_edit This command is identical to the built in edit com mand ispf_end Close the current file ispf_exclude Hide exclude lines that match the given search string ispf_find Find occurrences of the given search string in the current buffer ispf_flip Reverse the exclude status of lines ispf_hex Toggle display of the document in Hexadecimal mode ispf_hilite Specify the use of color coding in the editor ispf_locate Find lines with a specific line prefix ispf_move Move the contents of a file or PDS member into the buffer ispf_nonumber Turn off numbering mode ispf_number ispf_paste Controls line numbering mode Unlike ISPF this command does affect how lines are inserted Copy lines from the clipboard to the buffer ispf_preserve Controls saving of trailing blanks 504 ISPF Line Commands Command Descri
157. wml 8 org apache wml dom e 8 org apache xerces dom E bi org apache xerces dom events 8 org apache xerces dom3 Ia org apache xerces dom3 as ai Ui org apache xerces dom3 Is gi 8 Problems References 3 Pa Preview E bi org apache xerces impl org apache xerces impl dtd Symbol rg apache xerces parsers DOMParser Func xv 1 7 in 1 4 files C Samples SEJavaDemo OrderChart OrdersChart java 56 el a 8 org apache xerces impl dtd model L OrdersChart java E E org apache xerces impl dv Lagi _bts new BasicTimeSeries order data 8 org apache xerces impl dv dtd E CachingParserPool java try e ID org apache xerces impl dy util FcreateDOMParser DOMParser parser new DOMParser e ID org apache xerces impl dv xs E DocumentBuilderImpl java arser EEN D org apache xerces impl io DocumentBuilderImpl DocumentBuilderFactory allg j a rta i S STT Insert writable 56 42 20 Perspectives The Workspace The workspace is a collection of projects A project contains all resources such as source files sub folders icons and generated code By default the workspace files are placed in a workspace subdirectory under the install directory Perspectives A perspective in Eclipse is a set of views and editors For example the Java perspective has a much dif ferent set of views than the Debug perspective You can customize each
158. xml version 1 0 gt lt DOCTYPE SETemplate SYSTEM http www slickedit com dtd vse setemplate 1 0 setemplate dtd gt lt SETemplate Version 1 0 Type Item gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt Name gt My Java Class lt Name gt lt Description gt My custom Java class lt Description gt lt DefaultName gt MyClass java lt DefaultName gt lt SortOrder gt 100 lt SortOrder gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt TemplateContent gt lt Files gt lt File gt MyClass java lt File gt lt Files gt lt TemplateContent gt lt SETemplate gt TemplateContent TemplateContent is a required child element of SETemplate Specifies the contents of a template item Attributes Optional Delimiter used when replacing substitution parameters in content Defaults to Child elements Files Parameters Parent elements SETemplate Value N A Example The following example illustrates the metadata for an item template for a custom Java class lt xml version 1 0 gt lt DOCTYPE SETemplate SYSTEM http www slickedit com dtd vse setemplate 1 0 setemplate dtd gt lt SETemplate Version 1 0 Type Item gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt Name gt My Java Class lt Name gt lt Description gt My custom Java class lt Description gt lt DefaultName gt MyClass java lt DefaultName gt lt TemplateDetails gt 124 Text Editing lt TemplateContent gt lt Files gt lt File g
159. 1 Getting the Most Out of SlickEdit Core ooo eeecceescececeeeeeeee cece eeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeesaaeeseeeeeseaeeeneaeeteaes 2 Cool Featurestiisitni tte a DEE ENEE NEIE ENEE EE TEE 2 Write More Code Faster ix iiccie sats ive ES deed 2 Get Started EE 3 Documentation And CONVENTIONS 00 cececeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaaeedeneeesaeeeeaaeeseeeeessaeeeseaeesenees 4 ACCESSING Documentaiton soseri ienei ie aiiai aineen a e E eii 4 Documentation Conventio E 4 Supported Languages and Environments cccccececeeceeneeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeesaeeesaaeeseeeeeseaeesseeeeeaes 6 Supported Languages and File Types ssssessseseseesesirssrnssrnssrnstnstnnstnnsttnstnnntnnstnnsenn nnt 6 Supported Editor EMUulations 9 Install Uminstall 2 eege EE E 10 System Requirements cccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaaeseeeeeesaeeesaaeeseeeeesieeeseeeeeaes 10 Installing SlickEdit Core 2 eececeeccceceeeceeeseeceeeeeeeaaeseeneeceaaeeeeaaeseeneeesaaeseeaaeeseeessaeesseneeee 10 tele WEE 11 Uninstalling SlickEdit Core eeeeeecececceeeeeeeee cece eeeeaeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeesaaeeeeeeeeseaeeesaaeeeeeees 13 Help and Product Support Ae EEN ened nade eege 14 Using the Help SyStem EE ee na niece ee hail 14 Prod ct Suppo T EE 14 2 e UTTE S E Ta E 15 General eu TEE 16 Extension Specific Options iisa a n a ean a aean ede kaart eet EAE 17 3 User E E 19 SOTO AV OUL as aie a deeg eegene EE 20 ME e Te ne EE 20 The Workspace
160. 221 Viewing and Displaying e User Supertype Where Possible e Inline e Introduce Factory e Encapsulate Field See the Eclipse Help for descriptions and other information regarding Java refactoring Java Develop ment User Guide Reference Refactoring 222 Hexadecimal View and Edit Mode Viewing and Displaying SlickEdit Core offers several features for viewing and displaying Hexadecimal View and Edit Mode To view a binary or text file in a hex text view mode click Display Hex or Display Line Hex or use the commands hex or linehex If closing a file while viewing it in hex mode then the next time the file is edited it will be displayed in hex text view mode When the cursor is in the hex data it can be overwritten or hex nibbles characters 0 through F can be inserted When the cursor is in the text data overwrite it if you want or insert text characters the same as if editing a text file All of the search and replace com mands work while hex editing Only character selections are displayed when in hex editing mode Hex Mode Key Bindings Hex mode key bindings override normal key bindings for the emulation Most of the other emulation keys will perform the same operation However keys that are bound to the commands top_of_buffer bot tom_of_buffer page up page_down begin_line end_line begin_line_text_toggle cursor_left or cursor_right will perform hex text cursor motion Table 6 15 He
161. 246 Java 7 When finished click OK 8 A prompt appears asking whether to rebuild your workspace tag file Click Yes Preprocessor macros are stored in usercpp h located in your configuration directory Rather than using the dialog you can add large numbers of defines directly to this file You may want to make sure that your entire development team has an up to date copy of this configuration file once you have added all of your local preprocessor macros Note The usercpp h file should only be used for defines and undefs not includes 247 Java Formatting Options Java This section describes some of the features and options that are available for Java including extension specific options the Javadoc Editor and more Java Formatting Options Options are available for Java language file extensions for changing the smart indenting and template editing style settings To access these options from the main menu click Window Preferences ex pand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting Choose the language extension you wish to work with from the Extension drop down list then click the Options button The Formatting Options dialog specific to the file extension you have selected will be displayed Note Languages similar to Java have similar Formatting Options dialogs which are not specifically doc umented The Java Formatting
162. 44 Completions Note SmartPaste only works with line selections For information about creating a line selection see Line Selections 145 Auto Complete Completions Completions save keystrokes as you are typing code by providing a way to automatically complete par tially typed text There are several types of completions in SlickEdit Core e Auto Complete A feature set that includes syntax keyword and symbol completions e Word Completion Completions that work for any text in an editor window e Command Line Completions Completions for command line entries Auto Complete Auto Complete offers suggestions for how syntax keywords symbols and lines of code may be com pleted by the editor It works by looking at the word prefix under the cursor and using several different queries to find and suggest completion options Each of these types of suggestions can be individually turned on or off allowing you to customize auto completion to your liking Using Auto Complete Auto Complete is activated when the editor is idle for a short period of time and there is a partially typed word under the cursor When Auto Complete is active the available completions are indicated in several ways e A light bulb appears on the left edge of the editor e A list of completions appears under the word being typed e The rest of the completed word or statement appears to the right of the cursor Figure 6 18 Example o
163. 6 Cursor NavigatiOnl gie Ee ERENNERT aed eed 79 SYMbOl BrOWSING wisi E E EE E abl A E 81 vi SlickEdit Core v3 3 for Eclipse EE 82 Outline View gei edd dedi deed Aone ee eee 86 Find Symbol View xe dtc tee hee Aion ei a EE 88 Preview VIEN EE Anal ao AG ie Ane AR aaa en E 89 References VIEW ceeeccceceeeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeaaeeeeaeaeeeeessaeaeeeesaeaeeeeneeseceeenenenenenes 91 SY MOIS VIEW zue iaae i eia a Ei Ai daa ee A ee deeg 93 Symbol Properties View cccccecccecececesenceceeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeceaeeeeaaeseeaeeeceaeesseaeesseeessaaeeseaeeeeeas 101 Eeler E 103 Instantiating a Template onic iniiaiee iea aea N ii 103 Creating Templates stiati tnana E EE 105 Substitution Parameters ccceceeceeeeeeeeneeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeesaeeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeeeaeeeseieeesaeeeeeneeee 106 Organizing Templates ccccccceceseeceeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeesaeeesaaaeseeeeseaaeeeeaaeseeeeesenaeeseaeeeeaas 108 Template Manager Operations cceccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaesseneeseaeeeeaaesneneeess 109 Template Manager Dialog eccceceeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeetaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaaeeesesaeeeeeee 110 Template Options Dialog 111 Add File Dialog EE 111 Add Parameter Deeg ee EENEG ated tdci 111 Add New Item Dialog serres a e E A a Ea 112 Locating Templates rao eetet aeiaai Ea ANE tAE aia KAN iE CATE EEA EEE EEA 113 Manually Creating a Template A 113 Code Template Metadata File Refe
164. As sembler octq Octal numbers are of the form ddddQ like Intel As sembler poundbase Based numbers are of the form base number exponent like Ada underlineint Numbers may have underlines between the num bers like Ada xhex Hexadecimal numbers are of the form Oxhhhh like C nonumbers Do not color code numbers This style is useful for tag languages like HTML Using this style with other number color coding styles will produce unpredict able results rexxhex Hexadecimal strings are followed by an upper or packageimport lowercase letter X For example 414141 X or 414141X are REXxX style hexadecimal strings that are both equivalent to the string AAA Language has Java syntax package and import statement where non quoted file name follows package and import keyword idparenfunction An identifier followed by an open parenthesis indic ates a function like C and Java html Enables HTML syntax embedded languages and attribute coloring backslashescapechars Backslash escapes the character that follows heredocument Enables support for Here documents Note that if you prefix the terminator with one of the lexer names you will get embedded language color coding perl Adds support for Perl format statement and some other Perl specific changes 496 Editing the Key Binding Source Value of style Description tcl Special support for TCL la
165. CS sequence unless this option is specified Comma Delimiter to separate ambiguous options XCCLetters Requires the first character of search string NOT be one of the color coding elements specified For ex ample Xcs requires that the first character not be in a comment or string CCLetters is a string of one or more of the following color coding element letters e O Other e K Keyword e N Number e S String e C Comment e P Preprocessing e L Line number e 1 Symbol 1 e 2 Symbol 2 e 3 Symbol 3 e 4 Symbol 4 F Function color s V No save line e A Attribute CccCLetters Requires the first character of search string to be one of the color coding elements specified See CCLetters above Highlight matched patterns with highlight color The buffer is not automatically cleared when executing a new search like it is with the Find and Replace view 186 Find and Replace Commands Option Description id Used with the Search hidden text H or Highlight matches options to find all matches and un hide or highlight them amp Use Wildcard regular expression syntax Highlight matched patterns with highlight color Vv Replace commands only Preserve case When specified each occurrence found is checked for all lowercase all uppercase first word capitalized or mixed case The replace string is converted to the same case as t
166. Comment Lines box and comment commands respectively These operations will use the matching comment style to comment out all text on the lines containing the selection A Comment Block will surround multiple lines with a single block comment Comment Lines will comment out each line in the selection with a line comment See Commenting for more information To access comment options from the main menu click Format Comment Setup comment_setup command Alternatively click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog select the Com ments tab Figure 10 35 Extension Options Comments Tab 406 Extension Options Dialog Extension Options Extension C i Indent Word Wrap General Comments Comment Wrap Advanced Auto Complete Context Tagging Comment block Doc comments Automatically expand doc comments Insert leading For start characters Use style eg param Bottom C First line is top Comment editing _ Last line is bottom Split line comments ee Extend line comments Left Right C Join comments when joining lines Location At left margin At level of indent O Start in column oc Cet Conte soss Je String editing Split strings on Enter Comment Block These settings are used when you comment out a selected block of text Format Co
167. Core This option is used by the HTML toolbar When this attribute is selected path information is included when inserting file names into the value of an attribute For example creating a link with this option turned on might result in the following ex ample lt A HREF file c dev html index htm gt sample link lt A gt When this option is not selected the result is the following example lt A HREF index htm gt sample link lt A gt Use lower case file names when inserting links Not available in SlickEdit Core This option is used by the HTML toolbar When this option is selected the lowercase file names are used when in serting links into the value of an attribute See the example for Use paths for file entries Use quotes for numerical values When this option is selected word values are enclosed in double quotes after the of an attribute inside the body of a tag Use quotes for single word values When this option is selected number values are enclosed in double quotes after the of an attribute inside the body of a tag Insert colors using color names if possible When this option is selected colors are inserted by using the color names if possible For example instead of using ff0000 to represent the color red the color name red is used lt BODY bgcolor f 0000 gt lt and gt lt BODY bgcolor red gt lt are identical gt 269 HTM
168. Dialog W C C Compiler Properties E Compiler Name Yisual Studio 2005 w i Default visual Studio 2005 Set Default Build Tag File Compiler Configuration Header File CuPragram Files SlickEdit 2007 isyscantigivsparsery sc Built in Compiler Include Directories C Program FilestMicrosoft visual Studia GC unchde C Program Files Microsoft Visual Studio 6yChatimfclinclude C Program Files Microsoft Visual Studio SC PlatFormSDkK include CiProgram Files Microsoft Visual Studio 850K v2 Ohinclude The C C Compiler Properties dialog displays not only the chosen compiler but also the associated header file and include directories Collectively this is a configuration Configurations can be created and modified as needed In the Compiler Name drop down list select the compiler you wish to use If this is to be the global de fault compiler for all projects click the Set Default button 244 C C Preprocessing Note It is possible to select other compilers for individual projects In those cases the project specific compiler is used and overrides the global default SlickEdit Core ships with header files for each compiler and the correct header file will appear in the Header File field The header file configures the parser to emulate the compiler that is chosen in the Compiler Name field Creating New Configurations There are two ways to begin a new configuration In both cases a dialog box will be i
169. Dialog Recommended Fonts for Elements Font recommendations are given for the best screen display The information below contains recommen ded fonts for some of the screen elements Note Some font names are portable font names which are translated into other fonts This allows Slick Coe macros and dialog boxes to be portable across Windows and UNIX Command Line Fonts The following table contains recommendations based on the operating system for the Command Line 54 Colors font element Table 4 1 Command Line Font Recommendations Platform Font Recommendation Windows Choose Courier Courier New OEM Fixed Font or Terminal fonts for the most visually appealing char acter displays Linux Choose Courier Lucida Sans Typewriter or a con sole font for the most visually appealing character displays If these fonts are not visible look for the UNIX fonts below UNIX Choose Adobe Courier B amp H Lucida Typewriter or Width x Height family fonts for the most visually ap pealing fixed fonts Selection List Fonts Choose Courier for best display of selection lists that need a fixed font Dialog Box Fonts Choose MS Sans Serif as an attractive font for dialogs Text Box Fonts Choose System or MS Sans Serif for fonts used in text boxes SBCS DBCS Source Window Fonts This is the element used for all non Unicode source windows Choose Terminal for the most attractive visual dis
170. E EEEN EEEE 520 SlickEdit Regular Expressions c ccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeseeeesaeeeeeeeeee 526 Brief Regular Expressions 2 40 ti ch ea deer dees eegen ete att tena 531 Unicode Category Specifications for Regular Expressions ccccccesssseeeeesteeeeeesaes 537 Unicode Character Blocks for Regular Expressions c c ceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeteaes 539 xi xii List of Figures 1 1 Embedded Languages in HTML 000 0 eeeceeeeeeeene ee eter eee eee ae eee eeeaaeee eee aaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeneae 8 1 2 ALMEsEmbedded in Eer acai ian vai aaa at an wate 9 Salo Le Workbench siete eset ZE dere EE gates vat bebe E A ar ee evi aoe ee 20 3 2 Managing File ASSOCIATIONS 0 0 eee eee ien ee eet ae EEE ANETA EENET TETANEN RTENE ESEA 21 3 3 Opening Source Files with SlickEdit Core ccccceceeeeceeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeseeeeeesaaeeeeaeeeseeeesaeeeeeneeeea 23 B4sStatus Area E 25 3 5 Redefine Common Keys Dialog cccccceeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeecaaaeeseneeseeeeesaaeeseaeeeseeeesaeesseneeee 37 4 1 Emulation el e EE 42 4 2 Emulation ul EE 42 4 3 Key Bindings Dialog ree a a dE E dened ate es AE eevee IA 45 4 4 Bind Key Dialog EE 48 4 5 Font Contiguratlon DialOG EE 53 4 6 Color Settings Dialog WT 56 5 1 List Members Example T eaaa Ea EA EE EAA A AAE E EERE 63 5 2 List Members Example Z sierra iinitan iE aira E EESAN TAEAE AAAA 63 5 3 Param
171. EEN 182 Find and Replace Commandes 184 Find and Replace View eeecccceeeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeaeeeeeesaeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeaaeeesenaaeess 190 Find Symbol VIEW srren erraitan aae a a araa aae aa aaa aaan a a Ea aa aet araara i 192 Find and Replace with Regular Expressions cccceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenaeeeeeenaeeeeeseaaes 192 Undoing Redoing Replacement AA 196 Beautifying Code 201 dee acid eee deele EEN Jet ENEE 197 Re tis tdi ote eee E EE 197 FROMOWING TEXT EE 197 Een EE 198 Ee TEE ene BE 198 E EE Lee Il ne DEE 200 Reviewing Refactoring Changes cccccccesseeeceeeceeeeeeeaeeseeeeesaaeeeeaaeseceeesaeessnaeeeeaes 220 Java ReTactOning EENS i a EEN ENNEN NEEN NEES Kee dee gedoe 221 Viewing and Displaying cccecceeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaaeeeseeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeaeeeesenaas 223 Hexadecimal View and Edit Mode 223 Viewing Special Characters ccccccceeesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeseeeeeseaaeeseeeeeeas 223 Selective DISPLAY eraa rar cetendd ey secevbardedtureec uadhecd ege E a a a aE Ta Desk et 224 NERT E 227 7 Language Specific Editing E 229 Language Specific Editing Overview cccecceceeeceeeeeeceneeeeaaeceeneeseaeeeesaaeeeeaeeeseaeeeeaeeseenees 230 Language Editing Modes siis i ie tenidedeln e a a NEE a deed 230 Extension Options EELER Eege 231 ERS EE 233 C C Formatting Options seseeeseesseesseesiessiesiessinesiisst
172. ERSION c myprog4 2 When the editor starts the following environment variables are created by the editor e VSDRIVE Drive letter followed by a colon where editor executable resides e VSDIR Directory of editor executable with a trailing backslash UNIX slash Environment variables can be embedded in any line within a section by placing characters around the environment variable Using the set Command Change or view the environment while running through the set command The operation of the built in set command is almost identical to the DOS SET command Use the set command to temporarily change one of the configuration environment variables or any other environment variable For a complete listing 477 Configuration Variables of configuration environment variables see the table above The syntax of the set command is set envvar_name value When you invoke the set command with no parameters a new buffer is created and the current environ ment variable settings are inserted The current value of an individual environment variable may be re trieved by executing the set command followed by the name of the environment variable Specify the name of the environment variable followed by an equal sign and the new value will replace the value of an existing environment variable or assign a value to a new environment variable To remove an environment variable specify the name of the environment variable fo
173. Each provides different capabilities for different editing situations and easy access for those who like to work using the keyboard only or the mouse For a table of keyboard shortcuts see Selection Keys Selected text is rendered with a shaded background To change the selection color use the Color Set tings dialog box click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree double click the Color setting See Setting Colors for Screen Elements for more information on changing colors Tip When using the mouse for selections you can switch the selection type from character to block or to line While the left button is down click the right button to toggle through the selection types Character Selections Character selections are used to select words parts of a line or a range of text between a starting loca tion and an ending location To create a character selection use one of the following methods e Keyboard method Position the cursor at the beginning of the text to be selected Next enter the se lect_char command F8 or Edit Select Char Then move the cursor to the end of the text to be selected by using the arrow keys or by using the mouse e Cursor method Press and hold Shift with any cursor key including PgUp PgDn Home and End to create a quick character selection For example Shift Home will create a character selection from the cursor position to the beginning of the li
174. Edit Core on five machines you will not be able to activate it on another machine until you have deactivated one of the other five If you need more than five machines activated at one time you can contact SlickEdit Sales to request additional activations at no cost You can deactivate a license using the SlickEdit License Manager Select Help SlickEdit License Manager and then se lect the Deactivate a license option You can also deactivate a license using a stand alone utility shipped with SlickEdit Core vsact exe in the flex subdirectory of your SlickEdit Core installation directory You can copy the flex directory from one machine to another and run vsact exe You can also download these utilities from the SlickEdit Web site To deactivate a license with vsact exe type vsact deactivate If you have more than one license active on this machine perhaps for other SlickEdit products you will need to specify an ID for the license to deactivate Run vsact list to display a list of the licenses and their IDs Note Uninstalling SlickEdit Core does not deactivate the license If you have uninstalled SlickEdit Core you can copy the utilities in the 1ex subdirectory of another installation and run vsact to deactiv ate this license Repairing a License 12 Uninstalling SlickEdite Core FLEXnet Publisher identifies your machine using a combination of information about the hardware on this machine No personal da
175. F concat String str F contains CharSequence 5 F containstObject elem F containsfObject o Right click in this tree to display modify the symbol filters Items in the tree can be expanded to view uses recursively Double click or press the spacebar on an item in the tree list to go to an item Double click and Space are the same except when the item is a prototype that has a corresponding code section Double clicking will then go to the prototype s corresponding code section If the focus is in the Symbol Uses Calling Tree dialog the selected item will be shown in the Preview View just as it is in the Symbols View Viewing Base and Derived Classes To see what classes are inherited by a particular class right click on the class in the Symbols view and select Base Classes To see what classes are derived from a particular class right click on the class in the Symbols view and select Derived Classes Both dialogs have the same interface Figure 6 8 Base Classes Dialog 97 Symbols View E Base Classes System Guid El System Object lt type_being_boxed gt boxed Zwstem Gutt i PROTECTED EMPTY l PRIVATE EMPTY 4 PACKAGE EMPTY The left pane of each dialog contains a tree showing the class inheritance hierarchy the class list The right pane shows a list of the members of the selected class the member list If the focus is in the class list the selected class will be displayed in the member
176. For more information about navigating between symbols see Code Navigation Figure 10 10 Go to Definition Dialog W Go To Definition PRINT _FONTATTRS Za print footer YSOPRINTOPTIONS Searching 3 3 e Symbol Specifies the symbol to search for e Prefix Match Deselect to match tags using a regular expression or a substring search 357 Selective Display Dialog Dialogs Related to Viewing and Displaying This section describes SlickEdit Core dialogs and views related to viewing and displaying within the edit or For more information see Viewing and Displaying Selective Display Dialog The Selective Display dialog Display Selective Display or selective_display command allows you to activate Selective Display and choose the regions in your code that you want to display or hide Each region contains settings that are specific to that region The dialog also contains static options for expand ing See Selective Display for more information about working with this feature Figure 10 11 Selective Display Dialog Selective Display O Search text To r display all lines and remove outline markers invoke the Show All menu item from the View menu F directi C Preprocessor directives Show Function Headings and Optionally Multi level Comments O Paragraphs Settings Show comments Collapse comments When expanding Expand sublevels Collapse sub levels Remember sub levels
177. Format e Display e Navigate e Search e Macro e Tools e C C Refactoring e Window e Help 24 lipse Editors Views Views are windows that show various types of information that you can move around and dock within Ec lipse See SlickEdit Views for information Status Area The status area for a perspective and an editor displays text messages It indicates if the current mode is insert overwrite or replace and if a file is read only The editor status area also displays the line and column number for the cursor location Figure 3 4 Status Area Java C SamplesWSEJavaDemo OrderChart OrdersChart java Eclipse SDK File Edit Format Display Navigate Search Project Macro Tools Run C C Refactoring Window Help iG O Q 886 189 E JEEN HE Packa 2 k Hierar Symb CH OrdersChart java x D BasictimeSeries java Oo a Outline 28 ez D OrdersChart java y OrderChart Al You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public Lice E Borderschart EI Im default package if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple We _document D s bts a OrdersChart java MA 02111 1307 USA S D j amp title i E com jrefinery y Py dAoetcrderfDatat 13 com jrefinery chart makeCchart a 8 com jrefinery chart combination F main String args E com jrefinery chart data E bi com jrefinery Chart event 8 com jrefinery chart tooltips
178. Format Display Navigate Search Project Macro Tools Run C C Refactoring Window Help iM ESi O Q BHC Ge St H Eva H Packa 7 fg Hierar symb E A orderschart java 3 gt f BasicTimeSeries java D B outline 2 E Ki S4 a OrdersChart java EN 1 OrderChart A Zen Should have received a copy of the GNU General Public Lice H vireg 8 default package if not write to the Free Software Foundation Inc 59 Temple wo 1 LD OrdersChart java MA 02111 1307 USA H a com jrefinery ID com jrefinery chart K makeChart 3 com jrefinery chart combination F main String args EE com jrefinery chart data bi com jrefinery Chart event E com jrefinery chart tooltips AB com jrefinery chart ui EB com jrefinery data EE com jrefinery date E com jrefinery io bi com jrefinery layout EI com jrefinery ui private int getOrderData com jrefinery ui about Fi com keypoint _bts new BasicTimeSeries order data EB javax xml parsers try bi org apache html dom DOMParser parser new DOMParser parser setFeature http apache org xml features dom parser setFeature http apache org xml features con f f c demo app orderschart orders xml of parser parse C demo app orderschart orders xml J RR mn public class OrdersChart amp D OI private Document document private BasicTimeSeries bts private String title E E ES E ECH 8 org apache
179. General in the tree then double click the Color Coding setting The Color Coding Setup dialog box is displayed Select the Tokens Tab then click New The Enter New Keywords dialog box is displayed Enter the new lexer name Usually this is a language name such as C or Java Click OK On the Tokens tab make sure the new keyword is selected then correct the ID start characters These are valid characters which can be the start of an identifier Correct the ID follow characters These are additional characters which are valid after the start ID character For example digits are usually allowed in identifiers but not as the first character of an iden tifier Select the Comments Tab This lists the comments currently defined and allows you to define new multi line and line comments For each comment click New to add a line or multi line comment Select the Numbers Tab to display various numeric style options Select the Strings Tab to display various string literal options If you have not found all the options you need click the Language Tab This displays some more ad vanced language specific options Click OK on the Color Coding Setup dialog box Color Coding Configuration The Color Coding Setup dialog provides the capability to specify colors for identifying your code To con figure color coding from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click Gen eral in the tree then double
180. General setting and select the More Tab If Reflow next is selected the reflow_paragraph command places the cursor on the next paragraph after it has reformatted the current paragraph Comments can also be reflowed according to the comment wrap settings See Reflowing Comments for more information 197 Quick Refactoring Refactoring Refactoring is a precise code editing feature that you can use to clean up and improve the understandab ility of your Source code Refactoring allows you to make disciplined system wide changes to code without affecting the external behavior There are two types of refactoring available within SlickEdit Core C Refactoring and Quick Refactor ing C Refactoring supports the C language only while Quick Refactoring supports C C Java and Slick C Quick Refactoring is generally faster and less stringent than C Refactoring For information about refactoring results see Reviewing Refactoring Changes Quick Refactoring Quick Refactoring supports C C Java and Slick Ce and performs refactorings using Context Tag ginge rather than a formal language parser Quick Refactoring is generally faster and less stringent than C Refactoring Available Quick Refactorings To access the Quick Refactorings use the right click context menu in the editor and select Quick Refact oring The Quick Refactoring menu can be also be accessed from the right click menus within the Sym bols and Outli
181. Katakana 542 Unicode Character Blocks for Regular Expressions Range Block Name 3100 312F Bopomofo 3130 318F HangulCompatibilityJamo 3190 319F Kanbun 31A0 31BF BopomofoExtended 3200 32FF EnclosedCJKLettersandMonths 3300 33FF CJKCompatibility 3400 4DB5 CJKUnifiedldeographsExtensionA 4E00 9FFF CJKUnifiedldeographs A000 A48F YiSyllables A490 A4CF YiRadicals ACO00 D7A3 HangulSyllables D800 DB7F HighSurrogates DB80 DBFF HighPrivateUseSurrogates DC00 DFFF LowSurrogates E000 F8FF PrivateUse F900 FAFF CJKCompatibilityldeographs FB00 FB4F AlphabeticPresentationForms FB50 FDFF ArabicPresentationForms A FE20 FE2F CombiningHalfMarks FE30 FE4F CJKCompatibility Forms FE50 FE6F SmallFormVariants FE70 FEFE ArabicPresentationForms B 543 Unicode Character Blocks for Regular Expressions Range Block Name FEFF FEFF Specials FFOO FFEF HalfwidthandFullwidthForms FFFO FFFD Specials 10300 1032F Olditalic 10330 1034F Gothic 10400 1044F Deseret 1D000 1DOFF ByzantineMusicalSymbols 1D100 1D1FF MusicalSymbols 1D400 1D7FF MathematicalAlphanumericSymbols 20000 2A6D6 CJKUnifiedldeographsExtensionB 2F800 2FA1F CJKCompatibilityldeographsSupplement E0000 E007F Tags 544 SlickEdit Inc 3000 Aerial Center Parkway Suite 120 Morri
182. L e Use lt DIV gt tags for alignment Not available in SlickEdit Core This option is used by the HTML toolbar When this option is selected the lt DIV gt tag is used for aligning text For example rather than using a CENTER tag to designate alignment use the following tagging lt DIV ALIGN CENTER gt lt DIV gt e Tag Options Opens the XML HTML Formatting Scheme Configuration dialog See XML HTML Formatting for more information HTML Beautifier To beautify an HTML document open the document you want to beautify then from the main menu click Format Beautify or use the gui_beautify command The HTML Beautifier dialog will be displayed which allows you to make settings for how the code will be beautified Caution The HTML Beautifier is not affected by XML HTML Formatting If you run the beautifier on docu ments that have been automatically formatted through XML HTML Formatting you may find un expected results You can use the commands h_beautify or h_beautify_selection to instantly beautify the file or the se lection according to the settings on the Beautifier dialog Note The CFML Beautifier contains the same options and settings as the HTML Beautifier The following buttons and options are available on the Beautifier e Beautify Beautifies current selection or buffer and closes the dialog box e Reset Restores the dialog box settings to the values that appeared w
183. ML Map URLs to a different location Whenever opening a URL the URL map is examined to see if this URL is mapped to a different location If the URL is mapped to a different location then that mapped location is used This feature allows you to work offline or from a test location For example if you need to work with XML documents that contain external DTDs while offline you can map the URL to the DTD to a local file Simil arly if you wanted to test changes to a DTD without modifying every XML documents DTD references you can map the URL to the test DTD location Figure 7 22 URL Mappings Dialog E URL Mappings Use this dialog to map a URL path or file to a local or remote path or file This allows you to work off line or work from a test location which contains DTD s that your XML files reference Don lt add gt To map a URL complete the following steps 1 From the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the URL Mappings setting 2 Click in the From text box that reads lt add gt 3 Type in the URL that will be mapped to a different location 4 Click on the To text box and type in the location to use for this URL 265 HTML 5 Click OK Toggling Between Begin and End XML Tags Place the cursor anywhere on the begin or end tag and press Ctrl to find the corresponding end or be gin tag respectively HTML This section desc
184. Members When typing a member access operator Dot Comma gt and for C Dot for Java IN and OF for COBOL members are automatically listed You can access this feature on demand by pressing Alt Dot finding identifiers when there is no member operator list locals global variables current class members etc For example for the C language to find a string function type the string on the command line and press Alt Dot If you want to disable automatic listing and only list members on demand turn List Mem bers off as follows 1 From the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting 2 On the Extension Options dialog select the extension you want to affect from the Extension drop down list 3 Select the Context Tagging Tab 62 Parameter Information 4 Clear the Auto list members check box The following example shows the results of what is displayed after typing a Dot when entering Java source Notice that the Javadoc comments are displayed in a mini HTML browser To view documenta tion for Java APIs you must install the source files as part of the JDK If clicking on a URL the default HTML browser starts Clicking on other hypertext links navigates within the comment window The equals method in the example below has two occurrences one in the String class and one in the Object class Press Ctrl PgDn or Ctrl PgUp to
185. Only valid in character set Matches characters not in UnicodeCategorySpec For example P L matches all characters that are not letters This is equivalent to 4 p L P Lu matches all charac ters that are not uppercase letters See Unicode Category Specifications for Regular Expressions p UnicodeIsBlockSpec Only valid in character set Matches characters in UnicodeIsBlockSpec Where UnicodeIsB lockSpec one of the standard character blocks specified by the Unicode consortium For example p isGreek matches Unicode characters in the Greek block See Unicode Character Blocks for Regular Expressions P UnicodeIsBlockSpec Only valid in character set Matches characters not in UnicodeIsBlockSpec For example P isGreek matches all characters that are not in the Unicode Greek block This is equivalent to p isGreek See Unicode Character Blocks for Regular Expressions xhh Matches hexadecimal character hh where O0 lt hh lt O0xff dddd Matches decimal character ddd where O lt ddd lt 255 534 Brief Regular Expressions Brief Regular Expression Definition d Defines a back reference to tagged expression number d For example abc def 0 matches the string abcdefabc If the tagged expression has not been set the search fails c Specifies cursor position if match is found If the ex pression xyz c is found the cursor is placed after the z n Matches
186. Options Auto Complete Tab ccccccceeeeeeeeeceneeeeeneeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeesecaeeesaeeneeeeees 415 Extension Options Context Tagging Tab cccccccseceeeeeeceeeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeaeseeeeesecaeeesaeeneneee 417 Select a Tag KEE e WEE EE 421 File Options LOA Talo s senio tae aa aai a a a a a a A aAa IE 422 File Options Save Tab sairaan hie aiiai daid ai a ia eet ee 424 File Options Auto ET EE 426 File Options File Filters Tab cccececceseeeeeeneeeceeeeeeeaeeeeseeeceaeeeeeaeeseeeeeseaaeseeeeeseeaeeeeaeseeneee 428 Koy Bindings Dialog EE 429 Bind Key Dialog EE 432 Redefine Common Keys Dialog cccccccceececeeceeeeeeeaeeceeeeecaaeeeeaeeseeeeeesaaeeeeaeeesneeesaeeseenees 433 Context Tagging Options Dialog c ccecccceeceeeeneeeceeeeeceaeeeseneeseeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeseeeetaeeeeeeeeee 436 Color Coding Setup Dialog c cccccceceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeseeeeseeeeeeesaeseeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeneeee 439 Color Coding Setup Tokens Tab Anke 441 Color Coding Setup Numbers Tab cceecccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeecaaeeseeeeseaaesseaeeseeeeesaeeseaeeeeaas 443 Color Coding Setup Strings Tab 445 Color Coding Setup Language Tab cc ccccceceesseeceeeeeeceeeeeaeeseeeeeceaaesseaeeseeeeeesaeeseeeeeaas 447 Color Coding Setup Comments Tab ccccccceececeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeseeeeesaaeeseaeeseeeeeesaeeseaeeeeaas 449 Color Coding Setup Tags Tab 451 Color Settings Dialog eege DEENEN ascended ae i ead 453 Font
187. Options dialog is displayed Figure 7 31 Current Document Options Dialog Current Document Options Formatting scheme htral Auto Formatting options Enable content wrapping Select the Formatting scheme that you want applied then check or uncheck the Auto formatting op tions that you want enabled or disabled Click Configure Schemes if you want to modify or create a new scheme to apply to the current document Global formatting must be enabled for the current file type in order for these options to be available For example see the two screen shots shown previously The menu screen shot shows that global HTML formatting is enabled for Content Wrap only This means that tag content for every HTML file that you cre 280 Working with Schemes ate or open in SlickEdit Core will be wrapped but no Tag Layout settings will be applied The second screen shot the Current Document Options dialog reflects that the global setting for Tag Layout is dis abled Therefore it cannot be enabled for the current document To enable it for the current document you would first need to enable the global setting by placing a check next to Format XML HTML Formatting Enable HTML Formatting Tag Layout Then you can use the Current Document Op tions dialog to enable it for the current document Working with Schemes A formatting scheme is comprised of any number of individually configurable XML or HTML tags and con trols the forma
188. Quick filters Scope Functions Variables Data Types Statements and Others All of these items are for filtering the data displayed in the Outline view Find Symbol View The Find Symbol view is used to locate symbols in your code It allows you to search for symbols by name using either a regular expression substring or fast prefix match To open this view click Search Find Symbol Searching for a symbol is faster than a normal text search because it is executed against the Context Tagging es database rather than searching through your source files Find Symbol also avoids false hits in comments or string literals Though Syntax Driven Searching in the regular Find and Replace View 88 Preview View provides this same capability it cannot match the speed of Find Symbol See Find Symbol View for information about the options that are available on this view window Preview View Note In SlickEdit Core v3 3 the Preview view replaces the Symbol view found in previous versions The Preview view does not have a search capability so you should use the new Find Symbol View to search for symbols This provides you with more power and more control over your sym bol searching The Preview view provides a portal for viewing information in other files without having to open them in the editor It automatically shows this information when you are working with certain features See Inform ation Displayed by the Prev
189. Regular Expressions UNIX Regular Expression Definition the Unicode Greek block This is equivalent to p isGreek See Unicode Character Blocks for Regular Expressions xhh Matches hexadecimal character hh where O0 lt hh lt O0xff dddd Matches decimal character ddd where O lt ddd lt 255 d Defines a back reference to tagged expression number d For example abc def 0 matches the string abcdefabc If the tagged expression has not been set the search fails c Specifies cursor position if match is found If the ex pression xyzi c is found the cursor is placed after the z n Matches newline character sequence Useful for matching multi line search strings What this matches depends on whether the buffer is a DOS ASCII 13 10 or just ASCII 10 UNIX ASCII 10 Macintosh ASCII 13 or user defined ASCII file Use d10 if you want to match an ASCII 10 charac ter r Matches carriage return ASCII 13 What this matches depends on whether the buffer is a DOS ASCII 13 10 or just ASCII 10 UNIX ASCII 10 Macintosh ASCII 13 or user defined ASCII file t Matches tab character f Matches form feed character od Matches any 2 byte DBCS character This escape is only valid in a match set od Mod matches any single byte character excluding end of line characters When used to search Unicode text this escape does nothing om Turns on multi line matching
190. Saves beautify options in the uformat ini file These settings are used by the ada_beautify command 292 Ada Beautifier The tabs on the Ada Beautifier are described in the sections below Indent Tab The following settings are available Indent with tabs When checked tab characters are used for leading indent of lines This value de faults to the Tabs text box on the Indent Tab of the Extension Options dialog box Window Prefer ences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting Indent for each level Syntax indent The amount to indent for each new nesting level The words Syntax indent are in parenthesis to help indicate that this field has the same meaning as the Syntax indent text box on the Indent Tab of the Extension Options dialog box Window Preferences ex pand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting By default this text box is initialized with the current extension setup setting Tab size Specifies output tab size The output tab size is only used if the Indent with tabs check box is selected on the Indent Tab of the Extension Options dialog box Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting This value defaults to the Syntax indent text box on the Indent Tab of the Extension Options dialog box Original tab size S
191. SlickEdit Corev3 3 for Eclipse Code Quick Think Slick SlickEdito Core v3 3 for Eclipse SlickEdit Core v3 3 for Eclipse Information in this documentation is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of SlickEdit Inc The software described in this document is protected by U S and international copyright laws and by other applicable laws and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the license or nondisclosure agreement that accompanies the software It is against the law to copy the software on any medium except as specifically allowed in the license or nondisclosure agreement The licensee may make one copy of the software for backup purposes No part of this documentation may be reproduced or trans mitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems for any purpose other than the licensee s personal use without the express written permission of SlickEdit Inc Copyright 1988 2008 SlickEdit Inc SlickEdit Visual SlickEdit Clipboard Inheritance DIFFzilla SmartPaste Context Tagging Slick C and Code Quick Think Slick are registered trademarks of SlickEdit Inc All other products or company names are used for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective owners Protected by U S Patent 5 710 926 Table of Contents 1 Tu de H EE
192. Some examples are e 0x10 10 Seek to offset 26 e 8 4 Seek to current offset 12 e 8 4 Seek to current offset 12 Select the Decimal option to enter the seek position in decimal number format Select the Hex option to enter the seek position in hexadecimal number format You can type an x as the first character in the Position to seek for text box and this option will automatically be selected 81 Class View Symbol Browsing SlickEdit Core gives you the ability to browse and view symbols in your files or workspaces Symbol browsing relies on Context Tagging so symbols are updated immediately or in the background as you edit There are several views that display information as you work to help you find what you need at ex actly the time you need it e Class View e Outline View e Find Symbol View e Preview View e References View e Symbols View e Symbol Properties View See also Symbol Navigation for information about how to navigate between symbols in files Class View Note The Class view is new in SlickEdit Core v3 3 and not to be confused with the view named Classes in previous versions The formerly named Classes view has been renamed to Sym bols view The Class view provides an outline view of both the members of the current class as well as any visible inherited members This view also shows the inheritance hierarchy of the current class This is useful for object oriented pr
193. TP server e Port Default used when adding a new connection profile e FTP port By default this is 21 e Keep alive Default used when adding a new connection profile Keeps a connection alive even when idle e Upload filename case Default used when adding a new connection profile Indicates what file case should be used for the remote file name based on the local file name Firewall Proxy Tab This tab on the FTP Options Dialog is used to configure firewall and proxy settings for FTP Figure 10 64 FTP Options Firewall Proxy Tab 463 FTP Options Dialog FIP Options General Advanced Firewall Proxy 55H S5FTF Debug Enable Firewall proxy Host name Port Cancel z1 User ID Password SS EOE Type Co USER user site USER user site after logon OPEN site Router Help Passive transfers PASV e Enable firewall proxy When on indicates you have a firewall or proxy You need to turn this on to add a connection profile that uses a firewall e Host name Host name of firewall e Port Port number of firewall e User ID User ID used when logging into firewall e Password Password used when logging into firewall e USER user site When this option is selected host and port are required User id and password are ignored USER remote_host is sent to the firewall when connecting e USER user site after logon When this option is selected host port
194. Table of Configuration Variables Configuration Variable Description the Brief emulation When the edit flst e macro is loaded the space delimited extensions listed by this variable are filtered out by the edit command s completion The default is ex obj exe lib def_buflist Change this variable to find the initial file in Buffer List The default is 3 This macro variable determ ines how the list_buffers commands displays the buffer list By default the buffer list is sorted and path information is in a separate column to the right of the name This macro variable is composed with the following flags e SORT_BUFLIST_FLAG 1 e SEPARATE_PATH_FLAG 2 Add the flags together to select a configuration Leaving out a flag removes the features If the buf fer list is not sorted the list will be in the order of the buffer ring If you set this variable to 1 it will show the full path which you can order according to path The default 3 will show an alphabetical list of the files in the left column and the directories in the right column def_ctags flags This variable is a safeguard against parsing past the end of a proc when the braces mismatch To have the editor recognize the second dd go to Macro Set Macro Variable enter def_ctags_flags and set the value to 10 def_deselect_copy Set to 1 in Brief emulation to deselect after a copy def_do_block_mode_key def_eclipse_switchbuf S
195. The expres sion matches a right bracket In SlickEdite regu lar expressions matches no characters In both syntaxes the expression matches a right brack et char set Matches any character not specified by char set A dash character may be used to specify ranges The expression A Z matches all characters ex cept uppercase letters The expression matches any character except newline char set1 char set2 Character set subtraction Matches all characters in char set1 except the characters in char set2 For example a z qw matches all English lower case letters except q and w p L qw matches 533 Brief Regular Expressions Brief Regular Expression Definition all Unicode lowercase letters except q and w char set1 amp char set2 Character set intersection Matches all characters in char set1 that are also in char set2 For ex ample x 0 x 7f amp p L matches all letters between 0 and 127 x hhhh Matches up to 31 bit Unicode hexadecimal charac ter specified by hhhh p UnicodeCategorySpec Only valid in character set Matches characters in UnicodeCategorySpec Where UnicodeCat egorySpec uses the standard general categories specified by the Unicode consortium For example p L matches all letters p Lu matches all up percase letters See Unicode Category Specifica tions for Regular Expressions P UnicodeCategorySpec
196. This enhances the match character set or match any character primit ives to support matching end of line characters For example om matches the rest of the buffer 523 UNIX Regular Expressions UNIX Regular Expression Definition ol Turns off multi line matching default You can still use n to create regular expressions which match one or more lines However expressions like will not match multiple lines This is much safer and usually faster than using the om option char Declares character after slash to be literal For ex ample represents the star character ichar Matches predefined expression corresponding to char The pre defined expressions are s a A Za z0 9 Matches an alphanumeric char acter s c A Za z Matches an alphabetic character e b t Matches blanks e d 0 9 Matches a digit rf 2 We lt gt 4 Wl Windows Matches a file name part f 4 t UNIX Matches a file name part e h 0 9A Fa f Matches a hex number e Vi 0 9 Matches an integer e in 0 9 0 9 0 9 Ee 0 9 Matches a floating number e ip A Za z f 2 f Win dows Matches a path Vp 2 2 22 2 4 f UNIX Matches a path rq JA T Matches a quoted string e v A Za z_ A Za z0 9_ M
197. Value NA Example The following example illustrates the metadata for an item template for a custom Java class lt xml version 1 0 gt lt DOCTYPE SETemplate SYSTEM http www slickedit com dtd vse setemplate 1 0 setemplate dtd gt lt SETemplate Version 1 0 Type Item gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt Name gt My Java Class lt Name gt lt Description gt My custom Java class lt Description gt lt DefaultName gt MyClass java lt DefaultName gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt TemplateContent gt lt Files gt lt File gt MyClass java lt File gt lt Files gt lt TemplateContent gt lt SETemplate gt SortOrder SortOrder is an optional child element of TemplateDetails Specifies an order number that is used to sort the template item in relation to other template items in a list Used to sort template items in a category on the Add New Item dialog box If no SortOrder is specified for a template item then the SortOrder value defaults to 0 Attributes None Child elements None Parent elements TemplateDetails e Value Text value is required An integer that is greater than or equal to 0 When sorting in relation to other template items low SortOrder values are placed ahead of higher values in a sorted list 123 Code Template Metadata File Reference Example The following example illustrates the metadata for an item template for a custom Java class lt
198. a Dialog Setup Options 200 2 eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeceaaeeeeaeeeeeeeseaaeeseaeeeseaeeesaeeesenees 376 Multi File Diff Output Dialog cece cee ce ceeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeseaeeesaeeesaaaeseeeeesnaeeeeeaeeneees 377 Context Tagging Tag Files Dialog c cceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeaaeeseeeesaaaeeseneeseeeeesaaeeneneeeeaas 378 General Options General Tab ccccccscececececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeeseeeeeseaaesseaeeseeeeeesaeeseaeeeeaas 380 General Options Search Jah 383 General Options Selections Tab A 386 General Options Special Characters Tab 389 General Options More Tab 391 General Options Exit lab ET 394 General Options Virtual Memory Tab ccccceeeceeeeeeeceneeeeeaeeseeeeeeseaeeseaaeeseeeesnaeeeneneessaees 396 Extension Options Dialog cecccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeeseeeesaaaeeseaeeseeeeesaaesseaeeeseaeeeeaeessenees 398 Extension Options Indent Tab eccccccccceeeseeeeeee cess eeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeaaeseeaeesecaeeesaeeneneee 400 Extension Options Word Wrap Tab ccccccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeaeeseeeeeseaaeeeeaeeseceeesiaeeseaeeeea 402 Extension Options General Tab ccccceesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseeaeeesaeeeeeeeees 404 Extension Options Comments Tab 406 Extension Options Comment Wrap Tab 411 Extension Options Advanced Tab c ccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseaeeseneeeeeaaeeeeaeesecaeeesaeeneeeees 413 Extension
199. a a A a 104 6 13 Block Insert Mode Example 1 cececcccesseccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeaeeeensaeeeeeseeeceeesneeeeeentnees 127 6 14 Block Insert Mode Example 2 127 6 15 Block Insert Mode Example 2 128 6 16 SOM Dial g EE 136 6 17 Color Coding Setup Tokens Tab ccecccceeeseeeneeeceeeeeesaeeeeeeeeaaeeeseneeseeeeeseaaeseeneeessaeeseaaeeeeaes 140 6 18 Example of Auto Complete c ccceccceeeeeeeeeeeee cee eeeeaeeeeeeeecaeeeeeaeeseeeeeseaaeeseaaeesnieessaeeeeeneeee 146 6 19 Select Alias File Dialog A 150 6 20 Alas Editor Dialog EE EE E TE EE 153 6 21 Dynamic Surround Example 1 162 xiii SlickEdit Core v3 3 for Eclipse 6 22 Dynamic Surround Example 2 163 6 23 Dynamic Surround Example 3 164 6 24 Dynamic Surround Example A 165 6 25 Surround With Dialog c cceceeeesceeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeee cae eeeaaeeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeseeeeeseaaeeseaeeeseieeesiaeeeeeneeee 167 6 26 Alias Editor Dialog for Surround With 0 0 eee eeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeee eee eeeeaee teense eeaaeeeeaeeeseeeetaeeeeeneeee 167 6 27 Delete Code Block Dialog A 170 6 28 Find and Replace View REENEN 190 6 29 Quick Rename Refactoring cc cccecceceeseeceeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeseeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeneeeesiaeeeeeeeeee 198 6 30 Quick Extract Method Refactoring 0 ccccceesececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeseaeeseeeeeeeaaeeseaaeeeeeeesaeeeeeneeee 199 6 314 C Refactoring Rename eenaa aa E EE 201 6 32 C Refactoring
200. aa EEA EENAA E E EAA 336 Loading Ee EE 336 Setting Macro Variables AAA 336 10 SiNeKEGW Core Dialogs iira iieecdencs ce aa Aeae k anana Et 339 Editing Dialogs EE EE 339 SlickEdit Core v3 3 for Eclipse Select Text to Paste Dialog cccccceesceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeceaeeeeaaaeeeaeeecaaaeseeaeesseeeeeeaaeeeeaeeeeaas 340 Enumerate Dialog EEN niaii ia needed eaves ate eee ea ts 340 Filter Selection Command Dialog ccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeesaaeeeeaaeseceeeeseaeeesnaeeeeaes 341 Sealch Dialogs cfs eva aad techie iter hice eich ein tit ih eon tap ae 343 Find and Replace View eeceecceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaeeeseeeaees 343 Find Symbol EE 354 Goto Definition Dialog sesiieteieseastece ste Ee Eege eared 357 Dialogs Related to Viewing and Displaying ceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeates 358 Selective Display Dialog 358 Macro RTE EE teh Geet dette ete oti ete E 361 Save Macro Dialog ccceesceceeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeseeaaesnaeeeseaaesseaaeeeeeeesaeeseeneeee 361 List Macros RTE Le WEE 361 Variable Editor RT NEE 362 Grid Settings Dialog EE 364 MenusEaitor Dial EE EE EE 364 Auto Enable Properties Dialog ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeaeess 366 Tools Dialogs 2 04 28 E EE dee ee 369 Organize Imports Options Dialog ecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeee cece eeeeeee scenes eea
201. ace before paren Determines whether a space is placed between a keyword such as if for or while and the open paren when syntax expansion occurs Example if or if Insert padding between parens When checked a space is placed after the open paren and before the close paren providing padding for the enclosed text For example if becomes if Pointer style Specify the pointer style you wish to use Other Tab Figure 7 5 C C Formatting Options Other Tab C C Formatting Options Begin end style l Indentation Other Main style KER ANSI C C CH No expansion C C Preprocessing Extensionless C Files Extensionless C File Path Regular Expression incjindude c g 234 236 C C Beautifier The following options are available e Main style Specifies the main function declaration template inserted Select ANSI C C if you want an old ANSI C main declaration inserted You can define a template by using aliases or you can write a replacement function for c_insert_main The command find proc c_insert_main will locate the macro source for this function e C C Preprocessing Click this button to customize the global preprocessing that is used when Con text Tagging creates tag files for C or C See C C Preprocessing e Extensionless C Files Click this button to add names of extensionless C header files SlickEdit Core takes care of the sta
202. after a preprocessor but before the keyword if ifdef else elif endif etc are removed This is useful for fixing old C code where the character had to start in column 1 and spaces were used after the to indicate the nesting level Force parens on return When this option is selected parentheses are added to returns statements which do not have parentheses Pad condition These options indicate if parenthesized conditional expressions should have their spa cing adjusted Schemes Tab Figure 7 10 C C Beautifier Schemes Tab C C Beautifier Begin End Style Indenting Comments Other Schemes Beautify Scheme None SlickEdit Save Scheme Cancel Hel Delete Scheme a Rename Scheme Save Settings Syne extension options 243 C C Compiler Settings To define a new scheme set the various beautify options and press the Save Scheme button User defined schemes are stored in uformat ini C C Compiler Settings In order to correctly perform full preprocessing parsing symbol analysis and cross referencing SlickEdit Core needs to emulate the implementation specific parsing behavior of your compiler including built in functions preset defines and include directories This is accomplished by using the C C Com piler Properties dialog box shown below To access the dialog click C C Refactoring C C Com piler Options Figure 7 11 C C Compiler Properties
203. ag 8 The left section of the dialog lists all of your tag files separated into categories A tag file having a File bit map with blue arrows indicates the tag file is built with support for cross referencing The right section of 378 Options Dialogs the dialog lists all the source files indexed by the currently selected tag file For descriptions of the Tag File categories listed on the left side of the dialog see Tag File Categories The following buttons are available on the Context Tagging Tag Files dialog Done Saves tag file settings and closes the dialog box Add Files Displays the Add Source Files dialog box from which you can add a set of files to the cur rently selected tag file This button will be unavailable for read only tag files and auto updated tag files If you add files to your workspace tag file you will be prompted if you want to also add the files to your project Add Tree Displays the Add Tree dialog box from which you can recursively add a directory of files to the currently selected tag file This button will be unavailable for read only tag files and auto updated tag files If you add files to your workspace tag file you will be prompted if you want to also add the files to your project Remove Tag File Deletes the currently selected tag file You will be prompted whether or not to de lete the tag file from the list and then whether or not to permanently d
204. ain menu Click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the Selections tab For more information about working with selections see Selections Figure 10 26 General Options Selections Tab 386 General Options Dialog General Options Search Selections Special Characters More Exit Virtual Memory Styles When Shift Cursor Always Char User defined Select is off shift cursor keys will perform line or block selections Gei CUA depending upon the direction you move the cursor etat Elec he Let a LU L Turn on Mouse Selection Creates Extend selection as cursor mowes Clipboard if you like the way X windows programs let you use the Deselect after copy mouse to create a dipboard and Desde ales pack then use the middle mouse button to paste Indusive character selection 8 When Arrow Keys Traverse Delete selection before insert Selection is on the left arrow key moves the cursor to the beginning Auto deselect i e when cursor moves of the selection and the right arrow key moves the cursor to the end of the selection Shift Cursor always char select Mouse selection creates cipboard Clipboard formats C Arrow keys traverse selection L RTF Format C HTML Format The following settings are available e Styles Choose the selection style you wish to use from the following
205. all of its counterparts within the class hierarchy Figure 6 33 C Refactoring Modify Parameter List 202 C Refactoring WW Modify parameters Method Name doSiomething Type Argument N ame Default Value signed int i U Prototype void doSomething char e signed int rt Push Down to Derived Class Moves class members to a class that inherits from the selected class Figure 6 34 C Refactoring Push Down to Derived Class 203 C Refactoring E Push Down Select derived class to move members to MyClassComposite FMuClassComponent If a member of the super class is used by multiple subclasses then the member is moved to all of the subclasses that access that member so that when the refactoring is done everything will compile Any member that is explicitly accessed through an instance of the super class or an instance that is cast to the super class cannot be moved Moving this will break the code Constructors and destructors cannot be moved Members can only be moved one level at a time Figure 6 35 C Refactoring Push Down Selecting Members to Move 204 C Refactoring E Select members to move Move members trom class MyClassB ase to class MyClassComponent Class Members D MyClasslter Children O signed mt AddChild MyClassB ase E signed int RemoveChildiMyClassE ase z i void doSomething const char
206. ame time See Also ISPF Line Command A ISPF Line Command B ISPF Line Command Copy ISPF Line Command Overlay ISPF Insert Mask Line MASK Usage MASK Remarks Displays the contents of the mask used with the insert I and text entry TE line commands Normally when a line is inserted the line is initially blank By specifying an insert mask you can insert a block of lines with a particular template The MASK line is editable Note that if you specify multiple masks in one file only the first mask is used See Also ISPF Line Command I ISPF Line Command TE ISPF Line Command TS ISPF Make Data Lines MD MDD and MDMD for blocks Usage e MD n Make n data lines starting with the line with the command e MDD Make a block of lines data must match another MDD or MDMD e MDMD Make a block of lines data must match another MDD or MDMD Remarks Converts one or more no save lines to data so that they may be saved when the buffer is saved There are two forms to this command The first form MD n specifies that the line and the subsequent n 1 512 ISPF Line Commands lines are to be converted The second block form MDMD or MDD is placed on the first and last lines of the block to be converted See Also ISPF Line Commands ISPF Line Command COLS ISPF Line Command BNDS ISPF Line Com mand MASK ISPF Line Command TABS ISPF Overlay Lines O and OO for blocks Usage e O n Overlay n lines starting with the
207. an create a list of files that includes different files match ing files and files that do not exist in the other tree Use the DIFFzilla dialog box to compare the new source tree with the original source tree 1 From the main menu click Tools File Difference or use the diff command 2 On the Files tab select Multi File 3 Enter the first file in the Path 1 text box 4 Enter the second file in the Path 2 text box If the file names only differ by path you only need to spe cify the path for Path 2 5 Click OK The Multi File Diff Output Dialog box opens Figure 8 2 Multi File Diff Output Dialog 311 DIFFzillae E Multi File Diff Output C projectsMemp C projects javamain1 BER Path 1 C projects temp Path 2 C projects javamaint Eby C projects temp EH C projectsjavamaint Fai iavamaint bakvp javamain1 bakyvpw 8 javamain bakvpw javamainl java javamain1 java javamaint pt 8 javamaint vpi javamaint vpw i javamaint vpw lal javamaint vpwhist javamain vpwhist javamaint vtq 8 javamain1 vtg 6 Click Save The Save Mut File Output dialog box opens Figure 8 3 Save Multi File Output Dialog 312 DIFFzillae Save Multi File Diff Output C Save diff state file W Include different files Include matching files jw Include previously viewed different files W Include files and directories not in Path 1 Iw Include files and directories not in Fath 2 o
208. an open and close search results view windows by right clicking on the Search Results tab in the SlickEdit Core Search view Right click in the SlickEdit Core Search view to access more options See Find in Files Tab for more in formation Find Symbol View The Find Symbol view Search Find Symbol is used to locate symbols in your code It allows you to search for symbols by name using either a regular expression substring or fast prefix match Searching for a symbol is faster than a normal text search because it is executed against the Context Tagging database rather than searching through your source files Find Symbol also avoids false hits in comments or string literals Though Syntax Driven Searching in the regular Find and Replace View provides this same capability it cannot match the speed of Find Symbol See Find Symbol View for information about the options that are available Find and Replace with Regular Expressions Sometimes searching for a string literal is too limiting For instance you cannot search for a quoted string a blank line a word starting at the beginning of a line or two words separated by any number of spaces A regular expression can describe these search strings and many more All search commands support regular expressions The Find and Replace view contains options for turn ing on regular expression searching See Find and Replace View The key binding Ctrl T toggles regular expression searching o
209. and All Expands all Selective Display levels See Selective Display for more information e Output to editor window If selected search results are sent to an editor window 349 Find and Replace View e Append to output Select this option to append search results to the search results window that is in focus List filenames only If selected only file names and not occurrences are listed in the search output e List matching lines only Selecting this option will display only one line in the search results window for each line containing one or more matching patterns on the same line and will highlight all matching patterns Foreground search If selected activates the three range options listed below This option offers slightly better performance than a background search but prevents you from continuing to work while the search is being performed The default search for SlickEdit Core is background searching unless this option is selected e Prompted When this option is selected you are prompted whether to continue searching when an occurrence is found e Single When this option is selected your cursor is placed on the first occurrence found but the re maining files are not searched e Global When this option is selected all files are searched for occurrences without prompting e Stop button Click Stop to terminate a multi file background search Press Esc to terminate a long foreground search Rep
210. and C navigating from a symbol to its definition will prompt you to select whether you want to go to the prototype or the function You can tell SlickEdite Core to always go to one or the other by setting one of the options Go to Definition navigates to symbol definition proc or Go to Definition navigates to symbol declaration proto To set these options click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog se lect the extension you want to affect from the Extension drop down list then select the Context 76 Code Navigation Tagging Tab When the cursor is in the prototype pressing Ctrl Dot will navigate to the func tion and vice versa If you do not set one of these options you will be prompted with the Select a Tag Dialog the first time you navigate from a symbol to its definition Auto close visited files SlickEdit Core can automatically close a visited file one that was opened through symbol navigation but not edited Click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the General Tab then select the option Automatically close visited files Navigating Between Multiple Instances If more than one instance of the definition or reference is found the Select a Tag dialog is displayed from whic
211. ank menu item after the last menu item in the list e Insert Inserts a blank menu item before the selected menu item e Delete Deletes the selected menu item Auto Enable Properties Dialog This dialog is used to set the auto enable properties for a menu item For example the screen capture below shows the Auto Enable Properties dialog for cut on the _textbox_menu For more information see Enabling Disabling Menu ItemsEnabling Disabling Menu Items To access this dialog click the Auto En able button on the Menu Editor dialog Figure 10 16 Auto Enable Properties Dialog 366 Auto Enable Properties Dialog Auto Enable Properties for vdlgedit_move C Allow in read only mode Cancel C Allow when window is iconized so Help The following settings are available Requires editor control Indicates that this command should be enabled only if operating on an editor control e Allow in read only mode Indicates that this command should be enabled if the editor control is in strict read only mode e Allow when window is iconized Indicates that this command should be enabled if the editor control is an editor window which is iconized e Requires selection in active buffer Indicates that this command should be disabled if there is no se lection in the active buffer Requires Context Tagginge Indicates that this command should be disabled if Context Tagging does not support the current buffer language type
212. arations Tab The following options are available on the Statements Declarations tab e Reserved word case Specifies the case for reserved words For example if you choose UPPER then the Ada reserved word procedure would be beautified to PROCEDURE e One statement per line When checked only one statement is allowed per line of code e One declaration per line When checked only one declaration is allowed per line of code e One parameter per line When checked only one parameter is allowed per line of code in a formal parameter list of a subprogram specification e One enumeration per line When checked only one enumeration is allowed per line of code in an enumerated type definition Horizontal Spacing Tab This tab allows you to specify how certain operators and separators are padded The following options are available e Item Syntactic item to which padding settings get applied Note The Binary operators item includes gt lt gt lt gt e Padding Before When checked one space is placed before the item e Padding After When checked one space is placed after the item e Padding Preserve When checked the original padding or lack of padding around the item is pre served Vertical Alignment Tab The following options are available on the Vertical Alignment tab e Align on declaration colon When checked adjacent declaration lines including parameter specifica
213. arch for or post your question on the SlickEdit Community Forums to seek help from other SlickEdit Core users The forums are located at htto community slickedit com e Contact Product Support See Contacting Product Support below Using the Help System When SlickEdit Core is installed the searchable Help system is installed with the product The contents of the Help system are the same as the contents of the User Guide located in the docs installation subdir ectory see Accessing Documentation To access the Help system from the main menu click Help Help Contents then expand SlickEdit Core v3 3 for Eclipse in the tree Note Context sensitive Help is currently not available in SlickEdit Core Product Support Patches macros FAQs and more are available on the Product Support section of our Web site at ht tp www slickedit com From within Eclipse you can click Help SlickEdit Support Web Site to launch the site in a browser window Contacting Product Support Use the SlickEdit Community Forums at htto community slickedit com to report all defects and share any feedback you have on this release For problem reports please provide the following information e A description of the problem e The language you are working in C C Java etc e SlickEdit Core program information Select Help About SlickEdit Core then select the Program In formation tab click Copy To Clipboard and paste the
214. arch options Restore cursor after replace Leave selected Incremental search highlighting General Search Selections Special Characters More Exit Virtual Memory E Wrap at beginning end C Search backward Place cursor at end Search hidden text Search string initialization Gei History retrieval Word at cursor Selected text if exists Bookmarks C Use workspace bookmarks Show set bookmarks C Show pushed bookmarks C Close deletes pushed bookmarks Max stack depth The following options are available e Default search options The following default search options apply to all command line searches quick searches and incremental searches and to the Find and Replace view when the option Initialize with default options is checked 384 General Options Dialog e Match case If checked various search commands default to case sensitive searches e Match whole word If checked refines search results to match only the word as a whole By de fault this is unchecked and search results will match all instances of the word ignoring characters that are to the left and right of the occurrence Regular expression If checked various search commands find or c default to regular expres sion searching Specify which syntax to use from the drop down list e Wrap at beginning end If checked various search commands default to wrapping to the beginning or end of a buffer
215. ars from which you can select specific elements to affect Font Style For color coded elements you may choose whether the element is normal bolded it alicized or underlined For example keywords are bold by default Use fixed spacing for bold and italic fixed Unicode fonts Unicode support required When this option is selected and a fixed font is selected for a Unicode source window bold and italic color coding is supported Since this requires the Unicode text to be converted to the active code page some char acters may be displayed incorrectly The current editor display engine ignores bold and italic settings for proportional fonts or fixed Unicode fonts which are treated like proportional fonts OK Applies color changes and closes the Color Settings dialog Cancel Restores all colors to the values they were when the Color Settings dialog box was first dis played in the current editor session Apply Updates all modified screen elements useful for previewing what the colors look like The dia log box is not closed so that you can make further changes if you wish Reset Resiores all colors to the values they were when the editor was invoked Schemes Expands the Color Settings dialog box so you can try different color schemes or define your own See Using Color Schemes for more information Font Configuration Dialog The Font Configuration dialog contains options for changing the fonts and font styles of scree
216. ash at the beginning or end of the word character string Auto Complete Tab Auto Complete options in SlickEdite Core can be configured for each file extension type To access these options click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog select the Auto Complete tab Figure 10 38 Extension Options Auto Complete Tab Extension Options Extension c K ce Indent Word Wrap General Comments Comment Wrap Advanced Auto Complete Context Tagging Enable auto completion Details Syntax expansion Show light bulb Keywords Show expanded text Alias expansion Show list of matches Symbols I Show icons Show categories Word completion bd Show symbol declaration Show comments Options C Auto select unique items Tab inserts longest unique prefix d Symbols C Tab cydes through choices expanding J Insert selected 8 Gemeend expander Returns expan Display after ms idle 25 expanding Parameters Update after ms idle w parti string expand 415 Extension Options Dialog The following options are available Enable auto completion If selected activates the Auto Complete feature See Auto Complete for more information Syntax expansion If selected Auto Complete will show Syntax Expansion choices for the word prefix under the cursor Syntax Expansion completes synta
217. asing features uppercase lowercase ignore case do not support surrogates Windows is relied upon for casing support and Windows casing features do not support surrogates See Surrogate Sup port Vertical line column Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting and select the General Tab is not supported Truncation line length is not supported Record width on the File Open dialog is not supported DDE is not supported Unicode DDE does not work with Internet Explorer or Netscape You can view files with Unicode data in Internet Explorer however this feature will fail if the file name contains char acters not in the active code page Version control supports files containing Unicode data but does not support file names that contain characters not in the active code page Special character display is not supported for Unicode buffers The grew program does not support Unicode and can only be used on SBCS DBCS active code page text If you load the same source file in Unicode and SBCS DBCS mode the Context Tagging database will have incorrect seek positions It is important to use the default load options and to always load source files in the same encoding so that the Context Tagging seek positions match the editor seek positions The install setup exe unionist uninstall exe and update update exe programs are not Unicode applications so the installation di
218. ass the vsconfig argument to Eclipse This works the same as passing any argument to eclipse exe or eclipse on Linux For ex ample C Path_To_Eclipse eclipse exe vsconfig C My_Config You can also change the location of the SlickEdit Core metadata directory by using the vsmetadata ar gument C Path_To_Eclipse eclipse exe vsmetadata C My_Metadata Both options can be used at the same time You can also change the configuration directory permanently through the SlickEdit Core Preferences page Click Window Preferences SlickEdit then use the Configuration Directory and Metadata Directory group boxes Figure 11 1 Configuration Directory Preferences 484 Configuration Directory Preferences ype fiter text SlickEdit General Ant Configuration Directory C C Current Directory Help S geg z Install Update C Documents and Settings Rhuff My Documents My SlickEdit Core Config 3 3 _ Java New Directory effective starting From next startup Plug in Development C Documents and Settings RhuffiMy Documents My SlickEdit w Run Debug SlickEdit Team E Metadata Directory Current Directory C Documents and Settings RhuffiMy Documents My SlickEdit Core Metadata 3 B E H E H E H E New Directory effective starting From next startup C Documents and Settings Rhuff My Documents My SlickEdit Cor Restore Defaults Apply Use the New Directory fields
219. ast 200 files is saved See Selective Display for more informa tion Symbol browser tree If checked the symbol browser tree see Symbols View is restored across edit sessions The current position displayed selected is always restored regardless of this setting 59 DO Chapter 5 Context Tagging Tag Driven Navigation Context Tagging Overview Context Tagging is a feature set that performs expression type scope and inheritance analysis as well as symbol look up within the current context to help you navigate and write code Context Tagging uses an engine that parses your code and builds a database of symbol definitions and declarations commonly referred to as tags Context Tagging features work with your source code not just standard APIs application program interfaces and the features are dynamic in the sense that symbols are updated im mediately or in the background as you edit your source code The Context Tagging feature set includes e Tag Driven Navigation e List Members e Parameter Information e Auto List Compatible Parameters e Completions Symbol Browsing Statement Level Tagging Before you begin working with these features some configuration is required See Building Tag Files Tag Driven Navigation The Context Tagging database allows you to navigate your code jumping from a symbol to its definition or its references For more information see Symbol Navigation List
220. atches a C variable e w A Za z Matches a word The precedence of operators from highest to lowest is as follows 524 UNIX Regular Expressions e 22 These operators have the same precedence e concatenation UNIX Regular Expression Examples The table below shows examples of UNIX regular expressions Table 11 13 UNIX Regular Expression Examples Sample UNIX Expression Description Adefproc Matches lines that begin with the word defproc Adefinit Matches lines that only contain the word definit A name Matches lines that begin with the string name No tice that the backslash must prefix the special char acter MA Matches tab and space characters d9 d32 Matches tab and space characters x9 x20 Matches tab and space characters p t Matches any three letter string starting with the let ter p and ending with the letter t Two possible matches are pot and pat s t Matches the letter s followed by any number of characters followed by the nearest letter t Two pos sible matches are seat and st for while Matches the strings for or while Ap Matches lines beginning with a file name XY Z Matches x followed by one or more occurrences of y followed by z a z qw Character set subtraction Matches all English lowercase letters except q and w p isGreek amp p L Character set intersection Matches all
221. ate class name e Preserve identifier to right of cursor If selected only the identifier characters before the cursor are replaced with an item selected from a List Members dialog Identifier characters after the cursor are preserved When this option is not selected identifier characters following the cursor are replaced with the item selected from a list members dialog When this option is in the mixed state trailing identifier characters are preserved for auto list members but not when listing members on demand by pressing Alt Dot For example if List Members is active and the current line is as follows this gt foo lt cursor_here gt Bar Then if this option is selected and you choose a symbol named foodForThought from the List Mem bers list the line will be changed to this gt foodForThought lt cursor here gt Bar If this option is not selected doing the same would result in this gt foodForThoughtBar lt cursor here gt e Auto list compatible values If selected compatible variables are automatically listed after you press the spacebar after assignment operators and return statements Global non module variables are not listed This only affects C C and Java To access this feature on demand press Alt Comma Parameter Information The following options apply to parameters See Parameter Information for more details e Auto display parameter information If selected the prototype and comments for a funct
222. ath 1 text box Enter the name of the second file in the Path 2 text box If the file names only differ by path you only need to specify the path for Path 2 4 Click OK Alternatively you can use DIFFzilla to diff files from several Eclipse views including the Package Explorer and the Project Explorer 1 From the Eclipse view select the two files that you want to diff and right click 2 From the Compare With submenu click Each Other DIFF zilla Comparing Symbols or Parts of Files DIFFzilla provides the ability to diff compare a selected range of lines from two files or the same file This is very useful for comparing a piece of code that has been moved into a different part of a different 309 DIFFzillae file Note You can only use the interactive dialog output style when diffing a selected range of lines There fore the option Instead of an interactive dialog output one buffer with the differences labeled on the DIFFzilla dialog Options tab will have no effect To compare symbols select the Symbols option under Diff Type on the DIFFzilla dialog and all symbols from Path 1 will be diffed against all symbols from Path 2 If Multi File is selected as the Diff Type it al ways allows you to diff all symbols Be sure to be careful when diffing all symbols Some symbol blocks are not yet picked up correctly For example for C C and Java variable initializations are not yet handled correctly as
223. aultName gt MyClass cpp lt DefaultName gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt TemplateContent gt lt Files gt lt File TargetFilename SfileinputnameS cpp gt MyClass cpp lt File gt lt File TargetFilename SfileinputnameS h gt MyClass h lt File gt lt Files gt lt TemplateContent gt lt SETemplate gt Files Files is a required child element of TemplateContent Specifies files for the template item See the ex ample below Attributes None Child elements File Parent elements TemplateContent Value N A Example The following example illustrates the metadata for an item template for a C class that creates a header file h and implementation file cpp lt xml version 1 0 gt lt DOCTYPE SETemplate SYSTEM http www slickedit com dtd vse setemplate 1 0 setemplate dtd gt lt SETemplate Version 1 0 Type Item gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt Name gt My C Class lt Name gt 119 Code Template Metadata File Reference lt Description gt My complete C class header and implementation lt Description gt lt DefaultName gt MyClass cpp lt DefaultName gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt TemplateContent gt lt Files gt lt File TargetFilename SfileinputnameS cpp gt MyClass cpp lt File gt lt File TargetFilename SfileinputnameS h gt MyClass h lt File gt lt Files gt lt TemplateContent gt lt SETemplate gt Name
224. ava where a class must be defined in a file by the same name Substitution parameters are written as identifiers surrounded by a delimiter The default delimiter is Use a double delimiter to represent the delimiter character in a template source file You can specify a dif ferent character to use as the delimiter Click File SlickEdit Template Manager and click on the Cus tom Parameters tab to change the value for the Delimiter field We provide a set of predefined substitution parameters for items related to item name project name dir ectories date and time We can determine the value for these items rather than having to prompt for them See the list at the end of this section for all the predefined substitution parameters You can define substitution parameters that are common to all templates For example you might want to define an author parameter where the parameter value is your name You could then create code tem plates that fill in a header comment with the author s your name You would only have to define the sub stitution parameter once To define these parameters open the Template Manager and select the Cus tom Parameters tab If no value is provided for a substitution parameter you will be prompted for one when the template is in stantiated This is useful for things like class name or other values that are different each time the tem plate is instantiated Predefined Substitution Parameters The followin
225. ay based on braces or indent The following set tings are available e Braces When on multiple levels of selective display are set to correspond to curly brace nesting levels e Indentation When on multiple levels of selective display are set to correspond to indentation levels Limit levels When too many nested levels of selective display get confusing place a limit on the max imum number of nested levels Nesting deeper than this specified level is ignored Paragraphs Select Paragraphs to display the first line of each paragraph A paragraph is defined by a group of lines followed by one or more blank lines Hide Selection Select Hide selection to hide the lines in the current selection Expansion Options The following expansion options can be applied for each region e Expand sub levels When on expanding hidden lines expands all nested hidden lines e Collapse sub levels When on expanding hidden lines collapses all nesting hidden lines e Remember sub levels When on expanding hidden lines displays nested hidden lines the way they were last displayed 360 Save Macro Dialog Macro Dialogs This section describes SlickEdit Core dialogs related to macros For more information about working with macros see Recorded Macros Programmable Macros and the Sick Ce Macro Programming Guide Save Macro Dialog The Save Macro dialog appears when you end macro recording or when you click Macro Save last
226. b e Debug Tab General Tab This tab on the FTP Options Dialog is used to configure general FTP settings Figure 10 62 FTP Options General Tab 461 FTP Options Dialog FIP Options General Advanced Firewall Prozy SSHISFTP Debug nonymous email address quest Default local directory Ir O Upload on save Do not upload Gei Prompt Upload without prompting Cancel Help Resolve links e Anonymous e mail address Default password used for anonymous logins e Do not upload When on saving an FTP file will not upload the file e Prompt When on a prompt appears to upload when an FTP file is saved to specify ASCII or Binary transfer type e Upload without prompting When on saving an FTP file will upload the file The same transfer type used to open the file is used to upload the file Resolve links Default for adding a new connection profile Resolves symbolic links on remote host Advanced Tab This tab on the FTP Options Dialog is used to configure advanced FTP settings Figure 10 63 FTP Options Advanced Tab 462 FTP Options Dialog FIP Options General Advanced FirewalliProxy SSH SFTP Debug Timeout sec C l Fort Ia C keep alive Help Upload filename case Preserve case Force lowercase Force UPPER case e Timeout sec Default used when adding a new connection profile Specifies the wait time for a reply from the F
227. b Ant apache ant 1 6 Siet l C Vab Ant apache ant 1 6 Sib fa ab DifF fa Diff vpwhist W Diff vtg C ab docs C ab docs coolfeatures_a 3 coolfeatures_a dtd a coolfeatures_a xml af readme html dal C ab docs coolfeatures b EC EN The Multi File Diff Output dialog box contains the following elements Diff Shows current files in the difference editor when the selected files differ Del File played Deletes the selected file s Hold Ctrl Click to multi select in either tree The X bitmap is dis View Shows current files in the difference editor when the selected files match Copy File Copy Tree Copy File is displayed when the selected files differ or when the selected file only exists in the current source tree The Plus bitmap is displayed Copy Tree is displayed when the selected item is a directory that only exists in the current source tree When you click Copy Tree you are prompted as to whether you want to copy the directory source tree recursively 377 Context Tagging Tag Files Dialog e Next Moves the cursor to the next set of mismatched files in both source trees e Prev Moves the cursor to the previous set of mismatched files in both source trees e Save Lets you save a diff state file dif that you can load later with the Previous diff button on the DIFF zilla dialog box This is especially useful when you have not completed merging files and you want t
228. be added The line is split at the column in which the cursor is in when you press Enter This command does not support multiple lines See Also ISPF Line Command TJ split_insert_line ISPF Uppercase Lines UC UCC and UCUC for blocks Usage e UC n Uppercase n lines starting with the line with the command e UCC Uppercase a block of lines must match another UCC or UCC e UCUC Uppercase a block of lines must match another UCC or UCUC Remarks Converts all lowercase letter alphabetic characters in one or more lines to uppercase This command only operates on text within the edit boundary columns There are two forms to this command The first form 515 ISPF Line Commands UC n specifies that the line and the subsequent n 1 lines are to be converted The second block form UCUC or UCC is placed on the first and last lines of the block to be converted See Also ispf_caps ISPF Line Command Lowercase lowcase upcase ISPF Exclude Lines X and XX for blocks Usage e X n Exclude n lines starting with the line with the command e XX Exclude a block of lines must match another XX Remarks Specifies one or more lines to be hidden excluded There are two forms to this command The first form X n specifies that the line and the subsequent n 1 lines are to be excluded The second block form XX is placed on the first and last lines of the block to be excluded See Also ispf_exclude ispf_reset ISPF Li
229. bers pane but they are still visible in the hierarchy as gray text Select Show in Symbol Browser to jump to the class in the symbol browser Class Exclusion Manager The Class Exclusion Manager accessed by right clicking on a class in the hierarchy pane displays a list of any currently excluded classes interfaces namespaces and packages Exclusions are kept on a per workspace basis Figure 6 2 Class Exclusion Manager Dialog 84 Class View MS Class Exclusion Manager Exclusion List java lang Object Remove Selected Items Clear List Add Item To List Po To add an item to the list type the name in the Add Item To List text box then press Enter Click the buttons to remove selected items or to clear the list Filtering and Sorting in the Members Pane Right click on a member in the members pane to access a list of filtering and sorting options as well as options for code navigation and modification The following options are available e C Refactoring Displays a menu of C C refactoring options See C Refactoring for more in formation e Quick Refactoring Offers two Quick Refactorings Rename and Modify Parameter List See Quick Refactoring for more information e Add Member Function Add Member Variable and Add Virtual Function C C only When these options are selected for a class you are prompted with a dialog to type a member function member variable or virtual function to be added
230. ble private All references to the variable are replaced with references to the getter or setter as appropriate Figure 6 38 C Refactoring Encapsulate Field Encapsulate field with get and set functions x Getter Function Name Sn ES Setter Function Hame setChildren Insert new method After As first public method Ve 207 C Refactoring Extract Class Breaks a large class into a better abstraction by moving some responsibilities into a new class or inter face This refactoring creates new files When using the Extract Class refactoring keep in mind the follow ing information e The default path uses the same directory as the original class The default file names are the lt class_name gt cpp h Default paths and file names can be changed The files will be added to the current project If version control is enabled you are prompted to add the files to the version control system e The new class will generate a default constructor and a constructor that takes a parameter per mem ber variable moved Initializers in the original class constructors for moved member variables are moved to the new class constructors Figure 6 39 C Refactoring Extract Class 1 Extract Class Enter the class name and the location of the header and source files to create the extracted class Class Name MyComponentAttribute Header File MyComponent amp ttibute h Source File
231. bookmark for setting a bookmark and alt_gtbookmark for navigating to the book mark The purpose of these commands is so that you can bind them to keys providing a way for you to have one type of keyboard shortcut for setting the bookmarks naming them in the process and another for navigating to the bookmarks These commands can be bound to any of the following keys ranges e Ctrl 0 9 Ctrl4A Z Ctrl F1 F12 e Alt 0 9 Alt A Z Alt F1 F 12 e Ctri Alt 0 9 Ctrl Alt A Z Ctrl Alt F1 F12 e Shift F1 F12 For example you could bind alt_bookmark to Cirl 0 9 and alt_gtbookmark to Alt 0 9 for a more effi cient means of setting bookmarks named 0 9 and navigating back to them Navigating Named Bookmarks To navigate between the set bookmarks use the prev_bookmark and next_bookmark commands Command Line Shortcut gb Power programmers may prefer to use the gb command a shortcut for goto_bookmark This will display the Go to Bookmark dialog from which you can select a specific bookmark to navigate to Append gb with the name value to go directly to that named bookmark For example if you set a bookmark named for instance by using the command sb 1 type gb 1 to navigate back to that location See also Com mand Line Shortcut sb Deleting Named Bookmarks To remove a named bookmark when the cursor is on the bookmark line press Ctrl Shift J or use the toggle_bookmark command to toggle the bookmark off To remove all named bookmark
232. bottom_of_window Ctrl PgUp Cirl PgDn Places the cursor at the top bottom of the current editor window e top_of_buffer bottom_of_buffer Ctrl Home Cirl End The top_of_buffer command places the cursor at the first line and first column of the current buffer The bottom_of_buffer command places the cursor at the end of the last line of the current buffer If the option Preserve column on top bottom is on click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree double click the General setting and select the More Tab the cursor is placed at the first line last line of the buffer and the column position is unchanged Tip There is an option to make top_of_buffer bottom_of_buffer push a bookmark providing quick navigation between the top bottom of the buffer and the previous location See Setting Bookmark Options for more information e top_left_of_window bottom_left_of_window Places the cursor at the top left bottom right of the cur rent editor window page_up page_down PgUp PgDn Moves the cursor to the previous next page of text e page_left page_right Changes the left edge scroll position by half the window width to the left right 79 Cursor Navigation The cursor is moved half the window width to the left right as well Navigating in Statements and Tags The following navigation commands are available for languages that support statement tagging e next_tag prev_tag Places the cursor
233. bound to Ctrl O with the focus in the search box simply press Ctrl O To clear either field click the red X button to the right of each box This is especially handy for the key se quence search due to the fact that the field recognizes any keyboard mouse input including Backspace Alternatively you can use the what_is and where_is commands Help What Is Key and Help gt Where Is Command on the SlickEdit Core command line to determine binding associations See Using the Command Line to View Key Binding Associations for more information Creating Bindings You can work more efficiently if you create key mouse bindings for commands or user recorded macros that you use frequently To create a new key or mouse binding 1 Using the Key Bindings dialog find the command or user macro you want to bind You can search for a command macro by entering a string in the Search by command box see Viewing and Filtering Bind ings 2 Initiate the binding by using one of the following methods e Select the row then click the Add button e Select the row then press Enter 47 Managing Bindings e Double click on the row 3 When you initiate a binding the Bind Key dialog is displayed with focus in the Key Sequence box Figure 4 4 Bind Key Dialog Bind Key Command surround with Key Sequence cow 18 Bind Advanced lt lt Bind to mode XML e Fora key binding press the key sequence just as you would to
234. box To use this color scheme click OK To define a new color scheme set your colors for the various screen elements and click Save Scheme User defined color schemes are stored in the uscheme ini file located in your configuration directory You can change the name of a scheme by clicking Rename Scheme Setting an Embedded Language Color The option Set embedded language color allows you to specify the colors used for embedded lan guages These occur when a file of one type embeds a language of another type within it like HTML files containing JavaScript For HTML the syntax color coding recognizes the lt script language gt tag and uses embedded language colors for the new language In addition for Perl and UNIX shell scripts you can prefix your HERE document terminator with one of the color coding lexer names to get embed ded language color coding The following is an example for Perl print lt lt HTMLEOF lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt lt TITLE gt lt HEAD gt 57 Restoring Settings on Startup lt BODY gt lt BO lt HT DY gt L gt HTML EOF 58 Restoring Settings on Startup Restoring Settings on Startup By default the files current directory and more from the previous edit session are automatically restored when you switch workspaces or close and re open the editor To access auto restore settings from the main menu click Window Preference
235. box is displayed with the results of the 3 Way Merge Figure 8 5 3 Way Merge Results Dialog 315 File History and Backups E 3 Way Merge Z Oe x ao lt gt C Lab DifFifile2 c C Lab DifFifile3 c include lt stdio h gt A include lt stdio h gt tatic int func2 Imaginary tatic int funci Imaginary d Imaginary return func2 Imaginary Imaginary Imaginary Buffer static int func static int func2 lt II C Lab DifFi merge_output include lt stdio h gt returni i static int funci i returni i static int func return 2 3 Way Merge Settings For descriptions of the options on the 3 Way Merge Setup dialog see 3 Way Merge Dialog 316 Compare Two Backup History Elements Using DIFFzilla File History and Backups SlickEdit s Backup History is disabled in SlickEdit Core Eclipse maintains their own backup history which you can access using the History view Window gt Show View Other expand Team and click History You can however use DIFFzilla to compare and merge with the History view instead of using the de fault Eclipse compare tool Compare Two Backup History Elements Using DIFFzilla e Right click on a file in an Eclipse explorer view Package Explorer Project Explorer etc and select Compare With Local History This will activate the History view if necessary e Select the two revisions that you want to c
236. can create an extension specific alias from a selection by following the steps below 1 Select some code 2 Right click and select Create Alias 3 Give the alias a name and click OK 4 The Alias Editor dialog appears from which you can edit the code to fine tune or add parameters 158 Syntax Expansion Settings Syntax Expansion Syntax Expansion is a feature designed to minimize keystrokes increasing your code editing efficiency When you type certain keywords and then press the spacebar Syntax Expansion inserts a default tem plate that is specifically designed for this statement For example if you are using the C language and type for press Space and the following text expansion is inserted with the cursor location between the parentheses for Additionally for C C C J Java and Slick C after the statement is expanded you can use the next_hotspot command Ctrl to jump the cursor to the next part of the statement In the case of the for loop above Ctrl would move the cursor from the group in parentheses to the code block The structures loop if and switch or case are also expanded You do not have to type the entire keyword for Syntax Expansion to occur If there is more than one keyword that matches what you type a list of possible keyword matches is displayed To get the C template displayed above type f followed by pressing Space To override the insertion of braces immediately for one lin
237. ch case When selected SlickEdit Core uses a case sensitive search to find symbol matches When this option is not selected SlickEdit Core uses a case insensitive search When this option is in the neutral mixed state SlickEdit Core first searches for case sensitive matches and if none are found attempts to perform a case insensitive search Note that for case insensitive languages this may have no effect Match substring slower When selected SlickEdit Core searches for the specified string within the available symbols For example finding all symbols containing the word order not just those that begin with order Selecting this option causes the search to execute more slowly Use pattern slower When selected SlickEdit Core interprets the search string as a regular ex pression or wildcard expression This can result in slower search times since SlickEdit Coremust test every symbol in the tag file against the regular expression Filters Use filters to restrict the search to certain types of symbols The filters are the same the ones available on the Outline view See Outline View for more information e Buttons The following buttons are located at the bottom of the view window Go to definition Navigates to the definition of this symbol in the editor window If the programming language allows for separate declaration and definition you can control which is selected by using the Extension Options dialog Window Pre
238. ch for refer ences but it will not jump immediately to the first reference To find the next reference invoke the find_next command Search Find Next or Ctrl G Highlight references in editor Select this option to have each reference highlighted within the file e Maximums tune for performance You can tune Context Tagging performance and accuracy by adjusting these values Higher values will find more tags but increase search time Lower values im prove performance but may cause tags to be omitted e Functions found by parameter help When you invoke function parameter Help this setting limits the number of overloaded functions that will be displayed Globals shown in list members When you invoke List Members this setting limits the number of global symbols that will be inserted into the list e Class struct members shown in list When you invoke class struct members this setting limits the number of members that will be displayed in the list e Candidates for list parameters When you invoke list parameters auto list compatible values are enabled This setting limits the number of local variables and class members that will be evaluated to determine assignment compatibility e Response time for list parameters ms This setting is an upper limit on the amount of time SlickEdit Core will spend finding compatible parameters Note that this is not a hard limit in some cases evaluating the assignment compatibility of a
239. ck the General setting On the General Options dialog select the General Tab Select the option Expand collapse single click e To copy visible text to the clipboard Click View Copy Visible or use the copy_selective_display command Normally when you copy a selection that spans multiple lines hidden lines are copied as 225 Selective Display well This command ignores hidden lines and only copies visible text This operation does not work with block selections e To redisplay all lines and remove the Plus and Minus bitmaps From the main menu click View gt Show All show_all command Expanding Collapsing Code Blocks SlickEdit Core provides a way to expand and collapse code blocks without having to clutter the gutter with Selective Display bitmaps You can expand or collapse blocks of code by using the plusminus com mand whether or not Selective Display Plus or Minus bitmaps are displayed The plusminus command expands or collapses code blocks under the following conditions e If the cursor is on the first line of a code block the block is collapsed creating a new Selective Display region e If the cursor is on a line that contains a Plus bitmap the block is expanded e If the cursor is on a line that contains a Minus bitmap the expanded block is collapsed Note e The definition of a code block is based on your language e The plusminus command is controlled by the def_plusminus_blocks
240. ckEdit Core treats line selections differently than character selections Line selec tions are pasted either above or below the current line saving you from tediously positioning the cursor at the beginning or end of a line prior to pasting When the style is set to Before lines of text are inser ted before the current line When the style is set to After the default lines of text are inserted after the current line Next word style When the next word style is set to Begin the next_word command Cirl Right places the cursor on the beginning of the next word When the next word style is set to End the cursor is placed at the end of the next word 393 General Options Dialog e Smart next window Not available in SlickEdit Core Use this combo box to select from the following different windowing styles Smart next window This is the default style It allows you to press Ctrl Tab next_window com mand to switch the focus between the two most frequently used open editor windows rather than al ways going to the next window Press Ctrl Shift Tab prev_window command to switch between all open editor windows This style is similar to how Ctrl Tab and Cirl Shift Tab work in other Win dows MDI applications like Visual Studio Reorder windows If selected activating an existing window reinserts the window after the current window Neither Ctrl Tab nor Cirl Shift Tab reorders the windows This option is very good for switching
241. completions displayed by Word Completion This setting affects all file extensions This is espe cially useful when editing large files Auto select unique items If this option is selected and Auto Complete finds exactly one word match it will automatically select that match for completion If this option is turned off you must select a word to complete using the Tab key or the Up or Down arrow keys Tab inserts longest unique prefix If selected pressing Tab will cause Auto Complete to attempt to insert the longest unique prefix match of all its completions If the word prefix cannot be extended Tab will cycle to the next completion choices Tab cycles through choices Select this option if you want to use Tab and Shift Tab to cycle through completion choices as is done in some command shells If deselected Tab will attempt to in sert the longest unique prefix if selected or insert the selected completion or cancel Auto Complete and behave normally if there is no completion selected Insert selected If selected when cycling through completion choices and a choice is selected the se lected choice will replace the current text This modifies the file as you work Minimum prefix length The minimum number of characters the word prefix must contain before auto completions will be displayed automatically 416 Extension Options Dialog Display after ms idle The number of milliseconds the editor must be idle before a
242. configuration variable The value is set to true 1 by default For more information see ConfigurationVariables e The plusminus command uses the same logic to identify code blocks as the command cut_code_block See Deleting Code Blocks for more information Selective Display Regions Using the Selective Display dialog you can choose the regions you want to display or hide Specific set tings are provided for each region Search Text Displays lines that contain the specified search string or lines that do not contain the spe cified string Function Definitions Displays only function headings and optionally function heading comments e Preprocessor Directives Displays a source file as if it were preprocessed according to the define val ues specified here If you do not remember your defines use the Scan for Defines button e Multi Level Select this option to set multiple levels of Selective Display based on braces or indent e Paragraphs Displays the first line of each paragraph A paragraph is defined by a group of lines fol lowed by one or more blank lines e Hide Selection Select this option to hide the lines in the current selection 226 Other Display Options The Selective Display dialog also contains static options for expanding collapsing sub levels See Select ive Display Dialog for more information and details about the available settings Other Display Options This section descr
243. cted this option applies the Soft Wrap configuration that you want on all extensions without having to manually set up each one For example if you want Soft Wrap turned on for all extension types complete the following steps 1 Mark Wrap long lines to window width 2 Mark Break on word boundary 3 Then mark Affects all extensions and click either Update or OK Each time that you open a file Soft Wrap is automatically turned on To make this feature unavailable for all extensions clear the Wrap long lines to window width check box then click either Update or OK General Tab The General tab on the file extensions tab provides general and Alias options To access these options click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog select the General tab Figure 10 34 Extension Options General Tab 404 Extension Options Dialog Extension Options a LIndent Word Wrap General Comments Comment Wrap Advanced Auto Complete Context Tagging _ Mode name C C Alias filename cals Encoding Automatic Open Application Application IT use file association The Open Application is used when the Open menu item is invoked from the Project Toolbar Files tab Truncation C Display line numbers _ Om Oof t L The following options are available e Mode nam
244. cted tag will always have at least one preceding and trailing line break on both its opening and ending tag when beautified You can specify that there be more than one line break by setting Line breaks for the opening and closing tags Attributes Values Tab Figure 7 27 HTML Beautifier Attributes Values Tab 274 HTML HTML Beautifier Indent Tags Attributes Values Comments Advanced Schemes Beautify Attribute case Word value case Hex value case Cancel UPPER UPPER UPPER O lower O lower O lower Help Capitalize Capitalize Preserve Preserve Preserve Save Settings uote word values H C Quote all values Quote number values f Sync extension options The Attributes Values tab contains the following settings e Attribute case Specifies how you want attributes cased inside the body of a tag For example if you choose UPPER then lt td align right gt would be beautified to lt td ALIGN right gt e Word value case Specifies how you want word values cased after the of an attribute inside the body of a tag For example if you choose UPPER then lt td align right gt would be beautified to lt td align RIGHT gt e Hex value case Specifies how you want hex values cased after the of an attribute inside the body of a tag For example if you choose UPPER then lt body bgcolor ffffff gt would be beautified to lt body bgcolor FFFFFF gt e Quote word val
245. ctic elements of the language like if or for state ments putting in the parentheses and braces matching your specified coding style settings See Syntax Expansion for more information Keywords If selected Auto Complete will show keyword choices for the word prefix under the cursor if it matches one or more keywords in the current language Alias expansion If selected Auto Complete will show the matching alias for the word under the curs or Aliases names require an exact word match not just a prefix match For more information on using aliases see Aliases Symbols If selected symbols will be displayed as completion options if the word prefix at the cursor matches one or more symbols using a strict context sensitive and language specific tag search e Maximums Symbols For performance tuning you can limit the maximum number of symbols dis played by Auto Complete This setting affects all file extensions Word completion If selected word completions will be displayed if the word prefix under the cursor matches one or more words in the current file The strength of this option is that it ties into the word and line completion features of SlickEdit Core After you select a word completion you can press Ctrl Shift Space to complete the rest of the line from which the original word came See Word Com pletion for more information e Maximums Word completion For performance tuning you can limit the maximum number of word
246. d Workspace The rest of the symbols are grouped by language or compiler Hover the mouse over the bitmap of a symbol to see a tooltip that shows the symbol s signature and scope To jump to the definition of a symbol in the code pushing a bookmark in the process double click on any symbol Press Ctrl Comma to go back Filtering Symbols in the Symbols View The symbols listed in the symbol browser can be filtered using the Class and Member combo boxes The Class combo box filters the items listed under the Classes folder The Member combo box filters the items listed under any displayed classes or under any of the other folders like Global Variables Static Variables Defines etc Enter multiple words in either combo box to search for items containing either word For example e Enter person into the Class combo box to find all classes containing the word person e Enter person manager into the Member combo box to find all members variables etc containing the word person or manager Note e The filters are case sensitive so be sure to type the values in the same case 94 Symbols View e The items listed under the Classes folder are global classes that are not part of a namespace or package To clear the filters and see all items again select the Show all tags option For non object oriented languages use the Member combo box to search since there are no classes You can hide the comb
247. d a dotted box will be drawn around the current line e Tabs ruler If selected a box will be drawn around the current line and tab stops will be marked e Syntax indent ruler If selected a box will be drawn around the current line with the Syntax Indent levels marked e Decimal ruler If selected a box will be drawn around the current line with marks at multiples of five and 10 e Box color Click on the colored box to select the dotted box color e Column color Click on the colored box to select the column marker color This is the same as the margin line color Search Tab The Search tab contains default search options For more information about working with search and re place operations see Find and Replace There are two ways to access search options e From the Find and Replace view click Search SlickEdit Search Replace right click on the back ground and select Configure Options This will display the Search tab of the General Options dialog e From the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the Search tab Figure 10 25 General Options Search Tab 383 General Options Dialog General Options Default search options Match case C Match whole word C Regular expression Tool window options Close after Find Replace Initialize with default options Additional se
248. d this option ensures that a file handle is kept open to the file for locking purposes This detects when another user is editing the same file If you are using the load command to open files use the switch N to specify this option Reinsert after current Not available in SlickEdit Core When selected the editor will switch back to the previous buffer or window with the prev_buffer or prev_window command If you are using the load command to open files use the switch BP to specify this option Unmodified block spilling When selected unmodified blocks are spilled when the memory buffer cache is full When the spill file destination is faster than the disk the file resides on such as a floppy drive select this option for optimal performance If you are using the load command to open files use the switch S to specify this option Wrap line length When selected this option improves editing performance on large files with very long lines by wrapping the long lines at the number of characters specified here This option is particu larly useful for editing very large single line XML files Use undo Max undo steps When Use undo is selected modifications to buffers may be undone The Max undo steps box specifies the maximum number of steps that are stored Cursor motion can be undone but is not counted as a step If you are using the load command to open files use the switch U to specify this option For example U 32000 turns on
249. d MASK Display the contents of the mask used with the in sert I and text entry TE line commands ISPF Line Command Make Data Convert one or more no save lines to data so that they may be saved when the buffer is saved ISPF Line Command Overlay ISPF Line Command Repeat Identify one or more lines over which the copy or move block is to be overlaid Specify lines to be repeated immediately following this line or block 506 ISPF Line Commands Command Description ISPF Line Command Show Expose one or more lines having the left most in dentation level in a block of excluded lines ISPF Line Command TABS Display the tab definition line ISPF Line Command TE Insert one or more blank lines to allow power typing for text entry ISPF Line Command TF Reflow paragraphs according to the current column boundary settings ISPF Line Command TJ Join this line with the next line ISPF Line Command TS Divide a line so that data can be added ISPF Line Command Uppercase Convert all lowercase letter alphabetic characters in one or more lines to uppercase ISPF Line Command Exclude Specify one or more lines to be hidden excluded ISPF Line Command Select Select a block of lines ISPF Line Command Documentation ISPF Line Labels label Usage label where label does not start with az Remarks Define a label to be used as a marker to identify the given
250. d color schemes user vlx A text file that contains color coding changes keywords etc This file is updated when you close the Color Coding dialog box usercpp h A text file that contains defines default prepro cessing for Context Tagging of C and C code uservc slk A text file that contains user defined version control systems usrprjtemplates vpt A text file that contains user defined project pack ages vrestore slk vslick ini A text file that contains auto restore information The workspace files also contain auto restore in formation but only for the files windows previously open A text file that contains a few miscellaneous op tions The user configured backup directory is stored here In addition some customizable envir onment variables for path searching for macros bit 486 System Configuration Files User Config File Description maps and binary files are stored here as well vslick sta UNIX vslick stu A binary file that contains dialog boxes menus macro pcode key bindings and all other configura tion data not stored in one of the other configuration files Both user and system configuration informa tion is stored here vusrdefs e UNIX vunxdefs e A Slick Ca text file that contains the emulation set ting key bindings color settings file extension setup information and some other miscellaneous options vusrobjs e UNIX
251. d key bindings You can create your own wrapper commands The following example is the definition of surround_with_if _command void surround_with_if name_info VSARG2_REQUIRES_EDITORCTL VSARG2_MARK VSARG2_REQUIRES_AB SELECTION surround_with if You must change the name of the command and the argument passed to surround_with The argument does not have to be an exact match with the template name For instance calling surround_with i will prompt you to select the if if else or include once template If there is an exact match that template 169 Unsurround will be used In the case of surround_with_if if matches the beginning of both the if and if else tem plates but the if template is used because it is an exact match After you create your wrapper command you can bind it a key or invoke it from the command line For more information on working with commands see the Slick C Macro Programming Guide Unsurround Unsurround is a feature that lets you remove the surrounding text from a code block This is particularly effective when used with Dynamic Surround Unsurround is supported for the following languages Action Script AWK CH C CFML HTML Java JavaScript Perl PHP Slick C Tcl and XML To use Unsurround right click on a selected code block and select Unsurround or use the unsurround command For example to remove the if statement struc
252. d options are available on the Beautifier e Beautify Beautifies current selection or buffer and closes the dialog box e Reset Restores the dialog box settings to the values that appeared when you invoked the dialog e Save Settings Saves beautify options in uformat ini file These settings are used by the xml_beautify command e Restrict to selection When on only lines in the selection are beautified e Sync extension options When on the extension options are updated to reflect any changes that these dialogs have in common The tabs on the XML Beautifier are described in the sections below Indent Tab Figure 7 16 XML Beautifier Indent Tab 256 XML XML Beautifier Indent Tags Attrbutes Values Comments Advanced Schemes Beautify C Indent with tabs Indent for each level Syntax indent e ance Tab size 4 2 Original tab size 2 Help o s Max line length Reset Broken tag lines Indent from tag column by Save Settings Use original relative indent Preserve original indent Sync extension options The following settings are available Indent for each level Syntax indent The amount to indent for each new nesting level of tags We have put the words Syntax indent in parenthesis to help indicate that this field has the same meaning as the Syntax indent text box in the Extension Options dialog box Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General i
253. dTime 4 Revision IF 4 Zant ie guestbk asp If request Q ueryStringl message lt gt Y Then aes request Q QueryStringl message gt an tte LANGUAGE javascript gt function turnRed lt gt lt what window event srcElement if Cwhat tagName ING D lt what src red gig s window event cancelBubble true gt Ar gt lt SCRIPT gt Sii t print gt E lake junk3 lt Mer static void main String args gt lt gt gt lt java gt Embedded Languages in Perl and Other Scripting Languages To allow SlickEdit Core to recognize embedded source in a Perl script or UNIX shell prefix the HERE Supported Editor Emulations document terminator with the color coding lexer name The following Perl example shows HTML embed ded in a Perl script Unknown languages are color coded in string color Figure 1 2 HTML Embedded in Perl print lt lt HIMLEOF SHIRL lt CHEAD lt TITLE gt lt 4 TITLE lt HEAD lt BODY gt lt BODY gt 4 HTAL gt HIMLEOF Supported Editor Emulations SlickEdit Core provides keyboard emulations for the following editors e BBEdit e Brief e CodeWarrior CodeWright e CUA the SlickEdit Core default e Epsilon e GNU Emacs ISPF SlickEdit text mode edition e Vim e Visual C 6 Visual Studio default e Xcode See Emulations for more information System Requirements Install Uninstall System Requireme
254. de a copy of a line of text without selecting anything first Pressing the same cut key multiple times in succession creates one clipboard If you press Ctrl Shift K three times to cut three words one clipboard is created that you can insert with Ctrl V This is true for cut line Ctrl Backspace and erase to end of line Ctrl E as well Tip 134 Working with Lines If using Brief emulation and a clipboard is wanted when cutting text bind the commands cut_word cut_end_line and cut_line to the appropriate keys A stack of the last 15 default maximum of the most recently used clipboards is kept You can change the maximum number of clipboards in the General Options dialog box click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the General Tab To see a list of clipboards you have created press Ctrl Shift V Edit gt List Clipboards or list_clipboards command The Select Text to Paste dialog box appears The numbers on the far left are used to help move the selection cursor The number following the clip board type indicates the number for complete or partial lines of text in the clipboard Only clipboards of one line can be inserted into the command line or text box Both Ctrl V and Ctrl Shift V key sequences insert clipboard text into the text area or the command line The result of in serting a clipboard into the t
255. de the way you think about it rather than just as a set of files If you aren t using the code navigation features in SlickEdit Core then you aren t getting the most out of the editor Symbol Navigation Symbol Navigation allows you to jump from a symbol to its definition or to a reference with a single key stroke A pushed bookmark is set allowing you to return to the symbol with another keystroke You can chain a series of these navigation operations together creating a stack of locations Then pop your way back to the starting location To navigate between symbols use the following operations e Go to Definition To quickly move the cursor from a symbol to its definition pushing a bookmark in the process press Citrl Dot Alternatively click Navigate Go to Definition or use the push_tag command e Go to Reference To create a list of references and optionally jump to the first one pushing a book mark in the process press Ctrl Alternatively click Navigate Go to Reference or use the push_ref command e Pop Bookmark To pop the bookmark and return to the previous location press Ctrl Comma Altern atively click Search Pop Bookmark or use the pop_bookmark command See Pushed Bookmarks for more information about working with bookmarks When you first call these operations if a tag file does not exist for the current file it will be built see Build ing Tag Files Tip e Procs and prototypes In C
256. default for most languages set in Language tab 123ABC is color coded in number color Floating point numbers e base number exponent float Ada When this option is selected text such as 23 56 67 is col or coded in number color e Floating point with E exponent When this option is selected text such as 123 4E24 is color coded in number color e Do not color code numbers HTML When this option is selected text such as 123 4E24 and 123ABC is not color coded in number color By default for most languages set in the Language tab 123 4E24 and 123ABC is color coded in number color e Allow underscores in integers Ada When this option is selected text such as 12_34 is color coded in number color Strings Tab The Strings tab contains options for color coding strings To access these settings from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Col or Coding setting and select the Strings tab Figure 10 52 Color Coding Setup Strings Tab 445 Color Coding Setup Dialog Color Coding Setup Lexer name HTML k New emgeet Tokens Numbers Strings Language Comments Tags Double quoted strings Two consecutive quotes represent one REAS represents a double quote tC C Double quoted strings are always 1 char long Trailing backslash continues string across lines C Search For end quote across mult
257. dent with tabs When on tab characters are used for leading indent of lines This value defaults to the Tabs text box in the Extension Options dialog box Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog select the Indent Tab Tab size Specifies output tab size The output tab size is only used if Indent with tabs check box is on This value defaults to the Syntax indent text box in the Extension Options dialog box Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog select the Indent Tab Original tab size Specifies what the original file s tab expansion size was We need to know the tab expansion size of your original file to handle reusing indent amounts from your original file Currently the beautifier only reuses the original source file s indenting for comments This option has no effect if the original file has no tab characters Max line length Specifies the maximum length a line can be before it is wrapped to a new line This max line length is relative to the current indent level For example if you were inside a lt TD gt block which was at an indent level of 30 and your max line length was set to 80 then that line would not be 271 HTML wrapped until it reached a total length of 30 80 110 characters Set thi
258. dialog box The Fundamental extension setup information cannot be deleted An extension such as C that has other extensions euch as H and CPP that refer to it also cannot be de leted until all of the extensions that refer to it are deleted 232 C C Formatting Options C and C This section describes some of the advanced features and options that are available in SlickEdit Core for C and C including extension specific formatting options the C C Beautifier compiler settings and preprocessing The default editing mode in SlickEdit Core for C and C allows for programming in either language If you are coding to strict ANSI C standards you should configure the value of the macro variable def_ansic_exts to contain a space delimited list of extensions for files you want interpreted as ANSI C To set the macro variable press Esc to bring up the SlickEdit Core command line then type set var def_ansic_exts lt extensions gt where lt extensions gt is the space delimited list of extensions For example set var def_ansic_exts c h Please note that if you also code in C and any of these extensions are used for C they will be inter preted as ANSI C C C Formatting Options Options are available for C and C language file extensions for changing smart indenting and styles for template editing To access these options from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tr
259. different extension This option when set specifies that the AutoSave file be placed in the same directory as the file that is being auto saved but it is given a different extension The third character of the extension is replaced with a character The length of the extension is padded with un derscores if the length of the extension is less than three characters For example the AutoSave file for test cis test c_ The AutoSave file for test prg is test pr If you are editing two files in the same directory which differ only by the third character one AutoSave temporary file will be overwritten by the other Same name Setting this option specifies that the modified files be automatically saved No AutoSave temporary files are created Largest file to AutoSave K Files greater than the value that you type in this field are not automatic ally saved Set this value to 0 if you want all files auto saved File Filters Tab The File Filters tab shown below contains filtering options for opening and saving files To access filters click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Options setting On the File Options dialog select the File Filters tab Figure 10 44 File Options File Filters Tab 428 Key Bindings Dialog File Options EEN Load Save Backup AutoSave File Filters File filters VHDL Files vhd Makefiles mak mk Makefile Imakefil
260. ds switches keywords properties operators options variables and text to be typed by the user are shown in bold type User input variables and placeholders are shown in bold italic type Code samples and file names are displayed in a monospaced font e File extensions and environment variables are written with an UPPERCASE font SlickEdit Core commands that contain two or more words are written with underscore separators for example cursor_down Note that in the user interface however these commands are displayed with hyphen separators for example cursor down Both of these forms work so you can use whichever style you prefer Supported Languages and File Types Supported Languages and Environments This section lists the languages and file types supported by each SlickEdit Core feature as well as the supported emulations Supported Languages and File Types The table below indicates the languages and file types that support key SlickEdit Core features Fea tures that are not language specific such as DIFF zilla are not listed here Table 1 1 Supported Languages and File Types Feature Languages Automatic Syntax Expansion ActionScript Ada AWK C C C CFML CF Script Ch COBOL DTD Fortran HTML IDL In stallScript J Java JavaScript JSP Object ive C Pascal Perl PHP PL SQL PV WAVE e Py thon REXX Ruby SAS Slick Ce Tcl Trans ac SOL e VBScript Verilog VHDL
261. ds that accept different arguments Press Ctrl PgDn or Cirl PgUp to 63 Auto List Compatible Paramet ers select the next or previous occurrence Figure 5 3 Parameter Info Example 1 String s if s startsWith 41 of 2 b boolean java lang String startsWith String prefix Tests if this string starts with the specified prefix a Parameters prefix the prefix Returns true if the character sequence represented by the argument is a prefix of the character sequence represented by this string false otherwise Note also that true will be returned if the argument is an empty string or is equal to this String object as determined by the equals Object method v The example below shows the result of pressing Alt Comma inside the argument list of the WIN32 API function CreateWindowEx Figure 5 4 Parameter Info Example 1 hwnd CreateWi ndowEx 0 szAppName The Hello Program WS_OVERLAPPEDWINDOW CW_USEDEFAULT CW_USEDEFAULT CW_USEDEFAULT CW_USEDEFAULT NULL bw HWND WINAPI IsolationAwareCreateWindowExA __in int X __in int Y __in int nWidth __in int nHeight __in_opt HWND hWndParent m opt HMENU hMenu __in_opt HINSTANCE hinstance __in_opt LPVOID pParam ba define NULL 0 NULL A NULL_BRUSH 1 NULL_PEN y NULL_USERSETINFO_PASSW Auto List Compatible Parameters When typing a function operator such as the open parenthesis a list of compatible variables and ex pressi
262. e Allows you to enter a more meaningful name for this extension setup Define a mode name here for the Format Select Mode menu item to work well See Language Editing Modes for more information e Alias filename An alias defines a snippet of text that is inserted when the alias is expanded Each ex tension can have one alias file allowing aliases to be defined that do not affect other extensions An ex ample would be a comment header that is used a lot See Extension Specific Aliases for more informa tion Aliases Click the Aliases button to easily define extension specific aliases See Extension Specific Aliases for more information Encoding Each extension can have its own encoding specification Both the extension specific and global settings are overridden if an encoding is previously specified in the Open dialog box The encod ing used to override default encoding settings is recorded and this setting is used the next time the same file is opened This provides per file encoding support If the extension specific encoding is set to Default then the global setting defined in the File Options dialog Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Options setting and select the Load tab is used Note that Unicode support is required to work with encodings For more information about working with encodings and Unicode see Encoding e Truncation When On or Auto is selected a
263. e Assembler File filters used by File Open and File Save As dialogs Separate each file filter with a comma Place file patterns in parentheses Separate file patterns with a semicolon The first file filter is used to initialize the file list Examples Basic Files bas All Files C C Files cpp cxx c h All Files In the File filters text box enter the filters you wish to assign Separate each filter with a comma and place file patterns in parentheses Separate file patterns with a semicolon The first file filter is used to ini tialize the file list Key Bindings Dialog The Key Bindings dialog Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree double click the Key Bindings setting or use the gui_keybindings command is used for creating and viewing mouse and key bindings for commands and user created macros as well as for importing and ex porting your custom bindings See Managing Bindings for detailed information Figure 10 45 Key Bindings Dialog 429 Key Bindings Dialog WW Key Bindings CUA Search by command bookmark Command goto bookmark next bookmark pop all bookmarks pop bookmark prev bookmark push bookmark set bookmark This function is identical to the goto_ bookmark command except it requires less typing Note This command no longer supports the and options AppliesTo Edit Window Categories Bookmark Function
264. e Ctrl X Cut Ctrl C Copy Ctrl Shift X Append cut Ctrl Shift C Append to clipboard Ctrl Shift V List clipboards Shift Home Select text between cursor and beginning of line Shift End Select text between cursor and end of line Shift Click Extend selection to mouse position Backspace Delete previous character or selection Delete Delete character under cursor or selection Left arrow Move cursor left Right arrow Move cursor right 36 Redefining Common Keys Key or Key Sequence Operation End Move cursor to end of line Home Move cursor to beginning of line Double click Select word Triple click Select line Redefining Common Keys Many users have a preference for the functions of the keys Backspace Delete Enter Tab and Home The Redefine Common Keys dialog is designed for changing the function of these keys To access this dialog from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Redefine Common Keys Figure 3 5 Redefine Common Keys Dialog Redefine Common Keys Command Rubout Delete Linewrap Rubouk End Enter Home Cursor Wrap Up Down on text Up Down within soft wrapped lines Line wrap on text Jump over tab characters Pull chars backspace Hack tabs backspace Treat leading spaces as tabs setting 37 Redefining Common Keys In the Key list bo
265. e you have enough tagged expressions X Matches sub expression X but does not define a tagged expression X Y Matches X or Y char set Matches any one of the characters specified by char set A dash character may be used to specify ranges The expression A Z matches any uppercase letter A backslash may be used in side the square brackets to define literal characters or define ASCII characters For example spe cifies a literal dash character The expression d0 d27 matches ASCII character codes 0 27 The expression matches a right bracket In SlickEdit regular expressions matches no char acters In both syntaxes the expression matches a right bracket The expression matches a caret character but this does not work for SlickEdit regular expressions In both syntaxes D matches a caret character 521 UNIX Regular Expressions UNIX Regular Expression Definition char set Matches any character not specified by char set A dash character may be used to specify ranges char set1 char set2 Character set subtraction Matches all characters in char seti1 except the characters in char set2 The expression 4A Z matches all characters ex cept uppercase letters For example a z qw matches all English lowercase letters except q and w p L qw matches all Unicode lowercase let ters except q and w char set1 amp char set2
266. e Dialog DIFFzilla Files Options Diff Type To compare directories set Path 1 and Path 2 to directory names and 9 Text C compare two files then set Filespecs to a list of wildcards ex c h and Exclude oa a Filespecs to a list of wildcards you do not want included in the compare compare functions and procedures exqjunk O MultiFile compare directories and files ise the Prewt dif button to load results of saved directory _ Recurse into subdirectories compares Path 1 Path 2 zU 789 Diff Types The following Diff types are available Text Compare Compares two files and shows the differences between them When this option is se lected after you click OK on this dialog to start the comparison the interactive Diff dialog is displayed allowing you to preview the differences one by one before committing If the option on the Options tab Instead of an interactive dialog output one buffer with the differ ences labeled is checked a buffer with the differences between the two files marked up will be dis played instead Symbols Allows the selection of a symbol in order to set the Line Range line numbers Not all symbol ranges are identified Ranges for multi line variable declarations are not identified Multi File Compares two directories or directory trees and shows which files do not match Select Recurse into subdirectories to search subdirectories recursively Click Previous diff
267. e Language Specific check box 6 Click Update to commit the changes Files with a v1x extension are text files that have a syntax similar to a ini file If the first non blank character in a line is a semicolon the line is considered a comment Each definition of a language starts with a section name the lexer name enclosed in square brackets Within each section are statements in the format name value The table below shows the statements that can be used Table 11 5 VLX File Statement 491 Creating a Lexer Name and a New VLX File Statement Description case sensitive Y N Defines the case sensitivity for the language This statement must be the first or second statement within the section idchars start_id_chars after_id_chars Defines the characters that are the start of a valid identifier and additional valid characters that may follow This statement must be the first or second statement within the section You may use a dash character to specify a range for example A Z specifies uppercase letters To specify a dash or backslash character as a valid word character place a backslash before the character styles style Defines zero or more styles See Table of style Val ues below for a list of available styles micomment start_symbol end_symbol nesting followedby idchars colorname Defines a multi line comment start_symbol and end_symbo1 define strings which
268. e Substitution Parameters for more de 105 Substitution Parameters tails Use the Template Manager to Create a New Template Click File SlickEdit Template Manager to bring up the Template Manager Select the User Template folder in the tree and right click in either the Categories pane or the Templates pane to create a new template There are different operations based on whether you want to create a new category or not You will be prompted for the name of the new template Fill in a name and click OK Now you can use the Template Manager to enter a description add files or set values for Custom Parameters Add the Template Files to the Newly Defined Template Select the Files tab on the Template Manager dialog and click the Plus button to add the files you cre ated in Step 1 to this template You will have the option to link to the source in its current location or copy it to the template directory You will also be prompted for a target file name If you want the name of the instantiated template to appear in the file name you should use a substitution variable in the name like My safeitemname Class java Substitution Parameters Substitution parameters provide the real power in Code Templates Without them you would simply be making copies of static files You can use substitution parameters to replace any text in the template s source code You can also use substitution parameters in file names which is useful in J
269. e defined substitution parameters see Predefined Substitution Para meters See the example below e Attributes None e Child elements Parameter e Parent elements TemplateContent e Value N A Example The following example illustrates the metadata for an item template for a custom Java class When MyClass java is used to create the file from the template all occurrences of copyright in the created file will be replaced with c 2005 2006 lt xml version 1 0 gt lt DOCTYPE SETemplate SYSTEM http www slickedit com dtd vse setemplate 1 0 setemplate dtd gt lt SETemplate Version 1 0 Type Item gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt Name gt My Java Class lt Name gt lt Description gt My custom Java class lt Description gt lt DefaultName gt MyClass java lt DefaultName gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt TemplateContent gt lt Parameters gt lt Parameter Name copyright Value c 2005 2006 gt lt Parameters gt lt Files gt lt File gt MyClass java lt File gt lt Files gt lt TemplateContent gt lt SETemplate gt SETemplate Root element Contains all metadata about template item e Attributes 122 Code Template Metadata File Reference e Version Template version number The current version is 1 0 e Type Template type Valid types are Item e Child elements TemplateDetails TemplateContent e Parent elements None e
270. e if for or while statements type a semicolon immediately after the keyword For example if gt if lt cursor here gt lt next hotspot gt To override non insertion of braces immediately for if for while foreach with lock fixed and switch statements type an open brace immediately after the keyword For example if gt if lt cursor here gt lt next hotspot gt If the default behavior of Syntax Expansion does not match your coding style for most languages it can be customized From the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting Select your language extension then click the Options button For more information on these options see the topic for your language in the Chapter 7 Language Specific Editing chapter For further customization for most languages you can override the default keyword expansion by defin ing an alias for that keyword See Extension Specific Aliases for more information Syntax Expansion Settings To access Syntax Expansion settings from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting Choose the extension you wish to affect from the Extension drop down list then select the Indent Tab To turn Syntax Expansion on or off select or deselect the option Syntax expansion 159 Modifying Syn
271. e line e If the character selection spans more than one line the indicator shows the number of lines with a plus sign to indicate if there are extra characters selected or a minus sign to indicate if there are fewer characters selected depending on the start and end columns of the selection e When the current selection is a line selection the indicator displays the number of lines e When the current selection is a block selection the indicator displays the size of the block in the format Lines x Columns Click on the indicator or use the select_toggle command on the SlickEdit Core command line to create successively larger common selections For example if you have a character selection you can click on the indicator or use select_toggle to extend the selection to include the entire word Selections are cycled in the following order starting with no selection 1 Create empty character selection 2 Select current word 3 Select current line 4 Select current code block 5 Select larger code block 6 Select current function 133 Cutting Copying and Moving Text 7 Select entire file 8 Deselect Except for empty character selections and line selections the selections are locked so that the cursor re mains stationary Setting Selection Options Many options are available for setting your selection preferences To access these options from the main menu click Window Preferences e
272. e name The name of the SFTP service being run by the SSH server Defaults to sftp Debug Tab This tab on the FTP Options Dialog is used to set debug options for FTP Figure 10 66 FTP Options Debug Tab 465 Reflow Comment Dialog FIP Options Cancel verbose ssh List events in a say window Help C Save log to Ftplog Time stamp on log entries C Save raw directory listing to list C Save vsproxy debug to vysproxy log Reflow Comment Dialog The Reflow Comment dialog Format Reflow Comment shown below is used to reflow block com ments paragraphs or a selection of the current file Figure 10 67 Reflow Comment Dialog 466 Current Document Options Dia log Reflow Comment Entire block comment Match block comment setting Current paragraph Selection Comment width Automatic width Mamun thant col Fixed right margin ia The following options are available e Entire block comment If selected reflows an entire block comment based on the current width and border settings for the block comment e Match block comment setting If selected forces the borders to conform to the comment settings Format gt Comment Setup see Comments Tab e Current paragraph If selected reflows the current paragraph within the block comment Selection If selected reflows a selection within a block comment paragraph based on current se
273. e text box If your language is not listed in the Select Mode dialog or in the Extension drop down list you can create a new mode Click the New button on the Extension Options dialog then type the language extension without the Dot in the Extension text box If the language is similar to another language that is already available you can select it from the Refer to combo box This will cause the new extension s configura tion to match the configuration of the referred existing language See Referring to Extensions for more in formation 230 Extension Options Extension Options The behavior of the editor can be customized for files based on specific language extensions The Exten sion Options dialog box shown below contains the settings that can be configured for file extensions To display this dialog from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click Gen eral in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting Alternatively display the dialog by using the setupext command Figure 7 1 Extension Options Dialog Extension Options Extension aT Indent Word Wrap General Comments Comment Wrap Advanced Auto Complete Context Tagging Indent style When tab key reindents the line O None O Never In leading blanks Auto O Always E Strict Syntax indent 4 te Tabs 4 C Indent with tabs Syntax indent specifies the amount the C Inse
274. ect except when sorting a block or column selection e Order Choose Ascending or Descending In an ascending sort the lowest text item sorted is placed at the top e Numeric sort When this option is selected a numeric comparison is performed e Remove duplicate lines When this option is selected it removes adjacent lines that are identical This option does not fully support column selection it always compares complete lines e Case sensitive When this option is selected the sort is case sensitive Sort Commands 137 Inserting Literal Characters To use the command line for sorting first activate the command line by pressing Esc Sort command syn tax is in the form SortCommandOptionLetter s The following sort commands are available e sort_buffer Sorts the current buffer e sort_within_selection Sorts text within a selected area This command supports line and block se lections only sort_on_selection To sort on a column field press Ctrl B to select an area of text then invoke the command sort_on_selection This command supports line and block selections only The table below describes the OptionLetter s that you can use with each command Table 6 6 Sorting Options Option Description A Sort in ascending order D Sort in descending order l Case insensitive sort ignore case E Case sensitive sort exact case which is the de fault N Numeric sort C style float
275. ect the mode for which the binding should apply Bindings assigned to a specific language editing mode override those assigned to de fault Tip You can create multiple bindings for the same command macro and have one binding set to de fault and the others set to specific modes In this case when you are editing in a specified mode that binding is in effect and when editing in any other language editing mode not specified the default binding will be in effect For example in CUA emulation Ctrl L is bound to select_line by default but when in HTML mode you may want to use Ctrl L to insert an HTML link instead in sert_html_link command Therefore you can bind Cirl L to insert_html_link and specify the HTML mode for use only when editing HTML files 5 When finished click Bind The key sequence or mouse event now appears in the Key Sequence column on the Key Bindings dialog Editing Bindings To change the binding or language editing mode for a command macro that is already bound you will need to first unbind the command macro then recreate it See Removing Bindings and Creating Bindings If you have advanced knowledge of SlickEdit Core you can edit the Slick C key binding source directly See Editing the Key Binding Source for more information Removing Bindings To remove a binding 1 Using the Key Bindings dialog find the command user macro or key sequence that you want to unbind You can search by using the search
276. ected typing a closing parenthesis temporarily places the cursor on the matching begin parenthesis None When selected typing a closing parenthesis just inserts the close parenthesis Highlight matching blocks When selected the corresponding parenthesis brace bracket or be gin end word pairs under the cursor are automatically highlighted Tip To customize the highlighting color go to Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Color setting Select the Block Matching screen ele ment To adjust the delay in milliseconds before the highlighting is updated go to Macro Set Macro Variable and modify the variable def_match_paren_idle See Setting Colors for Screen 392 General Options Dialog Elements and Setting Macro Variables for more information Scroll style Select from the following options e Smooth horizontal scroll When selected this option specifies that the window should be scrolled column by column when the cursor moves out of view When this option is deselected the cursor will be centered and the text will be scrolled one fourth the width of the window when the cursor moves out of view e Smooth vertical scroll When selected this option specifies that the window should be scrolled line by line when the cursor moves out of view When this option is deselected the cursor will be centered and the text will be scrolled half the
277. ected G private Replace Literal with Constant Replaces the selected literal with a constant replacing use of the literal with the new constant Figure 6 47 C Refactoring Replace Literal with Constant 213 C Refactoring W Convert Literal to Constant Name at constant HELLO WORLD Type of constant const static const gt Hdefine literal Hello World yr Create Standard Methods Creates an assignment operator copy constructor default constructor and destructor for the selected class Figure 6 48 C Refactoring Create Standard Methods 214 C Refactoring Create standard methods Create standard methods tor class MYy CL4AS public protected private Create Copy Constructor public protected private Create Assignment Operator Virtual public protected private Create Destructor Virtual public protected private Test Parsing Configuration Test Parsing Configuration analyzes the C refactoring configuration that has been set up and reports key information and errors Generally it is designed as a debugging aid when a refactoring fails but it can also be valuable as a means to view the parameters that are set for a refactoring You can verify the re factoring setup before proceeding to avoid errors To access Test Parsing Configuration from the main menu click C C Refactoring Test Parsing C
278. ed only non volatile members are displayed Synchronized Java only When selected only synchronized members are displayed When unse lected only non synchronized members are displayed Extern When selected only identifiers defined explicitly using the extern keyword are displayed When unselected only identifiers defined which do not explicitly use the extern keyword are dis played Anonymous When selected only class names which are automatically generated by Context Tag ging are displayed When unselected only explicitly named classes are displayed Functions Methods Inline When selected inline functions or methods are displayed Constructors When selected constructors are displayed Operators When selected overloaded operators are displayed Abstract When selected only abstract methods are displayed When unselected only non abstract methods are displayed Virtual When selected only virtual methods are displayed When unselected only non virtual meth ods are displayed All non static Java methods are implicitly virtual Static class methods When selected only static methods are displayed When unselected only non static methods are displayed 100 Symbol Properties View e Native When selected only methods explicitly defined with the native keyword are displayed When unselected only non native methods are displayed e Data Members e Show data only When selected only data
279. ed by name Auto Expand All Top Level Classes Expands all top level class nodes in the members pane whenever the current class changes The default behavior is to only auto expand the node of the cur rent class Auto Expand All Structs Enums Inner Classes Expands all struct enum and inner class nodes displayed in the members pane whenever the content is refreshed By default this option is turned off and these nodes are collapsed Quick Filters and Scope Filters Quick filters allow you to display only certain items in the members pane such as functions prototypes etc Scope filters allow you to display members only in certain scopes such as public or global private protected etc Outline View The Outline view provides an outline of symbols in the current file To open the Outline view click Window Show View Other expand SlickEdit Views and double click Outline Figure 6 3 Outline View 86 Outline View Defs CH CVabuDfrle c ffu F funci F maintint argc char argy The name of the file is displayed at the top of the view window Hover the mouse over the bitmap of any symbol in the window to see a tooltip that shows the symbol s signature and scope To jump to the definition of the symbol in the code pushing a bookmark in the process double click on any symbol Press Ctrl Comma to go back Outline View Options Right click on any symbol in the Outline view to access the followin
280. ed to execute line commands e Cursor page up down When this check box is selected the display is scrolled up down until the line the cursor is on becomes the last first line displayed respectively If the cursor is already on the top bottom display line the display is scrolled one page When this check box is cleared page up down al ways scrolls one page e END command saves the file When this check box is selected changes to the buffer are saved automatically when the ispf_end F3 command is performed Otherwise you will be prompted if you want to save changes before closing the file e XEDIT line commands When this check box is selected the prefix area will support XEDIT style line commands e Home places cursor on command line When this check box is selected the Home key places the cursor on the command line By default this option is off and the Home key simply moves the cursor to the beginning of the line Further ISPF related options are available on the General Tab of the Extension Options dialog box Win dow Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree double click the File Extension Setup setting These options include Auto CAPS mode and editing of boundaries and the truncation column 502 ISPF Primary Commands ISPF Primary Commands The following table of standard ISPF primary commands are supported in the ISPF emulation mode Primary commands are entered by placing the cursor o
281. editing feature can be used after two people make a local copy of the same source file and each makes modifications to their local copy The 3 Way Merge takes both sets of changes and cre ates a new source file If there are any differences a dialog box is displayed that lets you select the changes that you want in the output file The output file can be viewed side by side or interleaved Performing a Three Way Merge To perform a three way merge complete the following steps 1 From the main menu click Tools File Merge or use the merge command The 3 Way Merge Setup dialog is displayed Figure 8 4 3 Way Merge Setup Dialog 314 3 Way Merge 3 Way Merge Setup Base File Filename Revision 1 Filename Lila Revision 2 Filename LB Output File Filename kd Merge style Output style Auto merge Interactive Show changes Interleaved buffer F Use smart merge Ignore spaces In the Filename text box enter the baseline original file name Click the Ellipses button to the right of the text box to select files Click the B button to select from the open buffers Enter the other names of the files to be merged in the Revision 1 and 2 text boxes In the Output file Filename text box enter the name of the output file or click the Ellipses button to select from an existing file Select any Merge style or Output style that you want Click OK The following dialog
282. ee then double click the File Extension Setup setting Make sure the C C language extension you want to work with is selected in the Extension drop down list then click the Options button The Formatting Options dialog specific to the file extension you have selected is displayed Note Languages similar to C C have similar Formatting Options dialogs which are not specifically documented The tabs on the C C Formatting Options dialog are described below Begin End Style Tab Figure 7 3 C C Formatting Options Begin end style Tab 233 C C Formatting Options C C Formatting Options Begin end style Indentation Other if i if if II i H i i D t Gei Style 1 Style 2 Style 3 Insert braces immediately Insert blank line between braces Insert function start brace on new line C Apply to function braces Use this tab to specify the brace style used by template editing and smart indenting Choose the style you want to use then select from the following options Insert braces immediately Specifies whether template should be inserted with braces Insert blank line between braces Specifies whether a blank line should be inserted between braces when a template expands with braces Insert function start brace on new line Specifies whether a function start brace should be inserted after Enter is pressed to start a new line Apply to funct
283. ee Also push bookmark pop bookmark set_bookmark toggle bookmark sb goto bookmark Click Add to add binding to current command Click Remove to unbind current selected command Bindings are based on the editor emulation mode CUA is the default The title bar of the Key Bindings dialog shows the current emulation To change the emulation mode see Changing Emulations The Search by command and Search by key sequence boxes are used to filter the data See Viewing and Filtering Bindings The Command column shows all of the SlickEdit Core commands including macros that you have recor ded The Key Sequence column shows the key sequence or mouse event to which the command macro is bound If there is no binding this field is empty The Mode column shows the language editing mode to which the binding is assigned The Recorded column indicates if the item is a command No or user recorded macro Yes Tip What is a language editing mode SlickEdit Core uses the extension of the current file to determ ine what language you are using thereby only making available the options and features that are possible or useful in that language You can also manually set the language editing mode See 46 Managing Bindings Language Editing Modes for more information The bottom of the dialog contains documentation if available for the selected command Columns can be sorted by clicking on the column headers A
284. ee times You can also change a configuration option view settings or expand a code template during macro recording 3 When you have finished recording the macro end recording by clicking Macro gt Stop Recording Macro or the same toggle you used in Step 1 The Save Macro Dialog is displayed Tip For recorded macros you dont need to track perhaps for immediate or one time use SlickEdit Core provides a way to stop macro recording and instantly bind the macro to a key sequence This allows you to keep a set of recent unnamed macro recordings instead of having just one last recorded macro See Binding Macros Using execute last_macro_key for more information 4 The next step depends on the purpose of your recorded macro If you want to save the macro for fu ture use continue with the steps below If you re just recording it to discover Slick C code see Using Macros to Discover and Control Options click Edit or press Alt E at this time to view the source code However you will not be prompted to save the macro and bind it to a key sequence In order to do that you will need to use Macro Save last macro prior to recording a new macro or exiting the editor See Saving and Editing Recorded Macros for more details 5 Specify the name for the macro in the Macro Name text box 6 Select the options that you want from the following or leave the defaults if you aren t sure e Requires editor control Check this box
285. eee 268 7 25 HTML Beautifier indent Talo sareno enra A aE A E E E EEA EESTE TEN 271 7 26 HTML Beautifier Tags Tab riicraciienioiiiinaan aiaa aa A NAN 272 7 27 HTML Beautifier Attributes Values Tab 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeenneee eee taeeeeeeeaeeeeetaeeeeeeeaeeeeeee 274 7 28 HTML Beautifier Comments Tab cc ccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeeseeeeseaaesseaeeseeeeesenaeeseaeeeeaas 275 7 29 HTML Beautifier Advanced Tab ooo eee cceeecceceeeeenneeeceenaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeeeneaeeeeeeeaas 277 7 90 XMEAATLME Formatting MEn ET 279 7 31 Current Document Options Dialog ccceesececeeeeeeeceeeeeeee cae eeeeaeeseeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeseaeeeseaeeeeeneeee 280 7 32 XML HTML Formatting Scheme Configuration Dialog ccccsceeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeees 281 7 33 New Formatting Scheme Dialog ccccceeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee cae eeeeaeeseeeeeeeaaeeseaeeeeneeesiaeeeeeneeee 283 7 34 XML HTML Formatting General Tab ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeee cee eeeeaeeseeeeeseaaeeseaeeseeeeeesaeeseaeeeeaas 285 7 35 XML HTML Formatting Content Wrap Tab 287 7 36 XML HTML Formatting Tag Layout Tab 0 0 cceeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeneaaes 289 7 37 COBOL Formatting Options Dialog cccecccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeee cess eeeeeeseeeeeseaaeeeeaaeeeeeeesiaeeteeeeeee 299 7 38 Pascal Formatting Options Dialog cccceesececeeeeeeeneeeeeeee cease eeeaeeseeeeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeeeeseae
286. eeeeeeeea 301 7 39 PL I Formatting Options Dialog cccceeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeseeeeeseaaeeeeaeeeeneeesiaeeeeeeeeee 303 8 1 DIFFzilla Dialog EE 309 8 2 Multi File Diff Output Dialog eet aaiae aai a aaa aia aee aei aa iae iaaa Taane 311 8 3 Save Multi File Output Dialog cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeeee cae eeeeaeeseeeeeseaaeeeeaaeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeee 312 8 4 3 Way Merge Setup Dialog ccccececeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeeceaeeesaaaeedeaeeseaeeeeeaaeseeeeeesaeesenaeessaees 314 8 5 3 Way Merge Results Dialog sire 2ou7esetceieZ eetEekebek dees ceemestet cay AEn KEE FERREE E EE Zeg ebb de r 315 8 6 FTP Profile Manager Dialog ciorapi iaa ai Aaa FAAA AERAN 318 8 7 Regex Evaluator UE 321 8 8 The SlickEdit Calculator AA 323 9 1 Binding Recorded Maros A 332 9 2 Set Variable Didog DEE 336 9 3 Variable Editor Dialog man iaeiei ete iaid EE EAE a EN Aa 336 10 4 Select Text to Paste Dialog pera aaan aaia aaao a a ra eE aa ar a r aaa Aaaa EBA E 340 10 2 Enumerate Dialog rire aaa Er a a AEE PA ANE EEA AA P E EA 341 10 3 Filter Selection Command Dialog cccccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceaaeeesaaeseeeeeeseaeeseaaeeseeeessaeeeeeeees 342 10 4 Find and Replace VIEW 1 043 kenna a lan nation a a ENEE 343 10 5 Find and Replace Find Tab esei E EE E R 344 10 6 Find and Replace Find in Files Tab 347 10 7 Find and Replace Replace Tab assssssssssssssrrssssrnnsssrnnesrnnnnesnennnsnnnnnnnnnnnenntnn
287. eeeneee 193 6 14 Examples of Tagged Search Expressions ccccccsseeeeeceeceeeeeeeaeeseeeeeceaaeeseaeeseeeeeesaeeseaaeeeaas 194 O21 5 sFeEX Mode b sse EA EES Ee 223 8 eBay OPCralorsn ee EE E de dee Sie 324 8 2 Math Command Examples cccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaaeeseeeeeceaeeeseaeeseneeeeeaeseeaeeeseeeesiaeeeeeeeeee 325 11 1 Environment Variables AAA 475 11 2 Configuration Variable cccecesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee cece eeeeaeeseneeeceaeeesaaaeseeeeeseaeeeseaaeseeeeeesiaeeeeaeeee 479 11 3 User Configuration Files iresi eii ai a aii ai 485 Ti4 System Contig ration RE 487 TES VLX Fie Statement EE 491 11 6 Table of style vele aSr EEA Ea AEA E bane EE A EERE RE 494 TZI SPE Primary el ET EE 503 11 8 ISPF Line Commands cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeeseeeeecaaaesdeaeeseaeeeesaaeseeaeeesseeesnaeeseaes 506 11 9 XEDIT Line Commands sesesesseeeseeeseeessnesnesnntssntnnnsrnnstnnttnnttnnnttnnntnnttnnntnnnsinatsnnnsnnnsnnetsnnao 516 11 10 Unsupported ISPF Primary Commands cccccccceceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaesseneeessaeeesnaeeseaes 517 1142 Supported ISPF Command EE 518 11 12 UNIX Regular Expression cineri ar Ea S a A a AEA EEEE EAA ERATA 520 11 13 UNIX Regular Expression Examples A 525 11 14 SlickEdit Regular Expressions 526 11 15 SlickEdit Regular Expression Examples c cccccccsssceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeeeeessaeeesnaeeteaes 531 11 16 Brief Regular ExXpreSSion
288. eeesaeeeseneeee 33 3 2 Common SlickEdit Core Commande ssseesseeeeeeseeeeeeieektsiessrnstrnesiissstnsstnsstnnnstnssnnnstn nnn nnnna 33 3 3 Text Box Ediling Key engste desen dese sods cadieval Gag ives E EORR 35 4 1 Command Line Font Recommendations sssseesseeeseeeeieeeeeneesinesinesinstsinssrnssrnnnsrnssnnnsnnnnnnnnnn 55 6 1 Preview View Information ou cececceeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaaeeeseeaaeeeeeseaeeeeseeaas 91 6 2 Predefined Substitution Parameters cc ccececceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeesiaeeeeeeeeee 107 6 3 Summary of Metadata Element 0 ccccceceseeeeeeeceneeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeaeeseneeeseaesteaaesenieeesiaeeeeeeeeee 116 E Selection Key Geek ae ete iat tata Sh eo tt A ha tad eras 128 6 5 Operations for Selected Text 129 Ge lee Ee Le EE 138 Ee Ee 155 6 8 Escape Sequence Examples cccccceeseeeceeneeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeseeaeeseeeeeeeaaeseeaaeeeneeeesaeeeeeeeeee 156 6 9 Incremental Search Key cecsceseccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeee cae eeeaaeeeeaeeeseaeeseeaeesgeeeeceaaeseeaaeeeneeseaeeeeeneeee 183 6 10 OptionCharacters for find and Slash Commande 184 6211s Replace Key Aessen Dee ee heat ali are Deele 187 6 12 Replace Command Search Examples c ccccecceeseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeseeeeesaeeeeeneeee 189 6 13 Examples of Replacing Using Regular Expressions 0 ceccecceeeesteeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeenee
289. eeseaeeeseeeeesaeeeeeeeeee 369 3 Way Merge Dialog EE 370 DIFRZilla Dialog EAEE EAEE E E liked el eevee 372 Multi File Diff Output Dialog eecceeeesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeseceeeesaaeeeeeeeeseeeeesaaeeseneeeeeas 377 Context Tagging Tag Files Dialog c ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeceeeeeseaaeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeeeaeeeeaas 378 Options DialogS 201 de eed Matas Heed EES ANE ate aes 380 General Options Dialogic Astaesi tice idee tet tide EEN 380 Extension Options Dialog ccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeseaee sense saaeeeeaeeseceeesaeeesiaeeeeaes 398 Selecta RE KRITT 420 File Options DialO EE 421 Key Bindings Dialog saeia e rasai aiaa aE AAE GEE Aa RE AAE AA AO ASERTE 429 Bind key DAIO eaa er EE A E A E E AR 432 Redefine Common Keys Dialog ssssssssesessesiresirnssinssrnsstrnntrnsttnstnnstnnntnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnt 433 Context Tagging Options Dialog eccceecccceseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeseaeeeseeeesiaeeeeeneeee 436 Color Coding Setup Dialog ccccecceeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeseeeeeesaaeeeeaaeeseeessaeeseeneeee 439 Golor Settings Dialog ecean iniii diii ede el need eel 453 Font Configuration Dialog eMas eurae aasa etia han thea ie aa anaE EEEE 454 XML HTML Formatting Dialog 0 eee ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeseeeeaeees 456 URL Mappings Dialog erst rekan e AE EA AN AEEA EEEE 457 Proxy Settings Dialoga jinga taraia a EEN 458 Network Options Dialog
290. egory under the selected category right click in the Categories tree and select New Category You will be prompted for a category name After clicking OK you can add templates in the new category Creating a New Template To create a new template select the category in which to create the template then right click in the Tem plates list and select New Template You will be prompted for a template name which is used to create the new template file After clicking OK you can edit the new template the lower half of the dialog Editing an Existing Template To edit an existing template select a template from the Templates list and edit its properties in the lower half of the dialog Deleting a Template To delete a template select the template you want to delete from the Templates list right click and select Delete Template from the context menu 109 Template Manager Dialog Template Manager Dialog The Template Manager dialog is made up of the following elements e Categories Lists a hierarchy of item categories for installed and user template items Note Installed templates can be viewed but not modified e Templates Lists the templates for the currently selected category When you select a template you are able to edit its properties in the lower half of the dialog e Template file File name of the currently selected template Details Tab The Details tab of the Template Manager dialog contains the fo
291. eir names will be based on the name you entered in the Name field of the Add New Item dialog box See the example below Example The following example demonstrates a multi file item template setemplate file The item creates C class header h and implementation cpp files lt xml version 1 0 gt lt DOCTYPE SETemplate SYSTEM http www slickedit com dtd vse setemplate 1 0 setemplate dtd gt lt SETemplate Version 1 0 Type Item gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt Name gt My C Class lt Name gt Description gt My complete C class header and implementation lt Description gt DefaultName gt MyClass cpp lt DefaultName gt lt TemplateDetails gt A A lt TemplateContent gt lt Files gt 115 Code Template Metadata File Reference lt File TargetFilename SfileinputnameS cpp gt MyClass cpp lt File gt lt File TargetFilename SfileinputnameS h gt MyClass h lt File gt lt Files gt lt TemplateContent gt lt SETemplate gt Code Template Metadata File Reference Template metadata describes the template item its files and how to create the template Template metadata files have a setemplate extension The SETemplate element is the root element of a template file Table 6 3 Summary of Metadata Element Element Child Elements Attributes DefaultName Description File ReplaceParamet ers TargetFilename T D ln F
292. elete the tag file from disk Note that some extension specific tag files are automatically generated and thus will be automatically regen erated if you delete them Remove Src File Removes the selected files from the currently selected tag file If no files are selec ted you will be prompted whether or not to remove all source files from the tag file If you remove files from your workspace tag file you will be prompted if you want to also remove the files from your project Options Displays the Context Tagging Options dialog box for you to configure Context Tagging op tions See Context Tagging Options Dialog for more information Up Moves the selected tag file higher in the search order This primarily applies to extension specific tag files see Creating Extension Specific Tag Files Down Moves the selected tag file lower in the search order This primarily applies to extension specif ic tag files see Creating Extension Specitic Tag Files Add Tag File Displays the Add Tag File dialog box which allows you to choose from a list of lan guages the source type for which to insert the tag file To automatically create tag files for C Java and NET you can instead use the Create Tag Files for Run Time Libraries dialog see Creating Tag Files for Run Time Libraries Retag Src Files Updates the Context Tagging information for the selected files in the currently selec ted tag file If no files are selected you will
293. em date is a normal part of testing time based behavior in the software you are devel oping For example you may need to set your clock ahead to test alerts on a task management program As long as you don t run Eclipse with SlickEdit Core or another FLEXnet Publisher licensed product while your clock is set ahead you will not have any repair issues If you do need to run SlickEdit Core your license will be damaged when you run again at the current date When this occurs you can repair the license as described in Repairing a License The number of repairs is limited so you should be cau tious about running SlickEdit Core when your clock is set ahead If you run out of repairs please contact Product Support Daylight savings time will not cause this to occur since it is only adjusting the date by one day Only changes larger than one day will trigger this Uninstalling SlickEdito Core To uninstall SlickEdit Core 1 In Eclipse select Help gt Software Updates Manage Configuration 2 Select SlickEdit Core from the list 3 Right click and select Uninstall 13 Using the Help System Help and Product Support There are several ways to get help about SlickEdit Core e Use the Help system See Using the Help System below e Search the FAQ A list of frequently asked questions and answers is available from the Product Sup port section of our Web site at http www slickedit com e Use the Community Forums Se
294. emulation chosen You can use the Key Bindings dialog to look up what command is bound to what key or key sequence or vice versa or you can use the SlickEdit Core menu and command line to determ ine these items See Key and Mouse Bindings and Using the Command Line to View Key Binding Associ ations for more information 43 What is a Binding Key and Mouse Bindings Key and mouse bindings are quick ways to execute operations in SlickEdit Core Key bindings are the most efficient Time is wasted each time you lift your hand from the keyboard to grab the mouse and more time is wasted when you move your hand back to the keyboard in preparation for more typing Therefore if you learn the key bindings associated with operations that you use most frequently you will save time coding If an operation you use frequently isn t already bound by default create your own easy to remember binding What is a Binding A key or mouse binding is a key sequence or mouse event associated with a command Key terms are defined as follows e Mouse event The clicking of any button or motion of the mouse wheel e Key sequence A series of one or more keys or key combinations For example Ctrl X R e Key combination Two or more keys pressed simultaneously For example Ctrl O e Key Any single key on the keyboard An example of a key binding with one key combination is Ctrl O in CUA emulation associated with the gui_open command and Fi
295. ent If Maximum right column is used lines will be wrapped when they reach the specified column even if they have not reached the specified automatic width This is useful if coding standards mandate that text should not exceed a specified column Fixed right margin When selected lines will break before the specified number of columns in the Right column field has been reached Tip If coding standards mandate that text should not exceed a specified column you can still use Fixed or Automatic width settings Select and set the Maximum right column and lines will be wrapped when they reach the specified column even if they have not reached the specified fixed or automatic width e Parent tag right margin When selected tag content is wrapped at the right margin to the width of the parent tag e Include tags in width calculation When selected the start and end tag characters are counted in addition to the content The number of characters and spaces including attributes within tags are cal 288 Formatting Settings culated and the specified width is adjusted accordingly This is useful for producing uniform blocks of text e Preserve width of existing content When selected SlickEdit Core preserves the width of the exist ing content while editing The width is determined by the length of the longest multi line paragraph If the width of the existing content cannot be determined the formatting optio
296. ent Indent column 1 comments Normally comments that start in column 1 are left alone Turn this on if you want the indent for these comments to be adjusted as well e Define Comments Displays the HTML Comments dialog This dialog allows you to define what the beautifier recognizes as a comment The sequence lt gt is defined as the HTML comment by de fault If you delete all comment definitions then all comments will be parsed as content and possibly word wrapped e Trailing comments Specify how trailing comments are treated from the following options e Specific column This text box specifies the column that trailing comments should be placed at By trailing comments we mean comments which appear at the end of lines which contain tags An example of a trailing comment is lt TD gt lt trailing comment gt e Original absolute column When on trailing comments are placed at the same column as the ori ginal source file By trailing comments we mean comments which appear at the end of lines which contain tags 276 HTML e Original relative column When on trailing comments are indented by reusing the indent after the last character of the end of the statement or declaration of the original source file By trailing com ments we mean comments which appear at the end of lines which contain tags The following is an example of code before beautifying trailing comments lt TR gt lt TD gt
297. eprocessing Only C and Java have function color defined Only HTML has attributes i e lt img src gt Wrap at beginning end If selected the search will always be performed on the entire buffer starting from the cursor e Place cursor at end If selected the cursor is placed at the end of the occurrence found e Search backward Select this option to have the search performed from the end to the beginning 346 Find and Replace View e Search hidden text Select this option to search for text hidden by Selective Display Matches found that were set to be hidden by Selective Display will be revealed To set Selective Display options from the main menu click View Selective Display See Selective Display for more information Highlight matches Select this option to highlight all matched patterns in the current search range Highlight colors for these matches are customizable To set this color from the main menu click Win dow Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Color set ting Select Highlight from the Screen element list Choose your desired color settings and click OK See Colors for more information To clear all highlighted text in all buffers deselect the Highlight matches option or simply close the Find and Replace view e Bookmark matches Select this option to bookmark lines with matching patterns and display the Bookmarks view when a match is b
298. ers when the view options are on See Viewing Special Characters for more information e More Tab The More tab contains additional option settings e Exit Tab The Exit tab contains options regarding exiting the program e Virtual Memory Tab This tab stores information for the virtual memory General Tab The General tab is used to set general configuration options in SlickEdit Core Figure 10 24 General Options General Tab 380 General Options Dialog General Options General Search Selections Special Characters More Exit Virtual Memory One File per window Auto restore Maximize First window Files Alb menu hotkeys d Clipboards C Command line prompting List command line completions Alt menu Change directory C Line modify Automatically clase visited Files Selective display Symbol browser tree Top of File line Current line highlight Expand collapse single click Tabs ruler click past end of line Syntax indent ruler ee Decimal ruler Vertical line column In 5 O Se Box color Vertical line color Column color The following options are available e One file per window Not available in SlickEdit Core If checked each file you open will be allocated in its own window If unchecked each file will open in the same window e Maximize first window Not available in SlickEdit Core If checked the first editor window opened will be maximized 381
299. es only mter e Look in This field allows you to specify a range for your search to the current selection current pro 348 Find and Replace View cedure current buffer or all buffers Click the right pointing arrow button to the right of the Look in field to display a menu containing more specific range options such as Directory Project and All Buffers From this sub menu you may also select Append and choose an item for which to have the search results appended File types Specifies one or more file types extensions to search for Type in this field or use the drop down list to select the extensions desired When a file title is specified in the Look in field the file types wildcards are ignored e Exclude Paths files or file types can be excluded from a multi file search by specifying them with wildcards or full path names No files are searched in a path that is excluded including any files in sub directories beneath e Look in subfolders Select this option to expand the search to sub directories of the folder specified in the Look in field Results options Click this button to expand or contract the Results options section of the view win dow When contracted the options that are set are summarized in this area e Search Results Window This field allows you to send the search results to a specific SlickEdit Core Search view The window to be used can be selected from the drop down list and these a
300. escription change the line insert style To access the line insert style click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Gener al setting On the General Options dialog select the More Tab mou_move_to_cursor Cirl R Moves the selected text to the cursor mou_copy_to_cursor Ctrl Shift R Copies the selected text to the cursor mou_click L Left click Drags and moves the selected text You must click within the se lected text and keep the left but ton down while moving the mouse to a new location list_clipboards Ctrl Shift V Allows you to select a clipboard from a list of the most recently used 15 is the default maximum clipboards to insert at the cursor copy_to_clipboard Ctrl C Copies selected text to the clip board append_to_clipboard Ctrl Shift C Appends selected text to the clip board append_cut Ctrl Shift X Deletes the selected text and ap pends it to the clipboard copy_to_cursor None Copies selected text to the cursor Line selections are inserted after the current line by default If you want line selections inserted be fore the current line change the line insert style You can change the line insert style Click Window Preferences expand SlickEd it and click General in the tree then double click the General set ting On the General Options dia 130
301. eseeeeeeaeeseeeeescaeeseaeesseeeessnaeeeeeeeeee 159 Modifying Syntax Expansion Templates cccccccseeeeeseeeceeeeeeeaeeeeneeseeeeeesaeeseneeeeeas 160 Adding Syntax Expansion for Other Languages cccceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeesnaeeeeenees 160 Dynamic Surround and Surround With cececcecceeeceeeeeeeeee cere eeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeseeeesaeeeeeeeeee 162 BEI eg Tei NEE 162 vii SlickEdit Core v3 3 for Eclipse telar lE Lao RA Ll dee Eet Dee 166 Unsurroung sissioni ina eed ei eee nen ede ate ees asta aati eae ds 170 BOOKMAIKS unesena aaa a e e Et eet eege gege beten abet bed e a 172 Named Bookmarks 172 Pushed ee au ETC 174 Setting Bookmark Options 174 Setting BreakpOints 2cenccdeiieaulaatas she eve hes eae a eset enact ieee ic 176 Setting Conditional Breakpoints eeecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaee scenes eeaaeeeeaeeeseeeeesaeeseeeeeees 176 Setting Java Exception Breakpoints 0 eccccececceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeseeeeetiaeeeeeeeeeed 176 GOmMM NtIhG ct E A E AA itten calcite A E AC SSSA coca cate 177 Commenting Blocks and Lines ccceeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeaaeeeeaeeeseeeesaeeeeeneeee 177 Creating Doc Comments ccecceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaaeeteeeeecaeeeeeaeeseneeessaaeeeeaaeeseeeesiaeeeeeneeee 178 SUM EE CIN EE 180 Gomiment WADING ee EEN EENS gege dE ebe EE 180 Rind and Replace E 182 Quick Search and Replace AAA 182 le Cu Eu ER re e WEE
302. et either individually or by editing a scheme To change the default colors complete the following steps 1 From the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Color setting or use the color command The Color Settings dialog box is dis played Figure 4 6 Color Settings Dialog Color Settings C Set embedded language color Screen element Foreground Comment Keyword Background Line Number Preprocessor String on Library Symbol Sample Text 1234567890 Operator User Defined Symbol Font Style Functi Special Characters Normal O Bold O Italic Underline Hex Mode Use fixed spacing for bold and italic fixed Unicode fonts Color scheme odes J pakte Schere 2 Select the element you want to change from the Screen element list box for descriptions of some of these elements see Color Settings Dialog 3 Set the Foreground and Background colors by clicking on the color squares The Color Picker dialog 56 Setting Colors for Screen Ele ments is displayed allowing you to pick a color from the palette or set your own custom color using RGB val ues Note If you have chosen the Selection screen element note that SlickEdit Core will attempt to render selections using your normal color settings for the Foreground color The selected foreground color will only be used if there is not enough contrast between the f
303. et this variable s value equal to 0 to stop SlickEdit Core from inserting characters on every line of a block selection Responsible for Eclipse style buffer switching with Ctrl PgUp and Cirl PgDn Set to 0 to turn this functionality off and be able to bind these keys to other SlickEdit Core commands Note that this func tionality is currently available for Windows only def_error_re2 Edit this variable to change from the SlickEdit Core regular expression used for compile build errors 480 Table of Configuration Variables Configuration Variable Description def_filelist_show_dotfiles Controls the global Show hidden files option on the General Tab of the General Options dialog On Windows the default value of this variable is 1 change to 0 to view Dot files On UNIX platforms the default value is 0 change to 1 to hide Dot files Dot files are files with names beginning with a dot character def_from_cursor Default is 0 If non zero the commands up case_word lowcase_word and cap_word will start case change from the cursor position instead of the beginning of the current word def_linewrap Default is set to 1 If you are at the end of a line that has whitespace only on the line below it spaces or tabs and you press Delete this will bring the whitespace below it up to the end of the line that you are on When the value is set to 0 if you press Delete while at the end of a line that has
304. eter inio Example Ta niea e R dese deene 64 5 4 Parameter Info Example 1 64 5 5 Auto List Compatible Parameters c cccccceeseeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaaeseeneeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeeeesiaeeeseeeenaes 65 5 6 Automatic Tagging BT W 67 5 fAdd Tag File Dialog snickers 68 5 8 Add Tags Database Dialog 69 5 9 Context Tagging Tag Files Dialog c cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseeneeceaaeeeeaaeseeeeeesaeeeeaaeeenaees 70 5 10 Rebuild Tag File Dialog eee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee a a a a a ER 72 6A ClaSS VIEW EE 82 6 2 Class Exclusion Manager Dialog sssssseesesssressseessrsstnnsttnstntrnnnsttnstnnsnnnttnnttnnsaninsnnnsnnnssrnnsnnnt 84 63 DE MEM deea egseha ta an ain a aetra a ana eena aea a aia ea aaa eataa dadaanan a aa aaan 86 6 4 Preview VICW avis itd ei ae en ae A tee ne a ai 89 6 5 References View EE EE ei hl ee da ee e e 91 EN EE 93 6 7 Symbol Uses Calling Tree Dialog cccecececeseeeceeee cece eeeaeeeeeeeecaaaeeeeaeeseeeeesaeseeaeeeseaeeeeaeeseeeees 96 6 8 Base Classes Dialog cecccececeeceeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaaesseeeescaeessaaeeseeeeesiaeeeseeeeeaes 97 6 9 Symbol Browser Filter Options Dialog cescceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeaaeeeeaeeessaeeeteaeeesaes 98 6 10 Symbol PropertioS EE 101 GTi Add New Item Dialog tute eae edie de eet 103 6 12 Parameter Entry Dialog assii cece iea irnia teenie ee ee ainiai a kE NEA ERAAN SE ae
305. exadecimal math xFF Converts hexadecimal FF to decimal math 077 Converts octal 77 to decimal matho 255 Converts 255 to octal math 077 0xff 10 Adds octal 77 hex FF and 10 Overflow Underflow If overflow or underflow occurs the message Numeric overflow or underflow is displayed on the message line Floating point numbers may have up to a 32 digit mantissa and a 9 digit exponent 325 OS File Browser Document Math Type mathematical expressions into a buffer and evaluate them with the add command This feature is called document math The add command adds selected text and inserts the result below the last line of the selection If no operator exists between two adjacent numbers on the same line addition is assumed The result of each adjacent line is added Prime Numbers Prime numbers are often useful for sizing hash tables The isprime command used from the command line takes a decimal number as an argument and tells you if it is prime and if not its first divisor The nextprime command takes a decimal number as an argument and finds the next greater prime number 326 OS File Browser OS File Browser SlickEdit Core provides a way to display the operating system s OS file manager browser For ex ample Windows Explorer is displayed on Windows Konquerer on Linux KDE desktop etc To display the OS file browser click Tools OS File Browser or use the explore or finder command the finder command is the
306. example set ting VSLICKXTERM to usr X11 bin xterm geometry 80x40 will create xterm windows with a width of 80 characters and a height of 40 charac ters The license manager handles system crashes bet ter if each user sets the VSUSER environment vari able to a unique name 476 Setting Environment Variables in vslick ini Environment Variable Description VST Specifies additional command line arguments to the macro compiler as if you typed them in when invok ing the compiler VSLICKXNOBLINK Suppresses the blinking cursor VSLICKXNOPLUSNEWMSG Suppresses a message when starting a second in stance of SlickEdit Core Setting Environment Variables in vslick ini Place configuration environment settings in the file vslick ini This file is located in the following de fault directory based on your platform if it does not exist it can be created manually e Windows My Documents My SlickEdit Core Config Editor_Version e Linux SHOME secore editor_version Below is text from a sample vslick ini file with an environment section where vslick is the path to the root of the core SlickEdit plug in eclipse plugins com slickedit core_VERSION Environment VSLICKPATH c vslick win c vslick macros c vslick bitmaps c vmacros VSLICKALIAS c vmacros alias slk VSLICKINCLUDE c vslick macros c vmacros VSLICKLOAD a 1 b 1 VSLICKSAVE a o b 0 MYPROJECTV
307. exer name to remove a lexer name from the list You can only delete user created lexers e Colors Click this button at the bottom of the dialog to display the Color Settings dialog which allows you to specify the color for color coding elements and other editor elements see Setting Colors for Screen Elements Tokens Tab The Tokens tab shown below provides the capability to specify unique tokens to help you when working with your code To access these settings click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Color Coding setting and select the Tokens tab Figure 10 50 Color Coding Setup Tokens Tab 441 Color Coding Setup Dialog Color Coding Setup Lexer name HI k New Tokens Numbers Strings Language Comments Tags Keywords CCS keywords oC Preprocessor O Punctuation Lib Symbols O Operators User Defined Identifiers Case sensitive ID start characters ID Follow characters O The following options are available e Token type Select from the following token types e Keywords When this option is selected the list box displays the words that have keyword color e CS keywords When this option is selected the list box to the right displays case sensitive words that have keyword color These words are always case sensitive even if the Case Sensitive check box is not selected e Preprocessor When this opti
308. ext area varies depending on the clipboard type A LINE type clipboard is inserted after the current line by default If you want LINE type clipboards inser ted before the current line change the line insert style click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the More Tab A BLOCK type clipboard is inserted before the current character and pushes over all text intersecting with the block No lines are inserted A CHAR type clipboard is inserted before the current character Use the View button to look at the complete text for the selected condensed clipboard While viewing the clipboard you can copy all or part of it to the operating system clipboard Setting the Maximum Number of Clipboards By default a stack of your last 50 clipboards are kept any one of which can be pasted with Ctrl Shift V To change the maximum number of clipboards saved from the main menu click Window Prefer ences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the More Tab Enter a value in the Max clipboards spin box Working with Lines There are several options for working with lines as described in the following sections Clicking Past the End of a Line To have the ability to place the cursor past the end of a line from the main menu click Window Pref erences ex
309. ext file prompting you for a file name and directory location The text file will then be displayed in the editor e Print Displays the Print dialog where you can configure options for printing the tree e Save Subtree and Print Subtree These options function similarly to the above except they apply to the selected subtree e Quick filters Scope Functions Variables Data Types Statements and Others All of these items are for filtering the data displayed in the References view Symbols View Note In SlickEdit Core v3 3 the Symbols view replaces the Classes view found in previous versions A new Class View is available The Symbols view contains the symbol browser which lists symbols from all of the tag files To open the Symbols view click Window gt Show View gt Other expand SlickEdit Views and double click Symbols Figure 6 6 Symbols View 93 Symbols View Symbols C Show all tags e Workspace C Vabicrderschertcrderchart vtg J Packages Namespaces E Classes ae fOrderschart B document OrdersChart Ben bts OrdersChart B title OrdersChart AF getOrderDatat OrdersChart F makechartt OrdersChart F main String args OrdersChart l Imports Uses The top part of the view window contains an option and combo boxes that are used for filtering The bot tom part of the window lists the symbols grouped by category Symbols in your workspace are listed in the top group labele
310. ext to Paste CHAR 1 Cancel Help The numbers in the first column of the list box are used to help you move the selection cursor The second column indicates the clipboard type The third column shows all or a portion of the clipboard text depending on the length Click OK to insert the selected clipboard at the cursor location Click View to see the complete text in the View Clipboard window From here you can copy all or part of the text to the operating system clipboard Enumerate Dialog This dialog contains options for adding incrementing numbers to a selection It is displayed when you click Edit Other gt Enumerate or use the gui_enumerate command Alternatively you can add increment 340 Filter Selection Command Dia log ing numbers to a selection using the enumerate command with options on the command line See the Help system for command syntax Figure 10 2 Enumerate Dialog Enumerate Stark Increment Pad to number of digits Output Co Decimal Hexadecimal Hexadecimal Flags e Start C syntax expression which evaluates to the number used for first line of selection However when the Hexadecimal flags output style is selected the start must be an integer bit position or the first hexadecimal number with which to start e Increment C syntax expression which evaluates to the amount to increment for each line in the selec tion However when the Hexadecimal flags output st
311. extension and assign extension specific options to it including Refer to click the New button located at the bottom of the Extension Options dialog The New Extension dialog box is displayed See Creating a New Extension for more information Delete To delete the selected file extension s setup information click the Delete button located at the bottom of the Extension Options dialog Note that the Fundamental extension setup information cannot be deleted An extension such as C that has other extensions such as H CPP and CXX that refer to it cannot be deleted until all of the extensions that refer to it are deleted Indent Tab You can set the indent configurations for specific file types To access these settings from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog select the Indent tab For more information about working with the features controlled by these options see Syntax Indent and SmartPastee Figure 10 32 Extension Options Indent Tab 400 Extension Options Dialog Extension Options Extension Indent Word Wrap General Comments Comment Wrap Advanced Auto Complete Context Tagging Indent style When tab key reindents the line O None O Never In leading blanks Auto O Always C Strict Syntax indent 4 E Tabs 4 _ Indent with tabs Syntax
312. ey or key binding use the what_is command Help What Is Key For example 1 Click Help What Is Key or activate the SlickEdit Core command line by pressing Esc and type what_is or type what and press the spacebar for auto completion then press Enter 2 The message line will prompt with the text What is key Enter the key sequence in question and the message line will display the information If the key or key sequence is not bound to a command no message will appear Determining the Key Binding of a Command To determine the key to which a command is bound use the where_is command Help Where Is Command For example 1 Click Help Where Is Command or activate the command line and type where_is then press Enter 2 A dialog will prompt with the text Where is command Enter the command in question The Eclipse message area will display the key binding or state that the command is not bound to a key Starting a Program from the Command Line Shelling You can use the command line to start a program Press Esc to toggle the cursor to the command line Type the program name and arguments and press Enter When entering a command that the editor does not recognize as an internal command a path search is performed to find an external program to execute To use a program whose name contains space characters enclose the name in double quotes For ex ample this is will starta program named this is exe if it exists
313. f Auto Complete 146 Auto Complete CMest cppy O2 Sei E void main int arge char targvy unsa Keywords Go unsigned W Symbols Eee void unseteny const char string These visual hints can also be individually turned on or off through the Auto Complete options See Auto Complete Tab Tip Auto Complete can be activated manually by using the autocomplete command By default this command is not bound to a key Key bindings can be set with the Key Bindings dialog click Win dow Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Key Bindings setting For more information see Creating Bindings To cancel out of Auto Complete mode use the Escape key To scroll through the items in the completion list use the Up Down PgUp and PgDn keys Optionally you can use Tab and Shift Tab to cycle through the choices If a completion is selected you can press Space Enter or any non identifier key to cause the selected completion to be inserted along with the character typed except for Enter Use Shift Space to insert a real space rather than the completion Use Ctrl Shift Space to insert the next character of the currently selected completion This can be useful if you only want part of the word being completed and you do not want to type it yourself Optionally pressing Tab will cause auto completion to attempt to insert the longest unique prefix match of al
314. f FTP operations See FTP for more information SlickEdit Output Displays output from various operations within the editor such as errors Preview Provides a portal for viewing information in other files without having to open them in the editor It auto matically shows this information when you are working with certain features See Preview View for more information References Displays the list of symbol references uses found the last time that you used the Go to Reference fea ture Cirl or push_ref command see Symbol Navigation for more information See References View for more information Regex Evaluator 28 The SlickEdit Core Command Line Provides the capability to interactively create and test regular expressions See The Regex Evaluator for more details SlickEdit Search Displays the results of multi file searches or when the option List all occurrences is selected on the Find and Replace View See Find and Replace for more information about searching and replacing Slick C Stack Displays errors that occur within the editor If errors occur during normal use you can send this informa tion to Product Support as a reference see Contacting Product Support If an error occurs in one of your macros you can use this information to help debug it Double clicking on a line of code in this window will open the file and go to the line in the file that contains the error Symbols Contains the
315. f tags which are indent sensitive such as the lt pre gt tag are used e Align deprecated comments Indicates whether return comments should be aligned to the first line of comment text No alignment is performed if tags which are indent sensitive such as the lt pre gt tag are used 251 Javadoc Editor e Add blank line after parameter comment If checked a blank line is added if a tag follows an param tag Add blank line after parameter comment group If checked a blank line is added if a tag follows an param group Add blank line after return comment If checked a blank line is added if a tag follows the return tag Add blank line after description If checked a blank line is added between the description and the first tag This option is ignored if the description contains a custom or unsupported tag e Add blank line after example If checked a blank line is added if a tag follows the example tag Javadoc Editor Use the Javadoc Editor to generate Javadoc syntax comments for Java C C JavaScript and Slick Ce To access the Javadoc Editor right click within the edit window and select Edit Javadoc Com ments To add a custom or unsupported tag append the tag with an prefix and its description into the De scription text box You can add serial serialField and serialData fields this way For more information see Sun s Javadoc documentation at http java sun com Organizing Java Impo
316. f the Extension Options dialog box This button is unavailable if other extensions already refer to this one Refer to is also available on the New Extension dialog box to set when adding a new extension Creating a New Extension If SlickEdit Core does not provide options for a language extension that you are working with you can add the extension On the Extension Options dialog click the New button and the following dialog is dis played Figure 7 2 New Extension Dialog New Extension Extension Hefer to gt Type the extension without 4 dot and press ENTER to add the extension To make the new extension s configuration reflect refer to that of an existing extension select ap extension fram the Refer to combo box Enter the new extension in the Extension text box without the Dot If the language is similar to another language that is already available and you wish to have the new language configuration the same as an existing one you can select the language to refer to from the Refer to combo box After a new extension is added you can change its reference at any time by selecting it from the Exten sion drop down list on the Extension Options dialog and then by clicking the Refer to button See Refer ring to Extensions for more information Deleting an Extension To delete the selected file extension s setup information click the Delete button located at the bottom of the Extension Options
317. fault is 6 Note that some line commands require four characters e g BNDS TABS COLS MASK To completely remove the prefix area set the prefix area width to 0 501 ISPF Primary Commands Only the following line commands are allowed in read only mode e ISPF Line Labels Define a label e ISPF Line Command BNDS Insert a column boundary ruler line e ISPF Line Command COLS Insert a column ruler line e ISPF Line Command First Expose one or more lines at the beginning of a block of excluded lines e ISPF Line Command Last Expose one or more lines at the beginning of a block of excluded lines e ISPF Line Command Show Expose one or more lines having the leftmost indentation level in a block of excluded lines e ISPF Line Command TABS Displays the tab definition line e ISPF Line Command Exclude Specifies one or more lines to be hidden excluded e ISPF Line Command Select Select a block of lines e Enter places cursor in prefix area When this check box is selected the Enter key places the cursor in the prefix area of the next line When this check box is cleared the Enter key places the cursor in column 1 of the next line e Right CTRL Enter Send When this check box is selected the Enter key places the cursor at the beginning of the next line and the Right Ctrl key is used to execute line commands When this check box is cleared the Right Ctrl key acts like a normal control key and the Enter key is us
318. ferences Displays the list of references for the selected symbol in the References View just as if you pressed Ctrl in the editor window See Symbol Navigation for more information e Calls Uses Displays a tree of symbols that are used by this symbol or called by this function See Viewing Symbol Uses with the Calling Tree for more information Viewing Symbol Uses with the Calling Tree View symbol uses to see what symbols variables functions methods classes etc are used by a spe cific function or method To view the symbols that a particular function or method uses first create a project or open an existing project Then from the Symbols view right click on the desired function or method and select Calls or uses The Symbol Uses Calling Tree dialog will be displayed Tip You can also access the Symbol Uses Calling Tree from within the Outline View by right clicking on a symbol and selecting Show Call Tree Figure 6 7 Symbol Uses Calling Tree Dialog 96 Symbols View WW Symbol Uses Calling Tree args args CASE _INSENSITIVE ORDER BS CaselnsensitiveComparator EF charAtdint D F charAttint index CharSequence BF checkBounds byte bytes int offset int length F codePointAttint index F codePointBeforetint index F codePointCount int beginInde int endIndex Comparable Comparator F compareTotObject obj F compareTotString anotherString F compareTolIgnoreCase String str
319. ferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting Select the appropriate language from the Extension drop down list then select the Context Tagging Tab Select either Go to Definition nav igates to symbol definition proc or Go to Definition navigates to symbol declaration proto See Code Navigation for more information Go to reference Displays a list of references for the selected symbol in the References View and optionally navigates to the first reference Click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Context Tagging Options setting Check the option Go to Reference only lists references if you just want to build the list of references See Code Naviga tion for more information Show in symbol browser Displays the selected symbol in the Symbols View Note that this feature does not work for local variables or symbols from the current file that are not in a tag file 356 Go to Definition Dialog e Manage tag files Displays the Context Tagging Tag Files Dialog which can be used to update your tag files Go to Definition Dialog The Go to Definition dialog gui_find_proc command can be used to navigate to symbols It lists all tags that match the prefix you have typed so far To display the dialog use the gui_find_proc command Tip This dialog has been deprecated in favor of the Find Symbol View
320. ff F File Compare Options Jump to next diff after copy block Automatic directory mapping C During multi file diff automatically dose after last difference C When closing multi file diff do not prompt to save results _ Put buttons at top of diff dialog C Launch multi file diffs in a separate process Starting position O Start at top of file Start at first difference Dialog initialization History Current buffer name Setup options for the DIFFzilla dialog are described as follows e Show gauge during diff When selected a gauge control will show various processing statistics while you wait for the differences output to complete e Jump to next diff after copy block When selected the cursor is moved to the next difference when you apply changes from one file to the other For example after clicking Block on the Diff dialog box the tab moves to the next difference This option has no effect on interleaved output e Automatic directory mapping When selected the Path 2 text box is automatically updated when you type a directory in the Path 1 text box During multi file diff automatically close after last difference When selected clicking Next Diff on the Diff dialog box when there are no more differences triggers the Close button on that dialog box Put buttons at top of diff dialog When selected the buttons that control operations such as Next Diff Prev Diff and Block are displayed at the top of
321. fier Other Tabirara erara aara aa e a a an a aa aaa sees 242 7 10 C C Beautifier Schemes Tab 243 7 11 C C Compiler Properties Dialog eeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeneeseaeeeeeaaeeseneeeseaeeesaeeneeees 244 7 12 C C Preprocessing Dialog ikee ina i a a a raaa aaa aaea aS 246 13 Java Options Dialog EE 248 7 14 Organize Imports Dialog cccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee cae eeeaaeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeeeaeeeseeeeesaeeeeeneeee 252 7 15 XML Formatting Options Dialog cceceeeeeeeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee cae eeeeaee senses eeaaeeeeaeeeseeeesiaeeeeeeeeee 254 7 16 XML Beautifier Indent abener ieda Ee E r EE E EE E A E E ERA 256 7 17 XML Beautifier Tags Talo eor E AEA E AE AAEE EAEE AEEA ARAE E 258 xiv SlickEdit Core v3 3 for Eclipse 7 18 XML Beautifier Attributes Values Tab o oo eee ceeneeeeeeecneeeeeenaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaeeeeeee 260 7 19 XML Beautifier Comments Tab c cccccceceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeesaaeeseeeesaaeeseaeeseeeeeesaeeseeeeeaas 262 7 20 XML Beautifier Advanced Tab 263 7 21 XML Beautifier Schemes Tab 264 7 22 URL Mappings Dialog eteren eee eene ee ee enne eee teenie ee eee eaae ee seta aaeee A A E R 265 7 23 Web Browser Setup Dialog ccceecceceeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeecaaeeeeeeeecaeeeseaeeseeeesiaeeeeaeeeeaas 266 7 24 HTML Formatting Options Dialog 0 ceeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaaeeseaeeeseeeesiaeeeeeee
322. for UNIX shell scripts which use to indicate that the double quote is not the start a string 448 Color Coding Setup Dialog e Here Document UNIX Shells Perl Activates support for HERE documents Note that if you prefix your terminator with one of our lexer names you will get embedded language color coding Example of a HERE document in Perl where HTMLEOF is used as the terminator to get HTML embedded lan guage color coding print lt lt HTMLEOF lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt lt TITLE gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY gt lt BODY gt lt HTML gt HTMLEOF Unknown languages are color coded in string color Embedded language colors are user definable e Color identifiers followed by as a function For language such as C Java and Sick Ce an identifier followed by a parenthesis always indicates a function e Special coloring for package and import statements Java When this option is selected the Java syntax package and import statements are supported This option is forced on for the lexer name Java You must add the package and or import keywords to your keyword list in order for this option to have any effect e Preprocessing keywords can appear anywhere When this option is selected preprocessing keywords are color coded even if they are not only preceded by white space e Identifiers may start with a number COBOL When this option is selected identifiers may start wi
323. g found during beautification e Add Display the Add Tag dialog This dialog allows you to add a tag definition to the list and specify how it will be beautified e Remove Used to remove the currently selected tag 272 HTML Content Specify how to beautify content from the following options e Reformat When off all white space and line breaks are preserved However tags are formatted tag case attribute case etc e Indent When on the selected tag s content bounded by the opening and closing tag will be inden ted one syntax indent level e Literal When on all white space and line breaks are preserved In addition tags within the content are treated as literal text If Reformat is on then leading indent is adjusted Tip Some examples of content settings for specific tags are e XMP Literal e PRE All Content check boxes off e BLOCKQUOTE Reformat Indent e STYLE Reformat Literal End tag When on the selected tag has an end tag For example the tag lt TD gt has a ending tag tag that is lt TD gt so End tag would be checked in this case End tag required When on the selected tag s ending tag is required This means that the ending tag is not optional An example of a tag whose ending tag could be optional is lt P gt Preserve tag body When on all properties of the body of the tag selected will be preserved This is especially useful for JSP ASP tags where you do
324. g Features Let SlickEdit Core do the formatting Syntax indenting SmartPastee and code beautifiers are just a few of the automatic formatting features in SlickEdit Core For more information see the topics in Chapter 6 Editing Features Utilize utilities SlickEdit Core provides many utilities for working with your code such as DIFFzillae 3 Way Merge a RegEx Evaluator math commands and even a calculator See the topics in Chapter 8 Get Started Tools and Utilities for more information Get Started To get started check out Chapter 2 Quick Start This will guide you through configuration of some of the most common user preference settings so you can get more work done in less time your way Accessing Documentation Documentation and Conventions Accessing Documentation Documentation is located in the SlickEdit Core installation directory at lt PathToSlickEditCore gt eclipse plugins com slickedit core_VERSION docs The docs directory contains PDFs of the following items e The User Guide This guide provides comprehensive information about using SlickEdit Core The Slick C Macro Programming Guide This guide contains details about how to write macros using the Slick C macro programming language e Emulation charts for the following editors BBEdit Brief CodeWarrior CodeWrighto CUA default Epsilon GNU Emacs ISPF SlickEdit Text Mode edition Vim Visual C 6 Visual Studio a
325. g and select the Word Wrap Tab wrapping occurs when the left margin is reached regardless of the Left or Backspace key configurations e Jump over tab characters If selected moving the cursor over a tab character with the Left or Right arrow key causes the cursor to jump across the virtual space To allow the Left and Right arrow keys to cursor into virtual space of tab characters deselect this option This setting also controls whether clicking in the buffer with the mouse to either position the cursor or to make a selection will align the cursor to the nearest tab character or allow the cursor to be placed in virtual space between tab characters e Pull chars backspace If selected pressing the Backspace key when in Replace mode when Start in insert mode is off Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting and select the More Tab removes the previous character and moves the cursor left If you want the previous character to be replaced with a space character deselect this option e Hack tabs backspace If selected pressing the Backspace key when the previous character is a tab 435 Context Tagginge Options Dia log causes the rest of the line to be moved to the previous tab stop If you are using a mode that has a syn tax indent for each level that is different from the tab settings see Indenting with Tabs deselect this option If you want your Backspace
326. g options e C Refactoring Displays a menu of C C refactoring options See C Refactoring for more in formation e Quick Refactoring Offers two Quick Refactorings Rename and Modify Parameter List See Quick Refactoring for more information Set Breakpoint Sets a debugging breakpoint See Setting Breakpoints for more information e Sort by Function Name and Sort by Line Number These options toggle the display of symbols sor ted either alphabetically by function name or by line number e Show Hierarchy Organizes symbols by their scope within the current file Deselect this option to dis play all of the symbols in one flat list e Show Statements C C Java Visual Basic only This option controls the Statement Level Tagging feature When selected the view shows an outline of all statements in each function within the current file This allows you to see a primitive function flowchart or to navigate to a specific statement within a function 87 Find Symbol View e Display Files Disabled in SlickEdit Core Displays the names of the files that are open in the editor Deselect this option to only show symbols in the current file allowing you to use the window as a true outline view e Auto Expand Automatically expands all levels within the current file If this option is deselected you will need to click to expand items manually Expand All Expands all symbols or levels in the current file e Expand 1
327. g substitution parameter names and values are pre defined for use in an item template The 106 Substitution Parameters default delimiter is used Table 6 2 Predefined Substitution Parameters Parameter Name Description itemname Name of item entered as on the Add New Hem dia log fileinputname Name of item entered as on the Add New Hem dia log without file extension safeitemname Name of item entered as on the Add New Item dia log with all unsafe characters replaced with safe characters For example if the item name was My Custom Class then the safeitemname would evaluate to My_Custom_Class for a C source code file upcasesafeitemname lowcasesafeitemname Same as safeitemname with all characters up percased Same as safeitemname with all characters lowercased tempdir Location of operating system temp directory No trailing file separator rootnamespace Root namespace or package for the current project This is typically used for C and Java projects to find the namespace containing Main or main in the case of Java ampmtime Time of day in the form hh mm am pm Example 11 34pm localtime Time of day in locale specific format time Time of day in the form hh mm ss localdate Current date in locale specific format date Current date in the form mm dd yyyy projectname Current project name no path no exten
328. g with the let ter p and ending with the letter t Two possible matches are pot and pat s t Matches the letter s followed by any number of characters followed by the nearest letter t Two pos sible matches are seat and st for while Matches the strings for or while Ap Matches lines beginning with a file name XY Z Matches x followed by one or more occurrences of y followed by z Brief Regular Expressions 531 Brief Regular Expressions Brief regular expressions are defined in the following table Table 11 16 Brief Regular Expressions Brief Regular Expression Definition Matches beginning of line lt Matches beginning of line Matches end of line gt Matches end of line Matches any character except newline Minimal match of zero or more of any character ex cept newline This is the same as X Minimal match of one or more occurrences of X See Minimal versus Maximal Matching for more in formation X Maximal match of zero or more of any character ex cept newline This is the same as X Maximal match of zero or more occurrences of X X Maximal match of one or more occurrences of X X n1 Matches exactly n1 occurrences of X Use to avoid ambiguous expressions For example a 9 1 searches for nine instances of the letter a followed Dy at X n1 Maximal match of at least n1 occurrences of X X n2 Maxima
329. ge Comments Tags Hex numbers Octal and binary numbers Oxted CC ste 0 Intel assembler 4 4h Intel assembler 0 Intel assembler aad Motorola asm C 4246 Intel assembler eHateatt Basic aca Basic peta Rexx Joreee ic z e Fortran 6 Binary numbers C Mo Hex COBOL Floating point numbers base number exponent Float Ada Floating point with E exponent Floating point with D exponent No exponents COBOL Do not color code numbers HTML C allow underscores in integers Ada The following options are available e Hex numbers e Ox C Style When this option is selected text such as 0x123ABC is color coded in number color h Intel assembler When this option is selected text such as 123ABCh is color coded in number color e Motorola When this option is selected text such as 123ABC is color coded in number color 444 Color Coding Setup Dialog e amp H Basic When this option is selected text such as amp H123ABC is color coded in number color e RAN Rexx When this option is selected strings such as 123ABC X are color coded in num ber color e Z Fortran When this option is selected strings such as Z 123ABC are color coded in num ber color e No Hex COBOL When this option is selected text such as 123ABC is not color coded in number color By
330. groups Figure 8 7 Regex Evaluator View Regex Evaluator Test Cazes Regular Expression Unix SlickEdit Brief BEE Options C Multiline mode Case sensitive Entering Test Cases Type your test cases in the Test Cases text box These test cases will be evaluated as you type your reg ular expression in the bottom field A wavy underline will indicate the ranges of text that match the entire 321 Using the Calculator and Math Commands expression Matches are also marked with a yellow arrow that appears in the gutter to the left of the test case You can hover your mouse on this arrow to see a tooltip which displays the matched expression de tails When groups tagged expressions are used in your regular expression pattern the groups will be boxed and highlighted in yellow in the Test Cases section Entering a Regular Expression Enter the regular expression to test in the text field Use the radio buttons to select the expression syntax that you wish to use UNIX SlickEdit or Brief Click the arrow to the right of the regular expression field to pick from a menu of common syntax and operators Regex Evaluator Options The following options and buttons are available on the Regex Evaluator view Multiline mode If Multiline mode is selected rather than searching through the test cases line by line regular expressions will be searched on all lines at once This is useful for test cases that wrap to the
331. gs column and select New Tag Type the name of the tag without angle brackets or attributes Click OK and the new tag is now listed in the Tags column Note Tag names cannot have spaces If you create a new tag with spaces SlickEdit converts the spaces to underscores in the dialog To add all of the tags from the current file to a selected scheme right click in the Tags column and select Add Tags from Current File To remove a tag from a selected scheme right click on the tag and select Delete Tag Deleting SlickEdit Core default tags or any tag that is based on another is not recommended If you attempt to do this you will be prompted whether to continue Formatting Settings The tabs on the XML HTML Formatting dialog contain settings that control how your text is formatted when XML HTML Formatting is enabled The following sections describe the tabs and how each setting works Before configuring settings be sure the scheme and tag s that you want to affect are selected Caution XML HTML Formatting does not currently affect XML or HTML Beautifier settings If you run the beautifier on documents that have been automatically formatted through XML HTML Formatting you may find unexpected results General Settings The General tab of the XML HTML Formatting dialog is shown below Figure 7 34 XML HTML Formatting General Tab 285 Formatting Settings General Content Wrap Tag Layout
332. gt would be beautified to lt TAG gt Under normal circumstances you will want to preserve the case of your XML tags but for certain special cases e g XHTML you may want to change this setting Tag settings The settings in this group box apply to the tag that is selected in the list box The lt DEFAULT TAGs tag item in the list of tags specifies settings to use when no settings exist for a tag found during beautification e Add Display the Add Tag dialog This dialog allows you to add a tag definition to the list and specify how it will be beautified e Remove Used to remove the currently selected tag Content Specify how to beautify content from the following options 258 XML e Reformat When off all white space and line breaks are preserved However tags are formatted tag case attribute case etc e Indent When on nested tags will be indented one syntax indent level Furthermore if Reformat is on the selected tag s CDATA content i e plain text bounded by the opening and closing tag will be indented one syntax indent level e Literal When on all white space and line breaks are preserved In addition tags within the content are treated as literal text If Reformat is on then leading indent is adjusted This option is useful for XHTML Tip Some examples of content settings for specific tags are e style Literal content is indented to the same level as the lt style gt open tag e
333. guration Files ccecsesesceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeee senses seaeeseaaeeseeeesaeeeeeneeee 487 RI re Et EE 489 Search Order for Configuration Files cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee scenes eeaeeeeeeeeseeeesiaeeeeeeeeee 489 Search Order for Executable Files ccccccceseeceeeeeeceeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeseeeeesaeeeeeneeens 489 VLX File and Color Coding ccccceeeeeceeeececeeeeeeeneeceaeeesaaaeeeeneeceaaeeeeaaeseeeeeesaaeseeaaeeseeeeenaeeseenees 490 Modifying the VLX File to Change a Color Definition 0 0 eccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeees 491 Creating a Lexer Name and a New VLX File ecccceeeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeee 491 Editing the Key Binding Source eccececeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeecaeeeeeaeeseneeeeeaaeeeeaaeeseeeesnaeeeseaeeee 498 Menus e le e WEE 499 Creating and Editing Menus ccceescceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee seats eeeaee scenes eeeaeeeeaaeeseeeesaeeeeeneeee 499 Using the ISPF and XEDIT Emulations 501 ISPF Options Dialog cecccceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeeceeeeceaeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaaeeseaaeseeeeeesaeeesaeeesaes 501 ISPF Primary Commande isore iari diria iieii aiii daak edie iadaaa iiaia 503 ISPF Line Commands eaaa aaea aanas e ia Aaaa aaa is a aaa AE EAE 505 Regular Expression Syntax cccccccscecececeeeeeeceeneeeceeeeceaeeseeeeecaeeeseaaeseeeeeesaeeseaaeeseeessaeeeseneeee 520 UNIX Regular Expressions soseri rreri areri rnke oe RAEE RAS TERRAE EEEE TER
334. h a zero and specify binary numbers by prefixing the number with the character b If no operator is specified between two unary expressions addition is assumed The characters and comma are stripped from the expression before it is evalu ated The mathx matho and mathb commands evaluate the Slick C language expression given and places the result in the message line in hexadecimal octal and binary respectively The expression can have the following unary operators e bitwise complement e negation no change The available binary operators are listed below from lowest to highest precedence A comma after the operator indicates that the next operator is of the same precedence Table 8 1 Binary Operators Operator Description amp bitwise AND bitwise OR 324 Math Commands Operator Description A xor blank s addition implied addition subtraction 1 multiplication division remainder Wu power Hexadecimal numbers are prefixed with the characters 0x or just x Octal numbers are prefixed with the character O or digit 0 Note Not all Slick C language operators are supported Math Command Examples The following table shows some examples of math commands Table 8 2 Math Command Examples Example Description math 2 5 2 Multiplies 2 5 times 2 math 5 2 Divides 5 by 2 mathx 255 Converts 255 to h
335. h you can select the instance to navigate to To go to the next occurrence press Cirl G or use the find_next command To go to the previous occurrence press Ctrl Shift G or use the find_prev com mand Alternatively press Ctrl Down next_tag command or Cirl Up prev_tag command to place the curs or on the next or previous symbol definition Using the Find Symbol View The Find Symbol view Search Find Symbol is used to locate symbols tags which are declared or defined in your code It allows you to search for symbols by name using either a regular expression sub string or fast prefix match See Find Symbol View for descriptions of the options that are available More Symbol Navigation Methods There are several other methods for navigating to symbols e The Symbols View shows the symbols for all tag files Right click in the view window and select Find Tag to search for a specific symbol You can also use the cb_find command to find the symbol under the cursor and display it in the Symbols view At the SlickEdit Core command line use the f command and completion keys Space and to enter a tag name For example if tagging the C run time library type f str on the command line for a list of tag names starting with str such as strcpy strcmp etc e To navigate to a Slick C symbol you can use the fp command a shortcut for find_proc If editing a Slick C macro then enter the push_tag command Ctrl Dot to find the sy
336. hash tables structures and unions Currently the Variable Editor does not have enough symbolic information to give you member names of structures or unions Structures will appear as an array Figure 9 3 Variable Editor Dialog 336 Setting Macro Variables W Variable Editor _AppTypeList_hashtab applet l custon application Applet runs in a web browser Custom command lines for execute and debug Application requires java exe to run Value Applet runs in a web browser Cancel Help Delete Format Evpand All Jil Cofanse All p tai Squish The data structure of the variable is displayed in the list box at the top of the dialog and the value for each entry is displayed in the Value text box For a list of all elements on this dialog see Variable Editor Dialog 337 338 Chapter 10 SlickEdit Core Dialogs 339 Select Text to Paste Dialog Editing Dialogs This section describes the SlickEdit Core dialogs associated with text editing See Text Editing for more details about editing operations Select Text to Paste Dialog This dialog is used to view and insert recently used clipboards It is displayed when you press Ctrl Shift V in CUA emulation click Edit List Clipboards or use the list_clipboards command If there are no clipboards the message line states No clipboards Figure 10 1 Select Text to Paste Dialog WW Select T
337. he current line e Extension specific project Not available in SlickEdit Core Click this button to set project properties specific to a file extension e Context Menus These options specify which context menu to display in the editor window base on whether a text selection is made in the editor window e Menu if no selection This specifies the menu that is displayed when right clicking in an edit win dow that does not have a selection e Menu if selection This specifies the menu that is displayed when right clicking in an edit window that has a selection 414 Extension Options Dialog e Select first affects all extensions When checked default a selection can be made with the right mouse button instead of displaying the extension specific menu When this is not checked se lect menu items by clicking and dragging the mouse Begin End pairs Specify the begin end pairs to use for the selected extension in a format similar to a regular expression This text box is unavailable for languages that have special begin end matching built in See Begin End Structure Matching for more information about begin end pairs and using this option e Word chars The word characters affect the operation of all word oriented commands including word searching You can use a dash character to specify a range such as A Z which specifies upper case letters To specify the dash character as a valid word character place a d
338. he following ways 22 Switching Between the SlickEdit Core Editor and Ec e To open a source file in the workspace from the Navigator view select the desired file Right click the file then select Open e To open a file using a specific editor from the Navigator view select the desired file Right click the file then select Open With e To open a file that is outside of the workspace from the main menu click File gt Open Figure 3 3 Opening Source Files with SlickEdit Core Java C SamplesWSEJavaDemo OrderChart OrdersChart java Eclipse SDK File Edit Source Refactor Format Display Navigate Search Project Macro Tools Run C C Refactoring Window Help i SO SHG Oe er HB Packa 3 fg Hierar S Symb ER orderschart java x4 D I BasictimeSeries java ei Si Java B Outline 23 as i il SI Sei OrderChart A import java text SimpleDateFormat java util Date 8 default package import 8 AU OrdersChart java Di com jrefinery IC a ID cor a Di cor New Open H cor open wt zs ID con 8 cor si ID con e ID cor B Copy cor ES Copy Qualified Name z ID cor CS Paste So Delete zs ID cor zs ID cor zs ID cor a ID jav az ID ore 3 a D ord a Import zs ID ord g Export H ore s org 8 org i EB org amp Refresh OR orc zs ID ore a ID ore zs ID ord a ID ore RS ore az ID ore zs ID org a ma Open Type Hiera
339. he lazy dog Pressing Enter will result in String x The quick brown fox CURSOR_HERE jumped over the lazy dog Comment Wrap Tab Comment wrapping options can be configured for C C C Java and Slick Ce files These options are currently unavailable for other languages Use the Comment Wrap tab to activate comment wrapping and configure options for how block line and doc comments are wrapped Tip After configuring comment wrap settings you can use the Reflow Comment dialog to reflow block comments paragraphs or a selection of the current file See Reflowing Comments To access the Comment Wrap tab from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEd it and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Op tions dialog make sure the extension you want to work with is selected in the Extension box then select the Comment Wrap tab Figure 10 36 Extension Options Comment Wrap Tab 411 Extension Options Dialog Extension Options Extension C Indent Word Wrap General Comments Comment Wrap Advanced Auto Complete Context Tagging C Enable block comment wrap Enable line comment wrap _ Enable doc comment wrap Start wrapping online 2 Ge Comment width Fixed width _ Preserve width on existing comments C Maximum right column C Continue bullet list on Enter Automatic width
340. he occurrence found except when the occurrence found is mixed case possibly mul tiple capitalized words In this case the replace string is used without modification Replace commands only Replaced occurrences are highlighted with modified color To set default search options see Search Tab If the option is not specified you will be prompted with the message Yes No Last Go Quit Suspend for each occurrence of the Search for string Replace and c Commands The replace commands replace and c can be used in the command line The syntax of these com mands is C string1 string2 options or replace string1 string2 options The available options are the same as for the find and slash commands see Find and Slash Com mands above You can perform one of the following actions with the replace command c by pressing the correspond ing key Table 6 11 Replace Key 187 Find and Replace Commands Key Action Y or Space N or Backspace Make change and continue searching No change and continue searching L or Dot Make change and stop searching Gor Make change and change the rest without prompt ing Q or Esc Exit command By default the cursor is NOT re stored to its original position If you want the cursor restored to its original position from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree the
341. he selection If using a char acter selection where there are partially selected lines comment characters are placed based on your settings The comment characters that are placed to the left and right of the text are also specified in your comment settings e To uncomment lines in a selection from the main menu click Format Uncomment Line or use the comment_erase command Surrounding line comment characters are removed from the line If there is no active selection the current line will be uncommented Uncomment Line only works for well formed comments which means that every line in the selection is commented and that the comment characters occur in the same column Whether you are creating a comment block or a comment line if the selected text already contains com ments another set of comment characters is added SlickEdite Core attempts to preserve the indentation level of the code and any existing comments when adding or removing comment characters Comment Block and Line Settings To specify the characters and other settings used for comment blocks and lines from the main menu click Format Comment Setup or use the comment_setup command The Extension Options dialog is displayed open to the Comments Tab Select the extension you wish to affect from the Extension drop down list The Comment block group box provides eight fields to specify the characters used in your commenting style If you want to apply a comment with no
342. height of the window when the cursor moves out of view e Scroll when Specifies how close in number of lines the cursor may get to the top or bottom of the window before scrolling occurs Does not affect horizontal scrolling Preserve column on top bottom If selected the top of butter Ctrl Home and bottom of butter Ctrl End commands do not change the column position unless already at the top or bottom of the buffer Show tool tips If selected the pop up tool tip Help messages are displayed when the mouse pointer rolls over a button Delay ms Specifies the delay in tenths of a second before tool tip messages are displayed Key message delay Selecting this option specifies the delay before a prefix key is displayed in tenths of a second The prefix key is not displayed if the next key is pressed before the delay specified in this text box Hide mouse pointer Selecting this option hides the mouse pointer when typing The mouse pointer is displayed when moving the mouse or when a dialog box is displayed Allow drag drop text If selected selected text can be copied or moved by dragging and dropping the selected text using the left mouse button Windows 3 1 style open dialog Windows only When selected a Windows 3 1 style Open dialog box is used to open and save files This dialog does not support all the features of the default Open dia log for example encoding options are not supported Line insert style Sli
343. hen creating the binding keys 0 9 A Z or F1 F12 These files can be helpful for determining what was recorded because if you use this method to bind a recorded macro you will not have an opportunity to name the macro or see a list of macros created with this method they will not appear in the List Macros or Key Bindings dialogs Running a Recorded Macro If you have saved the macro and created a key binding for it the easiest way to run it is to simply press the associated key sequence You can also run it by e Typing the name of the macro in the SlickEdit Core command line then pressing Enter e Using the List Macros Dialog Macro List Macros or list_macros command select the macro and click Run You can run the last macro that you recorded whether it was saved or not by clicking Macro Execute last macro Ctrl F12 or execute_last_macro command Saving and Editing Recorded Macros When a recorded macro is saved the source code of the macro is appended to the vusrmacs e user macros file located in your configuration directory To edit a macro that has previously been recorded and saved from the main menu click Macro List Macros or use the list_macros command to display the List Macros Dialog The list box on the left dis plays a list of your recorded macros Select the macro you want to edit then click Edit The vusrmacs e file opens in the editor Save the file when you re done making edits If you are us
344. hen you invoked the dialog e Save Settings Saves beautify options in uformat ini file These settings are used by the h_beautify command e Restrict to selection When on only lines in the selection are beautified e Sync extension options When on the extension options are updated to reflect any changes that these dialogs have in common The tabs on the HTML Beautifier are described in the sections below Indent Tab 270 HTML Figure 7 25 HTML Beautifier Indent Tab HTML Beautifier Indent Tags Attributes Values Comments Advanced Schemes Beautify Indent for each level Syntax indent 4 C Indent with tabs Cancel Tab size Original tab size Help Max line length Reset Broken tag lines Indent from tag column by Save Settings Use original relative indent Preserve original indent Sync extension options The following settings are available e Indent for each level Syntax indent The amount to indent for each new nesting level We have put the words Syntax indent in parenthesis to help indicate that this field has the same meaning as the Syntax indent text box in the Extension Options dialog box Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Ex tension Options dialog select the Indent Tab By default we initialize this text box with your current ex tension setup setting In
345. iara eecht eege tie eebe deeg e 32 Common SlickEdit Core Commande cccceeeeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaaeeseeeeeteaeeeseneeenaes 33 Using the Mouse and Keyboard o oo eee eeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaaeeeeseeaaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeneaaes 35 Key Shortcuts in Text Boxes ceccccecceeeeesececeeeeeeaaeeeeseeeseaeeeeeaeeseeeeseaaesseaeeeteaeeseaeeeeneees 35 Redefining COMMON keys esecceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaaeeeeeeeceeaeeeeaaeeeeeeeesaeeseaaeeseeeeesaeeeeeneeee 37 4 User Preferences ai dari tentechagucttantedcauseitcevanwateciecncueiaueantadsuedutvantansckeuesaiausitundduulanwnesuenstaas 39 Introduction to User Preferences AAA 40 Global Preferences g et dee eet aetna didi eege Eege ee A0 Extension Specific Preferences ccccccesceceeceececeeeeneececaeeeeaaeseeneeecaeeeeaaeeseeeeeeaeeseeneeee 40 SUE EE 41 Supported EMUuIlations 2 cccccceuceeeteeuedee sieves cee eae rdeeseee cae edieveeaeneen rede veveavie EEN diain 41 Changing EMUulationS EE 42 Determining KeyS FUNCTIONS rrotat iari ravi aaa aiaa ta Kra AAA aana paS Paai 43 Key and Mouse BIndingS roar aai iEn E EE E EREA A a A AE AEREE AEREA ER 44 UNE NET Le ue WEE 44 Managing Egger deene oui e aed Peckeeanl e dene eee tel gt 45 Key Binding Settings ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeecaeeeeeaeeseaeeeseeaeeeeaeeceeaeeesaaeseeeeeeseeeesiaaeeeenees 50 Cursor Mouse and Scroll Settings 52 Settingithe Cursor Stylea aana aaa ne aa beeen ited awd genge
346. ibes other general display options that you might find useful Displaying a Vertical Line You can choose to display a vertical line in all files that are open for editing To access this setting from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the General Tab In the Vertical line column spin box specify the column number at which you want the vertical line displayed A value of O default displays no vertical line Click on the colored box to the right of this option to change the color of the vertical line Viewing Line Numbers The line number of the current cursor position is always shown in the status line of SlickEdit Core along the bottom right edge of the editor You can also choose to display line numbers in the left gutter of editor windows To toggle display of line numbers for the current document from the main menu click Display gt Line Numbers or use the view_line_numbers_toggle command on the SlickEdit Core command line To always display line numbers for any file with a specific extension complete the following steps 1 From the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting 2 From the Extension drop down list select the extension to work with 3 Click the General Tab then click the Display line
347. icodeData 3 1 0 txt found on the Unicode Consortium Web site ht tp unicode org Table 11 18 Unicode SubCategories for Regular Expressions Subcategory Description Lu Letter Uppercase LI Letter Lowercase Lt Letter Titlecase Lo Letter Other Mn Mark Non Spacing Mc Mark Spacing Combining Me Mark Enclosing Nd Number Decimal Digit NI Number Letter No Number Other Pc Punctuation Connector Pd Punctuation Dash Ps Punctuation Open Pe Punctuation Close Pi Punctuation Initial quote may behave like Ps or Pe depending on usage Pf Punctuation Final quote may behave like Ps or Pe depending on usage Po Punctuation Other Sm Symbol Math 538 Unicode Character Blocks for Regular Expressions Subcategory Description Sc Symbol Currency Sk Symbol Modifier So Symbol Other Zs Separator Space Zl Separator Line Zp Separator Paragraph Cc Other Control Cf Other Format Cs Other Surrogate Co Other Private Use Cn Other Not Assigned no characters in the file have this property Unicode Character Blocks for Regular Expressions The Unicode consortium standard regular expression block categories are supported The syntax for spe cifying a character block is p IlsBlockName The above syntax matches the characters in the block specified The following syntax matches all cha
348. id width Gidheight 60 The width and height parameters are in twips 1440 twips equal one inch on the display Menu Editor Dialog The Menu Editor dialog shown below contains options for editing menus To access this dialog click Macro Menus select the menu to edit from the list then click Open Figure 10 15 Menu Editor Dialog 364 Menu Editor Dialog Menu Editor Menu name md menu D A T T am Caption Cancel oO is Help Cmd help file menu Message Displays File menu Submenu Auto Enable a a ID OH zi g amp File amp Edit amp 5earch wiew amp Project Gud amp Debug Document aMacra amp Tools Gino The following fields and settings are available e Menu name Name of the current menu resource You can define your own menu resource which is used instead of our menu bar WITHOUT changing the name of our default menu bar _mdi_menu Use the m invocation option for example m mymenu or set the def_mdi_menu macro variable to your menu name see Setting Macro Variables e Caption Title displayed for the menu item For menu items set the caption to to specify a line sep arator e Short Cut Key binding shortcut for the menu item e Command Macro command executed when the menu item is selected This may be an internal macro command or a command line for running an external program e Alias Displays the Menu Item Alias dialog box to se
349. ies and view the differences side by side You can make edits merge changes and save modified files easily within the results windows As edits are made the diff view is updated as you type so you don t have to re run the comparison And switching from a directory comparison to an individual file difference is as simple as a mouse click With DIFFzilla you can e View differences between two files See Comparing Two Files e View differences between symbols and parts of files See Comparing Symbols or Parts of Files e View differences between all of the symbols in two files See Comparing All Symbols of Two Files e View differences between source trees See Comparing Two Directories See intra line differences color coded as you type See Dynamic Difference Editing Generate file lists See Generating File Lists Specify automatic directory mapping See Automatic Directory Mapping Save restore multi file results Utilize dialog box history wild cards paths file specifications Using the DIFFzilla Dialog The following sections describe how to use DIFF zilla and the differencing features in SlickEdit Core For more details on the specific options available on the DIFFzilla dialog Tools File Difference or diff command see DIFFzilla Dialog Dynamic Difference Editing DIFF zilla allows you to diff or compare files and provides the ability to view the differences side by side or interleaved one on top of the o
350. iew View for more information To open the Preview view click Window Show View Other expand SlickEdit Views and double click Preview Figure 6 4 Preview View java text SimpleDateFormat SimpleDateFormat is a concrete class for formatting and parsing dates in a locale sensitive manner It allows for formatting date gt text parsing text gt date and normalization lt see java util TimeZone asee DateFormat asee DateFormatSymbols version 1 77 01 22 04 author Mark Davis Chen Lieh Huang Alan Lin wi public class Simp leDateFormat extends DateFormat ff the official serial version ID which says crypticay a 89 Preview View The Preview view contains the following components Symbol list This is the list of all symbols which are currently being previewed In most cases this is a single symbol In some cases such as for the symbol under the cursor multiple matches are shown such as the definition and declaration of a symbol You can do a few things with the symbol list e Hover the mouse over the bitmap of any item to see a tooltip that shows the symbol s signature and scope e Click on any symbol to preview that specific symbol or it s comments Right click to adjust symbol search filtering options Double click to jump to a symbol Press Ctrl Comma to go back e You can create key bindings for the preview_next and or preview_prev commands in order t
351. ified the remainder of the line is con sidered a comment regardless of where symbol appears A plus sign after a column specifies an unlimited end_col checkfirst specifies that the lexer should check if the line is a comment before determining the color coding of symbols in the line When the checkfirst option is specified symbol is limited to one character in length If symbol is not specified all characters will be ignored at or after the column specified ex linecoment 73 This is useful for Fortran which requires that all characters at or after column 73 be ignored leading specifies that symbol is considered a line comment only if it appears as the first non blank character Space or tab characters are considered blanks 493 Creating a Lexer Name and a New VLX File Statement Description keywords keyword keyword Defines words that should be displayed in keyword color Keywords do not have to be valid identifiers cskeywords keyword keyword Case sensitive keywords Defines words that should be displayed in keyword color only if found in the case specified This statement should only be used for languages such as HTML which are case insensitive except for a few words For other lan guages use the case sensitive and keywords statements Keywords do not have to be valid iden tifiers ppkeywords keyword keyword Defines words that should be displayed
352. ignatures configure de fault options to get the best recognition possible This is important because some features such as drag drop files and DIFFzillam do not prompt you for the file encoding Each extension may have its own encoding specification If the extension specific encoding is set to De fault then the global setting defined in the File Options dialog Window Preferences expand SlickEd it and click General in the tree then double click the File Options setting and select the Load Tab is used Both the extension specific and global setting are overridden if you previously specified an encod ing in the Open dialog The encoding used to override default encoding settings is recorded The setting is then reused the next time you open the same file This provides you with per file encoding support If you have non XML UTF 16 files that have signatures then try selecting Auto Unicode2 as an exten 471 Using Unicode sion specific or global encoding Since there is no option for recognizing UTF 8 or UTF 32 files other than Auto XML by looking at the file contents you will either need to set an extension specific encoding or specify the encoding in the Open dialog the first time you open the file Some compilers such as Visual C let you specify the code page in the source file in fact more than one code page can be used in the file This is not supported so the assumption is that the file is SBCS DBCS active code
353. ile D D Parameter Name Value Parameters Parameter SETemplate TemplateContent TemplateDetails Type Version SortOrder TemplateContent Files Parameters Delimiter TemplateDetails Default Name Description Name SortOrd er 116 Code Template Metadata File Reference Elements DefaultName DefaultName is an optional child element of TemplateDetails Specifies the default item name when us ing the Add New Item dialog box This element becomes more important in multi file templates where you need to specify a DefaultName element in order to create file names from parts of the input item name See the example below Attributes None Child elements None Parent elements TemplateDetails e Value Text value is required The text value specifies the default name of the template item Used to populate the name field with an initial value on the Add New Item dialog box Example The following example illustrates the metadata for an item template for a C class that creates a header file n and implementation file cpp lt xml version 1 0 gt lt DOCTYPE SETemplate SYSTEM http www slickedit com dtd vse setemplate 1 0 setemplate dtd gt lt SETemplate Version 1 0 Type Item gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt Name gt My C Class lt Name gt lt Description gt My complete C class header and implementat
354. ile and the open paren e else on same line as When this option is selected the beautifier will place else on the same line This is typical when using brace Style 1 The following is an example of using Style 1 with an else clause if i lt j else e Apply to function braces When this option is selected the beautifier will apply your begin end style to braces for function definition 238 C C Beautifier Indenting Tab This tab provides indenting parameters that you can use when working with C C files in SlickEdit Core Figure 7 7 C C Beautifier Indenting Tab C C Beautifier Begin end style Indenting Comments Other Schemes Broken lines J Indent with tabs Continuation indent 0 Indent first level of code ENEE C Indent CASE from SWITCH Align on equal _ Indent access specifier Indent for each level Syntax indent 4 Tab size Save Settings Original tab size Sync extension options The following options and settings are available e Indent with tabs When this option is selected tab characters are used for the leading indent of lines This value defaults to the Tabs text box on the Indent Tab of the Extension Options dialog box Win dow Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Exten sion Setup setting Indent first level of code Do not clear this check box When this check box is selected the f
355. in the code block below def function_foo arg lt cursor return 0 lt destination Executing find_matching_paren will move the cursor to the end of line containing the return 0 state ment Executing it while the cursor is at the end of the return 0 statement will bring the cursor back to the colon position of the function signature line def function_foo arg This works on function class for while if and try statements There is one limitation of this feature Note the following code block for i in xrange 0 10 lt A for j in xrange 0 10 lt B for k in xrange 0 10 lt C print i jp kI lt D Invoking find_matching_paren at position A B or C will move the cursor to D but doing so while the cursor is at D will only move the cursor back to C not A nor B This is because the Python language doesn t have the notion of end of scope token such as in C C Java etc so it s impossible to de termine the correct destination when jumping from D Therefore we pick the nearest possible destination in this scenario See Begin End Structure Matching for more information about this feature 305 306 Chapter 8 Tools and Utilities 307 DIFFzillae Comparing and Merging SlickEdit Core provides two powerful ways to compare and merge files DIFFzilla and 3 Way Merge DIFFzillae DIFFzilla provides powerful differencing capabilities that let you compare files or director
356. indent specifies the amount the C Insert real indent affects all extensions Enter and Tab keys indent Indent selection when text selected affects all extensions However for the fundamental cob and bau asm390 extensions the Tabs text box _ Backspace at beginning of line un indents es he mance Gi Bal oy bale Use SmartPaste For all extensions the Tabs text box Use Dynamic Surround specifies how tabs are expanded when Syntax expansion displayed on screen Minimum expandable keyword length The following options and settings are available e Indent style Select from the following indent styles e None When this option is selected the Enter key will put the cursor at the beginning of the line e Auto When this option is selected the Enter key indents according to the previous line e Syntax indent When this option is selected the Enter key indents according to language syntax The value in the text box specifies the amount to indent for each level See Syntax Indent for more in formation e When tab key reindents the line These options specify that the Tab key be used to beautify or reindent the current line Select from the following settings Never When this option is selected pressing Tab will never reindent the line It will indent to the next tab stop Always Pressing the Tab key in any column will reindent the current line In leading blanks Pressing the Tab key will reinde
357. ing default search case sensitivity c x y m Replace occurrences of x in the selected area with y using default search case sensitivity The string delimiter has been used requiring a space character after the c c x y e Replace lowercase occurrences of x with y without prompting c i something_more_meaningful w Replace occurrences of the variable i with something _more_meaningful c i j w A Za z Replace occurrences of the word i with j and specify valid characters in a word to be alphabetic characters replace Test TEMP v Replace occurrences of the word test with the word temp with the case preserved For example e Occurrences of Test are replaced with Temp e Occurrences of test are replaced with temp e Occurrences of tesT are replaced with TEMP because a mixed case will retain the actual re placement that you typed e Occurrences of TEST are replaced with TEMP 189 Find and Replace View Find and Replace View You can use the Find and Replace view Ctrl F or Search SlickEdit Search Replace to specify search and replace options and conduct search and replace operations on selections single files or mul tiple files Figure 6 28 Find and Replace View Find and Replace Find Find in Files Replace Replace in Files Search for Loak in _ lt Current Buffer E Search options Match caze Wrap at beginni
358. ing point numbers with up to 32 digit mantissa are supported F File name sort Inserting Literal Characters Characters can be inserted at the cursor location in the current buffer This is useful if you wish to insert non ASCII characters keys not on the keyboard To insert a literal character from the main menu click Edit Insert Literal or use the insert_literal command The Insert Literal dialog is displayed The text box to the right of the Character Code label displays the character The spin box displays the decimal character code hex character code or ASCII character depending on which of those options is selected 138 Resetting Modified Lines on Save Color Coding This feature is designed to combine current line coloring modified line coloring and language specific coloring By default the fundamental mode colors the current line Languages with specific support already defined i e keywords comments etc use language specific coloring If modified line coloring is active the left edge of the window displays a different color depending on whether the line was inserted or modified To change the colors use the Color Settings dialog box For more information see Colors When current line color coding is active language specific color coding for the current line is not view able If you want to know what lines have been modified bind the command color_modified_toggle to a key It
359. ing recorded macros to discover Slick C code see Using Macros to Discover and Control Options you can view edit the source of a macro that you have just recorded but have not yet saved After creating a new recorded macro you are prompted with the Save Macro Dialog Instead of naming the macro and saving it click Edit or press Alt E to view the source A new editor window named lastmac e which is the name of the file that contains the source of the last macro that was recorded is opened showing the macro s source code If you make edits you will need to save the changes by click ing Macro Save last macro The Save Macro dialog is displayed where you can name the macro and then click Save which then appends the new code to the user macros file vusrmacs e To bind the macro to a key use the Key Bindings dialog which is not automatically displayed like it is when record ing saving a macro in the normal way see Binding Macros Using the Key Bindings Dialog Each macro recorded and bound using execute_last_macro_key is saved in a file named last mac lt key gt e and the corresponding compiled byte code is saved in lastmac lt key gt ex where lt key gt matches the key you used when creating the binding keys 0 9 A Z or F1 F12 Both files are located in 334 Using Macros to Discover and Control Options your configuration directory To edit a macro bound using this method open the e file for the macro you want to edit
360. ing the fol lowing notation lt page import Jjava util Vector gt e Package sort order This list specifies the order in which package groups are sorted Use the El lipses button to add a new package Use the Up and Down arrow buttons to move items Use the X button to delete the currently selected package from the list 3 Way Merge Dialog The 3 Way Merge dialog Tools File Merge is used for merging file differences Figure 10 18 3 Way Merge Dialog 370 3 Way Merge Dialog 3 Way Merge Setup Base File Revision 1 Filename LB Revision 2 Filename LB Output File Menam JL Merge style Output style Gi Auto merge Gi Interactive Show changes Interleaved buffer C Use smart merge al Ignore spaces The Ellipses buttons to the right of the text boxes are used to select files The B buttons to the right of the text boxes are used to select from the open buffers The list below describes the remaining fields and settings e Base file Specifies the file ouffer name of the original source file before any changes are made e Revision 1 and 2 Specifies the file ouffer names of the modified versions of the base file e Output file Specifies the output file name e Merge style The following merge styles are available e Auto merge If selected if a change does not cause a conflict the change is automatically applied to the output file and no indication is made tha
361. ing the save command to save files use the switch S to specify this option Save files on loss of focus When this option is set all modified files will be saved when you switch to another application e Reset line modify When this option is set line modify flags are reset when the buffer is saved If you are using the save command to save files use the switch L to specify this option e Add file to project upon Save As Not available in SlickEdit Core This option controls the default 425 File Options Dialog value of the Add to project option on the Save As dialog Check this option on the Save tab to have the Add to project check box selected by default each time the dialog is invoked By default neither option is set If you are using the save command to save files use the switch P to specify this option e Line format By default the line format is set to Automatic which means files are saved as is and there are no changes made to the line end characters To have line end characters translated when files are saved set the file format to DOS Mac or UNIX When Automatic is set default the line breaks are saved automatically in the file format appropriate to the context in which you are working However you can designate a file type for the line breaks For example if you are working in Windows and using CVS using UNIX line breaks will make using CVS easier Therefore set the file format to UNIX Note
362. ing will cycle through all of your extension specif ic tag files listed under Tools Tag Files in addition to the workspace tag file Caution We do not recommend you run a second copy of the editor to perform tag file updating because it will cause tag file access problems Under UNIX the editor will crash if multiple editors are updat ing the same tag files References The following settings apply to references e Build workspace tag file with references When selected newly created tag files are built with 437 Context Tagging Options Dia log support for symbol cross references e Find references incrementally faster When unselected all files with potential references are searched and analyzed so that the files which do not contain any references are removed When this option is selected querying references will appear to be faster since analysis stops when a file is found containing a valid occurrence However you may see files which do not have any references to the symbol you are looking for listed in the References view e Update references and call tree on single click When this option is selected and you single click on anew symbol in the Classes Outline or Symbols view the references in the References view are updated This option is not on by default because it can cause problems with double click e Go To Reference only lists references When selected Go To Reference will sear
363. ings and optional function heading comments The following settings affect how comments before function definitions are handled e Show comments When checked comments above function definitions are displayed as if they were part of the function definition e Collapse comments When checked comments above function definitions are visible but multi line comments will require that you expand them to see all comments When both check boxes are off comments will not be visible at all making it difficult to copy or move functions and comments Preprocessor Directives Select Preprocessor directives to display a source file as if it were preprocessed according to the define values you specify If you do not remember your defines use the Scan for Defines button The following settings are available e Defines Specifies defines and optional values used when you select the Preprocessor Directives option on the Selective Display dialog box The syntax is namei value1 name2 value2 For example 359 Macro Dialogs WIN32S VERSION 4 e Warning if Not Defined If on when you preprocess your source a message box is displayed for each define found in an expression which does not have a value e Scan for Defines Searches for define variables in the current source file and lets you specify values Resulting values are placed in the Defines combo box Multi Level Select Multi level to set multiple levels of selective displ
364. inssinsstntsrnnnsinsstnnsnnnstnnsnnnnnnn nnt 233 C G tt Beaute ri retan a Ea a Ea et E E A E 237 C C Compiler Settings eneeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeneteinesinssinnssrnsstnnsrnnssinssrnnnnnnsnnnsnnnnennnnt 244 ir Preprocessing aiii inaa aiaa a aa Maen aiaia 245 Jaa ae a E E a aa E 248 Java Formatting Options c cccccceeeseeceeneeeeeeeeeaaeeceaeeeseaaeseeeeeseaeeeeseaeeneneeeseaeeesaeeseanees 248 Java BOaUtihen tute eege ELSEN EC 251 Javadoc Beautifier ec cceseecceeesseeeceesseceneeeeseeneeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeaneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeneeees 251 viii SlickEdit Core v3 3 for Eclipse GAVACOG te 252 Organizing Java Importer ENNEN eet 252 Java Refacing ive E E hed ee 253 Man ATM bss As yen EE EE oh nt te teed nee 254 leen eege 254 ERR BEE 266 AMULVELIME Geet e W 279 Enabling Disabling XML HTML Formatting 0 ccc cceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeaaeeeeeenaeeeeeseaaes 279 Working with Schemes 281 Working With TAOS aieea cathe tie e eile dati teen thie bitte 284 Formatting Settings seia eececcceccceeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeeeaeeeceaeeseaeeseaeeeseaaesseaaeseeaeessaeeeeaeeesaes 285 EE gege eeh Ee 292 Ada Formatting Kee 292 AER 292 EE Deer errr renee oor creer Ek ee ere rere 299 COBOL Formatting Options ssiri ainaani iaia iaaiiai tiaia 299 PasCal ita acer ai EE tA Ge ee eatin othe ten MAG eet 301 Pascal Formatting Options cccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeaeeseeeeseaaeseeaaeseeeeeseaeeeenaeeeeaes
365. into the source code at the top of the current class e Organize imports Java only Organizes import statements in Java files See Organizing Java Im ports for more information e Go to Tag Moves the cursor to the selected tag See Symbol Navigation for more information e References Brings the References view into focus displaying the references for the symbol See Ref erences View for more information Set Breakpoint Sets a debugging breakpoint See Setting Breakpoints for more information 85 Outline View Show in Symbol Browser Jumps to the member in the symbol browser See Symbols View for more information Increase Decrease Listed Members Limit Controls the number of members displayed in the mem bers pane When this option is selected the command line will prompt you for a variable value The de fault is 400 Sort Classes By Hierarchy and Sort Classes By Name These options toggle the display of classes sorted either by hierarchy or alphabetically by name Sort Members By Line Number and Sort Members By Name These options toggle the display of members sorted either by line number or alphabetically by name Organize Members By Class Groups the members in the members pane by their class or interface When this option is selected all Sort options are available When this option is not selected visible members in this pane will not be grouped at all They will instead be displayed in one list sort
366. ion are automatically displayed when a function operator such as the open parenthesis is typed and the cur rent argument is highlighted within the displayed prototype To access this feature on demand press Alt Comma e Show comments If selected comments are displayed when Parameter Info is displayed When a symbol has multiple definitions and multiple sets of comments the comments will indicate that you are looking at item lt 1 of n gt Click on the arrows or use Ctrl PgUp and Cirl PgDn to cycle through the comment sets e Auto insert matching parameter If selected when Parameter Info is displayed and the name of the current formal parameter matches the name of a symbol in the current scope of the appropriate type or class the name is automatically inserted When the name is inserted it is also selected so that you can type over it or you can type Comma Space Tab or a closing parenthesis to use the automatically in serted parameter 419 Select a Tag Dialog e Auto list compatible parameters If selected compatible variables are automatically listed when parameter info is active and typing the arguments to a function call Global non module variables are not listed This only affects C C and Java To access this feature on demand press Alt Comma See Auto List Compatible Parameters for more information e Pad parentheses If selected a space is inserted after the open parenthesis when a parameter name is au
367. ion braces When this option is selected the your begin end style will be applied to braces for function definition Indentation Tab This tab is used to specify indentation options Figure 7 4 C C Formatting Options Indentation Tab 234 C C Formatting Options C C Formatting Options Begin end style Indentation Other Indent first level of code Indent CASE from SWITCH F Use continuation indent on function parameters C No space before paren Insert padding between parens Pointer style char p char D char D The following options are available e Indent first level of code Specifies whether smart indenting should indent the cursor after declara tions such as functions Indent CASE from SWITCH When checked template editing places the case statement indented from the switch statement column e Use continuation indent on function parameters Determines whether function parameters should always use the continuation indent By default we format multi line function parameters as follows myLongMethodName firstarg secondarg thirdarg i myLongMethodName firstarg secondarg thirdarg 1 If Always use continuation indent on function parameters is selected the format will change as fol 235 C C Formatting Options lows myLongMethodName firstarg secondarg thirdarg i myLongMethodName firstarg secondarg thirdarg i No sp
368. ion lt Description gt lt DefaultName gt MyClass cpp lt DefaultName gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt TemplateContent gt lt Files gt lt File TargetFilename SfileinputnameS cpp gt MyClass cpp lt File gt lt File TargetFilename SfileinputnameS h gt MyClass h lt File gt lt Files gt lt TemplateContent gt lt SETemplate gt Description Description is a required child element of TemplateDetails Specifies the description for the template item See the example below e Attributes None 117 Code Template Metadata File Reference e Child elements None e Parent elements TemplateDetails e Value Text value is required The text value specifies the description of the template item The de scription is shown on the Add New Item dialog box Example The following example illustrates the metadata for an item template for a custom Java class lt xml version 1 0 gt lt DOCTYPE SETemplate SYSTEM http www slickedit com dtd vse setemplate 1 0 setemplate dtd gt lt SETemplate Version 1 0 Type Item gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt Name gt My Java Class lt Name gt Description gt My custom Java class lt Description gt DefaultName gt MyClass java lt DefaultName gt lt TemplateDetails gt A A lt TemplateContent gt lt Files gt lt File gt MyClass java lt File gt lt Files gt lt TemplateContent gt lt SETemplate gt
369. ion or buffer and closes the dialog box e Reset Restores the dialog box settings to the values that appeared when you invoked the dialog e Save Settings Saves beautify options in uformat ini file These settings are used by the c_beautify command e Restrict to selection When this option is selected only lines in the selection are beautified 237 C C Beautifier e Sync extension options When this option is selected the extension options are updated to reflect any changes that these dialogs have in common For example changing the begin end style to Style 2 will update your brace style for Syntax Expansion The tabs on the C C Beautifier are described in the sections below Begin End Style Tab Figure 7 6 C C Beautifier Begin End Style Tab C C Beautifier Begin End Style ndenting Comments Other Schemes a ne Beautify C Do not change brace style Cancel Ee LEO if 4 i l Es Help i i Style 1 Style 2 Style 3 C No space before paren C Apply to function braces Save Settings else on same line as H Syne extension options The following options and settings are available e Do not change brace style Select this option if you do not want your brace style changed This is useful if you are using a brace style that is not supported by SlickEdit Core e No space before paren Determines whether a space is placed between a keyword such as if for or wh
370. ionally you may have local libraries that are reused from project to project To create an extension specific tag file complete the following steps 1 From the main menu click Tools Tag Files The Context Tagging Tag Files Dialog is displayed 2 Click Add Tag File to open the Add Tag File dialog Figure 5 7 Add Tag File Dialog Add Tag File Select the source type you want this tag file inserted into Select Generate References to create CFScript symbol cross reference information DBS OTE Tag Files have a vtg extension HTML C Generate References 3 Select the source type into which you want the tag file inserted Select Generate References only if you want library functions to be shown when you list references Note 68 Building Tag Files Generate References creates an inverted file index so that you can quickly find which files con tain which symbols Workspace tag files create this index by default This information is used to build a list of references using the push_ref command bound to Ctrl in the CUA emulation In general it s better to have the reference list contain functions that are part of this workspace and not in libraries If Generate References is not checked you will still be able to jump from a sym bol to its definition in a library using Ctrl Dot push_tag This option is off by default since most programmers do not want to see library functions show
371. iple files Find Symbol View The Find Symbol view is used to locate symbols in your code It allows you to search for symbols by name using either a regular expression substring or fast prefix match To open this view click Search Find Symbol See Find Symbol View under the Symbol Browsing topic for more information Figure 10 9 Find Symbol View 354 Find Symbol View Find Symbol Search For System Drawing Printing Mo Cia V wvstem Draaipg dl 6627 E system Windows Forms Trac Crh bees Lilie loune Cees wi wah tl Ce Look in lt Use Context Tagging gt w Search options m Match case C Match substring slower C Use pattern slower Regular expression UNIX wi Klos Al symbol types e Search for Enter the name of the symbol to find If you select the option Use pattern you can enter regular expressions or wildcards in the search field If you specify lt Use Context Tagging gt for the Look in field then you can enter language specific expressions such as this gt get to find getters in your current class SlickEdit Core displays a progress bar at the top of this view window while a search is in progress Incremental matches are displayed with each character you type and the first element in the list is se lected Press Tab to put focus into the list of matches Press Enter to navigate to the first match Press Down to select the next match Press Escape to st
372. iple lines C Delay color coding until end quote Single quotes C Two consecutive quotes represent one Pascal represents a single quote Cc Single quoted strings are always 1 char long C Trailing backslash continues string across lines C Search For end quote across multiple lines Delay color coding until end quote C Backquoted strings Perl Bourne shell C shell The following options are available e Double quoted strings e Two consecutive quotes represent one for REXX represents a string of length one which is a double quote character e Backslash double quote represents a double quote for C represents a string of length one which is a double quote character e Double quoted strings are always 1 char long When this option is selected this means that a double quote character is followed by an additional character and then the terminating double quote character There is never more than one character between the start and end double quote 446 Color Coding Setup Dialog e Trailing backslash continues string across lines When this option is selected it indicates that searching for the terminating quote continues to the next line if the lines end with a backslash charac ter e Search for end quote across multiple lines When this option is selected it indicates that the string does not have to be terminated on the same line as the start quote character e Delay colo
373. irst level of code inside a function or method definition is not indented Indent CASE from SWITCH When this option is selected the case and default statements found in side switch statements are indented from the switch e Indent access specifier When this option is selected specifiers are indented under the class When not selected specifiers are aligned directly underneath the class e Indent for each level Syntax indent The amount to indent for each new nesting level of code We have put the words Syntax indent in parenthesis to help indicate that this field has the same meaning as the Syntax indent text box on the Indent Tab of the Extension Options dialog By default we initial ize this text box with your current extension setup setting e Tab size The value in this field specifies the output tab size The output tab size is only used if the op tion Indent with tabs is selected on the Indent Tab of the Extension Options dialog This value defaults 239 C C Beautifier to the Syntax indent text box on the Indent Tab of the Extension Options dialog Original tab size The value in this field specifies the size of the original expansion tab SlickEdit Core uses the expansion size of your original file to handle reusing indent amounts from your original file Currently the beautifier only reuses the original source files indenting for comments This option has no effect if the original file has no tab characters
374. is encoding specifies that the file encoding be determined based on XML standards and that the file be loaded as Unicode data The encoding is determined based on the encoding specified by the xml tag If the encoding is not specified by the xml the file data is assumed to be UTF 8 data which is consistent with XML standards We applied some modifications to the standard XML encoding determination to allow for some user error If the file has a standard Unicode signature the Unicode signature is assumed to be correct and the encoding defined by the xml tag is ignored e Auto Unicode When this encoding is chosen and the file has a standard Unicode signature the file is loaded as Unicode data Otherwise the file is loaded as SBCS DBCS data e Auto Unicode2 When this encoding is chosen and the file has a standard Unicode signature or looks like a Unicode file the file is loaded as Unicode data Otherwise the file is loaded as SBCS DBCS data This option is NOT fool proof and may give incorrect results e Auto EBCDIC When this encoding is chosen and the file looks like an EBCDIC file the file is loaded as Unicode data Otherwise the file is loaded as SBCS DBCS data This option is NOT fool proof and may give incorrect results The option does attempt to support binary EBCDIC files e Auto EBCDIC and Unicode2 This encoding is a combination of the Auto EBCDIC and Auto Unicode2 encodings described above Using Unicode To use encodings U
375. it with cat UNIX and SlickEdit regular expression Delete blank lines Search For 4 n Replace With Brief regular expression Search For lt n Replace With UNIX and SlickEdit regular expression Replace occurrences of two consecutive blank lines Search For 4 n n with one Replace With n Brief regular expression Search For lt n n Replace With n UNIX regular expression Search for lines containing a and replace the a Search for 4a with a formfeed character 193 Find and Replace with Regular Expressions Example Description Replace with d12 SlickEdit regular expression Search for 4a Replace with 12 Brief regular expression Search for lt a Replace with d12 Using Expressions to Search for Binary Characters Search for a sequence of binary characters by using regular expressions to specify hex or decimal char acters Some examples are e UNIX or Brief search expressions xOd x0a x01 x02 d13 d10 d1 d2 e SlickEdit search expressions xOd x0a x01 x02 13 10 1 2 Using Tagged Search Expressions When you use regular expressions to search for a string you will often want the replace string to depend on what was found Use tagged search expressions to insert parts of what is found into the replace string e UNIX regular expressions Use parentheses to denote a tagged expression in the search string The replace string specifies
376. item in the hierarchy or members panes to see a tooltip that shows the symbol s signature and scope To show or hide the hierarchy pane use the two buttons located at the top right of the view window If the hierarchy pane is hidden the members pane is resized to take up the entire space of the window Use the size bar to resize either pane Use the Up Down buttons located to the left of the pane buttons to navigate up or down the class hier archy The Up arrow button will allow you to navigate to a child class derived class or subclass of the current class The Down arrow allows you to navigate to a parent class superclass or interface of the current class When using these buttons to navigate through code the active buffer will switch to the des tination class and the hierarchy and members panes will update To jump to the definition of a class in the code pushing a bookmark in the process double click on any member or class Left click or press Ctrl Comma to go back Filtering in the Hierarchy Pane Right click on a class in the hierarchy pane to display a list of filtering options You can exclude entire namespaces or packages anything above a certain level in the hierarchy and anything outside of the current workspace You can always include any class es you have excluded via the Include options By excluding a class or interface in the hierarchy view the members of this class or interface are no longer displayed in the mem
377. iting a file For example if you invoke the command save xyz and an xyz file already exists and xyz is not the name of the current buffer you are prompted by default whether you wish to over write the file def_rwprompt Default is 1 Change this to 0 to suppress the pop up that asks Do you want to update the read only attribute of the file on disk def_save_macro Default is 1 Set this variable to 0 if you do not want to be prompted with the Save Macro dialog box after ending macro recording def_shift_updown_line_select Set this value to 1 for Shift Up or Shift Down to select the current line def_switchbuf_cd Set this variable equal to 1 to change the current working directory to the file that currently has focus in the editor def_top_bottom_push_bookmark Set this variable to 1 to push a bookmark whenever you jump to the top or bottom of the buffer Note that even when this variable is set no bookmarks are pushed when using the current buffer as a build window process buffer The default value is 0 def_undo_with_cursor Set this value to 1 to enable the undo of each curs or movement def_update_context_max_file_size This variable increases the array size in bytes of a file that is too large The default size of files that can be processed by Context Tagging is 4 MB The size can be lowered by changing this variable and setting it to equal the size that you want in bytes
378. itive tag search IO blockquote body br button v Preview Parent element content Not affected by settings lt default gt Current element content Affected by settings lt default gt More parent element content Default Schemes XML HTML Formatting comes with two default schemes Each time that you open an HTML file for edit ing by default the html default html scheme is used Each time an XML file is opened the xml default xml scheme is used You can configure the settings for each default scheme or specify your own default schemes see Specifying a Different Default Scheme The html default html scheme is comprised of a default tag as well as a list of commonly used HTML tags that are preconfigured with standard settings The xml default xml scheme is comprised of one default tag preconfigured with standard settings For any tag that does not appear in the Tags list the default tag settings are used 282 Working with Schemes Specifying the Scheme to Use You can specify a scheme to use for just the current document or a default scheme to use for all HTML and or XML files that are created or opened in SlickEdite Core To specify the scheme for the current document click Format XML HTML Formatting gt Current Document Options and pick the scheme to use from the drop down list The scheme you choose is re membered the next time that the d
379. key e Begin Line Moves the cursor to column one e Begin Line Text Toggle Toggles the cursor between the first non blank character of the current line and column 1 More Options The settings listed below appear on the Redefine Common Keys dialog box e Cursor wrap Determines whether the cursor_left and cursor_right commands wrap to the previous or next line respectively e Up Down on text Determines whether the cursor_up and cursor down commands place the cursor in virtual space By default cursor up and cursor_down go to the same column of the next or previ ous line regardless of the length of the line e Up Down within soft wrapped lines If selected when Soft Wrap is on Window Preferences ex pand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting and select the Word Wrap Tab the cursor_down and cursor_up commands move the cursor up to the next or previous visible line including line continuations To force cursor_down and cursor_up to move the cursor to the next or previous physical line the same position to which the cursor would move if Soft Wrap was off deselect this option e Line wrap on text If selected line wrapping will occur when column one is reached If deselected line wrapping occurs when the left margin is reached When Word Wrap is on Window Prefer ences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup settin
380. l If a unique match is not found a list is displayed allowing the selection of the exact match See Completions for more informa tion about working with this feature Symbol Browsing SlickEdit Core gives you the ability to browse and view symbols in your files or workspaces There are several views that display information as you work to help you find what you need exactly when you need it To open one of these views click Window Show View Other expand SlickEdit Views and double click the view you want to see e Class This view provides an outline of both the members of the current class as well as any visible in herited members It also shows the inheritance hierarchy of the current class e Outline The Outline view provides an outline of symbols in the current workspace 65 Statement Level Tagging e Find Symbol This view is used to locate symbols tags in your code It allows you to search for sym bols by name using either a regular expression substring or fast prefix match A quicker way to access this view is to use the Search gt Find Symbol menu item e Preview Preview provides a portal for viewing information in other files without having to open them in the editor It automatically shows this information when you are working with certain features e References This view displays the list of symbol references uses found the last time that you used the Go to Reference feature Ctrl or push_ref c
381. l PHP PL SQL Slick C Tcl Visual Basic Visual Basic NET XML XSD Selective Display Collapsible code block and function bodies SmartPasteo Pasted code re indents to correct level ActionScript Ada ANTLR C C C CFML CF Script Ch CICS COBOL DB2 DTD Fortran High Level Assembler HTML IDL InstallScript J Java JavaScript JCL JSP Lex Modula 2 Object ive C Pascal Perl PHP PL I PL SQL PowerNP Assembler PV WAVE Python REXX Ruby SAS Slick C Tcl Transact SQL VBScript Verilog VHDL Visual Basic Visual Basic NET x86 As sembly XML XSD Yacc ActionScript AWK C C C IDL InstallScript J Java JavaScript JSP Objective C Pascal Perl PHP PL I PV WAVE Python Ruby Slick C Tel Source Code Navigation and Lookup Includes Class Outline Preview References and Symbols views as well as symbol navigation ActionScript Ada ANTLR Assembly Language AWK Bourne shell scripts C C Shell C C CFML CFScript Ch CICS COBOL DB2 DTD Fortran High Level Assembler HTML IDL Install Script J Java JavaScript JCL JSP Lex Make file Modula 2 Objective C Pascal Perl PHP PL I PL SQL PowerNP Assembler Progress 4GL PV WAVE Python REXX Ruby SAS Slick C Tcl Transact SQL VBScript Verilog VHDL Visual Ba sic Visual Basic NET Windows batch files x86 Assembly XML XSD Yacc Syntax Indenting Cursor is placed at correct indent level
382. l in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the More Tab then select the option Hide mouse pointer The mouse pointer is then only displayed when moving the mouse or when a dialog box is displayed Displaying Tool Tips By default hovering the mouse pointer over a button displays a tool tip about the item To turn tool tips off or to change the amount of time before tool tips are displayed from the main menu click Window gt Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the More Tab then clear the option Show tool tips or change the value in the Delay spin box The Delay value is in tenths of a second Scroll Style Settings To set the scroll style select the More Tab on the General Options dialog then select the Scroll style setting that you wish to use Commands that move the cursor more than one page of text such as searching always center scroll text into view The following scroll settings are available e Center When center scrolling is on and the cursor moves out of view the cursor will be centered and the text will move by half the height or width of the window e Smooth Smooth scrolling is a line by line scroll of the screen that occurs when the cursor moves out of view Smooth scrolling is the default configuration e Scroll when Specifies how close in number of lines the cursor ma
383. l its completions If the completion has comments you can use Shift PgDn Shift PgUp Shift Home or Shift End to page through the comments Use Ctrl C to copy the comments for the current item to the clipboard 147 Word Completion Auto Complete options can be configured for each file extension type This allows you to activate and de activate particular features on a per language basis To change Auto Complete options see Auto Complete Tab Word Completion Word Completions search the current editor window for text matching the prefix at the current cursor posi tion Most completions are driven by Context Tagging matching symbols such as function names and variables Word Completions can match any text in the current editor window including comments Auto Complete also lists word completions but it is often faster to use key bindings to search for and in sert Word Completions The following is a list of commands for these operations and the key bindings in the CUA emulation See Creating Bindings to change them e complete_prev Ctrl Shift Comma Searches backwards through the current editor window to find a match complete_next Cirl Shift Dot Searches forwards through the current editor window to find a match complete_more Cirl Shift Space Adds subsequently more text from the matched line to the curs or position allowing you to extend the amount of text inserted The following example of code
384. l match of at least zero occurrences but not more than n2 occurrences of X X n1 n2 Maximal match of at least n1 occurrences but not more than n2 occurrences of X X n1 Match exactly n1 occurrences of X X n1 Minimal match of at least n1 occurrences of X 532 Brief Regular Expressions Brief Regular Expression Definition X n2 Minimal match of at least zero occurrences but not more than n2 occurrences of X X n1 n2 Minimal match of at least n1 occurrences but not more than n2 occurrences of X X Matches sub expression X but does not define a tagged expression X Matches sub expression X and specifies a new tagged expression See Using Tagged Search Ex pressions for more information dX Matches sub expression X and specifies to use tagged expression number d where 0 lt d lt 9 No more tagged expressions are defined by the sub expression syntax X once this sub expression syntax is used This is the best way to make sure you have enough tagged expressions X Y Matches X or Y char set Matches any one of the characters specified by char set A dash character may be used to specify ranges The expression A Z matches any uppercase letter Backslash can be used inside the square brackets to define literal characters or define ASCII characters For example specifies a literal dash character The expression 0 27 matches ASCII character codes 0 27
385. l overloads e All other instances of the symbol within the class hierarchy It then parses each file containing references to the selected symbol s and updates the rest of the code to use the changed name Figure 6 31 C Refactoring Rename Enter new name for symbol Symbol name EES omething Rename overloaded methods Hernan Feerninnercmethnre Paty H D Extract Method After selecting a set of lines Extract Method creates a new method with the selected lines as the body It discovers any undeclared variables and creates them as parameters to the new method The extracted method is created in the same scope as the original method Figure 6 32 C Refactoring Extract Method 201 C Refactoring MS Extract Method Method name Replace selected code with call to new method Keep 7 Type Argument Name MYCLASS amp cl signed int ange Prototype void map extracted MYCLASS amp cl signed int arge The Method name text box allows you to choose the name of the newly extracted method Uncheck Re place selected code with call to new method if you do not want the original method to be modified This option is unavailable if the selected block contains a return continue or break statement Modify Parameter List Modify Parameter List allows you to add delete and re order parameters for a selected function The re factoring will modify the parameter list for the selected function and
386. lable e Load entire file When selected the entire contents of the opened files are read into memory The line indicator located at the bottom right section of the editor might become blank if the file does not fit in the editor s cache defaults to 2 MB When this option is not selected Auto Reload does not work until the file is saved If you are using the load command to open files use the switch L to specify this op tion e Count number of lines When selected the entire contents of the opened files are read into memory 422 File Options Dialog and the number of lines in the file are counted The line number is always displayed in the line indicator area of the editor The Load entire file check box will have the same affect as this check box when the entire file fits within the cache of the editor defaults to 2 MB and does not have to be spilled If you are using the load command to open files use the switch LC to specify this option Truncate file at EOF When selected the entire contents of the opened files are read into memory and the number of lines are counted In addition DOS format files are truncated when an EOF charac ter is found The line number is always displayed in the line indicator area of the editor This option is useful for REXX cmd files which can have p code appended to them after the EOF character If you are using the load command to open files use the switch LZ to specify this option
387. lace Tab This tab on the Find and Replace View provides options for searching and replacing text The same search options from the Find Tab are provided as well as the additional replace options described below Figure 10 7 Find and Replace Replace Tab 350 Find and Replace View Find and Replace Find Find in Files Replace Replace in Files Search for Replace with ECK Look in lt Current Selection gt Search options Match case Wrap at beginning end C Match whole word Place cursor at end Search backward Wildcards we LJ Search hidden text L Preserve case _ Highlight replaced text Colors None Replace All Preview All e Replace with Enter the text or regular expression for which to replace the item that is searched You can retrieve previous replacement text or regular expressions by clicking the drop down list button Click the right pointing arrow button to the right of the Replace with field to display a menu containing tagged expressions See Using Tagged Search Expressions for more information e Preserve case Select this option to perform a case sensitive search and replace operation e Highlight replaced text Select this option to highlight all instances of the text that was replaced e Replace button Click to replace the first instance of the item e Replace All button Click to replace every instance of the item e Preview All b
388. late Insert template metadata into the setemplate file See the example below For more information on template metadata elements see Code Template Metadata File Reference Create a new project or open an existing one From the main menu click File gt New Item from SlickEdit Template Verify that your new template item appears in the Templates list on the Add New Item dialog box Example Th e following example illustrates the metadata for an item template for a custom Java class along with the content of the Java source code file From the Add New Item dialog box if the user entered Foo java for the item name then fi leinputname would be replaced with Foo in the file name of the file created and safeitemname would be replaced with Foo in the Java source code file My lt lt h lt S lt My Class setemplate xml version 1 0 gt DOCTYPE SETemplate SYSTEM ttp www slickedit com dtd vse setemplate 1 0 setemplate dtd gt ETemplate Version 1 0 Type Item gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt Name gt My Java Class lt Name gt lt Description gt My custom Java class lt Description gt lt DefaultName gt MyClass java lt DefaultName gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt TemplateContent gt lt Files gt lt File TargetFilename SfileinputnameS java gt MyClass java lt File gt lt Files gt lt TemplateContent gt SETemplate gt Class
389. latforms tmp is the default directory On non UNIX platforms TEMP and TMP environment variables specify the default directory Buffer Cache Size specifies the maximum amount of memory used to buffer text data Tag File Cache Size specifies the maximum amount of memory used to buffer tag file data The following options are available e Spill file path This text box specifies a directory where spill files and temporary files should be placed On Windows this defaults to the directory specified the TEMP environment variable If it does not exist the directory specified by the TMP environment variable is used On UNIX this defaults to the directory specified by the TMP environment variable 397 Extension Options Dialog e Buffer cache size The value in this field specifies the maximum amount of memory used to store text buffer data in kilobytes A value that is less than zero specifies all available memory Caution If the operating system starts the swapping process before the cache is full performance might be degraded The cache size must be smaller than the amount of actual memory available e Tag file cache size You can improve tagging performance by adjusting the tag file cache size to bet ter match the size of your tag files Generally a tag file cache size that matches the total size of the tag files being used will provide the best performance For example if the tag files for your source code a
390. le gt Open File The plus sign between the keys indicates that these keys must be pressed simultaneously press the Ctrl and O keys at the same time Note that the last key is case insensitive You do not need to press Shift An example of a key binding with a key sequence is Ctrl X R in Vim emulation this binding is associated with the redo command and Edit gt Redo The comma indicates that each key must be pressed con secutively press Ctrl and X at the same time release then press the R key To view or change bindings create new bindings and export import custom bindings see Managing Bindings The available key bindings change depending on the selected emulation While SlickEdit Core provides emulations for 13 editors CUA is the default emulation so key bindings listed throughout the documenta tion will be for the CUA emulation To change the emulation mode click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Emulation setting For more information see Emulations Note e For documentation purposes both mouse events and keys that are bound to commands are of ten referred to collectively as key bindings e The main menu displays the key bindings for commands associated with each menu entry See Menus Accessing Menus and Creating and Editing Menus for more information 44 Managing Bindings e A menu hotkey is a key sequence that corresponds
391. le click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the More Tab Set the Line insert style to Before or After When the line insert style is set to Before lines of text are inserted before the current line When the line insert style is set to After lines of text are inser ted after the current line Sorting Text SlickEdit Core uses a stable quicksort algorithm to sort text It is recommended that at least half the text be in memory for best speed results To sort text from the main menu click Tools Sort The Sort dia log box is displayed Figure 6 16 Sort Dialog 136 Sorting Text Type of sort e Cancel Order f Ascending Descending 1 Humene sort Remove duplicate lines Case sensitive The following options are available e Type of sort Choose the type of sort that you prefer from the following options e Sort buffer When this option is selected the entire contents of the buffer that you are working in are sorted e Sort on selection When this option is selected each line intersecting with the selection is sorted based on the selected column Sort on selection and Sort within selection have the same effect except when sorting a block or column selection e Sort within selection When this option is selected the selected text is sorted Text outside a block or column selection is not moved The Sort on selection and Sort within selection options have the same eff
392. lect one of the Go to Definition options Showing the info for a symbol under the mouse By default as the mouse cursor floats over a sym bol the information and comments for that symbol are displayed To turn this behavior off select the Context Tagging tab then deselect the option Show info for symbol under mouse Configuring C C preprocessing For C and C your source code base will typically include pre 17 Extension Specific Options processor macros that you use in your code for portability or convenience For performance considera tions Context Tagging does not do full preprocessing so preprocessing that interferes with normal C syntax can cause the parser to miss certain symbols To configure your preprocessing to avoid these omissions see C C Preprocessing Chapter 3 User Interface The Workbench Screen Layout Note SlickEdit Core does not modify the Eclipse screen layout so this information is intended only as a brief overview See Workbench User Guide in the Eclipse Help for more details about the Ec lipse layout The Workbench The workbench is the area where the workspace projects and programs are contained Use the work bench to manage and edit all projects in various perspectives views or editors Work may only occur in one workbench at a time Figure 3 1 The Workbench Java C SamplesWSEJavaDemo OrderChart OrdersChart java Eclipse SDK File Edit
393. lected scheme right click and choose Delete Scheme Working with Tags As described previously formatting schemes are comprised of individual tags with associated formatting settings For example in HTML you may want start and end lt div gt tags to be on separate lines above be low the text while start end style tags Such as lt b gt and lt i gt are formatted inline with the text In order to configure formatting for individual tags you must first define a scheme see Creating Schemes or you can use one of the default schemes see Default Schemes The Tags column of the XML HTML Formatting dialog shows a list of tags associated with the selected scheme Default Tags For all schemes a default tag is included It defines the settings that are applied to tags that are not specifically listed in the Tags list It can also be used as a basis for other tags when you use the Match tag style of option on the General tab The default settings for the default tag are based on a block style tag in that the start and end tags are on separate lines content and nested tags are indented according to your extension indent style and content is wrapped to a fixed right margin at column 80 Use the Preview area at the bottom of the dialog to see how tags based on the default tag will be formatted in your code Base Tags Base tags are used to define groups of tags with similar behaviors By creating a base tag and associat ing a set of
394. lection down one page Ctrl Shift Home Start or extend selection to top of buffer Ctrl Shift End Start or extend selection to bottom of buffer Ctrl X Cut selected text Ctrl C Copy selected text to clipboard Ctrl V Paste clipboard Ctrl Shift V List clipboards Different selection styles found in non CUA compliant editors such as Brief are also provided To use a different selection style use the Selections Tab of the General Options dialog box click Window Pref erences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree double click the General setting Modifying Selected Text After you select text you can invoke a key or type a command that modifies the selected text Use the in formation in the following table to assist you when making modifications to selected text When two com mands are displayed the first command is the command line version of the command and the second is the graphical version of the command Table 6 5 Operations for Selected Text Command Key Sequence or Menu Item Description mou_click_copy Cirl L Drags and copies the selected text Click within the selected text and hold the left button down while moving the mouse to a new location Line selections are inser ted after the current line by de fault If you want line selections inserted before the current line 129 Selections Command Key Sequence or Menu Item D
395. light button Stopping a Connection To stop a connection use the FTP view and complete the following steps 1 Select the connection that you want from the drop down list at the top of the view window 2 Click the Disconnect Current Session button Opening FTP Files Before you can open FTP files you need to start a connection See Starting a Connection above for more information After your connection starts from the FTP view window right click on selected files to open them to change the directory or to access more options Setting FTP Options To access FTP options on the FTP view window click the button to start a new session When the Con nect dialog is displayed click the Default Options button The FTP Options dialog will be displayed See FTP Options Dialog for a list of the available options 320 Using the Regex Evaluator The Regex Evaluator Regular expressions are used to express text patterns for searching The Regex Evaluator provides the capability to interactively create save and re use tests of regular expressions In SlickEdit Core the Regex Evaluator is a view To open it click Tools gt Regex Evaluator Using the Regex Evaluator Type some samples of the text you are trying to match in the top portion of the view window labeled Test Cases Enter your regular expression pattern in the bottom field The Regex Evaluator will highlight matched portions of your sample text and identify
396. line Labels are used to specify a particular line such as in the ispf_locate command or to specify a range of lines for an primary command to oper ate on The following labels are built in to the ISPF emulation e zfirst The first line in the buffer abbreviated zf e zlast The last line in the buffer abbreviated zl e zesr The current line the cursor is on abbreviated zc See Also ispf_change ispf_copy ispf_delete ispf_exclude ispf_find ispf_flip ispf_locate ispf_paste is pf_reset ispf_sort 507 ISPF Line Commands ISPF Shift Lines Left or Right Usage e n Shift the current line n columns left default 2 e a Shift the block of lines n columns left default 2 e n Shift the current line n columns right default 2 e a Shift the block of lines n columns right default 2 e lt n Data shift the current line n columns left default 2 e lt lt n Data shift the block of lines n columns left default 2 e gt n Data shift the current line n columns right default 2 gt gt n Data shift the block of lines n columns right default 2 Remarks This set of commands is used for shifting data left or right The versions using parenthesis shift text liter ally while the other versions attempt to intelligently shift text without disturbing line numbers or com ments In all cases the default number of columns that the text is shifted is two There are two for
397. line with the command e OO Overlay a block of lines must match another OO Remarks Identifies one or more lines over which the copy or move block is to be overlaid Text is only overlaid with in the column boundaries If the copy or move block has less lines than the overlay it is repeated until it fills the entire overlay block There are two forms to this command The first form O n specifies that the line and the subsequent n 1 lines are to be overlaid The second block form OO is placed on the first and last lines of the block to be overlaid You are allowed to specify multiple A B or O line commands to have the same copy or move block inser ted or overlaid in multiple places See Also ispf_copy ispf_paste ISPF Line Command A ISPF Line Command B ISPF Line Command Copy ISPF Line Command Move ISPF Line Command Overlay ISPF Repeat Lines Usage e R n Repeat the line with the command n times e RR n Repeat the block n times must match another RR Remarks Specify lines to be repeated immediately following this line or block There are two forms to this com mand The first form R n specifies that the line is to be repeated n times The second block form RR n is placed on the first and last lines of the block to be repeated n times See Also ISPF Line Command A ISPF Line Command B ISPF Line Command Copy ISPF Expose Next Level of Code S and SS 513 ISPF Line Commands Usage e S
398. list if it can be resolved If the focus is in the member list the selected item will be shown in the Preview view and is the name as it appears within the class definition To jump to the symbol in the code pushing a bookmark in the process double click on a symbol in either pane Press Ctrl Comma to go back Right click on a symbol for filtering options Symbol Browser Filter Options To access symbol browser filter options right click in the Symbols view and click Filters Filtering Op tions Figure 6 9 Symbol Browser Filter Options Dialog 98 Symbols View Symbol Browser Filter Options Class Members Functions Methods E Inline Protected E Constructors Private E Operators Package E Abstract Inherited E virtual E Freprocessed E Static class methods Declarations E Native E Template Data Members B Const E Show data only m Final E Static class data E Volatile E Transient E Synchronized Display or Hide B Extern Class Filter C Anonymous Member Filter Each option has three states If the option is selected only the specified items will be displayed If the op tion is deselected the specified item will not be displayed If the option is in a neutral state the item will not be considered in the filter The following options are available e Class Members e Public When selected public members are displayed e Protected When selected protected
399. ll editor operations prevent the data from the right of the 405 Extension Options Dialog truncation line length to be moved or to be modified For example search and replace operations do not find data to the right of the truncating line length In addition when a replace occurs the data to the right of the truncation line length will not move Set this to Auto for the editor to determine the truncation line length based on the record format of the file For files that do not have a record format the truncation length is turned off For example when Auto is on and the record width of the file is 80 72 is used as the truncation line length the record length minus eight e Display line numbers When this option is selected line numbers are displayed for any file with the selected extension To toggle the display of line numbers on a per document basis from the main menu click View Line Numbers or use the view_line_numbers_toggle command on the SlickEdit Core command line e Auto CAPS If selected and a file is opened that does not contain any lowercase characters caps mode is turned on not the same as caps lock When caps mode is on all text is inserted in uppercase This feature is intended to emulate ISPF Comments Tab The Comments tab provides options to control the creation of block and line comments To comment out selected lines select text in the editor and then click Format Comment Block or Format
400. llowed by an equal sign but omit the value parameter ex set classpath The DOS command shell removes environment variables in this way also The following steps are a convenient way to change the PATH environment variable 1 Press Esc to toggle the cursor to the command line 2 Type set path and press Enter This will place the current value of the PATH variable on the command line 3 Edit the current value and press Enter You can use the above steps to change the value of any other environment variable by specifying a differ ent environment variable name in the second step The set command supports completion on the envir onment variable name Typing set on the command line will give you a selection list of all of the envir onment variable names 478 Viewing Configuration Variables Configuration Variables SlickEdite Core has many behaviors that are controlled through properties not exposed in the options dia logs They are set through global configuration macro variables in Slick C using the set_var command The most commonly used of these variables are listed in the table below Viewing Configuration Variables To view the complete list of configuration variables bring up the SlickEdit Core command line and type set_var def note the hyphen at the end The completion list will provide the full list of available vari ables Use the Help system to look up information on a variable by typing the name of the va
401. llowing e Name Specifies the name for the template item The name is used in the Templates list of the Add New Item dialog e Description Specifies the description for the template item The description is displayed on the Add New Item dialog when the template is selected e Default name Specifies the default item name when using the Add New Item dialog box e Sort order Specifies an order number that is used to sort the template item in relation to other tem plate items in a list Used to sort template items in a category on the Add New Item dialog box Lower sort orders are placed ahead of higher sort order values in a sorted list Files Tab Use the Files tab of the Template Manager dialog to add edit order and delete files in a template Files are created from a template when using the Add New Item dialog as when adding an item template to a project Add Edit Order and Delete operations are accessible from the buttons on the right side or from the con text menu inside the list of files Custom Parameters Tab Use the Custom Parameters tab of the Template Manager dialog to add edit and delete substitution parameters in a template Substitution parameters are used to replace parameter names in the content of files created from a template with a pre defined value Substitution parameters can also be used to form target file names Files tab Add Edit and Delete operations are accessible from the buttons on the righ
402. losed in a larger parenthesized list For example before beautify Default_Data constant Data_Type A Get gt others gt Iteml gt false Item2 gt false Item3 gt false Paren d item enclosed in larger paren d list B_Set gt others gt Iteml gt false Item2 gt false Item3 gt false After beautify Default_Data constant Data_Type A Get gt others gt Iteml gt false Item2 gt false Item3 gt false Paren d item enclosed in larger paren d list B_Set gt others gt Iteml gt false Item2 gt false Item3 gt false e Before Specify how many blank lines are inserted before item e After Specify how many blank lines are inserted after item e Between Specify how many blank lines are inserted between like items Comments Tab The following options are available on the Comments tab e Comment lines immediately below a type declaration indented by The amount to indent a com ment appearing immediately below a TYPE declaration e Trailing comments Trailing comments appear at the end of lines which contain statements or declar ations For example A B C This is a trailing comment This is not a trailing comment procedure foo A_Var Boolean e Specific column When selected trailing comments are placed at the specified column e Indent by When selected trailing comment
403. lphanumeric char acter b t Matches blanks c A Za z Matches an alphabetic character d 0 9 Matches a digit rf V lt gt 45 WHA Matches a file name part f WJA UNIX Matches a file name part h 0 9A Fa f Matches a hex number i 0 9 Matches an integer n 0 9 0 9 0 9 Ee 0 9 Matches a floating number p A Za z I CA A A fl Windows Matches a path VpOUINM PGD UNIX Matches a path q J J Matches a quoted string v A Za z_ A Za z0 9_ Matches a C variable w A Za z Matches a word Brief Regular Expression Examples The table below shows example of Brief regular expressions Table 11 17 Brief Regular Expression Examples Sample Brief Regular Expression Description lt defproc Matches lines that begin with the word defproc lt definit gt Matches lines that only contain the word definit lt name Matches lines that begin with the string name No 536 Unicode Category Specifications for Regular Expressions Sample Brief Regular Expression Description tice that the backslash must prefix the special char acter Nt Matches tab and space characters d9 d32 Matches tab and space characters x9 x20 Matches tab and space characters p t Matches an
404. lt TD gt a table cell lt TD gt lt TR gt lt TABLE gt e Remove blank lines When on blank lines are deleted e Beautify JavaScript When on embedded JavaScript is beautified according to your JavaScript beau tifier settings e Edit JavaScript Settings Click on this button to configure the JavaScript Beautifier settings The JavaScript Beautifier is the same as the C C Beautifier see C C Beautifier for more information Schemes Tab To define a new scheme set the various beautify options and press the Save Scheme button User defined schemes are stored in uformat ini 278 Enabling Disabling XML HTML Formatting XML HTML Formatting Content in XML and HTML files may be set to automatically wrap and format as you edit XML HTML Formatting is essentially comprised of two features Content Wrap which wraps the content between tags and Tag Layout which formats tags according to a specified layout Both can be activated individu ally for all XML and HTML files that are opened in SlickEdite or just for the current document Formatting schemes form the basis for how tags and content are formatted A formatting scheme contains any number of XML or HTML tags each of which can be configured individually for indent levels wrap ping and tag structure Multiple schemes can be defined for example you may want one scheme for HTML files and another for XML files or perhaps you are required to code certain files t
405. lude wildcards Note that ISPF search expressions cannot be used here Click the right pointing arrow button to the right of the Search for field to display a menu containing specific search syntax options such as Character in Range Beginning of Line and Decimal Digit Look in This field allows you to specify a range for your search to the current selection current pro cedure current buffer or all buffers Search options Click this button to expand or contract the search options section of the view window When contracted the options that are selected are summarized in this area Match case If selected a case sensitive search is performed Match whole word If selected a word search is performed Before a search is considered successful the characters to the left and right of the occurrence of the search string found are checked to be non word characters The default word characters are A Za z0 9_ and can be changed To change these from the main 345 Find and Replace View menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog select the Advanced Tab and enter your desired characters in the Word chars field e Use Set this option to select one of the following types of search syntax from the drop down list e Regular expression UNIX e Regular expression Brief e Regular expression SlickEdit
406. ly UTF 8 data By default XML and Unicode files with signatures UTF 8 UTF 16 and UTF 32 files are automatically loaded as Unicode UTF 8 data while other more common program source files like c java and cs source files are loaded as SBCS DBCS active code page data All file data can be configured to Unicode UTF 8 data but this would cause some problems Loading files containing SBCS DBCS data would take significantly longer slowing down parsing by Context Tagging and any other multi file operations In addition Unicode editors cannot support all the features supported by SBCS DBCS editors due to font limitations For more information see Unicode Limitations To provide better support for editing Unicode and non Unicode files two modes of editing exist Unicode and SBCS DBCS mode Files that contain Unicode XML or code page data not compatible with the act ive code page should be opened as Unicode files The following are non Unicode encodings and put the editor in SBCS DBCS editing mode Default Text SBCS DBCS mode Binary SBCS DBCS mode and EBCDIC SBCS DBCS mode In addition the Auto Unicode Auto Unicode2 Auto EBCDIC and Unicode and Auto EBCDIC and Unicode2 encod ings put the editor into SBCS DBCS editing mode when the file is determined not to be Unicode All other encodings put the editor in Unicode mode and require that the file data be converted to UTF 8 There are many encodings available including e Auto XML Th
407. mark options are located on the Search Tab of the General Options dialog click Window gt Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting See Search Tab for a listing of the available options Another option is available by setting a macro variable SlickEdit Core can push a bookmark whenever you jump to the top or bottom of the buffer Ctrl Home Ctrl End or top_of_buffer bottom_of_buffer commands respectively This is convenient for example in C if you jump to the top of the buffer to add a include statement a bookmark is pushed so you can use Ctrl Comma pop_bookmark com mand to get back to your previous position To use this option click Macro Set Macro Variable and in the Variable combo box select or type def_top_bottom_push_bookmark then click OK To turn off this option off unset the variable by changing the Value to 0 175 Setting Conditional Breakpoints Setting Breakpoints The quickest way to set or clear a breakpoint is to press F9 This toggles the breakpoint for the current line The breakpoints functionality in SlickEdit Core integrates with the Eclipse Breakpoints view This view displays a list of breakpoints and lets you easily add remove and activate them To display the Break points view click Window Show View Other expand Debug and double click Breakpoints See Breakpoints view in the Eclipse online Help for more information Set
408. may want to change this setting Comments Tab 261 XML Figure 7 19 XML Beautifier Comments Tab XML Beautifier Indent Tags Attributes Values Comments Advanced Schemes l Beautify Trailing comments Cancel Indent stand alone comments Specific column Indent column 1 comments Original absolute column Help ee ee Original relative indent Save Settings Sync extension options The Comments tab contains the following options and settings Indent stand alone comments When on indicates whether comments which appear on lines by themselves with no content to the left are indented to the current content indent level The following is an example of a stand alone comment lt stand alone comment Indent column 1 comments Normally comments that start in column 1 are left alone Turn this on if you want the indent for these comments to be adjusted as well e Define Comments Displays the XML Comments dialog This dialog allows you to define what the beautifier recognizes as a comment The sequence lt gt is defined as the XML comment by default If you delete all comment definitions then all comments will be parsed as content Trailing comments Specify how trailing comments are treated from the following options e Specific column This text box specifies the column that trailing comments should be placed at By trailing comments we mean comments which appear at the end
409. mbol at the cursor The push_tag command actually calls the find_proc command with the symbol name at the cursor to per form the task Begin End Structure Matching Begin End Structure Matching moves the cursor from the beginning of a code structure to the end or vice versa This works for languages using curly braces begin and end or any other defined begin end pairs 77 Code Navigation To place the cursor on the opposite end of the structure when the cursor is on a begin or end keyword pair press Cirl find_matching_paren command or from the menu click Navigate Go to Matching Parenthesis The find_matching_paren command supports matching parenthesis pairs and Tip For Python SlickEdit Core supports the matching of the colon token and the end of context See Begin End Structure Matching for Python for more information Viewing and Defining Begin End Pairs Use the Extension Options Dialog to view or define the begin end pairs for any language To access this dialog click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog select the extension you wish to work with from the Extension drop down list then select the Advanced Tab In the Begin end pairs text field specify the pairs in a format similar to a regular expression Note This text box is unavailable for language
410. members are displayed e Private When selected private members are displayed e Package Java only When selected package members are displayed Java members have pack age scope if they do not specify public protected or private 99 Symbols View Inherited When selected only inherited members that this class can access are displayed When unselected only members of this class are displayed Preprocessed When selected only members expanded by pre processing are displayed This is specifically useful for MFC classes When unselected only non preprocess members displayed e Declarations Template C only When selected only template classes are displayed When unselected only non template classes are displayed Const C only When selected only methods which do not modify members method1 const are displayed When unselected only non const methods are displayed Use the Symbol Properties View right click in the Symbols view and choose Arguments or from the main menu click Window Show View Other expand SlickEdit Views and double click Sym bol Properties to view other const information for declarations for example int const const pcpcvariable Final Java only When selected only final members are displayed When unselected only non fi nal members are displayed Volatile C only When selected only volatile method members method1 volatile are dis played When unselect
411. members are displayed When unselected only meth ods are displayed e Static class data When selected only static data members are displayed When unselected only non static data members are displayed e Transient Java only When selected only transient data members are displayed When unselec ted only non transient data members are displayed e Display or Hide e Class Filter When selected the class filter is displayed in the Symbols view e Member Filter When selected the member filter is displayed in the Symbols view Symbol Properties View The Symbol Properties view displays detailed information properties and arguments for the symbol at the cursor location Note that this window is read only so you can t use it to change the properties To open the Symbol Properties view right click on a symbol in the Symbols view and click Properties Figure 6 10 Symbol Properties View 101 Code Templates Symbol Properties Const Cl inline Abstract C Synchronized C Extern Forward G8 Properties di Arguments 102 Instantiating a Template Code Templates Code templates are pre defined units of code that you can use to automate the creation of common code elements like a standard class implementation or design patterns You can create templates for a whole file or multiple files Templates can contain substitution parameters that are replaced when the template is instan
412. ment block Navigating Between Words To navigate between words use the next_word Ctrl Right and prev_word Ctrl Left commands The next_word command moves the cursor to the beginning of the next word The prev_word command moves the cursor to the beginning of the previous word You can specify whether the cursor moves to the beginning or the end of the next previous word Click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the More Tab Set the Next word style to Begin or End This affects both next_word and prev_word commands Navigating to a Specific Line To view and place the cursor on a specific line number from the main menu click Search gt Go to Line Enter the line number and click OK Alternatively you can use the goto_line command in the syntax 80 Symbol Browsing goto_line lt linenumber gt Navigating to an Offset To seek to a byte offset in the current buffer from the main menu click Navigate Go to Offset or use the gui_seek command This function is the same as the C Iseek function However if you have opened the file with tab expansion the seek position on disk may be different When the Seek dialog appears enter the position to seek for You may specify a C syntax expression In addition you may prefix the expression with a plus or minus sign or to specify a relative seek posi tion
413. ments that appear on lines by themselves with no statement text to the left are indented to the current statement indent level For example stand alone comment another stand alone comment i 14 trailing comment Indent column 1 comments Normally comments that start in column 1 are left alone Select this op tion if you want the indent for these comments to be adjusted e Specific column This text box specifies the column in which trailing comments should be placed Trailing comments are comments that appear at the end of lines that contain statements or declara tions For example another stand alone comment stand alone comment Zeck trailing comment if x trailing comment f e Original absolute column When this option is selected trailing comments are placed at the same 241 C C Beautifier column as the original source file Trailing comments are comments that appear at the end of lines that contain statements or declarations Original relative column When this option is selected trailing comments are indented by reusing the indent after the last character of the end of the statement or declaration of the original source file Trail ing comments are comments that are displayed at the end of lines that contain statements or declara tions For example if the original code is as follows if i 1 lt four characters gt trailing comment i 4 lt four characters gt
414. menu item Edit Other Copy Unicode As 4 Open the Java source file and paste Edit Paste the UCN data into the file Unicode Limitations 472 Using Unicode The following is a list of Unicode limitations Bold and italics color coding is not supported Support for this will be added in a future version Tab character operations are not fully supported Tab display the Expand tabs to spaces save option Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Options setting and select the Save Tab and save with tabs save t only work correctly if all the characters are below 128 The Expand tabs to spaces load option Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Options setting and select the Load Tab is ignored Column selections do not fully support Unicode If all the characters are below 128 and the font is fixed then it works Support for this will be added in a future version Word Wrap does not fully support Unicode If all the characters are below 128 and the font is fixed then it works Support for this will be added in a future version The Unicode line end character 0x2048 is not supported Hex editing is not supported The current character Composite character is displayed on the status line Also use the Open dialog with the Binary SBCS DBCS mode encoding to view a Unicode file in hexadecimal C
415. mment Block or box command SlickEdit Core provides eight fields to specify the characters used in your commenting style If you want to apply a comment with no additional decoration fill in the upper left and lower right fields with the characters to begin and end a block comment To draw a box around the comment fill in additional characters in the other fields For example you might put an asterisk in each of the other fields to draw a box of asterisks around the block comment SlickEdit Core interprets the contents of these fields literally If you want the asterisks on the left hand side to line up you need to put a space before the asterisk in the left middle field Likewise you would put a space before the asterisk and slash in the field containing the end of comment characters Trailing spaces are ignored on the right hand fields To illustrate the following code sample is a selection if tenabled tabState TIS_DISABLED From the main menu click Format Comment Block and the selection is commented out as follows 407 Extension Options Dialog if enabled tabState TIS_DISABLED SZ Select from the following comment block options e First line is top When this option is selected the first line of the text selection is used as the first line of the comment The top border is not drawn Otherwise the open comment characters will appear on their own line If this option is selected for
416. modified by the dialogs and is not preserved when a new editor is installed syscpp h UNIX usyscpp h A text file that contains system defined default pre processing for Context Tagging of C and C code vesystem slk UNIX uvcsys s1k A text file that contains default version control sys tems This file is NOT modified by the dialogs and is not preserved when a new editor is installed vslick ini A text file that contains a few miscellaneous op tions Some customizable environment variables for path searching for macros bitmaps and binary files are stored here as well This file is NOT modified by the dialogs and is not preserved when a new editor is installed vslick sta UNIX vslick stu A binary file that contains default dialog boxes menus macro pcode key bindings and all other configuration data not stored in one of the other configuration files vslick vlx A text file that contains default color coding lexer definitions vsscheme ini A text file that contains default color schemes This file is NOT modified by the dialogs and is not pre served when a new editor is installed 488 Search Order for Configuration Files File Search Order Search Order for Configuration Files Several files are automatically searched for either immediately when the editor is invoked or during the course of operation The search order for configuration files such as vslick ini
417. more details see Bookmarks Breakpoints 27 Available SlickEdito Core Views Lists breakpoints and exception breakpoints for Java and allows you to modify them You must use this view to set breakpoint properties It can be used when you are not in debug mode Right click within the view window to display a context menu which allows you to jump to the location of a breakpoint or modify breakpoints Note that the breakpoints functionality in SlickEdit Core integrates with the Eclipse Break points view For more details on this topic see Setting Breakpoints Class Provides an outline of both the members of the current class as well as any visible inherited members This view also shows the inheritance hierarchy of the current class useful for object oriented program ming languages such as Java See Class View for more information Outline Provides an outline of symbols in the current workspace See Outline View for more information Find and Replace Used to perform search and replace operations This view can also be displayed by using the key binding Ctrl F See Find and Replace for more information Find Symbol Used to locate symbols which are declared or defined in your code It allows you to search for symbols by name using a regular expression substring or fast prefix match See Find Symbol View for more informa tion FTP Used to connect to FTP servers and open files Right click on files to display a menu o
418. more information about changing these colors To display the Color Set tings dialog click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Color setting Figure 10 56 Color Settings Dialog Color Settings Set embedded language color Screen element Foreground Comment F Keyword Background Line Number Preprocessor String Library Symbol Sample Text 1234567890 Operator User Defined Symbol Font Style Functi special Characters Normal O Bold O Italic O Underline Hex Mode C Use fixed spacing for bold and italic Fixed Unicode fonts Color scheme The following options are available e Set embedded language color When this option is selected you can define the colors for source code for example JavaScript embedded in an HTML file For HTML the syntax color coding recog nizes the lt script language gt tag and uses embedded language colors for the new language In addition for Perl and UNIX shell scripts you can prefix your HERE document terminator with one of the color coding lexer names to get embedded language color coding For an example see Setting Colors for Screen Elements Screen element Select the screen element before changing the Foreground and Background col ors Most of the screen element items are obvious except for those in the following list e Window Text This is the color of other text which is not a specific syntax element
419. more specific For example to search for a string of digits and prefix each string of digits with the character you would specify the following in the Replace tab of the Find and Replace view e UNIX regular expression Search for 0 9 Replace with 1 195 Undoing Redoing Replacements SlickEdit regular expression Search for 0 9 Replace with 0 Brief regular expression Search for 0 9 Replace with 0 If the minimal matching operator UNIX SlickEdit and Brief syntax was used in the search string in stead of the maximal matching operator UNIX SlickEdit syntax Brief syntax the above search and replace would prefix each digit in the file with a character which is probably not what you want Undoing Redoing Replacements To undo a replacement click Edit gt Undo press Ctrl Z or use the undo command To redo a replace ment click Edit gt Redo press Ctrl Y or use the redo command To undo replacements in multiple files click Edit Multi File Undo or use the mfundo command To redo replacements in multiple files click Edit gt Multi File Redo or use the mfredo command 196 Code Beautifiers Beautifying Code Code Beautifiers Code beautifiers available for many languages reformat the layout of existing text based on settings that you specify such as begin end styles and indenting To beautify selected lines of code or to beautify the entire b
420. mplate editing word processing options and all other extension options are the same In addition modifying the extension option information for either extension updates both extensions For example by default the nand cpp extensions refer to the c file extension Modify the h or cpp extension setup to modify the extension setup for all three extensions In addition the h and cpp extensions use the same Context Tagging settings as the c extension To have the setup data for one extension refer to another extension click the Refer to button located at the top right corner of the Extension Options dialog This button is not available if other extensions already refer to this one Refer to is also available on the New Extension dialog box to set when adding a new extension Update To update the extension setup click this button located at the bottom of the Extension Op tions dialog This is useful when modifying the options for more than one extension as it keeps the Ex tension Options dialog box displayed Options To access formatting options such as brace styles indentation and other code style settings click the Options button located at the bottom of the Extension Options dialog This will display a Formatting Options dialog box that contains options specific to the extension that is selected Each dia log is described in the appropriate section in the chapter Chapter 7 Language Specific Editing New To create a new
421. ms to these commands The single character forms lt or gt specifies that the line and the subsequent n 1 lines are to be shifted The two character block forms are placed on the first and last lines of the block to be shifted Data is shifted only within the columns defined by the current bounds or if bounds is turned off but there is a truncation column between column 1 and the truncation column If the shift operation results in data moving beyond the right or left margins it is truncated and there is no warning message See Also ispf_bounds ISPF Insert After A Usage A n Remarks Identifies a line after which copied or moved lines are to be inserted n times You are allowed to specify multiple A B or O line commands to have the same copy or move block inserted in multiple places See Also ispf_copy ispf_paste ISPF Line Command B ISPF Line Command Copy ISPF Line Command Move ISPF Line Command Overlay 508 ISPF Line Commands ISPF Insert Before B Usage B n Remarks Identifies a line before which copied or moved lines are to be inserted n times You are allowed to specify multiple A B or O line commands to have the same copy or move block inserted in multiple places See Also ispf_copy ispf_paste ISPF Line Command B ISPF Line Command Copy ISPF Line Command Move ISPF Line Command Overlay ISPF Insert Bounds Ruler BNDS Usage BNDS Remarks Insert a column boundary ruler line Afte
422. n toe 7 Select Save Path 1 Filelist Include different files and Include files not in Path2 All other check boxes should be clear 8 Click OK and select an output file for the list The file you save will have the 1st extension appended to the output file name 9 Zip the files if you want Automatic Directory Mapping The DIFFzilla dialog box automatically updates the Path 2 text box with a directory based on file paths that you previously typed in this field For example if you previously typed f slick12 bitmaps into the Path 1 text box and server user slick12 bitmaps into the Path 2 text box then f slick12 is mapped to server user slick12 The next time that you type f slick12 macros in the Path 1 text box server user slick12 macros is automatically entered into the Path 2 text box To turn this option off complete the following steps 1 From the main menu click Tools File Difference or use the diff command 2 Select the Options tab 3 Click Dialog Setup 4 Clear the Automatic directory mapping check box Diffing File History 313 3 Way Merge The Backup History feature is available for viewing and comparing the differences between the current and previous versions of an open file It utilizes the DIFFzillam dialog for diffs see Using the DIFFzilla Dia log For more information about this working with Backup History see File History and Backups 3 Way Merge The 3 Way Merge
423. n Windows 1 Open a command line utility and change to the SlickEditCoreSetup subdirectory of your Eclipse installation 2 Run the following command as a user with administrator privileges Maes add SlickEditCore3 3 0 Setup on Linux 1 Open a command line utility and change to the SlickEditCoreSetup subdirectory of your Eclipse installation 2 Change to the root directory of your Eclipse installation and run the following command chmod R x plugins com slickedit linux libs_3 3 0 slickedit 3 Run the following command as a user with root access sh install_fnp sh FNPLicensingService Finding Updates To find updates for SlickEdit Core 1 In Eclipse select Help gt Software Updates Find and Install 2 Select Search for updates of the currently installed features 3 Select the SlickEdit update site from the list of sites and click Next 4 Accept the license agreement to continue 5 Click Finish Licensing SlickEdite Core v3 3 uses FLEXnet Publisher from Macrovision to manage licenses When Eclipse with SlickEdit Core is run it checks for an activated license If one can t be found the SlickEdit License Manager wizard is run This gives you the option to get a trial license buy a license or enter a license key You can also manually run the SlickEdit License Manager by selecting Help gt SlickEdit License Manager e To try out SlickEdit Core click the option to obtain a trial license This will
424. n XHTML lt td gt block which was at an indent level of 30 and your max line length was set to 80 then that line would not be wrapped until it reached a total length of 30 80 110 characters Set this value to 0 if you want your line breaks preserved 257 XML e Broken tag lines Specify how broken tag lines are treated from the following options e Indent from tag column by Specifies the amount to indent for broken tag lines from the starting column of the tag Specify 0 to align broken tag lines with the starting column of the tag e Use original relative indent Reindent broken tag lines using the original relative indent amount from the starting column of the tag e Preserve original indent Preserve the original absolute indent amount on broken tag lines Tags Tab Figure 7 17 XML Beautifier Tags Tab XML Beautifier Indent Tags Attributes Values Comments Advanced Schemes Beautify Tag case UPPER O lower O Capitalize Preserve Cancel Tag settings Help lt DEFAULT TAG gt Ze End tag d Reformat Kee AE End tag required 9 Indent f C Preserve tag body C Literal a Save Settings F Preserve tag position Line breaks E Before open Lag 1 C Stand alone Add After close tag 1 Syne extension options The Tags tab contains the following options and settings Tag case Specifies how you want your tag names cased For example if you choose UPPER then lt tag
425. n a double click To specify this option double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the General tab then select the option Expand collapse single click e Clicking past the end of a line To have the ability to place the cursor past the end of a line double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the General tab then select the option Click past end of line Specifying cursor up down behavior By default cursor_up and cursor_down commands go to the same column of the next or previous line unless that line is shorter than the current column in which case the cursor is placed at the end of the line To have the cursor placed in virtual space at the end of the line double click the Redefine Common Keys setting Uncheck the option Up Down on text Changing the line insert style In code a line of text is a meaningful unit of functionality SlickEdit Core treats line selections differently than character selections Line selections are pasted either above or below the current line saving you from tediously positioning the cursor at the beginning or end of a line prior to pasting To specify where line selections are pasted double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the More tab then set the Line insert style option to Before or After The default is After e Setting color schemes and fonts Predefined color schemes as well as individual settings are avail
426. n alphabetic character e d 0 9 Matches a digit f A V lt gt 4 WII Windows Matches a file name part e tf t UNIX Matches a file name part e th 0 9A Fa f Matches a hex number e i 0 9 Matches an integer n 0 9 0 9 0 9 Ee 0 9 Matches a floating number p A Za z F f Windows Matches a path p f f UNIX Matches a path q J Matches a quoted string e v A Za z_ A Za z0 9_ Matches a C variable e w A Za z Matches a word The precedence of operators from highest to lowest is as follows 530 Brief Regular Expressions e These operators have the same precedence e concatenation SlickEdit Regular Expression Examples The table below shows examples of SlickEdit regular expressions Table 11 15 SlickEdit Regular Expression Examples Sample SlickEdit Regular Expression Description Adefproc Matches lines that begin with the word defproc Adefinit Matches lines that only contain the word definit A name Matches lines that begin with the string name No tice that the backslash must prefix the colon charac ter MA Matches tab and space characters 9 32 Matches tab and space characters x9 x20 Matches tab and space characters p t Matches any three letter string startin
427. n be set with the Key Bind ings dialog click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Key Bindings setting For more information see Creating Bindings Popping a Bookmark Popping a bookmark will pop back or return to the location of the top bookmark pushed on the book mark stack removing the bookmark in the process To pop a bookmark press Ctrl Comma You can also use the menu item Search gt Pop Bookmark or the pop bookmark command Note If the option Automatically close visited files is selected in the General Options dialog Win dow Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Gen eral setting and select the General Tab the file will be closed if it is unmodified and the book mark was created through symbol navigation See Symbol Navigation for more information Viewing Pushed Bookmarks Pushed bookmarks do not appear in the Bookmarks view and by default no visual indicator is displayed in the editor window To display a visual indicator click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click on the General setting Select the Search Tab then select the option Show pushed bookmarks This will display a blue Bookmark bitmap in the left margin of the edit or window for each new pushed bookmark Setting Bookmark Options 174 Setting Breakpoints Most book
428. n double click the General setting Select the Search Tab Select the Restore cursor after replace option Cirl G Exit command and restore cursor to its original pos ition Cirl R Search in reverse for next occurrence of search string Cirl S Ctrl T Search forward for next occurrence of search string Toggle regular expression pattern matching on off The key bound to the Brief emulation command re_toggle will also toggle regular expression pat tern matching Ctrl W Toggle word searching on off To change the word characters for a specific extension from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting Se lect your extension from the Extension drop down list then select the Advanced Tab Ctrl C Toggle case sensitivity The key bound to the Brief emulation command case_toggle will also toggle the case sensitivity Ctrl M F1 or Toggle searching within selection Display Help on Find and Replace view 188 Find and Replace View Key Action Replace Command Search Examples The table below provides examples of using command line replace Table 6 12 Replace Command Search Examples Example Description c Replace occurrences of forward slashes with back slashes c x y m Replace occurrences of x in the selected area with y us
429. n elements 454 Font Configuration Dialog See Fonts for more information about changing fonts and a list of recommended fonts To display the Font Configuration dialog from the main menu click Window gt Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Font setting Figure 10 57 Font Configuration Dialog Font Configuration Element SBCSIDBCS Source Windows k Font Style eat Fixed Font M Bold Default Fixed Font i Fixedsys _ Italic HE_TER MIMAL C Strikethrough Lucida Console C Underline Lucida Sans Typewriter Fixed Fonts Only Script Default wi Sample Line before da Bb Ce ll OI Line after The following settings are available e Screen Elements The Element drop down list of the Font Configuration dialog contains the screen elements for which fonts can be changed When an element is selected the font type and size will automatically adjust to the current settings for that element and a preview of the font will be displayed in the Sample area Select from the following elements e Command Line The SlickEdit Core command line displayed at the bottom of the application win dow 455 XML HTML Formatting Dialog e Status Line For status messages displayed at the bottom of the application window SBCS DBCS Source Windows Editor windows that are displaying non Unicode content for ex ample plain text e Hex Sou
430. n in the reference list 4 Click OK The Add Tags Database dialog opens Figure 5 8 Add Tags Database Dialog Add Tags Database Look in gt taafiles vO Ce ES Cygwin 3 2 i656 pc cygwin vig E dotnet bg IE java vtg File name Files of type T ag Files vtg Change dir 5 Select an existing tag file or enter the name for the new tag file Tag files have the extension vtg 6 Click Open to display the Add Tree dialog Navigate to the root of the library source code and click the OK button 7 The Building Tag File dialog opens showing the progress as the tag file is built When finished the con tents are displayed in the Context Tagging Tag Files dialog 69 Managing Tag Files See Managing Tag Files for more information Tagging Run Time Libraries Create extension specific tag files for include files of compiler packages or utility libraries or both This al lows the Context Tagging feature set to work for all symbols not just those symbols in the project Con text Tagging needs all symbol information to work properly A tag file is automatically built for the run time libraries of C InstallShield JavaScript Perl PV WAVE Slick Ce Tornado TCL and Visual Basic NET and usually it is not necessary to build tag files for the run times of these languages If you already built a tag file for run times during installation you can skip this section If you a
431. n off while an incremental search is in progress see Incremental Searching The search commands slash and find take R and U options to interpret the search string as a regular ex pression see Find and Slash Commands The search and replace command also takes R U and B options to specify a regular expression see Replace Command Search Examples SlickEdit Core supports four types of syntax e UNIX see UNIX Regular Expressions e SlickEdit see SlickEdit Regular Expressions e Brief see Brief Regular Expressions e Wildcards All syntax types have the same features In order to accomplish this we have made several enhance ments to the UNIX and Brief syntaxes To select the regular expression syntax from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree double click the General set ting then select the Search Tab Select the option Regular expression then pick the syntax from the drop down list Special Characters in Regular Expression Find Replace 192 Find and Replace with Regular Expressions Characters have special meaning during search and replace operations e UNIX regular expressions When regular expressions are turned on for a search and replace com mand the backslash character has special meaning in the replace string A backslash in the replace string has the same meaning as in the search string except that c and char are not supported
432. n specified Fixed Auto matic or Fixed right will be used instead Tag Layout Settings The Tag Layout tab of the XML HTML Formatting dialog contains options to control the location of the start tag end tag and the content between them Figure 7 36 XML HTML Formatting Tag Layout Tab General Content wrap Tag Layout Start tag on separate line End tag on separate line Content indent Match extension indent style O indent Nested tag indent Offects all tags in scheme Match extension indent style Match content indent Insert line breaks Before start tag o After end tag e Start tag on separate line When selected the start tag occurs on a separate line and the cursor will be placed on the line below for you to type the content Note the cursor location in the examples be low e End tag on separate line When selected the end tag placed on a separate line below the content Example of both settings checked 289 Formatting Settings lt div gt lt div gt Example of both settings unchecked lt div gt lt div gt Example of start checked and end unchecked lt div gt lt div gt Note Dynamic Surround is triggered when you type a tag that has both options Start and End tag on separate line checked Note that Dynamic Surround cannot wrap content and only indents to match the indent style you have specified on the Indent Tab of the Extension Optio
433. n text selected affects all extensions When this option is selected it affects all of the extensions and pressing Tab or Shift Tab indents or un indents the selected text e Backspace at beginning of line un indents When this option is selected and the cursor is located before the first non blank character pressing the Backspace key un indents the current line by one in dent level See also Setting the Backspace Unindent Style e Use SmartPastee Specifies whether copied or pasted text should be reindented according to what the editor thinks is the correct indent level See SmartPaste for more information e Use Dynamic Surround Provides the ability to surround a group of statements with a block state ment indented to the correct levels according to your indent settings on this tab In order for Dynamic Surround to work the option Syntax Expansion must also be selected see below See Dynamic Sur round for more information on how to use this feature e Syntax expansion Activates the Syntax Expansion feature When this option is selected pressing the spacebar after typing a keyword such as if or for will cause that syntax element to be expanded insert ing the rest of the if or for statement Alternately you can bind a space command to a key other than the spacebar See Syntax Expansion for more information on using this feature e Minimum expandable keyword length Sets the minimum length for a keyword that will trigger Syn
434. n the command line To place the cursor on the command line either press the Esc key click on the message line or use is pf_retrieve F12 If configured to do so the Home key will also place the cursor on the command line Once on the command line you may use the cursor Up Down keys to retrieve the previous last command entered respectively Though primary commands may be typed at the command line explicitly for convenience you can simply type the last part of the command name in the command line and it will automatically be mapped to the ISPF specific command For example to execute the ISPF reset command simply type reset at the command line instead of ispf_reset Note Some standard built in commands conflict with ISPF emulation commands These conflicts in clude copy cut delete find hex move and paste To access the built in command you may be able to use a menu option or consult the Help for that command for specific instructions Table 11 7 ISPF Primary Commands Command Description ispf_autosave Turn on or off prompting to save changes ispf_bounds Set or reset the left and right edit boundaries ispft_bnds Set or reset the left and right edit boundaries ispf_browse Browse a data set or member ispf_cancel Closes the current file or PDS member without sav ing changes ispf_caps Turn on or off automatic capitalization mode ispf_change Replace one string with another
435. n the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Ex tension Options dialog select the Indent Tab By default we initialize this text box with your current ex tension setup setting Indent with tabs When on tab characters are used for leading indent of lines This value defaults to the Tabs text box in the Extension Options dialog box Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog select the Indent Tab Tab size Specifies output tab size The output tab size is only used if the Indent with tabs check box is on This value defaults to the Syntax indent text box in the Extension Options dialog box Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog select the Indent Tab Original tab size Specifies what the original file s tab expansion size was We need to know the tab expansion size of your original file to handle reusing indent amounts from your original file Currently the beautifier only reuses the original source file s indenting for comments This option has no effect if the original file has no tab characters Max line length Specifies the maximum length a line can be before it is wrapped to a new line This max line length is relative to the current indent level For example if you were inside a
436. n the view options are selected 388 General Options Dialog Note Viewing special characters is only available for ASCII files To access Special Characters options from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the Special Characters tab which is pictured below See Viewing Special Characters for more information about these settings Figure 10 27 General Options Special Characters Tab 389 General Options Dialog General Options General Search Selections Special Characters More Exit Virtual Memory View code in This tab defines the characters to S display when displaying special O Hex Dec characters ch Cod Meani The two End Of Line characters a eg Gage are useful when viewing files from pl End Of Line 1 Windows DOS platforms TI End Of Line 2 Use Hex and Dec to toggle the special characters code between pl P hexadecimal and decimal representations 46 Spac Ta Use Reset to restore values to Virtual space default settings a Note that some fonts may not be H e End Of File able to display certain special characters More Tab The More tab pictured below contains additional options that can be set for working with SlickEdite Core To access these options click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click Ge
437. n up or down arrow in the column header in dicates ascending or descending sort order All of the columns as well as the documentation pane can be resized by dragging the separator bars The sections below describe different ways to use the Key Bindings dialog For a listing and descriptions of elements on this dialog see Key Bindings Dialog Viewing and Filtering Bindings You can filter the data in the Key Bindings dialog by using the Search by command and Search by key sequence boxes at the top This is useful for finding a command macro for creating editing or removing a binding and for determining what key sequences are associated with a command macro and vice versa e To find a command macro search for it by entering a string in the Search by command box The column of commands is filtered incrementally as you type to show only commands that contain the specified string Commands that have more than one key sequence associated with them are listed on separate rows For example in CUA emulation the command gui_open is bound to F7 and Ctrl O Therefore gui_open appears in the Command column three times one row per key sequence e To find a key sequence place the focus in the Search by key sequence box by tabbing or using the mouse and then press the actual key or key sequence The column of key sequences is filtered to show only bound sequences that contain the specified key s For example to see all commands mac ros that are
438. nd Xcodee In addition to the documentation SlickEdit Core provides a built in Help system The contents of the Help system is the same as the contents of the User Guide Documentation Feedback We welcome your comments and suggestions regarding our documentation Please send feedback to lt docs slickedit com gt Documentation Conventions The subsequent topics describe conventions that are used in the SlickEdite Core documentation Default Emulation Key Binding Mode CUA is the default editor emulation mode Therefore key bindings and shortcuts listed in the documenta tion follow the CUA emulation Platform Specific Notes Platform specific notes for for Microsoft Windows and Linuxe are listed throughout the documentation where applicable Menus and Dialogs Instructions for navigating to items accessed from the main menu are written in the form MainMenulItem gt SubMenuItem For example the text click Window Preferences indicates that you should first select Window from Supported Languages and En vironments the main menu then select Preferences from the Window submenu Our documentation structure is set up so that instructions for using the product make up the bulk of the content while listings of dialog boxes and options can be found in Chapter 10 SlickEdit Core Dialogs Buttons on dialogs such as OK and Close are not usually documented since the meaning is obvious Code Syntax Conventions e Comman
439. nd libraries adds up to 100 MB you should set your cache size to 100 MB You may have to experiment to find the optimum value Use the recommendations below as a guide Note that this is the same option as found on the Context Tagging Options Dialog For more information about tagging see Building and Managing Tag Files e Minimum 8 MB e Default 64 MB e Ideal Sum of tag file sizes e Maximum 25 of physical system memory Extension Options Dialog The behavior of the editor can be customized for files based on specific language extensions The Exten sion Options dialog box shown below contains the settings that can be configured for file extensions To access this dialog from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click Gen eral in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting You can also display the dialog by using the setupext command Figure 10 31 Extension Options Dialog 398 Extension Options Dialog Extension Options Indent Word Wrap General Comments Comment Wrap Advanced Auto Complete Context Tagging Indent style When tab key reindents the line O None O Never In leading blanks O Auto O Always E Strict Syntax indent 4 lt Tabs 4 0 ien Syntax indent specifies the amount the C Insert real indent affects all extensions Enter and Tab keys indent Indent selection when text selected affects all extension
440. ndard STL headers automatically but you can use this to add additional com piler specific headers such as unodered_set or regex Note this setting works in combination with the extensionless header file path regular expression see below Extensionless C File Path Regular Expression In order for SlickEdit Core to safely recognize an extensionless C header file as C automatically without accidently attempting to open other exten sionless files such as executables as if they were C in addition to requiring that you specify the names of the files see above the path that the files are located in must match this regular expression C C Beautifier To beautify a C or C document open the file you want to beautify then from the main menu click Format Beautify or use the gui_beautify command The C C Beautifier will be displayed which allows you to make settings for how the code will be beautified You can use the commands c_beautify or c_beautify_selection to instantly beautify the file or the selec tion according to the settings on the Beautifier dialog Currently this beautifier supports beautifying Slick C source if the statements are terminated with semi colons like C Note The C Java JavaScript and Slick C Beautifiers contain the same options and settings as the C C Beautifier The following buttons and settings are available on the Beautifier e Beautify Beautifies current select
441. ndow displays a hori zontal scroll bar This does not affect edit window controls on dialog boxes Vertical scroll bar Not available in SlickEdit Core If checked each edit window displays a vertical scroll bar This does not affect edit window controls on dialog boxes Expand collapse single click If checked Selective Display Plus and Minus bitmaps can be expan ded or collapsed with a single click This causes Selective Display to operate similar to Windows Ex plorer However you will not be able to select a line by clicking to the left of a text line which contains a Selective Display bitmap For more information see Selective Display 382 General Options Dialog e Click past end of line If checked the cursor can be placed past the end of a line e Vertical line column Specifies the column in which the editor is to display a vertical line Specify 0 to display no vertical line e Vertical line color Click on the colored box to change the color of the line e Auto restore The Auto restore options control which elements of your SlickEdit Core environment are restored when you switch workspaces or close and re open SlickEdit Core See Restoring Settings on Startup for more information about these options e Current line highlight Select from the following options pertaining to the highlight effect of the current line e None If selected the current line will not be highlighted e Draw box only If selecte
442. ne Shift End will create a selection from the cursor to the end of the line You can also use Ctrl Shift Home to create a character selection from the cursor position to the top of the file or Ctrl Shift End to create a selection from the cursor to the end of the file e Mouse method Left click and drag the text to be selected or double click to select a whole word To extend a selection to the cursor hold down the Shift key and left click Note The key bindings are different if using the Vim emulation See the Vim emulation chart located in the docs subdirectory of your installation directory for a listing of selection keys Block Selections 126 Selections Block selections also known as column selections are used to process columns of text To select a block use one of the following methods e Keyboard method Position the cursor at the beginning of the text to be selected Next enter the se lect_block command Ctrl B or Edit Select Block Then move the cursor to the end of the block to be selected by using the arrow keys or by using the mouse e Mouse method Right click and drag the text to be selected Editing a Block of Text Block Insert Mode Block insert mode is useful when you need to edit a block of text instead of just copying or deleting it Ad ditionally when in this mode characters you type as well as other edits such as backspacing and delet ing apply to the entire bl
443. ne Command First ISPF Line Command Last ISPF Line Com mand Show ISPF Select Lines Z and ZZ for blocks Usage e Z n Select n lines starting with the line with the command e ZZ Select a block of lines must match another ZZ Remarks Select a block of lines There are two forms to this command The first form Z n specifies that the line and the subsequent n 1 lines are to be selected The second block form ZZ is placed on the first and last lines of the block to be selected See Also ispf_cut ispf_paste XEDIT Line Commands The following XEDIT line commands are supported and override the like named ISPF commands when there is a conflict XEDIT commands can be enabled using the ISPF Options dialog box Window gt Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the ISPF Options set ting Table 11 9 XEDIT Line Commands 516 ISPF Line Commands XEDIT ISPF Description R Repeat the marked line F A Paste text following line A l Add insert line s P B Paste text before line L LC Make line lowercase LL LCC Make block lowercase U UC Make line uppercase UU UCC Make block uppercase Note the following conflicts with standard ISPF edit line commands e F conflicts with unexclude first F e A conflicts with paste after A e L conflicts with unexclude last L e LL conflicts with unexclude block LL ISPF Unsupported
444. ne an alias called inc vine in Microsoft Visual C bine in C Buildere or gine for GCC if you have multiple compilers To define a new directory alias complete the following steps 1 From the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Alias setting The Select Alias File dialog appears Figure 6 19 Select Alias File Dialog 150 Directory Aliases Select Alias File ave als alias slk html als ml als CG als Ge als m als j z als cob als e als 2 Select alias sl1k and click OK The Alias Editor dialog appears 3 Click New then type the characters you wish to use for an identifier in the Alias Name text box 4 Click OK The identifier you entered is now displayed in the list box in the Alias Editor dialog 5 Make sure your new identifier is selected then in the large text box to the right enter the alias value by typing in the directory path that you want the identifier substituted with 6 Click OK Using Directory Aliases After the directory aliases are defined you can use them in any text box or buffer including the command line and fields on the Open and Change Directory dialogs For example to open a file from the command line using a directory alias complete the following steps 1 On the command line type e for edit 2 Type the alias name identifier for the directory where the file resides 3 Press Cirl S
445. ne views Quick Rename Quick Rename uses the Context Tagging to rename a symbol under the cursor or any symbol selected in the Outline or Symbols views This operation works for all tagged languages It is faster than the re name provided by C Refactoring but less stringent Quick Rename does not treat renaming classes constructors and destructors as a special case Quick Rename will rename all of the overloads of a func tion Quick Rename does not rename overridden methods in parent and child classes Figure 6 29 Quick Rename Refactoring 198 Quick Refactoring Enter new name for symbol Symbol name ImageEditor NOTE Quick rename is not a precise refactoring It uses tagging to find and replace all references to a symbol It does not detect spmbol name conflicts and does nothing special to handle constructors destructors overloaded or overridden functions C Cira Quick Extract Method After selecting a set of lines Quick Extract Method creates a new method with the selected lines as the body It discovers any undeclared variables and creates them as parameters to the new method The ex tracted method is created in the same scope as the original method Quick Extract Method is only avail able for C C Java and Slick Co Figure 6 30 Quick Extract Method Refactoring 199 C Refactoring E Extract Method Method name Replace selected code with call to new method Beautify ex
446. neral then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog select the extension you wish to work with from the Extension drop down list then select the Advanced Tab Select from the following options e Lexer name Specifies which lexer to use to recognize elements to use to be colored e Color Coding Displays the Color Coding Setup dialog box allowing modification of language specific color coding for the current language For more information see Color Coding Setup Dialog e Modified lines Color codes the modified lines e Current line Color codes the current line 142 Syntax Indent Syntax Indent and SmartPastee Syntax Indent and SmartPaste are two of the many SlickEdito features designed to decrease typing im proving your coding efficiency Syntax Indent automatically indents code to the correct levels There are two ways that code can be indented by using the automatic Syntax Indent feature and or by using tabs SmartPaste reindents pasted text to the correct level based on surrounding code Syntax Indent By default if you press Enter while you are editing a source file Syntax Indent automatically indents the cursor to the next level if it is moved inside a structure block For example if you edit a C file and the cursor is on a line containing the text for CH and you press Enter a new line is inserted and the cursor is indented four spaces in from the letter f in the word
447. neral in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the More tab 390 General Options Dialog Figure 10 28 General Options More Tab General Options General Search Selections Special Characters More Exit Virtual Memory Start in insert mode Preserve column on top bottem Throw away file lists Show tool tips Delay ms Auto exit build window CR w o LF erases line in the build window Edit A B C start on file A Key message delay C Short key names Hide mouse pointer C Reflow next Allow drag drop text Protect read only mode C Windows 3 1 style open dialog CUA Text Box Paren match style Line insert style Next word style Ce Highlight Before oi After Begin End Cursor to begin paren re Highlight matching blocks Use block cursor Scroll style Window left margin inch 0 14 C Smooth horizontal scroll Max clipboards Smooth vertical scroll Word help filename s Scroll when LJ The following options are available e Start in insert mode If selected the editing mode is set to insert when the editor is invoked Other 391 General Options Dialog wise the editing mode is set to replace e Throw away file lists If selected the modified File Manager file lists can be modified and closed without being prompted to save e Auto exit build window If selected the concurrent
448. newline character sequence Useful for matching multi line search strings What this matches depends on whether the buffer is a DOS ASCII 13 10 or just ASCII 10 UNIX ASCII 10 Macintosh ASCII 13 or user defined ASCII file Use d10 if you want to match a 10 character r Matches carriage return t Matches tab character b Matches backspace character f Matches form feed character od Matches any 2 byte DBCS character This escape is only valid in a match set od od matches any single byte character excluding end of line characters When used to search Unicode text this escape does nothing om Turns on multi line matching This enhances the match character set or match any character primit ives to support matching end of line characters For example om matches the rest of the buffer ol Turns off multi line matching default You can still use n to create regular expressions which match one or more lines However expressions like A will not match multiple lines This is much safer and usually faster than using the om option char Declares character after slash to be literal For ex ample represents the asterisk character char Matches predefined expression corresponding to 535 Brief Regular Expressions Brief Regular Expression Definition char The predefined expressions are e a A Za z0 9 Matches an a
449. next line This works just as if you had entered om on the SlickEdit Core command line Case sensitive If Case sensitive is selected the regular expression search will be case sensitive This option is on by default New expression button To clear the view window of all entries in order to start a new evaluation click the button at the top of the view window labeled New expression Open a saved expression button To open an expression that you have already saved click the folder button at the top of the view window labeled Open a saved expression Save the current expression button To save the current expression click the diskette button at the top of the view window labeled Save the current expression Both the expression and the test cases will be saved to a file The default extension is regx Save as button To save the current expression with a different file name than what has previously been saved click the button at the top of the view window labeled Save the current expression as 322 The Calculator Using the Calculator and Math Commands The Calculator To access the calculator click Tools Calculator or use the calculator command Figure 8 8 The SlickEdit Calculator Calculator 135 288 423 xiA Hex 423 or Onesl Mode Bn e Dec Hex C Oct Done Backspace Clear You can use the calculator in various ways Type in mathematical expressions from the keyboard or by
450. nformation Use workspace bookmarks By default bookmarks are stored globally and are visible in all work spaces If this option is checked bookmarks are associated with the workspace used to create them even if the files they are in are not part of the workspace When you switch workspaces the Book marks view will display only the bookmarks associated with this workspace Show set bookmarks If checked a green Bookmark bitmap is displayed in the left margin of the editor control corresponding to the bookmarks you have set Show pushed bookmarks If checked a blue Bookmark bitmap is displayed in the left margin of the editor control corresponding with each location on your bookmark stack This helps you see where Pop Bookmark will go Close deletes pushed bookmarks If checked when a buffer is closed quit any pushed book marks remaining in that file are removed This option is helpful for buffer management because it prevents buffers which were explicitly closed from coming back when you pop up out of your book mark stack Max stack depth By default the maximum stack depth for the bookmark stack is set to 15 entries If you push more than this number of bookmarks the oldest bookmark will be removed Enter the number of entries that you want the bookmark stack to hold in this field Selections Tab The Selections tab pictured below is where you can set preferences for selections These options are accessed from the m
451. ng menu items with your own callback The Auto Enable Properties dialog box is used for these settings and can be accessed from the main menu by clicking Macro gt Menus When the Open Menu dialog box is displayed click New to display the Menu Editor Click the Auto Enable button and the Auto Enable Properties dialog is displayed For descriptions of the options on this dialog see Auto Enable Properties Dialog 500 ISPF Options Dialog Using the ISPF and XEDIT Emulations This section describes the features of the ISPF editor emulation and outlines some XEDIT line com mands ISPF Options Dialog The ISPF Options dialog is used to tune various ISPF emulation options When you are in ISPF emula tion you can access this dialog from the main menu by clicking Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the ISPF Options setting Figure 11 2 ISPF Options Dialog ISPF Options Use the Extension Options dialog box Tools Options File Extension Setup to turn on line numbers or auto CAPS Prefix area width z Display prefix area for read only files Enter places cursor in prefix area Right CTRL Enter eng Ll Cursor page up down END command saves the file XEDIT line commands Home key places cursor on command line The following settings are available e Prefix area width The number of characters to display in the prefix area de
452. nges The expression A Z matches all characters ex 527 SlickEdit Regular Expressions SlickEdit Regular Expression Definition cept uppercase letters Achar set Same as char set above char set1 char set2 Character set subtraction Matches all characters in char set1 except the characters in char set2 For example a z qw matches all English lower case letters except q and w p L qw matches all Unicode lowercase letters except q and w char set1 amp char set2 Character set intersection Matches all characters in char set1 that are also in char set2 For ex ample x 0 x 7f amp p L matches all letters between 0 and 127 x hhhh Matches up to 31 bit Unicode hexadecimal charac ter specified by hhhh p UnicodeCategorySpec Only valid in character set Matches characters in UnicodeCategorySpec Where UnicodeCat egorySpec uses the standard general categories specified by the Unicode consortium For example p L matches all letters p Lu matches all up percase letters See Unicode Category Specifica tions for Regular Expressions P UnicodeCategorySpec Only valid in character set Matches characters not in UnicodeCategorySpec For example P L matches all characters that are not letters This is equivalent to 4 p L P Lu matches all charac ters that are not uppercase letters See Unicode Category Specifications for Regular Expressi
453. ngrend Match whole ward Place cursor at end Use Search backward Fiegular expression Urix Search hidden text Highlight matches Bookmark matches Incremental search Colors Mone Find Al Saving Search and Replace Values When the Find and Replace view is invoked the options that were used for your last search are dis played providing a way to repeat the last search Options also persist when switching between the tabs Pressing F7 and F8 retrieves previous and next responses respectively Search and replace values can be saved as named operations Saving preserves the values of all of the fields in the Find and Replace view so that the search and or replace operation can be repeated in the fu ture with the same results To save the search replace right click in the Find and Replace view Select Saved Search Expressions then select Save Search Expression from the submenu You will be 190 Find and Replace View prompted to name the operation To access a saved operation select Saved List from the submenu then pick the saved operation to load Syntax Driven Searching To reduce the number of false positives in your searches you can restrict the search based on program syntax Click the Color button on the Find tab of the Find and Replace view to specify the syntactic ele ments for filtering Each check box has three states Neutral the default All check boxes start in the neutral state These eleme
454. ngth int width int height String Editing When the cursor is inside of a string if you press Enter to split the line SlickEdit Core can automatically align the string with the original string as well as insert the closing and opening quotes and if necessary operators To set this option click Format Comment Setup comment_setup command The Exten sion Options dialog is displayed open to the Comments Tab Select the extension you wish to affect from the Extension drop down list then select Split strings on Enter Comment Wrapping Comments can be set to automatically wrap to the next line as you type This feature is available for C C C Java and Slick Co files To activate comment wrapping from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General then double click the File Extension Setup setting Select the extension you want to affect from the Extension drop down list then select the Comment Wrap tab Check the option Enable comment wrap then select the type of comments you want wrapped block comments line comments and or doc comments The Comment Wrap tab also provides options to control how comments are wrapped There are three 180 Find and Replace types of width settings e Fixed Comments will be formatted to a specified width e Automatic Comments will be formatted according to the width of existing comments e Fixed right margin Lines will break before a
455. nguage color coding bquote Perl and Linux Shell style backquote subshell model204 Special support for Model 204 language cics Special support for CICS embedded in COBOL python Special support for Python 497 Menu Editing Editing the Key Binding Source If you are creating a new emulation or if you change many key bindings you might want to edit your key binding source instead of using the Key Bindings Dialog To create a Slick C batch macro containing your current key bindings enter the command list_source on the command line One of the files gener ated by this command is vusrdefs e It is placed in your configuration directory if you have changed this location from the default Otherwise it is placed in your macros directory If you open this file Ctrl O the first part of the source code is your key binding which looks like the following defeventtab default_keys def A a A z def A F6 def F10 def C A select all def C B select_block def C C copy_to_clipboard def C D oui cd The default_keys are the key bindings that are active in Fundamental mode The other event tables defined by the defeventtab primitive are mode event tables containing key bindings which override the Fundamental mode key bindings Make changes to this buffer by adding or modifying the def keyname command lines and then save the buffer by pressing Ctrl S The valid key names are listed in the Help
456. nicode support is required OEMs typically turn this feature off Unicode is supported 470 Using Unicode for the following list of features e All Context Tagging features e Color Coding Level 1 regular expressions as defined by the Unicode consortium Multi file search and replace e Support for many encodings including UTF 8 UTF 16 UTF 32 and many code pages Automatic en coding recognition for XML files Configure encoding recognition per extension or globally Optionally store signatures and specify little endian or big endian Use the Save As or Write Selection dialog to convert data to a particular file encoding e Support for converting Unicode to UNC data and visa versa Supported UCN formats include xXHHHH x HHHH UHHHH amp XHHHH and amp xDDDD This is useful for specifying Unicode character strings in SBCS DBCS active code page source files See Converting Unicode to UCN Multiple clipboards e Sorting e 3 Way Merge e Support for composite and surrogate characters e Support for storing up to 31 bit Unicode characters e SmartPasteo e Syntax Expansion and Syntax Indenting Code beautifiers e Support for almost all of the SBCS DBCS active code page features in SlickEdit Core Unicode File Recognition By default XML and Unicode files with signatures UTF 8 UTF 16 and UTF 32 files are automatically loaded as Unicode If you have Unicode files that are not XML and do not have s
457. nnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnneanna 350 10 8 Find and Replace Replace in Files TaD seiis isiirrciesrri eei ereke aeea keekan eE ERR 352 E D ele une et TEE 354 10 10 Go to Definition Dialog miiran cae eeeaaaeeeeeeceaaeeesaaeseeeeesaaesseaaeeseaeeesaeesennees 357 10 41 Selective Display Dialog vanes eas ciate ian en oleh eau eege e 358 10 42 Der Macros Dial g ege iegegedbezeer ti Anche does dere REENEN teen ee anaes tne 361 10 13 Variable Editor Dialog EE 362 10 14 Grid Settings DialOg oo niiin a iiaia daia itii ae tai iia iai aa de edi idi 364 1045 Menu Editor Didog anieri ea eE REE EE EEEE EE AEAEE E DEE 364 10 16 Auto Enable Properties Dialog sssssessssseessrrnessnrneersnnnesrnnnesnnnnnnsnennnnttnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnneeenennne 366 XV SlickEdit Core v3 3 for Eclipse 10 17 10 18 10 19 10 20 10 21 10 22 10 23 10 24 10 25 10 26 10 27 10 28 10 29 10 30 10 31 10 32 10 33 10 34 10 35 10 36 10 37 10 38 10 39 10 40 10 41 10 42 10 43 10 44 10 45 10 46 10 47 10 48 10 49 10 50 10 51 10 52 10 53 10 54 10 55 10 56 10 57 10 58 10 59 10 60 10 61 10 62 10 63 10 64 10 65 Organize Imports Options Dialog c cccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeseeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeseeeesaeeeeeeeeee 369 3 Way Merge Dialog TEE 370 DIFF zilla sRiles Tab 2 dcx Adee e ugeet iesse dees ech eeehenntd cathe e a E 372 DIFFzillaw File Compare Options 374 DIFFzill
458. ns dialog Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting See Syntax Indent for more information Content indent group settings These mutually exclusive options control how content between tags is indented e Match extension indent style When selected tag content is indented according to the settings on the Indent Tab of the Extension Options dialog Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting See Syntax Indent for more information on setting extension specific indent styles e Indent When selected indenting for the tag occurs at the column number specified in the spin box When Indent after start tag gt is selected indenting is relative to the close bracket Otherwise in denting is relative to the open bracket Nested tag indent settings Indenting is activated after the end tag is typed or automatically inserted if Insert end tags on gt is checked on the General tab These mutually exclusive settings apply to all tags in the selected scheme e Match extension indent style When selected SlickEdit Core indents the selected tag according to the indent style you have specified on the Indent Tab of the Extension Options dialog Window gt Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting See
459. nt class members etc Show comments If selected the comments are displayed for the currently selected symbol in the list displayed by List Members When a symbol has multiple definitions or overloads and multiple sets of comments the comments will indicate that you are looking at item lt 1 of n gt Click on the arrows or use Cirl PgUp and Ctrl PgDn to cycle through the comment sets Completion on space If selected pressing the spacebar when List Members is displayed will insert the longest unique matching prefix from the symbols in the list For example if the list contains FLAG_CHAR and FLAG_LONG then typing FL lt Alt Dot gt lt spacebars gt completes the line of code up to FLAG_ If this option is not selected use Ctrl Space when List Members is displayed to perform completion Space always inserts space If selected pressing the spacebar when List Members is displayed will insert the current item and a space in the list after the current item If unselected pressing the spacebar will only insert the current item with no extra space 418 Extension Options Dialog e Insert open parenthesis If selected selecting an item in the list inserts the current item in the list and any extra characters that are required by the symbol For example an open parenthesis is inserted after a function name for languages that require an open parenthesis after a function name For C the less than symbol lt is inserted after a templ
460. nt the line if the cursor is positioned within the leading white space of the line Otherwise it will indent to the next tab stop This option is further con trolled by the Strict check box e Strict Strict only applies to the In leading blanks option When this option is selected it reindents 401 Extension Options Dialog the line only if the cursor position is before the intended indent location otherwise it will insert an ad ditional tab stop When this option is deselected it reindents the line when the cursor is located on the leading whitespace regardless of whether the column is before or after the intended indent loca tion e Tabs Set tabs in increments of a specific value or at specific column positions To specify an incre ment of three enter 3 in the text box To specify columns for example enter 1 8 27 44 to specify tab stops that are not an increment of a specific value e Indent with tabs Determines whether Tab key Enter key and paragraph reformat commands indent with spaces or tabs See Indenting with Tabs for more information Insert real indent affects all extensions When this option is selected the Enter key inserts real spaces or tabs representing the indent instead of virtual spaces This check box affects all extensions when it is selected This option allows the function for the End key on the keyboard to place the cursor after blank text where new text can be typed e indent selection whe
461. ntains the following e Name This is the name of the substitution parameter WITHOUT delimiters For example if the delim iter is the default then a substitution parameter that inserts a copyright string would have a name of copyright and NOT copyright Do not use quotes in the name Valid characters for a parameter name are A Za z0 9_ e Value This is the value that the substitution parameter evaluates to when a string or file is created from the template and has its substitution parameters replaced with values e Prompt for value Check this option if you always want to be prompted for the value of a substitution parameter When set the Value field becomes a default value field and is used to pre populate the value when you are prompted e Prompt string Specifies the prompt string to display when being prompted for a substitution paramet er value Add New Item Dialog Used to add an item to your current project the Add New Item dialog is displayed when you click File gt New Item from SlickEdit Template Use the Categories list to select a category Selecting a category populates the Templates list with tem plate items for that category You can then select an item from the Templates list enter a unique Name for the item and enter a Location Click Add to instantiate the template with the name and location you provided You can manage your templates from the Template Manager dialog box by choosing File SlickEdit
462. nts SlickEdit Core runs on Microsoft Vista Windowse XP or Windows 2000 as well as Linux x86 GTK 2 kernel 2 4 or later with the following requirements e 256 MB minimum recommended memory e 150 MB available hard disk space on Windows 200 MB on Linux e Eclipse 3 3 including JDT e Java 5 or later Linux only e Internet connection required to activate license Optionally CDT 3 1 is needed to run compile and debug C and C programs Installing SlickEdit Core SlickEdit Core is provided as an annual subscription that includes support Installation can be performed by using the Eclipse Update Manager or you can download ZIP files Installing with the Update Manager To install the SlickEdit Core with the Eclipse Update Manager 1 In Eclipse select Help gt Software Updates Find and Install 2 Select Search for new features to install 3 Click the New Remote Site button on the Update sites to visit screen 4 Enter a name for the plug in like SlickEdit Core and enter the following for the URL htto www slickedit com updates secore 5 Select SlickEdit Core in the list of features to install and click Next 6 Accept the license agreement to continue 7 Click Finish Installing with ZIP Files SlickEdit also provides ZIP files for installing SlickEdit Core Unzip the files to your Eclipse installation directory then follow the instructions below to complete setup 10 Licensing Setup o
463. nts will be used in a search until deselected or until one or more other elements are selected Putting a check in any check box essentially deselects all non checked boxes e Selected If the check box is selected the search will be restricted to this element and any other selec ted elements There is no need to deselect any other elements if any elements are selected If any ele ments are selected only selected elements will be searched For example to search for the word res ult only in comments put a check only in the Comment check box All other syntactic elements will be ignored as part of this search e Deselected If the check box is clear these elements will not be searched For example if you want to find the word result anywhere in your code except for in comments clear the Comment check box Setting Options Options for individual search and replace operations are located on the Find and Replace view Alternat ively you can set default options that are always used instead To set the default options right click on the background of the view window and select Configure Options The default search options will always be used when the Find and Replace view is invoked unless settings are changed on the Find and Re place view If you change settings on the view window and want to use the default options instead right click in the view window and select Use Default Options For information on each option on the Find and Re
464. nu click Format Beautify or use the gui_beautify command The Java Beautifier dialog appears where you can specify preferences for how the code is beautified The Java Beautifier contains the same options and settings as the C C Beautifier See C C Beautifier for more information Javadoc Beautifier To beautify Javadoc comments or set up Javadoc Beautifier options first invoke the Javadoc Editor by right clicking within the edit window and selecting Edit Javadoc Comments Then click the Options but ton The Javadoc Beautifier Options dialog is displayed The following settings are available e Align parameter comments to longest parameter name If checked the parameters are aligned to the length of the longest parameter name If the parameter name length is less than the minimum length the minimum length is used If the parameter length is longer than the maximum parameter length the description for the parameter will start on the next line e Align exception comments to longest exception name If checked the exceptions are aligned to the length of the longest exception name If the exception name length is less than the minimum length the minimum length is used If the exception length is longer than the maximum exception length the description of the parameter will start on the next line e Align return comments Indicates whether return comments should be aligned to the first line of comment text No alignment is performed i
465. nvironment variables or any other environment variable See Using the set Command for more information Caution Do not set the VSLICKCONFIG environment variable in vslick ini VSLICKCONFIG determ ines where the editor looks for vslick ini When the editor starts up it sets the value of envir onment variables specified in vslick ini For more information see Setting Environment Vari ables in vslick ini Table 11 1 Environment Variables Environment Variable Description VSLICKRESTORE Directory to store Auto Restore files VSLICKCONFIG Directory where user s local configuration files are stored Used in multi user environments Defaults to e Windows My Documents My SlickEd it Core Config lt Editor_Version gt e Linux SHOME secore lt editor_version gt VSLICK Specifies additional command line arguments to ed itor as if you were typing them in when invoking the editor VSLICKPATH One or more directories separated with a semicolon or a colon on UNIX where batch macros or executable files are searched VSLICKMACROS One or more directories separated with a semicolon or a colon on UNIX that contain macro files e VSLICKPATH must also contain the direct ories listed here VSLICKBIN One or more directories separated with a semicolon or a colon on UNIX that contain binary files 475 Environment Variables Environment
466. nvoked prompting for the name of the new configuration e Click Copy to copy the selected compiler configuration This can be used as a template for creating a new configuration and makes the process of creating similar configurations more convenient e Or click Add to create a configuration from scratch or to add a newly installed compiler If you wish to remove the selected compiler and associated configuration from the list click Delete This does not delete any files from disk Building the Tag File The Build tag file button on the C C Compiler Properties dialog is used to build tag files from the head er file found in the include directories for the selected compiler configuration This is especially useful when new configurations are created If you do not build the tag file here manually it will be built on de mand C C Preprocessing Typically your source code base will include preprocessor macros that you use in your code for portability or convenience For performance considerations Context Tagging does not do full preprocessing so macros that interfere with normal C syntax can cause the parser to miss symbols For example MYNAMESPACEDECL my struct MYPACKEDMACRO BinaryTree MYTYPELESS data MYPOINTER BinaryTree next MYPOINTER BinaryTree prev MYPOINTER BinaryTree proot MYNULL MYENDNAMESPACE This example uses the following preprocessor macros 245
467. o boxes to save space by right clicking and selecting Filters then unchecking the corresponding check box Symbols View Options Right click on a symbol in the Symbols view to access the following additional filtering options as well as code management options Go to Definition Moves the cursor to the symbol s definition proc See Symbol Navigation for more information Go to Declaration Moves the cursor to the symbol s declaration proto See Symbol Navigation for more information Quick Refactoring Offers two Quick Refactorings Rename and Modify Parameter List See Quick Refactoring for more information Organize imports Java only Organizes import statements in Java files See Organizing Java Im ports for more information Set Breakpoint Sets a debugging breakpoint See Setting Breakpoints for more information Find Tag Searches for symbols and displays them in the symbol browser Note that the Find Symbol view also provides this functionality Manage Tag Files Displays the Context Tagging Tag Files Dialog for use in managing your tag files Expand and Collapse options Expands collapses symbols as specified Sort by Sorts symbols displayed by tag name line number or containers to top which puts classes structs etc at the top of the list Filters Filter by class or member or select Filtering Options to display the Symbol Browser Filter Options dialog See Symbol Browser Filter Options for info
468. o continue at a later time Also you can generate a file list e Refresh Rediffs modified files or all files e Options Displays the DIFFzilla Options Tab Options include ignoring spaces skipping leading com ments and expanding tabs e Report Displays a report of the operations you performed in this dialog including file copies file de letes and diffs where changes were saved In addition you can save the report Context Tagging Tag Files Dialog The Context Tagging Tag Files dialog shown below is used to manage all your tag files For more in formation on tagging see Context Tagging Overview To access the dialog click Tools Tag Files Figure 10 23 Context Tagging Tag Files Dialog Context Tagging Tag Files Workspace Tag Files C cygwin lib gcc i686 pe cygwin 3 4 4 includeemmintrin h ZC Documents and Settings Rhuffiworkspaces runtime orders Ci cygwin lib gcc i686 pc cygwin 3 4 4 include float h ia f i Ciicyqwin lib gcc i686 pe cygwin3 4 4include g2c h C Compiler Configuration Tag Files C cyqwinilib gcc i686 pc cyqwin 3 4 4 include iso646 h aioa EEE a allt gre AMDB le ald C cyquin lib gcc i686 pc cygwin 3 4 4 include limits h Java Compiler Configuration Tag Files Seite ace ae cate apap arr dillndcragd i SES cyguwin lib gcc i686 pc cyqwin 3 4 4 include mmintrin C Documents and Settings RhuffiMy Documents My SlickEdit C eyqwintlib gccti686 pc cygwin 3 4 4 includelpmmintrin h
469. o place the command on both the first and last lines of the block Line commands are processed using the ispf_do_Ic command when you press Enter Ctrl Enter or the 505 ISPF Line Commands Right Control key depending on your preferences Several commands or line labels can be entered and then processed at one time The ispf_reset command is used to clear the prefix area Table 11 8 ISPF Line Commands Command Description ISPF Line Labels Define a label ISPF Line Command Shift Shift data left or right ISPF Line Command A Identify a line after which lines are to be inserted ISPF Line Command B Identify a line before which lines are to be inserted ISPF Line Command BNDS Insert a column boundary ruler line ISPF Line Command Copy S Specify lines to be copied to another location ISPF Line Command COL Insert a column ruler line ISPF Line Command Delete Delete one or more lines ISPF Line Command First Expose one or more lines at the beginning of a block of excluded lines ISPF Line Commandl Insert one or more blank data entry lines ISPF Line Command Lowercase Convert all uppercase letter alphabetic characters in one or more lines to lowercase ISPF Line Command Last Expose one or more lines at the beginning of a block of excluded lines ISPF Line Command Move Specify lines to be moved to another location ISPF Line Comman
470. o scroll through the items in the symbol list without using your mouse See Creating Bindings for more in formation File and line label Shows the file name and line number of the selected symbol Documentation comments pane This pane displays any existing comments for the symbol that is selected in the symbol list If the comments are in Javadoc or XMLdoc format they will be formatted in HTML You can single click on hypertext links within the comments to follow the links such as See also sections Editor preview window Shows the contents of the actual source file at the line number of the selec ted symbol Double click to open the code in the editor Right click to adjust symbol search filtering op tions Size bars Use the size bars to adjust the width of the symbol list and or the height of the documenta tion comments area Buttons The following buttons are found along the right edge of the Preview view window e Back and Forward Allow you to navigate among the hypertext links that you have traversed in the documentation comments e Go to definition Opens the selected symbol in the editor e Go to reference Finds references to the selected symbol e Show in symbol browser Locates the selected symbol in the Symbols View formerly known as the Classes view e Manage Tag Files Opens the Context Tagging Tag Files Dialog for building and maintaining tag files for indexing symbol information Information Di
471. o various stand ards Schemes can be saved and imported so they can be shared with your team Tags for each scheme can be entered manually or you can import tags from the current file Caution XML HTML Formatting does not currently affect XML or HTML Beautifier settings If you run the beautifier on documents that have been automatically formatted through XML HTML Formatting you may find unexpected results Enabling Disabling XML HTML Formatting XML HTML Formatting is on by default for XML and HTML files that you open in SlickEdit You can ac tivate and or deactivate Tag Layout and or Content Wrap for either file type on a global basis or on a per document basis Options to turn these features on off are located on the Format gt XML HTML Format ting menu Figure 7 30 XML HTML Formatting Menu XML HTML Formatting Current Document Options Indent with Tabs Enable XML Formatting Word Wrap Content Wrap Justify Tag Layout Read Only Mode w Enable HTML Formatting vw Content Wrap Tag Layout Enabling Disabling Globally Automatic formatting can be enabled or disabled for every XML and or HTML file that is created or opened in SlickEdit These XML and HTML specific global options are toggled on off by placing a check 279 Enabling Disabling XML HTML Formatting next to Enable XML Formatting and or Enable HTML Formatting To toggle Tag Layout and or Con tent Wrap on or off for either file type check or
472. o view and work with a list of macros you have recorded It is accessed by clicking Macro List Macros on the main menu or by using the list_macros command on the SlickEdit Core command line Figure 10 12 List Macros Dialog 361 Variable Editor Dialog E List Macros rep le user macro Run samnple user macra Cancel Edit Delete Bind to Key The dialog shows a list of all macros you have recorded Use the buttons to perform the following opera tions e Run Runs the selected macro See Running a Recorded Macro for more information e Cancel Closes the dialog e Edit Opens the macro source for editing See Saving and Editing Recorded Macros for more informa tion e Delete Deletes the selected macro See Deleting Recorded Macros for more information e Bind to Key Displays the Key Bindings dialog so you can assign a key or mouse shortcut to the macro See Binding Recorded Macros to Keys for more information Variable Editor Dialog The Variable Editor dialog shown below is used to edit complex variables for macros For more informa tion about working with these programmable macros see Programmable Macros To access the Variable Editor click Macro Set Macro Variable or use the gui_set_var command select a variable to edit from the list then click the Edit button Figure 10 13 Variable Editor Dialog 362 Variable Editor Dialog W Variable Editor _AppTypeList_hash
473. ock column selection After a block selection is created you can enter block insert mode by simply typing some characters to in sert or by entering the block_insert_mode command Edit Other Block Insert Mode If the block selection is more than one column wide then the initial block selection will be deleted when you type the first character This mode also supports use of the keys Tab Shift Tab and Backspace To cancel out of block insert mode press the Esc key The figure below shows an example of a block selection created by right clicking and dragging to select a block Notice the cursor position Figure 6 13 Block Insert Mode Example 1 method char ch method int i 1 method char Ss int mi method float method double dj The figure below shows how the above example changes when you type i at the cursor while the block is selected Figure 6 14 Block Insert Mode Example 2 method char ch method int method char s int nj ifpmethod float f method idonble dj 127 Selections The figure below shows how the original example changes when you type int at the cursor while the block is selected Figure 6 15 Block Insert Mode Example 3 method char ch method int method char s int nj method float f method double dj Line Selections A line selection is any selection that includes one or more complete lines of text Line selections are usu all
474. ocument is opened Specifying a Different Default Scheme SlickEdit Core has two predefined default schemes see Default Schemes You can specify your own default scheme for new XML or HTML files by selecting a scheme then from the right click context menu choose Set as Default XML Scheme or Set as Default HTML Scheme The name in the Scheme list will be appended with the text default xml or default html For example if you have an HTML scheme named readmes and set it as the default the name in the Schemes list will change to readmes default html Creating Schemes To create your own scheme right click in the Scheme column of the XML HTML Formatting dialog and select New Scheme Figure 7 33 New Formatting Scheme Dialog New Formatting Scheme New scheme name newSchemne Based on Create Cancel Type a name for your scheme then select an existing scheme on which it should be based This will copy all of the tags and settings from the selected existing scheme to your new scheme Click Create when finished 283 Working with Tags Saving and Deleting Schemes In the XML HTML Formatting Scheme Configuration dialog modified schemes are denoted by asterisks around the name for example html To save a modified scheme right click on it and select Save Scheme Changes Alternatively when you close the XML HTML Formatting dialog you are prompted whether to save modified schemes To delete a se
475. ocumentation comments if any exist See List Members and Auto Complete for more informa tion References View The References view displays the list of symbol references uses found the last time that you used the Go to Reference feature Ctrl or push_ref command see Symbol Navigation for more information To open the References view click Window Show View Other expand SlickEdit Views and double click References Figure 6 5 References View 91 References View References Symbol CATCH define zc 1 1 in 1 file c Microsoft Visual Studio 8 Chatlm S lSafx h c Program Files Microsoft int AFX CDECL AfxNewHandler size t L CATCHiclass ei jwoid AFXAPI AfxAbort T d d d d dd dd dd f f Exception macros using try cat ff for backward compatibility tc define TRY AFX EXCEPTION LINK _ itdefine CATCH class e catch e ASSERT e gt IsKindOf RUNTIME C _afxExceptionLink m pExcery gt The References view automatically comes into focus when you use the Go to Reference feature or when you select References from the right click menu of the Class Outline or Symbols view windows Note Typically you only want to view references that occur in project files and not run time libraries which can be very large For this reason references are not generated automatically for run time library tag files If you want to view references that occur
476. of tags per file _ Highlight references in editor 4 gt lt gt dh ar C Background tagging of other files Maximums tune for performance Functions found by parameter help Globals shown in list members Class struct members shown in list Candidates for list parameters Response time for list parameters ms Tags found in symbol search Tag file cache size k lt gt lt gt 4 gt lt gt lt gt lt gt dh The following settings are available 436 Context Tagging Options Dia log Tag file on save When this option is selected files are retagged when you save a modified file Background tagging of open files When this option is selected all open files are retagged in the background if they have been modified Start after seconds idle When Background tagging of buffers is selected re tagging of buffers opened files starts after the user has not touched the keyboard or the mouse for this number of seconds Update view windows after ms idle Number of milliseconds to wait before updating the Outline and Preview views Max size of files to tag bytes Limits tagging to the files that have less than this number of bytes Max number of tags per file Limits the Outline view to files that have less than this number of tags including statements if Statement Tagging is on See Statement Level Tagging for more information Background tagging of other files Select this option if you want yo
477. ogramming languages such as Java To open the Class view click Window Show View Other expand SlickEdit Views and double click Class Figure 6 1 Class View 82 Class View Student El Person a java lang Object El Student F equals Student otherStudent F getStudentNumber f reset String neName int newStudentNumber F settudentNumbertint newStudentNurmber H Studenti StudentiString initialMame int initialStudent i Bes studentNumber WaurteOutputt S Person F getName Personi H Person String initialName F sameNametPerson otherPerson F setName String newName F writeQutputt El java lang Object T done F equals Object obj GI finalize getClass hashCode notify E notifyAll sH objecti F toString F wat E isi sikilan kirsam If you are coding within a class the top pane hierarchy pane of the view window shows the base class hierarchy for the current class The bottom pane members pane shows all members of the current class as well as all members visible from inherited superclass es and implemented interface s The name of 83 Class View the current class is displayed at the top of the view window If you are not currently in a class or enum or interface the hierarchy pane is blank and the members pane shows the symbols in the current file The name of the current file is displayed at the top of the view window Hover the mouse over the bitmap of any
478. okmark on the current line and give it a name click Search gt Set Bookmark set_bookmark command The Bookmarks dialog is displayed Type the name of the bookmark in the combo box then click Add Command Line Shortcut sb Power programmers may prefer to use the sb command which is a shortcut for set_bookmark You can append sb or set_bookmark with any character or text string and the bookmark will be instantly set us ing the value for the name For example sb 1 will allow you to create an instant bookmark named 1 and sb main will let you create an instant bookmark named main See also Command Line Shortcut gb Allowing Automatic Naming If you want to quickly set a named bookmark and you would prefer the editor to automatically name them for you press Ctrl Shift J or click Search Toggle Bookmark toggle _bookmark command This command also instantly toggles the new named bookmark on off When a bookmark is set in this manner the name is automatically generated and appears in the Eclipse Bookmarks view in one of two formats Symbo Name LineNumber or FileName LineNumber The symbol 172 Pushed Bookmarks name is used if the bookmark is inside of a symbol The file name is used if there is no symbol on the line or if the file does not support Context Tagging Using a Key Binding for the Name You can set a bookmark that takes its name from the key used to set it There are two commands that can be used alt_
479. ommand see Symbol Navigation for more informa tion e Symbols The Symbols view contains the symbol browser which lists symbols from all of the tag files For more detailed information about these views and how SlickEdit Core can help you browse symbols see Symbol Browsing For information about how to navigate between symbols in files see Symbol Nav igation Statement Level Tagging Statement Level Tagging is a feature of Context Tagging a that provides a more detailed view of items in the Outline view for C C Java Python and Visual Basic NET Along with definitions view constructs like if while and for statements It also displays every non comment line of code To see this feature in action from the Outline View right click and select Show Statements 66 Building Tag Files Building and Managing Tag Files Context Tagging creates tag files to store information about symbols and optionally cross reference in formation from your source code Many of the most powerful SlickEdit Core features use this information to speed your coding Building Tag Files Tag files are automatically created and maintained for files in the workspace see Creating Tag Files for Run Time Libraries You may need to create extension specific tag files for compiler includes or other lib raries that you have see Tagging Run Time Libraries After a tag file is created it is updated in the background when you make modification
480. ommands that we use fre quently in our own work which you may also find useful Table 3 2 Common SlickEdit Core Commands Command Description e file Edit a file number Go to line number 33 Using the Mouse and Keyboard Command Description f symbol Find a symbol search_string loptions Search for a string C search replace options Replace a string sb name Set a bookmark gb name Jump to a bookmark man command Show UNIX man page del filename dos command Delete file Execute command outside of editor math expr Evaluate expression 34 Key Shortcuts in Text Boxes Using the Mouse and Keyboard SlickEdit Core provides four ways to launch operations commands menu items key bindings and but tons For example to launch the Open dialog box in order to open a file you could use any of the follow ing methods e Type the oul open command on the SlickEdit command line e Click File Open File e Press the key binding F7 or Ctrl O The command forms the basis of each method As you can see commands are often bound to more than one key sequence They can also be bound to mouse events including the spin wheel Key bindings are the fastest and most efficient means of executing operations See The SlickEdit Core Command Line for more information about commands and Key and Mouse Bind ings for more information
481. ompare right click and select Compare with Each Other DIFFzilla Compare a Local Backup History Element with the Current Version Using DIFFzilla e Right click on a file in an Eclipse explorer view Package Explorer Project Explorer etc and select Compare With Local History This will activate the History view if necessary e Select the revision that you want to compare right click and select Compare Current with Local DIFFzilla 317 Working with FTP FTP FTP support includes an FTP view window and the ability to easily open and edit FTP files Working with FTP Before you can access FTP files you must create an FTP profile then start that connection FTP opera tions can be accessed from the FTP view window or by right clicking on FTP files after a connection is active FTP View The FTP view can be used to connect to FTP servers and open files To access this view from the main menu click Window Show View Other expand SlickEdit Views and double click FTP Right click on files to display a menu of FTP operations Creating a New FTP Profile To create a new FTP connection profile complete the following steps 1 Display the FTP view and click the button labeled Start a New Session el The FTP Profile Man KN ager dialog box is displayed as pictured below Figure 8 6 FTP Profile Manager Dialog 318 Working with FTP FIP Profile Manager Delete Edit Rename
482. ompare parts of the same file e Record file width Specifies the record width to use when reading a file optional e Filespecs Enter a space delimited list of wildcard file specifications to difference For example enter nes epp h to difference all files with c cpp and h extensions Exclude filespecs Enter a space delimited list of wildcard file specifications to be excluded from the differencing For example enter junk test to exclude all files with names beginning with the words junk or test DIFFzilla Options Tab Use this tab to set up file comparison options and options that affect the interactive Diff dialog Click Save to save the options and close this dialog without running DIFFzilla There are two types of options avail able File Compare Options and Dialog Setup Options File Compare Options Figure 10 20 DIFFzillae File Compare Options 374 DIFFzillae Dialog DIFFzilla Files Options C Expand tabs into spaces before comparing i C Ignore leading spaces before text on each line Dialog Setup C Ignore trailing spaces after text on each line C Ignore all spaces in file C Compare files case insensitive _ Do not compare newline characters C Skip comments at the beginning of the file _ Instead of an interactive dialog output one buffer with the differences labeled The file compare options shown above are described as follows e Expand tabs into spaces bef
483. on is selected the list box to the right displays preprocessor keywords in preprocessor color All preprocessor keywords must start with the same character 442 Color Coding Setup Dialog e Punctuation Lib Symbols Operators User Defined When one of these options is selected the list boxes to the right display the words associated with each e Identifiers Select from the following options e Case sensitive Indicates whether identifiers are case sensitive e ID start characters Specifies characters which are valid for the start of an identifier or any part of an identifier e ID follow characters Specifies additional characters which are valid after the first character of an identifier e New Click this button on the Tokens tab to add one or more words Separate each word with a space e Delete Deletes selected items in a list box Get Click this button to add words by selecting the file that contains the keywords that you want to add Numbers Tab The Numbers tab shown below provides options for color coding numerical values when working with SlickEdit Core To access these options click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Color Coding setting and select the Numbers tab Figure 10 51 Color Coding Setup Numbers Tab 443 Color Coding Setup Dialog Color Coding Setup Lexer name HTML k New Tokens Numbers Strings Langua
484. on when editing files larger than the cache size 2 MB by default because very little data is written to the spill file The Auto Re load feature does not work until the file is saved If you are using the load command to open files use the switch LF to specify this option Show EOF character When selected the EOF character is not removed when files are loaded If you are using the load command to open files use the switch LE to specify this option Expand tabs to spaces When selected the entire contents of the files are read into memory and tabs are expanded into spaces If your tab settings for the file being loaded are of the form lt increment gt e g 4 then tabs are expanded in increments of the specified increment Other wise tabs are expanded in increments of eight To set tabs in a form lt increment gt click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog select your extension from the Extension drop down list then select the Indent Tab Enter your values in the Tabs text box For languages such as REXX and Linux containing shell scripts that require the contents of the file be analyzed before the file type is known the Fundamental mode tab settings are used If you are using the load command to open files use the switch E to specify this option 423 File Options Dialog File locking When selecte
485. onfiguration refactor_parse command or right click within the editor window and click C Refact oring Test Parsing Configuration On the Test Parsing Configuration dialog click Parse File to parse the file Any errors are displayed in the SlickEdit Core Output view Click Preprocess File to preprocess the file sending the results to a new editor window Click Copy to Clipboard to copy the entire display shown in the window This is useful for sending to SlickEdit Support if it is necessary to diagnose a prob lem The following example of the Test Parsing Configuration window shows an error stating that there is no open workspace as well as various other warnings These are severe enough to prevent parsing the file which is why the Parse File button is unavailable 215 C Refactoring Figure 6 49 Test Parsing Configuration Example 1 W C Refactoring Configuration Test Configuration settings to be used to parse this file Current file command Bronz The file comumand does not exist or has not been saved Error The file comumand is nota Cor C source file Current workspace Open Hrror You must Open a workspace Effective project Change Warning The jfile command is notin a project im this workspace Macro Definitions Echt Warning No active project User Include Search Directories Edit Warning Mo active project Active C C Compiler Configuration Change rror fou have not yet
486. ons p UnicodeIsBlockSpec Only valid in character set Matches characters in UnicodeIsBlockSpec Where UnicodeIsB lockSpec one of the standard character blocks specified by the Unicode consortium For example p isGreek matches Unicode characters in the Greek block See Unicode Character Blocks for Regular Expressions P UnicodeIsBlockSpec Only valid in character set Matches characters not in UnicodeIsBlockSpec For example P isGreek matches all characters that are not in the Unicode Greek block This is equivalent to p isGreek See Unicode Character Blocks for 528 SlickEdit Regular Expressions SlickEdit Regular Expression Definition Regular Expressions xhh Matches hexadecimal character hh where O0 lt hh lt O0xff ddd Matches decimal character ddd where O lt ddd lt 255 gd Defines a back reference to tagged expression number d For example abc def gO matches the string abcdefabc If the tagged expression has not been set the search fails c Specifies cursor position if match is found If the ex pression xyz c is found the cursor is placed after the z n Matches newline character sequence Useful for matching multi line search strings What this matches depends on whether the buffer is a DOS ASCII 13 10 or just ASCII 10 UNIX ASCII 10 Macintosh ASCII 13 or user defined ASCII file Use d10 if you want to match an ASCII 10 charac ter
487. ons dialog select the Exit tab Figure 10 29 General Options Exit Tab 394 General Options Dialog General Options General Search Selections Special Characters More Exit virtual Memory Configuration Gei Always save configuration Always prompt before saving configuration Exit confirmation prompt Select Always Save Configuration to save the configuration changes before exiting Select Always Prompt to always prompt before saving configuration changes The following options are available on the Exit tab e Always save configuration If selected configuration changes are saved without prompting e Always prompt before saving configuration Select this option to always receive a prompt before saving changes that you make to the configuration of the software 395 General Options Dialog e Exit confirmation prompt If selected you will always be prompted when exiting the editor Virtual Memory Tab To access virtual memory options click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the Virtual Memory tab Figure 10 30 General Options Virtual Memory Tab 396 General Options Dialog General Options Spill file path Buffer cache size k Tag file cache size Ki Use Spill File Path to specify a directory where spill files should be placed On UNIX p
488. ons for the current argument is displayed Auto List Compatible Parameters can also be used in stead of List Members in assignment statements x lt Alt Comma gt and when listing members of a class or struct Keep in mind not all possible variables and expressions are listed Press Alt Dot if the symbol that you want is not listed To access Auto List Compatible Parameters on demand press Alt Comma If you want to disable automatic listing and only list parameters on demand turn Auto List Compatible Parameters off as follows 1 From the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting 2 On the Extension Options dialog select the extension you want to affect from the Extension drop down list 3 Select the Context Tagging Tab 64 Completions The following example displays the results of pressing Alt Comma after an assignment operator The Rect pRect and argv are not listed because their types do not match Figure 5 5 Auto List Compatible Parameters static int CalcnulateArea RECT pRect d return pRect jw pRect h I Old main int argc char argyv d RECT Rect RECT pRect Rect int irea iArea Sa sizeoft Completions Completions save keystrokes as you are typing code by providing a way to automatically complete par tially typed text Press Ctrl Space to complete type the rest of the current symbo
489. ont colors to be readable It is best to specify a Background color for selections that is as close as possible to your normal background color ensuring that the color coded fonts are still easy to read 4 If you change the background color for an element in the editor window you can use the Sync Back grounds button to propagate the background color for the currently selected element to other related elements For example if you change the background color for Keywords you will probably want that same color used for Strings Comments Numbers etc The Syne Backgrounds button prevents you from having to manually make all these changes 5 If you want choose a Font Style for the text 6 Click Apply to update the colors that you have modified without closing the dialog box or click OK to apply the changes and close the dialog For a complete list of all of the options available on the Color Settings dialog see Color Settings Dialog Using Color Schemes Color schemes store the settings for all screen elements allowing you to quickly change the look of your editing environment Several predefined color schemes are provided and you can create your own To use color schemes click the Schemes button on the Color Settings dialog see the previous screen shot To try a different color scheme from the Color scheme drop down text box select a color scheme and click Apply A sample of the color scheme is displayed in the Sample text
490. ookmarked e Incremental search Select this option to search incrementally on patterns being typed into the Search for field showing the location of the match at the cursor See Incremental Searching for more information on this method of searching e Find button Click this button when you have entered all desired search options and are ready to initi ate a search If no matches are found the Search for field will turn red and the text String not found will be displayed in the status area of the editor e Find All button Click this button to mark all matches in the current search range which have any of the following options selected Search hidden text Highlight matches and Bookmark matches If no matches are found the Search for field will turn red and the text String not found will be dis played in the status area of the editor Find in Files Tab This tab on the Find and Replace View provides the same functionality as the Find Tab with the added ability to conduct multi file searches Additional options are described below Figure 10 6 Find and Replace Find in Files Tab 347 Find and Replace View Find and Replace Search options Match case L Match whole word Use Wildcards w Color Colors None Results options Search Results window Search lt 0 gt C Output to editor window Foreground search C Append to output C List matching lines only L List filenam
491. op the search e Symbol List The list of search results are refreshed as you type the search string They include the symbol name the file that contains it and the line number You can sort by any of the three columns The selected match is highlighted and is displayed in the Preview view Single click or use the arrow keys to select a match Double click or press Enter to navigate to that match e Look in Use this control to specify the scope of the symbol search The options are e lt Use Context Tagginge gt This is the default setting It uses Context Tagging to intelligently de termine which tag files to search e lt Current File gt Select this setting to only search the tags in the current file including local variables 355 Find Symbol View in the current function scope lt Current Project gt Select this setting to only search in files that are in the current project lt Current Workspace gt Select this setting to only search in files that are in the current workspace lt Exiension Tag Files gt Select this setting to search all extension specific tag files for the indicated extension This may also include your workspace tag file Specific tag files Select one of the specific tag files listed to limit search to that file lt All Tag Files gt Select this setting to search all tag files for all languages e Search Options The search options can be expanded or collapsed to save space Mat
492. or Minus bitmap is placed before hidden or expanded lines in the editor window margin The following screenshot shows a sample file with two function defini tions expanded and the rest collapsed Figure 6 53 Selective Display E Rectangle cpp C dev Rectangles Rectangle cpp include lt stdio h gt Rectangle Rectangle Rectangle Rectangle const Point topLeft const Point bottomRight float Rectangle getWidth return m BottomRight m x m TopLeft m x 1 float Rectangle getHeight REFACTOR Encapsulate Field m x my return m BottomRight m_y m TopLeft m_y 1 woid Rectangle printTitle wee Rectangle printBanner ool Rectangle contains Rectangle rect When Selective Display is active you can perform the following operations e To display or hide lines Double click on the Plus or Minus bitmaps Alternatively click Display Expand Collapse Block press Cirl or use the plusminus command Tip Selective Display bitmaps can be expanded or collapsed with a single click causing Selective Display to operate similar to Windows Explorer Note however that you will not be able to select a line by clicking to the left of a text line which contains a Selective Display bitmap To set this op tion from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double cli
493. ord at cursor If selected the Find and Replace view uses the word that is at the cursor when performing a search e Selected text if exists If checked the Find and Replace view uses the text that you have selec ted in the editor to perform the search e Additional search options The following additional search options are available on the Search tab e Restore cursor after replace If checked the cursor is restored to its original position after a search and replace operation completes and is not canceled e Leave selected If checked the last occurrence of a search string that was found is left selected This also affects whether pressing Esc during a search and replace leaves the search string selec 385 General Options Dialog ted Incremental search highlighting If checked when an incremental search is performed matching occurrences will be highlighted with two colors one for the current match at the cursor and one for all possible matches Highlights are removed when the incremental search command terminates Highlight colors can be set using the Color Settings Dialog Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Color setting Select the items I Search Current Match and I Search Highlight from the element list See Incremental Searching for more information e Bookmarks These options provide for the control and viewing of bookmarks See Bookmarks for more i
494. ore comparing When selected tabs are expanded to the appropriate number of spaces before lines from each file that is compared e Ignore leading spaces before text on each line When selected differences in leading spaces of lines are ignored Ignore trailing spaces after text on each line When selected differences in trailing spaces at the end of lines are ignored Ignore all spaces in file When selected differences in spacing between characters in lines are ig nored Compare files case insensitive When selected differences in character casing are ignored e Do not compare newline characters When selected differences in end of line characters are ig nored This is useful when comparing UNIX formatted files with DOS formatted files e Skip comments at the beginning of the file When selected leading comments are ignored This is useful if you are using a version control system that automatically inserts comment file headers Instead of an interactive dialog output one buffer with the differences labeled When selected a new buffer is created that contains color coded difference output You can edit the output buffer When this option is not selected the Diff dialog box opens displaying the two files side by side and the differ ences are color coded Dialog Setup Options 375 DIFFzillae Dialog Figure 10 21 DIFFzillae Dialog Setup Options DIFFzilla Files Options E Options Show gauge during di
495. ove EOF Character to append remove EOF character at the end of DOS files These two options have no effect under UNIX Expand tabs to spa O ai All listed options except for the Save Files on Loss of C Strip trailing spaces Focus are applied when the file is saved A R Check Save Files on Loss Focus to save all modified _ Reset line modify files when you switch from SlickEdit to another J Add file to project upon Save As application Line format Opos Omac OUNIX Automatic The following options are available e Append EOF character When this option is set an EOF character is appended to the end of DOS files when the buffer is saved This option has no effect on UNIX Macintosh or binary files If you are using the save command to save files use the switch Z to specify this option e Remove EOF character When this option is set the EOF character is removed from the end of DOS files when the buffer is saved This option has no effect on UNIX Macintosh or binary files If you are using the save command to save files use the switch ZR to specify this option e Expand tabs to spaces When this option is set tabs are expanded to spaces according to the tab stops when the buffer is saved If you are using the save command to save files use the switch E to specify this option Strip trailing spaces When this option is set trailing spaces at the end of each line are stripped when the buffer is saved If you are us
496. ove the text to the next tab stop The Shift Tab key combination deletes enough spaces to move the text to the previous tab stop See Redefine Common Keys Dialog for information on other Tab and Shift Tab key bindings Regardless of the Tab key binding if the extension specific setting Indent with tabs is on a physical tab character is inserted see Indenting with Tabs Setting the Backspace Unindent Style By default pressing the Backspace key when the previous character is a tab causes the rest of the line to be moved to the previous tab stop If you want your Backspace key to delete through tab characters one column at a time click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Redefine Common Keys setting Select the Hack tabs backspace option See Redefin ing Common Keys for more information SmartPastee When pasting lines of text into a source file SmartPaste reindents the added lines according to the sur rounding code For example if editing a C or C file select some lines with a line selection Ctrl L copy them to the clipboard Ctrl C then paste them inside a for loop block Ctrl V The added lines are correctly indented according to the for loop s indent level SmartPaste will work for character stream selections however the last line of the selection must include the end of line character Use the mouse to copy and move lines and still take advantage of SmartPaste 1
497. ow Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Col or Coding setting and select the Language tab Figure 10 53 Color Coding Setup Language Tab 447 Color Coding Setup Dialog Color Coding Setup Lexer name HTML k New Tokens Numbers Strings Language Comments Tags Language specific Perl Ce Python Model 204 OTC 05 390 Assembler O Ruby COBOL Co HTML enables Tags ICL OML fenables Tags O Verilog other Progress C Color Code Line Numbers Basic COBOL Backslash escapes next character Bourne Shell C Color identifiers Followed by 7 as a Function Special coloring For package and import statements Java Preprocessing keywords can appear anywhere Identifiers may start with a number COBOL Unicode strings C The following options are available e Language specific To avoid requiring complicated BNF for defining color coding some hardware language specific adjustments have been added You may be able to use one of these language specif ic settings for another language but there s no guarantee it will work e Color code line numbers Basic When this option is selected indicates that leading line numbers should be color coded in line number color e Backslash escapes next character Bourne Shell Backslash escapes the character that follows This is useful
498. pace to expand the alias 4 Type the name of the file to open 5 Press Enter Embedding Environment Variables in Directory Aliases 151 Extension Specific Aliases If you keep source code in a version directory tree you might want to set an environment variable and embed the environment variable in the alias value For example if you have a directory named c version20 srce project2 define a p2 alias and give it a value such as VERSION src project2 Type the following command on the command line to set or create the VER SION environment variable set VERSION c version20 For more information about setting environment variables see Environment Variables Extension Specific Aliases You can set up aliases for any frequently used text such as comment headers Extension specific aliases are set up on a per language basis Each extension can have one alias file allowing aliases to be defined that do not affect other extensions After typing the alias identifier extension specific aliases can be expanded by pressing Cirl Space codehelp_complete command Extension specific aliases are stored in a file that you can specify and typically have the extension als Tip e If the alias is a Syntax Expansion modification you can simply press Space to expand the ali as See Syntax Expansion for more information e An Auto Complete option is available to show a tooltip of the matching alias for the word under the
499. pand SlickEdit and click General in the tree double click the File Extension Setup set ting See Symbol Navigation for more information File Options Dialog You can set various options that pertain to loading saving and other file operations To access these op tions click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Options setting The File Options dialog is displayed containing the following four tabs click the links to go to the appropriate descriptions in the documentation e Load Tab e Save Tab 421 File Options Dialog e Backup Tab e AutoSave Tab e File Filters Tab Load Tab The Load tab pictured below offers options to control how files are loaded To access the Load tab click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Options setting and select the Load tab Figure 10 41 File Options Load Tab File Options Auto reload C Count number of lines C Suppress prompt unless modified C Truncate file at EOF Auto read only V Load partial if larger than 4000 K V Reload on switch buffer C Fast line count on partial load Wrap line length V Show EOF character 7 Use UNDO o _ Expand tabs to spaces Max undo steps 32000 File locking Save Restore file pos Reinsert after current Max files 200 Encoding Auto Unicode oe The following settings are avai
500. pand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the General Tab Select the option Click past end of line Highlighting the Current Line The current line can be highlighted by having a dotted box drawn around it making the cursor easier to see You can choose to make the highlight a box only or you can choose a box with tab stops syntax in 135 Sorting Text dent levels or decimal points shown To set these options from the main menu click Window Prefer ences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the General Tab Select one of the Current line highlight options Click on the color boxes to change the box color or the column marker color Preserving the Column on Top Bottom You can specify that the top ot butter Ctrl Home and bottom ot butter Ctrl End commands do not change the column position unless already at the top or bottom of the buffer To set this option from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the More Tab Select the option Preserve column on top bottom Setting the Line Insert Style To set the line insert style from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then doub
501. pe Sequences for more information e You can also specify parameters in alias values When the alias is expanded you are promp ted with a dialog to input the values See Parameter Prompting for more information 4 Click OK Alias Escape Sequences Alias escape sequences can be used in alias values When the aliases are expanded the sequences are replaced with their values The following table contains a list of the escape sequences that can be used for aliases For examples see Escape Sequence Examples below Table 6 7 Alias Escape Sequences Escape Sequence Description c Places the cursor This sequence can be used mul tiple times in the same alias value in order to create a series of hot spots within the alias After the ali as is expanded press Cirl next_hotspot com mand to jump to the next cursor stop d Inserts the date locale dependent e Inserts the date in MMDDYY format t Inserts the time locale dependent Inserts a percent character f Inserts the current file name n Inserts the current function name o Inserts the current function name with signature i Indents b Unindents XColumnNumber Moves the cursor to the specified column number X Increment Increment column by ddd 155 Extension Specific Aliases Escape Sequence Description X Increment Decrement column by ddd Ze P
502. pecifies what the original file s tab expansion size was It is necessary to know the tab expansion size of your original file to handle reusing indent amounts from your original file Cur rently the beautifier only reuses the original source file s indenting for comments This option has no ef fect if the original file has no tab characters Continued Lines e Max line length Specifies the maximum length a statement line can be before it is wrapped to a new line Set this value to 0 to preserve line breaks e Continuation indent Specifies how much to indent lines of statements which continue to the next line This has no affect on assignment statements or parenthesized expressions Lines which are a continuation of an assignment statement are indented after the first equal sign Lines which are a continuation of a parenthesized expression are indented after the open paren Operator position Specify where the operator should be positioned when breaking a statement across multiple lines For example given the statement Seconds Days Hours_Per_Day Minutes_Per_Hour Seconds_Per_Minute An operator position setting of End of same line would result in Seconds Days Hours_Per_Day Minutes_Per_Hour Seconds Der Minute 293 Ada Beautifier An operator position setting of Beginning of next line would result in Seconds Days Hours_Per_Day Minutes Per Hour Geconda Der Minute Statements Decl
503. perator position Beginning of next line Additional indent for logical operator 3 if A B and C D then null end if After beautify 297 COBOL if A B and C D then null end if Additional indent for logical operator when followed by another line that begins with logical operator Additional indent amount for a line broken on a logical operator that is followed by another line that also is broken on a logical operator that is different This amount is in addition to the current indent level and in addition to the Additional indent for logical operator setting For example before beautify Indent per level 3 Additional indent for logical operator 3 Addition al indent for logical operator when followed by another line that begins with different logical operator 3 Indent per level 3 Operator position Beginning of next line Additional indent for logical operator 3 Additional indent for logical operator when followed by another line that begins with different logical operator 3 if A B and then C D or else E F then null end if After beautify if A B and then C D or else E F then null end if Schemes Tab To define a new scheme set the various beautify options then click the Save Scheme button User defined schemes are stored in uformat ini 298 COBOL Formatting Options COBOL This sec
504. perspective s layout by dragging and dropping The SlickEdit Core Editor Use the SlickEdit Core editor to create and change projects folders files and classes To edit files and classes in SlickEdit Core first associate those files or classes with the editor or open the source file using the editor Figure 3 2 Managing File Associations 21 The SlickEdit Core Editor Preferences type Filter text File Associations General Appearance Capabilities Compare Patch Content Types Editors File Associations Text Editors Keys Network Connections Perspectives Search Startup and Shutdown Web Browser Welcome E Workspace Ant C C Help Install Update Java ED SlickEdit Editor default Plug in Development Run Debug SlickEdit Team See Content Types For content type based file associations File types Associated editors E E Ri RR Ri i Ej To associate files to edit complete the following steps 1 From the main menu click Window Preferences 2 Expand General then expand Editors and select File Associations 3 From the File Types list select the desired file type Or to add an extension click Add 4 From the Associated Editors list select the desired editor 5 To make this the default editor for this file type click the Default button 6 Click OK Source files can be opened with the SlickEdit Core editor in t
505. place view see Find and Replace View For a listing of the default search options see Search Tab Search Results Output You can specify that multi file search results are displayed in a new editor window or in a new SlickEdit Core Search view To send the results to a new editor window select the Find in Files tab click the Result options button to expand the options then select Output to editor window To send the results of a multi file search to a specific SlickEdit Core Search view select the Find in Files tab click the Results options button to expand the options then use the Search Results Window drop down list to select the window to be used These are labeled starting at Search lt 0 gt A new results view window can be added with the lt News gt option up to a pre set limit of open SlickEdit Core Search views If lt Auto Increment gt is selected from the Search Results Window drop down list the search results will cycle through all of the open Search Results tabs in the SlickEdit Core Search view with each new search For example if you have Search lt 0 gt Search lt 1 gt and Search lt 2 gt open then for each search op eration the results will be displayed in this order Search lt 0 gt Search lt 1 gt Search lt 2 gt Search lt 0 gt Search lt 1 gt and so on If you only have one SlickEdit Core Search view open then all results will go into 191 Find Symbol View the only open search view windows You c
506. placed and can be used multiple times within a single Surround With template sur_text can take several parameters which can appear in any order The available parameters are e beautify This is the default for C Java and others It beautifies the results of the template expan sion e begin lt text gt Prefixes each line of the selection with text deselect This is the default parameter It specifies to leave the text deselected e end lt text gt Suffixes each line of the selection with text e ignore lt chars gt The begin indent and stripbegin options will ignore any chars when finding the beginning of the selected line indent Indents each line of the selection nobeautify This is the default for HTML XML and others It specifies that the editor should not at tempt to beautify the results of the template expansion notext Specifies that no text should be pasted e select Leaves the text selected stripbegin lt text gt If any line begins with text text is removed from the line This option is ap plied before begin stripend lt text gt If any line ends with text text is removed from the line This option is applied before end e surround_with_if This is a wrapper command that expands the if template for the selected text This command can be bound to a key see Creating Bindings for more information The use of Surround With can be streamlined by using wrapper commands an
507. play Unicode Source Window Fonts Default Unicode Font is the default font for the Unicode Source Windows element When this font is se lected the Arial Unicode MS font is used if it is installed Otherwise the ANSI Fixed Font is used which only supports the English character set Arial Unicode MS is a fairly complete font which is included with Microsoft Office Currently no version of Windows ships with a complete Unicode font For more informa tion on Unicode support see Using Unicode Colors Use the Color Settings dialog click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Color setting alternatively use the color command to set the color for differ 55 Setting Colors for Screen Ele ments ent screen elements in SlickEdit Core This includes syntactic elements in the editor window like keywords comments strings etc as well as other user interface elements like the message area or the status line Window colors and backgrounds are set using the facilities provided by the operating system Color and Color Coding are different Color Coding is a feature that combines current line coloring modi fied line coloring and language specific coloring SlickEdit Core recognizes and automatically displays color support for many languages See Color Coding for more information Setting Colors for Screen Elements Colors can be customized in the user interface Colors can be s
508. ption ispf_rchange Repeat the change requested by the most recent change command ispf_renumber Immediately update the line numbers in a file ispf_replace Save the contents of the current buffer to an exist ing file ispf_reset Reset the contents of the line prefix area ispf_return Close the current file ispf_rfind Repeat the last find operation requested ispf_save This command is identical to the built in save com mand ispf_sort Sort lines of data in a specified order ispf_submit Submit the contents of the current buffer for batch processing ispf_swap Switch to the next buffer ispf_tabs Define logical tab positions ispf_unnumber Blank out the line numbers in a file ispf_undo This command is identical to the undo command ISPF Line Commands The table below shows ISPF edit line commands that are supported in the ISPF emulation mode Enter line commands by typing over the prefix area on the left hand side of the editor control which con tains either or the line number To place the cursor in the prefix area click there or move the cursor left or backspace until the cursor in is in the prefix area In addition Enter will place the cursor in the prefix area of the next line unless an insert or text entry command is executed Edit line commands operate on either a single line or a block of lines The commands that operate on blocks require you t
509. pts whether or not you want to continue If you continue the emulation mode is changed and the key bindings are loaded for that emulation To import bindings 1 Click the Import button on the Key Bindings dialog The Open dialog is displayed 2 Find and select a bindings file that was previously exported then click Open Saving a Bindings Chart Click the Save Chart button on the Key Bindings dialog to save an HTML reference chart of all current bindings for all language editing modes in the selected emulation Commands and user macros that are not bound are not included Running a Command Macro using the Key Bindings Dialog If you have the Key Bindings dialog open you can conveniently run a selected command or user re corded macro by clicking the Run button Resetting Default Bindings To reset bindings for the selected emulation to the SlickEdit Core defaults from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click Emulation in the tree then select the Restore to default key bindings option See Emulations for more information Key Binding Settings The following are settings that you can make pertaining to key bindings Key Message Delay For key bindings that contain multiple key combinations like Ctrl X Ctrl C you can specify the maxim um delay between the two combinations If that time limit is exceeded this key sequence will be inter preted as two separate bindings executing the command bound to
510. r clicking with the mouse will exit Dynamic Surround mode The following screen shot shows the Syntax Expansion menu that appears after typing if in a C file Figure 6 21 Dynamic Surround Example 1 162 Dynamic Surround amp C Lab sample cpp int sortedSearch const int item const int pList int numItems if Syntax Expansionfor the specified item in the array og Ew if item i Keywords Sst numitems 1 middle Ga ifstream last Widaile T Tifst last gt gt 1 middleItem pList middle if item middleItem return i middle j else if item lt middleItem last middle 1 else first middle 1 f f did not find the item return 1i1 After pressing Space to expand the template Dynamic Surround is activated with a blue rectangle drawn around the expanded statement as shown below Figure 6 22 Dynamic Surround Example 2 163 Dynamic Surround amp C Lab sample cpp int sortedSearch const int item const int pList int numItems f f Binary search for the specified item in the array const int middleItem int first 0 last numItems 1 middle while first lt last middle first last gt gt 1 middleItem amp pList middle if item middleItem return middle iz else if item lt middleItem last middle 1 else first middle 1 ff did not find the
511. r coding until end quote When this option is selected a string is not color coded un less an end quote is seen on the same line This does not support multi line strings e Single quotes e Two consecutive quotes represent one four consecutive single quote characters for Pascal represents a string of length one which is a single quote character Backslash single quote represents a single quote represents a string of length one which is a single quote character e Single quoted strings are always 1 char long When this option is selected a single quote char acter is followed by an additional character and then the terminating single quote character There is never more than one character between the start and end single quote Trailing backslashes continues string across lines When this option is selected it indicates that searching for the terminating quote continues to the next line if the lines end with a backslash charac ter e Search for end quote across multiple lines When this option is selected it indicates that the string does not have to be terminated on the same line as the start quote character e Delay color coding until end quote When this option is selected a string is not color coded un less an end quote is seen on the same line This does not support multi line strings Language Tab The Language tab is used to set more language specific color coding options To access these settings click Wind
512. r this line is inserted the lt and gt marks may be moved in order to adjust the column boundaries Note that if you have multiple bounds lines and you change one the sub sequent bounds lines will also be changed A column boundary line with one lt sign indicates a left boundary and no right boundary unbounded A column boundary with one gt sign indicates a single column boundary left and right bounds are same See Also ispf_bounds ISPF Line Command Shift ISPF Line Command Overlay ISPF Copy Lines C and CC for blocks Usage e C n Copy n lines starting with the line with the command e CC Copy a block of lines must match another CC Remarks Specify lines to be copied to another location There are two forms to this command The first form C n specifies that the line and the subsequent n 1 lines are to be copied The second block form CC is placed on the first and last lines of the block to be copied There can be only one copy block specified Furthermore you can not have both a move block and a copy block specified at the same time See Also 509 ISPF Line Commands ISPF Line Command A ISPF Line Command B ISPF Line Command Move ISPF Line Command Overlay ISPF Insert Columns Ruler COLS or SCALE Usage COLS SCALE Remarks Insert a column ruler line The column ruler line is read only See Also ispf_bounds ispf_tabs ISPF Line Command BNDS ISPF Line Command TABS ISPF Delete Lines D and DD
513. rac ters notin the block specified P lsBlockName The p and P notations may only be used inside a character set specification For example p isBasicLatin matches all characters in the Greek block P isBasicLatin matches all characters that are not in the Greek block The following is a list of the non standard valid character block names This list was generated from XML standards found at the World Wide Web Consortium Web site htto Avww w3c orq e XMLNameStartChar All characters that are valid for the start of an XML tag name 539 Unicode Character Blocks for Regular Expressions e XMLNameChar All characters that are valid in an XML tag name The following table lists the valid character block names These character tables were generated using the blocks txt file found on the Unicode Consortium Web site http unicode org Table 11 19 Unicode Character Blocks for Regular Expressions Range Block Name 0000 007F BasicLatin 0080 00FF Latin 1 Supplement 0100 017F LatinExtended A 0180 024F LatinExtended B 0250 02AF IPAExtensions 02B0 02FF SpacingModifierLetters 0300 036F CombiningDiacriticalMarks 0370 03FF Greek 0400 04FF Cyrillic 0530 058F Armenian 0590 05FF Hebrew 0600 06FF Arabic 0700 074F Syriac 0780 07BF Thaana 0900 097F Devanagari 0980 09FF Bengali OA00 0A7F Gurmukhi 0A80 0AFF Gujarati 0B00 0B7F Oriya
514. rce Windows Editor windows that are being viewed in Hex mode View Hex e Unicode Source Windows Editor windows that are displaying Unicode content for example XML e File Manager Windows Controls the display of the SlickEdit Core File Manager File File Man ager Diff Editor Source Windows The editor windows used by DIFFzillae e Parameter Info Controls the fonts used to display pop ups with information about symbols and parameters e Parameter Info Fixed Used when SlickEdit Core needs to display a fixed width font for parameter info such as when displaying example code e Selection List The font used for selection lists like the buffer list Document List Buffers e Dialog Controls the font used in SlickEdit Core dialogs and view windows e HTML Proportional The default font used by HTML controls for proportional fonts In particular this affects the Version Control History dialog the About SlickEdit Core dialog and the Cool Features dialog e HTML Fixed The default font used by HTML controls for fixed space fonts e Font and Size The Font and Size fields allow you to make typeface and point size changes to the se lected screen element The fonts that are listed are the fonts that are installed on your computer Style Styles such as bold and italic can be set to affect the selected font e Sample area This area provides a preview of the selected font size and style e Fixed Font
515. rchy Show In Build Path Source Refactor References Declarations Assign Working Sets Run As Debug As Team Compare With Replace With Properties import a F3 F4 Alt Shift we gt Ctrl C Ctrl Delete Alt Shift 5 Alt Shift T Restore from Local History Alt Enter com jrerinery JCommon java Order Part javax swing JFrame org apache xerces parsers DOMParser org w dom Document P Java Editor SlickEdit Editor B Text Editor gt System Editor gt In Place Editor Default Editor Other com joeLriuery uata hent List tart ChartFactory rart JFreeChart 1art JFreeChartFrame ita BasicTimeSeries ita Day com jrefinery data xXY Dataset fect Info http www object refinery com jfreechart TimeSeriesCollection OrdersChart java E BordersChart D documert Ord Des Er Ord D title Ord BI REISER F makechart Ord F main String args Ord References 22 Si Preview apache xerces parsers DOMParser func e 1 7 in 1 4 files C Samples WSEJavaDema OrderChart OrdersChart java 56 IParserPool java teDOMParser sntBuilderImpl java ge imentBuilderImpl DocumentBuilderFactory 3 _bts new BasicTimeSeries order data try DOMParser parser new DOMParser i parser setFeature http apache org xml gt Switching Between the SlickEdito Core Editor and Eclipse
516. rder ascending or descending Note To change the mode for a command macro that is already bound first you should unbind the command macro then recreate the binding with the mode you want to use See Editing Bindings for more information For information about editing modes see Language Editing Modes Recorded This column indicates if the item in the Command column is a SlickEdit Core command No or a user recorded macro Yes Documentation pane The bottom pane of the dialog displays the code documentation for the selec ted command or macro if it exists Click See Also hyperlinks if any exist to display Help for that item For See Also links if a Help entry does not exist a message box notification is displayed The docu mentation pane can be resized by dragging the size bar in the middle of the dialog The size is re membered the next time the dialog is displayed Import and Export These buttons allow you to import and export bindings This is useful for creating backups sharing with other team members or taking with you should you switch computers See Ex porting and Importing Bindings for details of these features Save Chart This button allows you to save a reference chart of all current bindings for all language editing modes in the selected emulation The chart is saved in HTML format with a name and location that you specify Commands macros that are not bound are not included 431 Bind Key
517. re 10 61 Web Browser Setup Dialog Web Browser Setup Browsers OK Automatic Mozilla SS Cancel CH Internet Explorer CH Netscape Navigator Help O Netscape Navigator 6 Defaults Other Co Firefox Program CHPROGR A 1 MOZILL 1 FIREFOX EXE ul oP Po arse tn Parts p E Buffer name The following settings are available e Browsers Select which Web browser you want to use Selecting a preferred browser automatically sets the defaults for the other items in the Web Browser Setup dialog box Note the following e Windows Your Web browser is automatically detected e Linux You need to specify which Web browser you are using In addition you need to give the full path to the program executable e Program Indicates the program to run You may specify a F in this text box or any of the other text 460 FTP Options Dialog boxes on this dialog box to have the HTML file name inserted into the command that is executed e DDE The Application Topic and Item text boxes specify DDE XTYP_REQUEST parameters and are used only if the Use DDE option is selected FTP Options Dialog This dialog is used to configure default FTP options To open it on the FTP view window click the button to start a new session When the Connect dialog is displayed click the Default Options button The dia log is categorized into the following tabs e General Tab e Advanced Tab e Firewall Proxy Tab e SSH SFTP Ta
518. re labeled starting at Search lt 0 gt A new results window can be added with the lt New gt option up to a pre set limit of open SlickEdit Core Search views If lt Auto Increments gt is selected the search results will cycle through all of the open Search Results tabs in the SlickEdit Core Search view with each new search See Search Results Output for more information Right click in the SlickEdit Core Search view to access the following options e Quick Search Finds the next occurrence of the text selected e Filter Search Results Select this option to display the Filter Search Results dialog From here if a match is found you can choose to keep or delete lines with additional searches match case limit to current default regular expression syntax and or remove matches found on the same line number in the same file this can also be accomplished by selecting List matching lines only from the Find in Files tab e Open as Editor window Opens current search results in a new editor window e Go to Line Goes to the file line number of the current line in the SlickEdit Search view e Bookmark Line Places a bookmark at the line in the file where the result was found e Clear Window Clears all results in the current SlickEdit Core Search view e Align Columns Aligns the line numbers and column numbers for all search results e Collapse All Collapses all Selective Display levels See Selective Display for more information e Exp
519. re the aliases in another file type a new file name with the als extension here 5 Click Aliases The Alias Editor dialog appears Using the Alias Editor After choosing the file used to store aliases use the Alias Editor dialog to create or edit extension specific aliases The dialog is pictured below Figure 6 20 Alias Editor Dialog 153 Extension Specific Aliases E Alias Editor Eunctioncomment L Surround with bin a F z config filecommerntt tunchoncomment i Parameters 4c ka Funetion Name ina hescription ka T Parameters Initial Value Alias names are displayed in the list box at the top left of this dialog box The value for the selected alias name is displayed in the large text box at the top right of this dialog Click Delete to remove a selected ali as and its value To create a new alias complete the following steps 1 Click New then type the characters you wish to use for an identifier in the Alias Name text box 2 Click OK The identifier you entered is now displayed in the list box in the Alias Editor dialog 3 Make sure your new identifier is selected then in the large text box to the right enter the alias value by typing in the text that you want the identifier substituted with Tip 154 Extension Specific Aliases e You can use special escape sequences in your aliases which will be substituted upon expan sion with certain values See Alias Esca
520. re using Perl Python or TCL and the compiler cannot be found in PATH or registry for Windows you need to build tag files for these run time libraries Configuring Context Tagging for COBOL All of the Context Tagging features for COBOL except Parameter Information are provided by scanning COBOL source file and the copy books that are included This information is used by List Members com pletions tag driven navigation symbol preview and in the Outline view Parameter Information for CO BOL commands and intrinsic functions are provided by the COBOL built ins file created during product in stallation To provide Parameter Information for subroutines you must build a tag file that will hold linkage information from the subroutine s point of view Managing Tag Files The Context Tagging Tag Files Dialog Tools Tag Files is used to manage your tag files Figure 5 9 Context Tagging Tag Files Dialog 70 Managing Tag Files Context Tagging Tag Files Workspace Tag Files C cyqwin lib gcc i686 pe cygwin 3 4 4 includeemmintrin h 2 C Documents and Settings RhufFiworkspaces runtime orders C cygwin lib gcc i686 pc cygwin 3 4 4 include float h CH Compiler Configuration Tag Files Ci cygwin lib gcc i686 pc cyqwin 3 4 4 include g2c h cl guran g C cyqwinilib gcc i686 pc cyqwin 3 4 4 include iso646 h EE Ee Deet ne ald C cyqwin lib gcc i686 pc cygwin 3 4 4 include limits h Java Compiler Configuration Tag Files Ge
521. rectory must contain characters in the active code page 473 Environment Variables Unicode Implementation Native Unicode and SBCS DBCS editing modes are supported When you edit a SBCS DBCS active code page file such as a c h or java file the data is loaded as SBCS DBCS data and is not con verted to Unicode When you edit a Unicode file such as an XML file the data is converted to UTF 8 that is one of the standard formats for supporting Unicode files There are several advantages to this imple mentation e Since almost all source files for programming are stored as SBCS DBCS loading these files is signific antly faster This is very important to our customers who expect superior performance from SlickEdit Core e Unicode editing modes cannot support all the features you were used to when editing SBCS DBCS files see Unicode Limitations e Macros can be written once to support both editing modes This was very important to us because we wanted to reduce development time e Since Unicode is stored as UTF 8 only one set of binaries is required Most products that support SBCS DBCS and Unicode UTF 16 use preprocessing This requires two sets of binaries 474 Environment Variables Environment Variables Below is a list of environment variables that can be used Configuration environment variables are set in vslick ini You can also use the set command to temporarily change one of the configuration e
522. rence cccccececeeeeeneeeeeeeeeecaeeeeaeeseeeeesecaeeeeeeeeaas 116 TE E OMNO WEE 126 Selections TEE 126 Cutting Copying and Moving Text cecccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeesaaeeeeaeeseeeeeesaeeseaeeeeaas 134 Veloen ML 135 SOMMING TEX EE 136 Inserting Literal Characters serrian eurae ap raa eana dive deans a a ARA EE EEEa 138 Elie eelere EE 139 Resetting Modified Lines on Save ou eeccccecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaaeeeeaaeseceeeeseaeeeseaeeeeaes 139 Adding Color Coded Keywords to Supported Languages ccsscceeseeeeeteeesseeeennees 139 Creating Color Coding for a New Language ceecceseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeaeeeeeneeeed 140 Color Coding Configuration c cccccceeccceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeseeeeessaaeeeeaaeeseeeesiaeeeeeneeee 140 Golor Coding Settings CEV ENEE cine aed edie sites eel een eee eed 142 Syntax lndent and SMamtPaste sa ccccciscececeeiheceecacsartvacescary sp thval sued ee ra aaar aaier iepa edari 143 Syntax LAGS EE 143 Lu EE 144 Completions smiet Atta Aan tel pat eget is EE 146 AUTO GOMplete rege E EE teats eet pmath cedang et ved se 146 Word Completion EE 148 Configuring Completion Settings eccccccceeeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeee scenes eeaeeeeaaeeseaeeetaeeeeeneeeed 148 AAS OS se feck E E E TEAN rue E E E E T ETE theses 150 Directory E 150 Extension Specific Aliases AAA 152 Syntax EXpanSiO EE 159 Syntax Expansion Settings c cccceeeeceeceeeeeeceeeeeeee
523. rent element content See XML HTML Formatting for information about enabling formatting and working with this feature See Formatting Settings for information about the General Content Wrap and Tag Layout tabs URL Mappings Dialog This dialog allows you to map URLs to a different location See URL Mappings for information 457 Proxy Settings Dialog Proxy Settings Dialog If you need to configure proxy settings for when SlickEdit Core needs to use an Internet connection use the Proxy Settings dialog Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Proxy Settings setting Figure 10 59 Proxy Settings Dialog Proxy Settings Fi Use Internet Explorer settings Servers Type Proxy address to use Exceptions Do nok use proxy server For addresses beginning with Use semicolons to separate entries The following options are available e Use Internet Explorer settings If selected Internet Explorer settings will be used and the remaining options and fields on the dialog will be unavailable e Use proxy server If selected the remaining options and fields will become available 458 Network Options Dialog e Servers Indicates the proxy address and port to use e Exceptions Indicates the Web site addresses that the proxy server should disregard Separate entries with semicolons Network Options Dialog This dialog allows you
524. reserves trailing spaces place at the end of a line I Preserves leading spaces place at the beginning of the first alias line ParameterName Parameter replacement See Parameter Prompting M MacroName ArgumentList Calls the specified Slick C macro with a specified optional argument EnvironmentVariable Inserts the value of the environment variable spe cified m sur_text Escape Sequence Examples Indicates where the text to be surrounded will be placed See Dynamic Surround and Surround With for more information The following table contains some examples of using escape sequences in alias values Table 6 8 Escape Sequence Examples Alias Name and Description Value comment A header comment to have the date and time inserted if A simple if statement with indenting support for surround and a cursor position EE Date d Time t SERRE EAERER SEEPS RENEE AAEAEREE EAEREN EE EES LESS if c i Comment goes here A i m sur_text ifelse An if else statement with indenting and sev eral cursor hot spots if So c i o c else i o c 156 Extension Specific Aliases Alias Name and Description Value wm A WinMain function template with indenting and a cursor position int APIENTRY WinMain HANDLE hinstance HANDLE hPrevinstance LPSTR lpszCmdParam int nNCmdShow i C
525. riable into the Index search field Alternatively you can use the Symbols View to find where the variable is defined in the Slick C code Expand the Slick C folder and then expand the Global Variables folder If Slick C hasn t already been tagged type fp into the SlickEdit Core command line This is an abbreviation of the find_proc command which will trigger tagging if it hasn t already been done Setting Changing Configuration Variables There are two ways to set change these macro variables e From the SlickEdit menu click Macro Set Macro Variable and enter the macro variable in the Vari able field The current value of the variable will be shown in the Value text box Click Edit to edit this variable then click OK to accept the change e From the SlickEdit Core command line invoke the set_var command with the macro variable name for example set_var def_auto_linecomment then press Enter to view the current value You can edit this value then press Enter to accept the change See Programmable Macros for more information on loading macros and setting variables Table of Configuration Variables The table below provides a list of the most commonly used configuration variables Table 11 2 Configuration Variable Configuration Variable Description def_auto_linecomment Change to 0 to turn off automatic line comment in sertion def_binary_ext This variable is used by the edit flst e macro for 479
526. ribes some of the features and options that are available for HTML including extension specific options the HTML Beautifier and more HTML support includes Context Tagging e a beautifier Color Coding Syntax Expansion and Syntax In denting for HTML JSP and ASP Many of the language features in SlickEdit e Core are supported for lan guages embedded in HTML including Context Tagging Color Coding SmartPaste Syntax Expansion and Syntax Indenting Tip When working with HTML files you can toggle between the begin and end HTML tags by press ing Ctrl Exporting to HTML To save the current open buffer as HTML file with formatting and color coding use the export_html com mand Configuring the Web Browser To specify the Web browser that is used for previewing from the main menu click Window Prefer ences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Web Browser Setup set ting The Web Browser Setup dialog is displayed as shown below See Web Browser Setup Dialog for a list of option descriptions Figure 7 23 Web Browser Setup Dialog 266 HTML Web Browser Setup Browsers Automatic Mozilla CH Internet Explorer CH Netscape Navigator i Netscape Navigator 6 Other Co Firefox Program CHPROGR A 1 MOZILL 1 FIREFOX EXE url oP Parse In Parts oF Buffer name HTML Formatting Options Content in XML and HTML files may be set to automa
527. ring code help For JSP Package sort order Seeler Java Refactoring See Java Refactoring for information about Java refactoring in SlickEdit Core 253 XML XML and HTML Features for XML and HTML are described below See also XML HTML Formatting XML XML features in SlickEdit Core include Context Tagging validation well formedness checking a beau tifier Color Coding URL Mapping Syntax Expansion and Syntax Indenting for XML XSLT and schemas DTD or XSD XML Formatting Options Content in XML and HTML files may be set to automatically wrap and format as you edit through the XML HTML Formatting feature See XML HTML Formatting for complete information Other miscellaneous tag and attribute options are still provided through the XML Formatting Options dia log To access these options click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog choose xml from the Extension drop down list then click the Options button The XML Formatting Options dialog is displayed Tip You can also display the XML Formatting Options dialog by clicking the XML Options button on the XML HTML Formatting Scheme Configuration dialog click Window Preferences expand Slickedit and click General in the tree then double click the XML HTML Formatting setting The XML Formatting Options dialog is shown below
528. rmation on the available options Contents Displays the following menu of save and print operations for the symbol browser tree e Save Writes the items displayed in the symbol browser to a text file prompting you for a file name and directory location The text file will then be displayed in the editor e Print Displays the Print dialog where you can configure options for printing the tree e Save Subtree and Print Subtree These options function similarly to the above except they apply to the selected subtree 95 Symbols View e Base Classes Displays the Base Classes dialog which shows a list of base classes for the selected class on the left with the list of that class s members on the right Base classes are displayed in a tree view allowing you to explore up the inheritance hierarchy See Viewing Base and Derived Classes for more information Note that the Class View provides this same functionality e Derived Classes Displays the Derived Classes dialog which works the same as above but for de rived classes See Viewing Base and Derived Classes for more information e Properties Displays the Symbol Properties View showing the properties of the selected item such as visibility whether it s static or final etc Note that this window is read only so you can t use it to change the properties e Arguments Displays the return type and arguments for functions methods in the Symbol Properties View e Re
529. rs so that you can use the style to which you are accustomed making your coding experi ence as efficient as possible The Key Bindings dialog allows you see what keys or key sequences are bound to what commands Emulation charts are also available as printable PDF documents in the docs subdirectory of your SlickEd it Core installation directory See Key and Mouse Bindings for more information Supported Emulations This section lists each emulation mode and any special notes BBEdit Brief This emulation relies heavily on Alt key bindings In addition to Brief emulation support SlickEdit Core also supports Brief regular expressions See Regular Expression Syntax for more in formation CodeWarrior CodeWright CUA CUA is an acronym for Common User Interface a standard set of user interface guidelines simil ar to those used in Microsoft products This is the default emulation mode used by SlickEdit Core Epsilon This emulation relies heavily on Ctrl X and Escape meta key bindings GNU Emacs This emulation relies heavily on Ctrl X and Escape meta key bindings It does not in clude an Emacs Lisp emulator ISPF Support is included for ISPF prefix line commands the ISPF command line rulers line number ing and some XEDIT extensions In addition to the ISPF emulation charts additional documentation about using this emulation is available see Using the ISPF and XEDIT Emulations SlickEdit Text Mode Edition Vim
530. rt real indent affects all extensions Enter and Tab keys indent Indent selection when text selected affects all extensions However for the fundamental cob and _ e asm390 extensions the Tabs text box _ Backspace at beginning of line un indents ifies the amount the Tab key indents Use SmartPaste For all extensions the Tabs text box Use Dynamic Surround specifies how tabs are expanded when Syntax expansion displayed on screen Minimum expandable keyword length 1 Be sure to select the extension you want to affect from the Extension drop down list before configuring any settings For a complete of options and buttons on this dialog see Extension Options Dialog Referring to Extensions When an extension refers to another extension both extensions operate exactly the same That is all Context Tagging template editing word processing options and all other extension options are the same In addition modifying the extension option information for either extension updates both exten sions For example by default the H and CPP extensions refer to the C file extension Modify the H or CPP extension setup to modify the extension setup for all three extensions In addition the H and CPP extensions use the same Context Tagging settings as the C extension 231 C and C To have the setup data for one extension refer to another extension click the Refer to button located at the top right corner o
531. rts Organizing imports automates the management of import statements in Java files This feature minimizes the amount of time that it takes to compile code by only importing the classes that are used Existing im port statements are also sorted in a readable format and are more consistent between different Java packages in the same project Organizing of imports is applied to an entire file To organize imports from the right click context menu in the editor click Imports Organize Imports Adding Imports Add Import is used to add an import statement for the class name under the cursor in Java code To in voke this feature move the cursor to the class name you want to import then on the editor s right click context menu click Import Add Import Import Options The behavior of the Organize Imports and Add Import features is controlled by the options on the Organ ize Imports Options dialog box pictured below To open this dialog on the editor s right click context menu click Imports Options For a list with descriptions of the options on this dialog see Organize Imports Options Dialog Figure 7 14 Organize Imports Dialog 252 Java Refactoring W Organize imports Refactoring Package explicit import limit before using wildcard Add blank line between groups of imports Number of package nesting levels bo group imports by Automatically add import during code help for Java Automatically add import du
532. s However for the fundamental cob and Ss asm390 extensions the Tabs text box C Backspace at beginning of line un indents ipediies e amani he Tib key iink Use SmartPaste 3 j For all extensions the Tabs text box use Dy specifies how tabs are expanded when Syntax expansion displayed on screen Minimum expandable keyword length General settings on this dialog box are described below see Extension Options General Dialog Settings Other options are categorized into the following tabs Click on an item to go to that section in the documentation Indent Tab Word Wrap Tab General Tab e Comments Tab e Comment Wrap Tab Advanced Tab e Auto Complete Tab e Context Tagging Tab Extension Options General Dialog Settings The following fields and buttons are available on the Extension Options dialog e Extension The Extension drop down list located above the tabs contains a list of pre loaded exten 399 Extension Options Dialog sions that support Extension Options To configure Extension Options for an extension that is not in the list you must first load or create a file with that extension Tip Before configuring any of the Extension Options always make sure the Extension drop down list reflects the extension you wish to affect Refer to When an extension refers to another extension both extensions operate exactly the same That is all Context Tagging e te
533. s If you modify some source files using a different application you will need to rebuild the tag file Tag file names have the extension vtg By separating tag files for different languages the Context Tagging features can identify symbol information for the file that you are currently editing Creating Tag Files for Run Time Libraries The Create Tag Files for Run Time Libraries dialog appears when SlickEdit e Core is run for the first time It allows you to build tag files for commonly used languages and their libraries including C C Java and NET You can access this dialog at any time in order to create tag files from the Context Tagging Tag Files Dialog click Tools Tag Files then click Auto Tag Figure 5 6 Automatic Tagging Dialog Create Tag Files for Run Time Libraries Context Tagging List Members Parameter Information Tag Driven Navigation and other features Visual Studio 2005 requires tag files for run time libraries By creating these tag files Source SlickEdit saves time you would otherwise spend searching code Destination C Doc To create tag files for the following languages enter the base directory for your compiler package if it is V Create tag file for Java run time libraries not already listed as well as the destination of your tag file Source C Program Files Java jdk1 5 0_09 v For other languages you can Destination C Documents and Se
534. s See Also push bookmark pop bookmark set_bookmark toggle bookmark sb goto bookmark Click Add to add binding to current command Click Remove to unbind current selected command Note e The first time the Key Bindings dialog is invoked the Building Tag File progress bar may be displayed while Slick C macro code is tagged e Bindings are based on the editor emulation mode CUA is the default The title bar of the Key Bindings dialog shows the current mode To change the emulation mode click Window gt Preferences expand SlickEdit and click Emulation in the tree For more information see Emulations The dialog contains the following elements Search by command This filter is used for searching commands in the Command column Type a string in the filter box and the list of commands is filtered as you type to show only those commands that contain the specified string The red X button is used to clear the text box or you can edit inside the text box manually 430 Key Bindings Dialog Search by key sequence This filter is used for searching bindings in the Key Sequence column It captures literal keyboard input For example when the focus is in this filter press Ctrl and C at the same time and Ctrl C is displayed Press the Backspace key and Backspace is displayed Mouse events inside the filter are literal as well For example right clicking within the filter displays the text RButtonDn Becau
535. s Used to search for variables W SlickEdit regular expression Specifies the valid characters in a word The default value is A Za z0 9_ To change the word charac ters for a specific extension from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting Select your exten sion from the Extension drop down list then select the Advanced Tab WP Limit search to word prefix For example a search for pre matches pre and prefix but not supreme or supre W PS Limit search to strict word prefix For example a search for pre matches prefix but not pre supreme or supre W S Limit search to word suffix For example a search for fix matches fix and suffix but not fixit W SS Limit search to strict word suffix For example a search for fix matches suffix but not fix or fixit H Allow finding search string in hidden lines Y Binary search This allows start positions in the middle of a DBCS or UTF 8 character This option is useful when editing binary files in SBCS DBCS mode which may contain characters which look like DBCS but are not For example if you search for the character a it will not be found as the second 185 Find and Replace Commands Option Description character of a DB
536. s expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the General Tab The Auto restore options listed below control which elements of your SlickEdit Core environment that are restored Files Unavailable in SlickEdit Core If checked the files and windows that were opened in your last edit session are restored and re opened when you start the editor Clipboards If checked clipboards are saved across edit sessions Working directory Unavailable in SlickEdit Core If checked the working directory is saved across edit sessions Workspace files Unavailable in SlickEdit Core If checked when switching workspaces the files and windows that were opened for a workspace when it was last closed will be restored Line modify If checked the line modification flags are saved and restored when you save and open files respectively Line modification information for the last 200 files is saved SlickEdit Core stores line modification information in temporary files placed in the SelDisp directory This option works best when the Modified Lines color coding option is selected click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree double click the File Extension Setup setting and select the Advanced Tab Selective display If checked Selective Display is saved and restored when saving and opening files respectively Selective Display for the l
537. s Only Select this option to display only fixed fonts in the Font field By default this option is not selected Script Windows only Choose Default unless you are editing files that have characters not in the active code pages Choose Western to use the typical English characters XML HTML Formatting Dialog This dialog is used to configure the way XML and HTML code is automatically formatted as you edit Note that XML HTML Formatting must be enabled in order for these settings to work To display the XML HTML Formatting dialog click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click 456 URL Mappings Dialog General in the tree then double click the XML HTML Formatting setting Alternatively use the xml_html_options command to display the dialog Figure 10 58 XML HTML Formatting Dialog XML HTML Formatting Scheme Configuration Scheme Tags Settings html default html General z e xhtml block d General Content Wrap Tag Layout xml default xml preserve_content semi block End tags start_tag_only treat_as_content Has end tag a abbr Insert end tag on gt acronym address applet Match tag style of no match base C Scheme uses case sensitive tag search 19 blockquote body br button center Preview Parent element content Not affected by settings lt default gt Current element content Affected by settings lt default gt More pa
538. s Using execute_last_macro_key The execute_last_macro_key command provides functionality to stop macro recording and instantly bind the macro to a key sequence This feature is convenient for recorded macros you want to use per haps immediately or one time only and don t need to track It allows you to keep a set of recent un named macro recordings instead of having just one last recorded macro similar to a feature provided by early text editors that supported macro recording such as the EVE and Edt editors on the Vax VMS Unlike other SlickEdit Core commands we document execute_last_macro_key is not intended to be used on the command line instead you use a key binding that is automatically assigned when you press it to stop macro recording To bind a macro to a key sequence using this method start recording the macro and enter the keystrokes you want to record Then press Citrl Shift F12 key where key stands for keys 0 through 9 A Z or F1 F12 to stop recording the macro and instantly bind it to the key sequence you just pressed 333 Recorded Macro Operations Note The prefix key sequence Citrl Shift F12 works in all emulations except SlickEdit text mode edi tion In that emulation the prefix key sequence is Ctrl Shift T Each macro that you record and bind using this feature is saved to a new file named lastmac lt key gt e located in your configuration directory where lt key gt matches the key you used w
539. s are indented by the specified number of columns after 296 Ada Beautifier the last character of the end of the statement or declaration Original relative indent When selected trailing comments are indented by reusing the indent after the last character of the end of the statement or declaration of the original source file Force type declaration comments to next line When selected trailing comments appearing at the end of a TYPE declaration line are forced onto the next line Advanced Tab The following options are available on the Advanced tab e if then else continued lines Use these advanced options to customize how multi line conditional ex pressions of an if then else statement are indented Force a linebreak on logical operators A line break is forced before after depending on your Op erator position setting every logical operator in the condition of an if elseif For example before beautify Indent per level 3 Operator position Beginning of next line if A B and C D then null end if After beautify if A B and C D then null end if Additional indent for logical operator Additional indent amount for a line broken on a logical op erator This amount is in addition to the current indent level For example before beautify Indent per level 3 Operator position Beginning of next line Additional indent for logical operator 3 Indent per level 3 O
540. s at once use the clear_bookmarks command Alternatively the Bookmarks View contains options for deleting named bookmarks Bookmarks View The bookmark functionality in SlickEdit Core integrates with the Eclipse Bookmarks view This view shows a list of bookmarks that have been set with each bookmark s name file location and line number To open the Bookmarks view click Window Show View Other expand General and double click Bookmarks See Bookmarks view in the Eclipse online Help for more information 173 Setting Bookmark Options Pushed Bookmarks Pushed bookmarks are stored on a stack New bookmarks can be pushed onto the stack preserving the current location Popping the stack removes the top bookmark and navigates the cursor to the location of the previous bookmark Pushed bookmarks do not have names and cannot be manipulated on the Book marks view Pushing a Bookmark To push a bookmark for the current line click Search gt Push Bookmark or use the push_bookmark command Additionally you can use the key binding Cirl Dot push_tag command to move the cursor from a symbol to its definition or Ctrl push_ref command to navigate from a symbol to its reference pushing a bookmark in the process Pushing a bookmark will place the current line on the bookmark stack A bookmark stack is simply an internal list of pushed bookmarks Note By default push_bookmark is not bound to a key Key bindings ca
541. s cursari erene en EERE NEEESE AAAS EEEE EAEE S 532 11 17 Brief Regular Expression Examples AA 536 11 18 Unicode SubCategories for Regular Expressions ccecccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeesnaeessaeessaes 538 11 19 Unicode Character Blocks for Regular Expressions cccecesesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeseaes 540 xix XX Chapter 1 Introduction Cool Features Getting the Most Out of SlickEdit Core At SlickEdit we take great pride in delivering unparalleled power speed and flexibility to our customers Our goal is to remove the tedious tasks involved with programming allowing you to focus on the reason you first got into programming the thrill of writing great code SlickEdit Core brings the rich history of excellence of SlickEdit to the Eclipse framework It delivers the power programming capabilities needed to write more code faster and more accurately making it an in dispensable plug in for developers Cool Features SlickEdit Core contains powerful editing features and capabilities Some of our coolest features are lis ted in the Cool Features dialog Using this dialog you can read a description of each feature and watch a short demo of the feature in action By default the Cool Features dialog appears each time Eclipse is started It can also be displayed anytime by clicking Help SlickEdit Cool Features Write More Code Faster These keys to programming efficiency will help you write
542. s setting is 4 which indicates that the default tab setting is eight spaces To work properly with the Sun Java API source code the tab stops need to be in increments of eight but the syntax indent must be set to four The Syntax Indent affects not only the Tab key but also the number of spaces to indent for each code block level 143 SmartPasteo Note e When you change the tab stops and indent for all languages except COBOL change the Tabs text box to lt value gt where value is the same value used for the Syntax indent text box The Tabs text box only affects how tab characters are expanded on the screen This does not affect the indent when pressing Tab or the amount of indent for statements inside a code block e For COBOL files the Tabs text box also affects the Tab key Syntax Indent still affects the in dent for each code block level Setting Tab to Indent Selections For the Tab key to indent the selection when text is selected select the option Indent selection when text selected Setting Tabs for the Current File To set tabs for the current buffer only use the Tabs dialog box Format Tabs or gui_tabs command You can set tabs in increments or at specific column positions For example to specify an increment of three enter 3 in the text box To specify columns you could enter 1 8 27 44 to specify tab stops that have absolute locations By default the Tab key inserts enough spaces to m
543. s such as HTML and XML From the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click Gener al in the tree then double click the Color Coding setting and select the Tags tab Figure 10 55 Color Coding Setup Tags Tab 451 Color Settings Dialog Color Coding Setup Lexer name HTML k New Tokens Numbers Strings Language Comments Tags Tag names gt gt Ottribubes PUBLIC S STEM H Ya Yol ACRONYM APPLET ORES jE BASE BASEFONT BDO BIG BLOCKQUOTE The following fields and settings are available Attribute values For all tags e Tag names List box containing tags for HTML or XML To add or delete tags use the New and De lete buttons below this list box e gt gt Attributes List box containing attributes that belong to the tag selected in the Tag names list box To add or delete attributes use the New Attir and Delete buttons below this list box e Attribute values List box contains the values for the specified tag and attribute To add or delete a value use the New Value and Delete buttons below this list box e For all tags When this option is selected the values in the Attribute value list box are applied to all tags that have the specified attribute 452 Color Settings Dialog Color Settings Dialog The Color Settings dialog contains options for changing embedded language colors and the colors of screen elements See Colors for
544. s that have special begin end matching built in The examples below illustrate the syntax for defining the begin end pairs The begin and end pair match ing option is case sensitive by default Append l to ignore case Example 1 begin case end The above begin end pairs are for the Pascal language The Pascal language requires a more sophistic ated expression This expression indicates the keywords begin or case start a block and the keyword end terminates the block The comma is used to specify multiple begins or multiple ends The operat or is used to separate begins from ends Example 2 ifdef ifndef if endif The above pairs are for the C language The C language has the added complication that if is a sub string of ifdef Due to the implementation of begin end matching ifdef must appear before if More settings for begin end pairs can be found on the Formatting Options dialog specific to the extension you are working with From the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog select the extension you wish to work with from the Extension drop down list then click the Options but ton See the individual language sections in the chapter Chapter 7 Language Specific Editing for more in formation about these options 78 Cursor Navigation Setting the
545. s value to 0 if you want your line breaks preserved e Broken tag lines Specify how broken tag lines are treated from the following options e Indent from tag column by Specifies the amount to indent for broken tag lines from the starting column of the tag Specify 0 to align broken tag lines with the starting column of the tag e Use original relative indent Reindent broken tag lines using the original relative indent amount from the starting column of the tag e Preserve original indent Preserve the original absolute indent amount on broken tag lines Tags Tab Figure 7 26 HTML Beautifier Tags Tab HTML Beautifier Indent Tags Attributes Values Comments Advanced Schemes Beautify Tag case UPPER O lower O Capitalize Preserve Cancel Tag settings lt DEFAULT TAG gt PA Ee SE ad t ihi End tag required Reset C Indent C Preserve tag body C Literal S Save Settings IT Preserve tag position Line breaks Before open tag 1 Stand alone Alter close tag 1 Syne extension options The Tags tab contains the following options and settings e Tag case Specifies how you want your tag names cased For example if you choose UPPER then lt td gt would be beautified to lt TD gt Tag settings The settings in this group box apply to the tag that is selected in the list box The lt DEFAULT TAG tag item in the list of tags specifies settings to use when no settings exist for a ta
546. s well as ways to navigate the information in your workbench Views also have their own menus To open the menu for a view click the icon at the left end of the view s title bar Some views also have their own toolbars The actions represented by buttons on view toolbars only affect the items within that view A view might appear by itself or stacked with other views in a tabbed notebook You can change the lay out of a perspective by opening and closing views and by docking them in different positions in the work bench window Opening SlickEdit Core Views Perspectives offer pre defined combinations of views and editors To open a view that is not included in the current perspective from the main menu click Window Show View To open a SlickEdit Core view click Window Show View Other expand SlickEdit Views and double click the view you want to open Tip e You can create fast views to provide a shortcut to views that you use often e After adding a view to the current perspective you may want to save your new layout by click ing Window Save Perspective As For more information on views and the multiple operations they allow see the Eclipse online Help Available SlickEdit Core Views The views below are made available by SlickEdit Core Bookmarks Displays a list of bookmarks that have been set Note that the bookmark functionality in SlickEdit Core integrates with the Eclipse Bookmarks view For
547. sc to terminate an incremental search only during prompting Press and hold Ctrl Alt Shift to terminate a long search You can retrieve your previous search string by invoking the i_search or reverse_i_search command and pressing Ctrl S or Ctrl R respectively before entering a search string Find and Replace Commands Find and Slash Commands The command line is available for performing searches You can use the forward slash or find com mands which provide the same functionality as the Find and Replace view Press Esc to toggle the cursor to the command line The syntax of the slash command is string OptionCharacters The syntax of the find command is find string OptionCharacters OptionCharacters is one or more of the following option characters Table 6 10 OptionCharacters for find and Slash Commands Option Description E Exact case l Ignore case S Reverse search M Limit search to selection lt If found place cursor at beginning of word gt If found place cursor at end of word 184 Find and Replace Commands Option Description R Interpret search string as a SlickEdit regular ex pression U Interpret search string as UNIX regular expression B Interpret string as a Brief regular expression N Do not interpret search string as a regular expres sion P Wrap to beginning end when string not found Ww Limit search to word
548. se file names when inserting links Use quotes for numerical values Use quotes for single word values Insert colors using color names if possible _ Use lt DIV gt tags for Alignment C Automatically insert gt when typing e 268 HTML The following settings are available Case for inserted tags This option is where you specify if you want the tag names to be lowercase or uppercase For example if you select Uppercase then lt td gt becomes lt TD gt Case for inserted attributes This option is where you specify if you want attributes to be lowercase or uppercase inside the body of a tag For example if you select Uppercase then lt td align right gt would become lt td ALIGN right gt Case for inserted single word values This option is where you specify if you want word values to be uppercase or lowercase when the of an attribute is inside the body of a tag For example if you select Uppercase then lt td align right gt becomes lt td align RIGHT gt Case for hex values This option is where you specify if you want hex values to be uppercase or lowercase after the of an attribute inside the body of a tag For example if you select Uppercase then lt body bgcolor ffffff gt would become lt body bgcolor FFFFFF gt Embedded ASP dialect The language that you select here determines the default embedded lan guage mode for ASP files Use path for file entries Not available in SlickEdit
549. se the key sequence filter captures literal keyboard input you cannot edit the text or use key functions such as backspacing or tabbing in and out of the field You must use the red X but ton to clear the filter Command This column lists in alphabetical order by default the SlickEdite Core commands and user macros that are or can be bound to keys or mouse events Click on the column label to sort bindings by this column An arrow in the column header indicates the sort order ascending or descending If acommand macro has more than one binding each instance is listed on a separate row For ex ample in CUA emulation the command out open is bound to F7 and Cirl O Therefore out open appears in the Command column three times once for each binding Key Sequence This column shows the mouse event or key sequence associated with the command or macro If a Key Sequence cell is empty no binding is associated with that command macro Click on the column label to sort bindings by this column An arrow in the column header indicates the sort order ascending or descending Mode This column shows the language editing mode to which the key binding applies The default mode causes the binding to work in all language editing modes However the default mode will be overridden by any language specific mode binding to another command macro Click on the column la bel to sort bindings by this column An arrow in the column header indicates the sort o
550. shown in the code below struct MYSTRUCT int x int y 1 MYSTRUCT VariableDefinition symbol definition stops here 0 1 really should end here To diff a selected range of lines from two source files complete the following steps 1 From the main menu click Tools File Difference 2 Select the Multi File diff type 3 Type the name of the first file in the Path 1 text box 4 Click More and type the start and end line numbers next to Line range label 5 Type the name of the second file in the Path 2 text box and type the start and end line numbers next to Line range label If the file names only differ by path you need to specify the path for Path 2 only 6 When differencing a symbol definition click Symbols to enter the line number range Comparing All Symbols of Two Files DIFFzilla allows you to diff all the symbols of two different files This feature is most useful for diffing files with symbols that have been moved around To diff all the symbols of two source files complete the fol lowing steps 1 From the main menu click Tools File Difference or use the diff command 2 Enter the first file in the Path 1 text box 3 Enter the second file in the Path 2 text box If the file names only differ by path you need to specify the 310 DIFFzillae path for Path 2 only 4 In the Diff type select Symbols and click OK You do not need to turn on the Diff all symbols check box when
551. shown on the Add New Item dialog These category hierarchies map exactly to the directory structure under the locations for installed and user templates To create a new template item category 108 Template Manager Operations 1 Create a new folder under the user templates directory For example if you wanted to create a Dialogs category for Java project items you would create the following directory lt ConfigDir gt templates ItemTemplates Java Dialogs 2 Place all templates for the category under this directory 3 Create a new project or open an existing one 4 From the main menu click File gt New Item from SlickEdit Template 5 Verify that your new category appears in the Categories list on the Add New Item dialog box Caution We do not recommend creating new categories or re organizing categories under installed tem plates since the next patch or upgrade would overwrite any customizations you have made If you want to customize an installed template then we suggest you copy it to the user templates direct ory and perform your customization on the copy Template Manager Operations Use the Template Manager dialog to add edit and delete templates You can show this dialog by clicking File SlickEdit Template Manager Use the Categories list to select a category Selecting a category populates the Templates list with templates for that category Creating a New Category To create a new cat
552. single variable can be time consuming especially when templates are involved e Tags found in search When you invoke the Find Tag dialog box right click in the Symbols View and select Find Tag the number of tags found is limited by this setting This setting also controls how many duplicate tags are tried when SlickEdit Core is attempting to evaluate the type of a symbol e Tag file cache size k You can improve tagging performance by adjusting the tag file cache size to better match the size of your tag files Generally a tag file cache size that matches the total size of the tag files being used will provide the best performance For example if the tag files for your source code and libraries adds up to 100 MB you should set your cache size to 100 MB You may have to experiment to find the optimum value Use the recommendations below as a guide Note that this is the same option that is found on the Virtual Memory Tab of the General Options dialog 438 Color Coding Setup Dialog e Minimum 8 MB e Default 64 MB e Ideal Sum of tag file sizes e Maximum 25 of physical system memory e C Preprocessing button Displays the C C Preprocessing dialog box Use this dialog to modify preprocessing so that Context Tagging can better analyze your code See C C Preprocessing for more information Color Coding Setup Dialog The Color Coding Setup dialog provides the capability to specify colors for identifying your code To
553. sion 107 Organizing Templates Parameter Name Description safeprojectname Current project name no path no extension with all unsafe characters replaced with safe characters For example if the project name was My Project vpj then safeprojectname would evaluate to My_Project for a C source code file workspacename Current workspace name no path no extension safeworkspacename Current workspace name no path no extension with all unsafe characters replaced with safe char acters For example if the workspace name was My Workspace vpw then safeworkspacename would evaluate to My_Workspace for a C source code file projectworkingdir projectbuilddir projectconfigname Current project working directory No trailing file separator Current project build output directory No trailing file separator Current project configuration name workspaceconfigname Current workspace configuration name This will be the same as projectconfigname except for MS Visual Studio workspace which will have a separate workspace solution configuration name projectdir workspacedir username Location of current project file No trailing file separ ator Location of current workspace file No trailing file separator Operating system login name Organizing Templates Templates are organized into category hierarchies as
554. splayed by the Preview View The table below describes what the Preview view displays under different circumstances 90 References View Table 6 1 Preview View Information Editor Element in Use Any source file open in the editor Preview View Display The Preview view shows the definition or declara tion of the symbol under the cursor along with the symbol s documentation comments if any exist The Outline Symbols Class and Find Symbol views Single click on a symbol and the Preview view dis plays the selected symbol and its documentation comments if any exist See Outline View Symbols View Class View and Find Symbol View for more information Call Tree dialog and References view The Preview view shows the location of the symbol references or use The Base Classes and Derived Classes symbol browser dialogs Single click on a symbol and the Preview view dis plays the selected symbol and its documentation comments if any exist See Symbols View for more information The SlickEdit Core Search view Single click on a line in the SlickEdit Core Search view and the Preview view displays the location of the selected search result See Search Results Out put for more information List Members and Auto Complete results Cursor up or down through the list of items in auto complete or list members results and the Preview view displays the location of the selected symbol and its d
555. stant 0 eccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeeeeeeeees 213 6 48 C Refactoring Create Standard Methods 0 ccseceeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeeeeeeeee 214 6 49 Test Parsing Configuration Example 1 cceccceeeseeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeseeeeeseaaeeseaeeseeeeeesaeeseaeeeeaas 216 6 50 Test Parsing Configuration Example 2 217 6 51 Test Parsing Configuration Example 3 219 6 52 Refactoring RESUItS preron a a ee eet ea a ented A A EA 220 6 53 SElOCHIVE DIS PIAY EE 225 7A Extension Options Dialog iiin a iad SEENEN ieee died eee di ania ceed NEEN teed 231 Zeie New Extension Dalgo 2utesseageieessetit eebegtorgegkl E EErEE A raa ER EEFE EENEN EET 232 7 3 C C Formatting Options Begin end style Tab ccceceececeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaeeseeeeeesaeeseeeeeaas 233 7 4 C C Formatting Options Indentation Tab esseesseesseesseesieeesissriesriessriesrissrressrnssrnssrrnssrns 234 7 5 C C Formatting Options Other Tab cccceecceeeeeeneceeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeceeeeesaaeeseaeeseeeeeesaeeseaeeeeaas 236 7 6 C C Beautifier Begin End Style Tab cccceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeecaeeseeeeeseaaeeseaeeseeeeeesaeeseaeeeeaas 238 7 7 C C Beautifier Indenting Tab cccccceseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeeseeeeesaaeeseaeeseeeeeesaeeseeeeeaas 239 7 8 C C Beautifier Comments Tab ccceeeceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeeseeeeesaaesseaeeseeeeeesaeeseaeeeeaas 240 ED C C Beauti
556. style Reformat Literal content is indented one syntax indent level from the lt style gt open tag e pre All Content check boxes off e blockquote Reformat Indent End tag When on the selected tag has an end tag For XML you will normally want this to remain on End tag required When on the selected tag s ending tag is required For XML you will normally want this to remain on Preserve tag body When on all properties of the body of the tag selected will be preserved This is especially useful for processing instructions like lt xml gt where you do not want the embedded text to be beautified Preserve tag position When on the position of the tag within the document is preserved This is es pecially useful with JSP ASP tags where reindenting the tag would interrupt the flow of the script code Line breaks Select the way lines are broken e Before open tag Specify the number of line breaks before the opening tag For example if you were to set the number of line breaks before the opening tag to 3 for the XHTML lt td gt tag and the original content was lt tr gt lt td gt lt td gt lt tr gt The resulting content would be 259 XML lt tr gt lt td gt lt td gt lt tr gt Please note that the number of line breaks is not the same as the number of blank lines If you wanted three blank lines then you would set the number of line breaks to 4 e After close
557. sville NC 27560 USA 1 919 473 0070 1 800 934 EDIT 1 919 473 0080 fax info slickedit com www sSlickedit com SlickEdit Visual SlickEdit Clipboard Inheritance DIFFzilla SmartPaste Context Tagging Slick C and Code Quick Think Slick are registered trademarks of SlickEdit Inc All other products or company names are used for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective owners Protected by U S Patent 5 710 926 Copyright 1988 2008 SlickEdit Inc All rights reserved
558. symbol browser which lists the symbols from all of the tag files See Symbols View for more information 29 Activating the Command Line The SlickEdite Core Command Line SlickEdit Core provides its own command line as a means to execute most SlickEdit Core operations so you can work without taking your hands off of the keyboard This is useful for less frequently used opera tions that may not warrant a key binding or complex commands that require arguments Note e SlickEdit Core commands that contain two or more words are written throughout our docu mentation with underscore separators for example cursor_down Note that in the user inter face however these commands are displayed with hyphen separators for example cursor down Both of these forms work so you can use whichever style you prefer e Although SlickEdit Core shares a heritage with our stand alone editor SlickEdit some SlickEdit commands may not available when the functionality is not applicable to the Eclipse environment Activating the Command Line To activate or toggle the command line press the key or key sequence for your emulation e BBEdit Esc e Brief Esc e CodeWarrior Esc CodeWright F9 Epsilon Alt X or F2 e GNU Emacs Alt X or F2 e ISPF Ese SlickEdit Text Mode edition Esc e Vim Ctrl A e Visual C Esc e Visual Studio Esc e Xcode Esc See Emulations for more information 30 Command Line
559. t tings e Comment width Select one of the width options to reflow a block comment to the margins or the width that you specify in these fields See Comment Wrap Tab for information on these options For more information about comments see Commenting Current Document Options Dialog 467 Current Document Options Dia log The Current Document Options dialog allows you to enable disable aspects of XML or HTML Formatting for just the current document It can be displayed by clicking Format gt XML HTML Formatting Cur rent Document Options or by using the xml_html_document_options command Figure 10 68 Current Document Options Dialog Current Document Options Formatting scheme htral Auto Formatting options Enable content wrapping The dialog contains the following e Formatting scheme This drop down specifies the formatting scheme applied to this document Choose from the list of available schemes e Auto formatting options These are the aspects of XML HTML Formatting that can be enabled dis abled for the current document e Configure Schemes button Allows you to modify or create a new scheme to apply to the current document For more detailed information see Enabling Disabling for the Current Document 468 Chapter 11 Appendix 469 Using Unicode Encoding Encodings are used to convert a file to either SBCS DBCS for the active code page or Unicode more specifical
560. t Diff or Prev Diff to advance to the next or previous change made by the refactoring Click File gt gt to restore the contents of the current selected file to its original contents Click Block gt gt to restore an entire block of changes to the original contents Click Del Block to remove a block of code inserted by the refactoring Click Line gt gt to restore the current line to its original contents Some refactorings in particular Modify Parameter List may require further user input In this case each input will be displayed under the file it is in and there will be two additional buttons Next Input and Prev Input You will not be able to save the refactoring results until you have resolved all of the input requests Java Refactoring The Eclipse JDT Refactor main menu item for Java refactoring disappears when you are not using the JDT Editor SlickEdit Core has made several of these refactorings available in the editor s right click menu under the Source menu item Override Implement Methods e Implement Getters and Setters e Generate Delegate Methods e Add Constructors from Superclass Generate Constructor Using Fields Externalize Strings There are also other Java refactorings from the JDT accessible from the Refactor menu item of the edit or s right click menu e Move e Change Method Signature e Convert Anonymous Class to Nested e Move Member Type to New File Pull Up e Push Down Extract Interface
561. t MyClass java lt File gt lt Files gt lt TemplateContent gt lt SETemplate gt TemplateDetails TemplateDetails is a required child element of SETemplate Describes the template item Details are used to display the template item on the Add New Item dialog box Attributes None Child elements DefaultName Description Name SortOrder Parent elements SETemplate Value N A Example The following example illustrates the metadata for an item template for a custom Java class lt xml version 1 0 gt lt DOCTYPE SETemplate SYSTEM http www slickedit com dtd vse setemplate 1 0 setemplate dtd gt lt SETemplate Version 1 0 Type Item gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt Name gt My Java Class lt Name gt lt Description gt My custom Java class lt Description gt lt DefaultName gt MyClass java lt DefaultName gt lt TemplateDetails gt lt TemplateContent gt lt Files gt lt File gt MyClass java lt File gt lt Files gt lt TemplateContent gt lt SETemplate gt 125 Selections Text Editing SlickEdit Core provides familiar operations for selecting copying moving and operating on text with en hanced capabilities to meet the needs of developers This section also describes how to work with lines sort text and insert literal characters into your text Selections SlickEdite Core supports three kinds of selections character line and block
562. t an alias for the menu item See Defining Menu Item Aliases e Help Cmd Macro command executed when F1 is pressed when the menu item is selected Usually it is a help or popup_imessage command For example if you specified gui_open as the menu item 365 Auto Enable Properties Dialog command specify help open dialog box as the Help item If you do not know the name of the dialog box displayed search for Help on the command The Help for each command should indicate the name of the dialog box displayed Some commands do not display dialog boxes For these commands spe cify help command where command is name of the command this menu item executes or help xxxx menu where xxxx is the name of the drop down menu this command is on e Message Message text to be displayed when selection cursor is on this menu item This message is currently only used when the menu is used as the SlickEdit Core menu bar e Submenu Check this box if you want to create a menu which contains other menu items e Auto Enable Displays the Auto Enable Properties dialog box to set the properties for the menu item that should be automatically enabled See Enabling Disabling Menu Items and Auto Enable Properties Dialog e Up Moves the selected menu item above the previous menu item e Down Moves the selected menu item below the next menu item e Next Selects the menu item after the currently selected menu for editing Use this button to insert a bl
563. t side or from the context 110 Template Options Dialog menu inside the list of parameters Template Options Dialog Use this dialog to edit options that are common to all templates You can launch this dialog from the Tem plate Manager dialog by clicking the Options button Global Substitution Parameters The Global substitution parameters area on the Template Options dialog lists the substitution paramet ers that are common to all templates A common substitution parameter for example could be author where the parameter value is your name You could then create code templates that automatically fill in a header comment with the author s your name Add Edit and Delete operations are accessible from the buttons on the right side or from the context menu inside the list of parameters Add File Dialog Used to add a file to a template To launch this dialog right click on a file in the Files tab of the Template Manager dialog and select Add File or use the Add File button The dialog contains the following e Source file name When a file is created from a template as when adding an item template from the Add New Item dialog it is created from the source file with this file name e Copy source file to template directory Check this option to place a copy of the file in the current template s directory and change the source file name to point to the new file in the template The file is not copied until you click OK
564. t the change was already applied e Show changes If selected if a change does not cause a conflict the change is automatically ap 371 DIFFzillao Dialog plied to the output file and the change IS indicated so that using the Next Conflict button will show you the change e Output style Output style has no effect if there are no conflicts The following output styles are avail able e Interactive Provides a friendly side by side dialog box which lets you pick the change you want in the output file It also lets you edit e Interleaved buffer Creates an editor buffer which you must edit to resolve conflicts e Use smart merge If selected the number of conflicts found is reduced e Ignore spaces If selected leading and trailing spaces are ignored The side by side output allows you to easily select the change that you want DIFFzillaw Dialog The DIFFzilla dialog Tools File Difference is used to configure a file differencing operation and begin the diff The options are categorized into two tabs e DIFFzilla Files Tab e DIFFzilla Options Tab DIFFzilla Files Tab You can compare two files or two source trees to determine which files have been added or removed and to generate a list of file names Use this tab to set up the comparison parameters for the files that you wish to compare After configuring your settings click OK to start the diff Figure 10 19 DIFFzilla Files Tab 372 DIFFzilla
565. ta is used in creating this ID Small changes to your machine like switching dis play cards upgrading memory or changing hard drives can cause the license to become damaged A li cense can also be damaged by changing the system date by more than one day When this happens you will need to repair the license SlickEdit Core automatically detects damaged licenses and launches the SlickEdit License Manager You will be prompted to enter your license key The number of repairs is limited but enough are available to handle any reasonable hardware changes If you run out of repairs please contact Product Support If enough hardware is changed then this will appear to be a different machine and you will have to activ ate the license as though this was the first time Eclipse with SlickEdit Core was run In that case you will lose the activation you had previously Therefore we strongly recommend that you deactivate your li cense prior to making substantial changes to your computer s hardware Adjusting the System Date Changing the system date on your computer could damage your license The SlickEdit License Manager records the date each time the product is run If you run Eclipse with SlickEdit Core with a system date that is more than one day earlier than a previous run then your license will be damaged This is part of the tamper protection on time limited licenses like a trial license or the SlickEdit Core subscription Changing your syst
566. tab applet Applet runs in a web browser custon Custom command lines for execute and debug application Application requires java exe to run Expand All Collapse All Refresh Squish The data structure of the variable is displayed in the list box at the top of the dialog and the value for each entry is displayed in the Value text box The following buttons are available e Expand Curr Expands current item which has a Plus bitmap e Delete Deletes current item e Format Allows you to change the type of the current item e Insert Inserts a new hash table or array element e Expand All Expands all items so you can see the entire data structure e Collapse All Display first level of variable with nothing expanded 363 Grid Settings Dialog e Update Sets the contents of the variable to what is currently displayed in the Variable Editor e Refresh Cancels changes and displays current value of variable which is not necessarily the same as when this dialog box was originally displayed e Squish Deletes array items which have the value _notinit Grid Settings Dialog The Grid Settings dialog Macro Grid or gui_grid commana is used to set the width and height of grid dots displayed on forms when you use the Dialog Editor These settings affect the distance between the dots on a form that is being edited Figure 10 14 Grid Settings Dialog Grid Settings Gr
567. tag Specify the number of line breaks after the closing tag For example if you were to set the number of line breaks after the closing tag to 3 for the XHTML lt td gt tag and the original con tent was lt TR gt lt TD gt lt TD gt lt TR gt The resulting content would be lt TR gt lt TD gt lt TD gt lt TR gt Please note that the number of line breaks is not the same as the number of blank lines If you wanted three blank lines then you would set the number of line breaks to 4 e Stand alone When on the selected tag will always have at least one preceding and trailing line break on both its opening and ending tag when beautified You can specify that there be more than one line break by setting Line breaks for the opening and closing tags Attributes Values Tab Figure 7 18 XML Beautifier Attributes Values Tab 260 XML XML Beautifier Indent Tags Attributes Values Comments Advanced Schemes Beautify Attribute case Word value case Hex value case Cancel UPPER O lower Help Capitalize Preserve Reset Save Settings Quote word values O Yes O No Preserve Quote number values i O Yes O No EE Syne extension options C Quote all values The Attributes Values tab contains the following settings Attribute case Specifies how you want attributes cased inside the body of a tag For example if you choose UPPER then lt td align right
568. tagged expressions with a backslash followed by a tag group number 1 9 Count the left parenthesis in the search string to determine a tagged expression number The first tagged expression is 1 and the last is 0 SlickEdito regular expressions Use curly braces to denote a tagged expression in the search string The replace string specifies tagged expressions with a followed by a tagged expression num ber 0 9 Count the left braces in the search string to determine a tagged expression number The first tagged expression is 0 Brief regular expressions Use curly braces to denote a tagged expression in the search string The replace string specifies tagged expressions with a backslash followed by a tagged expression number 0 9 Count the left braces in the search string to determine a tagged expression number The first tagged expression is 0 The following table contains examples of using tagged search expressions Table 6 14 Examples of Tagged Search Expressions 194 Find and Replace with Regular Expressions Example Description UNIX regular expression Search for if while Replace with x 1y 2 SlickEdito regular expression Search for if while Replace with x 0y 1 Brief regular expression Search for if while Replace with x 0y 1 UNIX regular expression Search for 4 Replace with 2 1 SlickEdit regular expression Search for 4 Replace
569. take you to a Web page where you can register for a trial A license key will be e mailed to you to activate the product A trial can be converted to full license by entering a full license key at any time in the SlickEdit License Man ager 11 Licensing e To buy a full license visit the SlickEdit Web site at Atto www slickedit com or select the Purchase a License option That will take you directly to the product page for SlickEdit Core e To enter a license key for an existing license select Enter a license key Activation After you enter a license key to activate the product SlickEdit Core contacts the license server over the Internet You are permitted up to five concurrent activations of SlickEdit Core initially You can contact SlickEdit Sales to get additional activations at no additional cost if you need more Activating SlickEdit Core en ables your subscription to run on a particular machine You can deactivate a license if you want to use it on a different machine Uninstalling SlickEdit Core does not automatically deactivate the license Your license key is good for one year Any new versions of SlickEdit Core that are released will work with the existing key You will not need to reactivate a machine when installing a new version of SlickEdit Core When your subscription expires you will need a new license key Each machine will need to be re activated using that key Deactivation Once you have activated Slick
570. tax Expansion Templates To change the minimum expandable keyword length enter the value by using the Minimum expandable keyword length spin box To set options such as brace style click the Options button on the Extension Options dialog Tip SlickEdit Core can display Syntax Expansion choices for the word prefix under the cursor To turn this option on off select the Auto Complete Tab on the Extension Options dialog and select deselect the Syntax expansion option See Completions for more information Modifying Syntax Expansion Templates Syntax Expansion templates are essentially extension specific aliases that have been pre defined You can modify these templates by replacing them with your own For example to add a comment to the end of C for while if and switch statements 1 7 8 From the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup The Extension Options dialog is displayed From the Extension drop down list select the c extension Select the General Tab Click Aliases to display the Alias Editor dialog Click New and then type for as the alias name Type the following lines in the text box to the right of the alias name for c Le for The c escape sequence above specifies the cursor placement after expansion is performed Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for the while if and switch keywords
571. text You can use aliases for commonly typed function names statements or to insert several lines of code There are two types of aliases in SlickEdit Core e Directory Aliases Directory aliases are short identifiers for long directory names They save you from having to type long path names when you are prompted for a file name or directory e Extension Specific Aliases These aliases are set up on a per language basis and are useful for in serting frequently used text such as comment headers into your code Directory Aliases Directory aliases take advantage of the fact that most users are constantly opening files from a small number of directories throughout the day By using a directory alias when opening a file or changing dir ectories you do not have to type in long paths or click the mouse repeatedly in the Directory list box After typing the alias identifier directory aliases can be expanded by pressing Ctrl Space These aliases are stored in the file alias sik Note SlickEdit Core doesn t modify Eclipse s file management related dialogs such as File gt Open File Save As Therefore directory aliases are not available in these dialogs Defining a New Directory Alias Directory aliases typically consist of a short abbreviation of the last name in a long directory path For ex ample if you had a directory called c version20 srce project2 a good alias name might be p2 For compiler include files defi
572. th one or more decimal digits By default leading decimal digits indicate a number e Unicode strings C When this option is selected text in the form of any text is coded as a string Comments Tab The Comments tab is used to set comment options for color coding To access these settings click Win dow Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Color Coding setting and select the Comments tab Figure 10 54 Color Coding Setup Comments Tab 449 Color Coding Setup Dialog Color Coding Setup Lexer name HTML k Delete Tokens Numbers Strings Language Comments Tags ul ne aor o MultiLine lt New Multi line comment Multi line comment Start delimiter End delimiter C Nesting allowed Only iF First mon blank character in line For start delimiter First End delimiter must be che last character op the line Only when start delimiter is in column Color as CommentColor wi The following options are available e New Line comment Click this button to define new single line comments e New Multi line comment Click this button to define new multi line comments e Line comment options The following line comment options apply to multi line comments e Start delimiter Delimiter which starts the multi line comment Currently the first character of this string cannot be a valid identifier character e End delimiter Delimiter
573. the Options button The Formatting Options dialog specific to the file extension you have selected will be displayed Note Languages similar to Ada have similar Formatting Options dialogs which are not specifically doc umented Keyword case specifies the case of keywords used by template editing If Auto case keywords is selec ted the case of keywords are changed to the keyword case specified when you type them For example when you type the word procedure and the Keyword case is set to Upper case the editor changes procedure to PROCEDURE Ada Beautifier You can beautify Ada files and change the beautify settings by using the Ada Beautifier dialog box This dialog box can be accessed from the main menu by clicking Format Beautify or by using the gui_beautify command To instantly beautify Ada code according to the settings that are selected on the Ada Beautifier dialog box use the ada_beautify or ada_beautify_selection commands The following settings and operations are available on the Ada Beautifier Restrict to selection When checked only lines in the selection are beautified e Sync extension options When checked the extension options are updated to reflect any changes that these dialogs have in common Beautify Beautifies current selection or buffer and closes the dialog box e Reset Restores the dialog box settings to the values that appeared when you invoked the dialog Save Settings
574. the chosen language is shown in the list box on the left Figure 6 26 Alias Editor Dialog for Surround With 167 Surround With E Alias Editor C default_config java als UL Msurround with eal lt case l catch Sr sur text indent default D do while Finally For if iF else new j2me ride a Km Coe Ca ra Parameters Param Mame i Initial Value To modify one of the Surround With structures complete the following steps 1 Select the structure that you wish to modify Notice the template for the structure that appears in the text box on the right side of the Alias Editor 2 Modify the template to suit your needs For a list of escape sequences and template examples see Ali as Escape Sequences For more information about using the Alias Editor see Creating an Extension Specific Alias 3 When you are finished click OK on the Alias Editor dialog 4 Click OK on the Surround With dialog Surround With Commands There are three commands available for working with Surround With 168 Surround With e surround_with This command is used to display the Surround With dialog allowing you to pick a structure to surround selected text with This command can be bound to a key see Creating Bindings for more information e sur_text This is a Slick C function that can only be used inside of a Surround With template It is used to indicate where the selected text should be
575. the cursor This option is not available if using Brief or Emacs emulation Delete selection before insert Indicates whether a selection is deleted before new text is inserted This option is not available if using a Brief or Emacs emulation Auto deselect Check this box to clear a selection when the cursor moves or one of a few other editor operations occurs This option is not available if using a Brief or Emacs emulation Shift Cursor always char select When this check box is cleared pressing the Shift lt arrow keys gt will select line or block selections depending upon the direction the cursor moves This is not available if using a Brief emulation Mouse selection creates clipboard Select this option to use the left mouse button to create a clip board and to use the middle mouse button to paste Arrow keys traverse selection If checked the Left arrow key moves the cursor to the beginning of the selection and the Right arrow key moves the cursor to the end of the selection Clipboard formats Select the type of editing format for clipboards allowing you to paste formatted and color coded text to other applications as well as plain text Choose from Rich Text Format or HTML Special Characters Tab Activating view of special characters inserts characters into your file to show such items as tabs spaces and line endings Characters defined on the Special Characters tab are displayed instead of the original characters whe
576. the languages C C C HTML Java JavaScript and XML Highlight the lines to 166 Surround With surround right click and select Surround Selection With or use the surround_with command The Surround With dialog appears with a pre defined list of structures based on the current file extension Figure 6 25 Surround With Dialog E Surround With case catch default Cancel do while finally for if 1f else new jeme midlet switch try try catch try catch finally try finally while Customize Select the structure you wish to surround with then click OK If there is no selection and you activate Surround With the current line or code block will be automatically highlighted for surrounding the same function performed by the select_code_block command Modifying Surround With Templates Surround With templates are created and modified the same way as other aliases with the addition of the m sur_text escape sequence This sequence indicates where the selected text should be placed and can be used multiple times within a single Surround With template See Surround With Commands for more information on sur_text To view or modify the Surround With templates use the surround_with command to display the Sur round With dialog then click the Customize button This will display the Alias Editor dialog with the Sur round With option selected The list of Surround With structures for
577. the preceding code sample the comment will instead be formatted as fol lows if enabled tabState TIS_DISABLED KE Last line is bottom When this option is selected the last line of the text selection is used as the last line of the comment The bottom border is not drawn Otherwise the open comment characters appear on their own line Using the same example if this option is selected the comment will be formatted as follows if enabled tabState TIS_DISABLED Comment Line These settings are used when you comment out selected lines Format Comment Lines or comment command e Left and Right Characters that you specify in these boxes are literally inserted to the left and right of the text on each line of the selection when you use SlickEdit Core to create a line comment The placement of the Left characters can be controlled through the Location options below Characters specified in the Right box are placed and aligned vertically at the end of the longest line of text in the selection For example if the Left and Right boxes both contain the characters clicking Format gt Comment Line comments out the example code as follows if enabled tabState TIS DISABLED e Location Mutually exclusive location options control where characters specified in the Left box are 408 Extension Options Dialog placed e At left margin Places characters flush
578. ther The output is color coded The side by side output differences can be merged from one file to the other and you can edit the files directly inside the DIFFzilla dia log this is called Dynamic Difference Editing Undo copy paste Syntax Expansion indenting SmartPasteo Auto List Members Auto Parameter Info and many emulation key mappings work when editing in the DIFFzilla dialog box When you type or make any edit lines are re diffed compared again so that you can view the new intra line differences easily 308 DIFFzillae Comparing Two Files To diff two source files complete the following steps 1 From the main menu click Tools File Difference or use the diff command The DIFFzillae dialog appears as pictured below Figure 8 1 DIFFzillae Dialog DIF Fzilla E Files Options Diff Type To compare directories set Path 1 and Path 2 to directory names and Ti mpare compare two files then set Filespecs to a list of wildcards ex c h and Exclude Text Co eee Filespecs to a list of wildcards you do not want induded in the compare compare functions and procedures excjunk O MultiFile compare directories and files Use the Previous diff button to load results of saved directory _ Recurse into subdirectories compares Path 1 Path 2 UK HE More gt gt 2 Under Diff Type select the Text Compare option 3 Enter the name of the first file to compare in the P
579. tial Value Optional Enter the initial value of the parameter This text will appear in the text field of the Parameter Entry dialog that prompts for values after the alias is expanded 4 Click OK 5 If you wish to add more parameters repeat Steps 2 through 4 6 On the Alias Editor dialog the Parameters group box will now display a list of the parameters that you have added 157 Syntax Expansion 7 In the large text field on the right side of the Alias Editor you can now type the alias value In the places where you want parameter prompting to occur type ParamName where ParamName is the parameter name that you entered in Step 3 8 Click OK when you are finished Example Instantiating a Variable in Java with Parameter Prompting In Java instantiating variables can be a repetitive task The following code shows a common Java code snippet public class public static void main String args String x new String arg 0 You could define an alias for entering new class names with variables and arguments That way when you press Enter after the third line and type and expand the alias you will be prompted for the values For this alias in the Alias Editor dialog first define three parameters class_name var_name and arg_list Then enter the following text for the alias value class_name var_name new class_name arg_list Creating an Extension Specific Alias from a Selection You
580. tiated when a new element is created from that template Some parameters are replaced with cal culated or pre defined values like date or author If a value is not known you will be prompted for a value when the template is instantiated Code templates are composed of one or more template source files and a metadata file providing addi tional information like the name of the template a description of the template prompts for substitution parameters and default values for substitution parameters The following is an example of a single file source template The items surrounded by dollar signs are the substitution parameters Scopyright package SpackageS author Sauthors version versions S public class Ssafeitemnames Default constructor Ki public Ssafeitemnames Templates can be organized into Categories to make them easier to manage The templates shipped with SlickEdit Core are organized into categories by language and then by purpose Use the Template Man ager dialog to add edit and delete user templates The Template Manager dialog is accessed by clicking File SlickEdit Template Manager Instantiating a Template You can add an item to your current project by clicking File New Item from SlickEdit Template If you want to create a new item from a template without adding it to your current project then click File gt New Item from SlickEdit Template The Add New Item
581. tically wrap and format as you edit through the XML HTML Formatting feature See XML HTML Formatting for complete information Other miscellaneous tag and attribute options are still provided through the HTML Formatting Options dia log To access these options click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog choose html from the Extension drop down list then click the Options button The HTML Formatting Options dialog is displayed Tip You can also display the HTML Formatting Options dialog by clicking the HTML Options button on the XML HTML Formatting Scheme Configuration dialog click Window Preferences ex pand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the XML HTML Formatting set ting Note 267 HTML Languages similar to HTML have similar Formatting Options dialogs which are not specifically documented Figure 7 24 HTML Formatting Options Dialog HTML Formatting Options Case for inserted tags Uppercase Lowercase Capitalize Case for inserted attributes Uppercase Lowercase Capitalize Case for inserted single word values Uppercase Lowercase Capitalize Case for Hex Values Uppercase Lowercase Embedded ASF Dialect VBScript Visual Basic JScript GavaScipt c C Sharp _ Use paths for file entries Use lower ca
582. ting Conditional Breakpoints For help on setting conditional breakpoints see the Eclipse Help on Managing conditional breakpoints Setting Java Exception Breakpoints For help on setting Java Exception breakpoints see the Eclipse Help section Add Java Exception Break point 176 Commenting Blocks and Lines Commenting SlickEdite Core makes commenting your code easy You can comment out selected text or type the start characters for a new doc comment and have the doc comment skeleton automatically expanded SlickEd it Core also makes your comments easier to read by automatically wrapping them as you type Existing comments can be reflowed to match current comment wrap settings Commenting Blocks and Lines Existing text in your code can be commented out or uncommented as follows e To comment out a selected code block from the main menu click Format gt Comment Block or use the box command This comments out the entire selection as a single block comment by surrounding the block with comment characters you have specified in your comment settings e To comment out selected lines from the main menu click Format Comment Lines or use the comment command Each line in the selection is commented out as a single line comment If there is no selection the current line is commented out If using a block selection where there are partially se lected lines comment characters are placed at the beginning and end of t
583. tion describes some of the advanced options that are available for COBOL COBOL Formatting Options Options are available for the COBOL language file extension for changing smart indenting and styles for template editing To access these options from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting Choose the language extension you wish to work with from the Extension drop down list then click the Options but ton The Formatting Options dialog specific to the file extension you have selected will be displayed Note Languages similar to COBOL have similar Formatting Options dialogs which are not specifically documented The COBOL Formatting Options dialog is pictured below Figure 7 37 COBOL Formatting Options Dialog COBOL Formatting Options Keyword case Syntax COBOL 74 syntax strict columns COBOL 85 syntax Capitalize first letter COBOL 2000 syntax object oriented O None C Auto syntax help _ Auto case keywords Embedded SQL Dialect Line Numbering PL SQL C COBOL style columns 1 6 SQL Server _ SPF style columns 73 80 DB2 The following options are available e Keyword case Specifies the case of keywords used by template editing If Auto case keywords is 299 Pascal selected the case of keywords are changed to the keyword case specified when you type them For example
584. to an underlined letter on a menu name Managing Bindings Create and manage key bindings using the Key Bindings dialog The dialog displays a list of all SlickEdit Core commands including macros that you have recorded their associated key sequences and the lan guage editing mode in which the key binding can be used Documentation for the selected command if available is also displayed The Key Bindings dialog provides capabilities to incrementally search by command or by key sequence export and import custom bindings save an HTML chart of your bindings and run a selected command or user recorded macro To access the Key Bindings dialog click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Key Bindings setting or use the gui_keybindings command The first time the Key Bindings dialog is invoked the Building Tag File progress bar may be displayed while Slick C macro code is tagged Figure 4 3 Key Bindings Dialog 45 Managing Bindings WW Key Bindings CUA Search by command Search by key sequence bookmark 2 R Command Mode goto bookmark next bookmark pop all bookmarks pop bookmark prev bookmark push bookmark set bookmark This function is identical to the goto_bookmark command except it requires less typing Note This command no longer supports the and options AppliesTo Edit_Window Categories Bookmark Functions S
585. to load a diff state file dif restoring the saved state of a multi file diff session Path Information and Filespecs The following list describes the path information and filespec settings that can be entered on the DIFFzilla dialog e Path 1 Path 2 To compare directories set Path 1 and Path 2 to directory names To compare files set Path 1 and Path 2 to file names If the file names only differ by path you only need to specify a dir ectory for Path 2 Click the Ellipses button to browse or the B button to select an open buffer 373 DIFFzillao Dialog e Use file on disk Select this option to diff the file on disk and not the file in the buffer e More Click this button to display additional file options e Symbols Click this button to select a symbol to diff The selected symbol will appear next to the word Symbol under the Line range options All symbols from Path 1 are diffed against all symbols from Path 2 Performing a multi file diff always diffs all symbols When symbols are diffed there is a multi file diff on just two files which immediately diffs all symbols Not all symbol blocks are identified correctly For an example see Comparing Symbols or Parts of Files e Line range Specifies the start and end line numbers for the range of lines to compare If you set the start line number and leave the end line number blank the range extends to the end of the file When you select a range of lines you can c
586. to modify either of these values and click Apply and then OK to change the settings Note that these changes will not be effective until the next start of Eclipse Backing Up the Configuration Directory You should make periodic backups of your SlickEdit Core configuration directory If you experience a problem in the editor you can often solve it by using a saved config directory SlickEdit Core Product Support may also ask you to use a default configuration to help debug problems This is accomplished by backing up your config directory and then deleting its contents Table of User Configuration Files The table below provides a list of the user configuration files Table 11 3 User Configuration Files 485 Configuration Directory User Config File Description als A text file that contains user defined extension specif ic aliases alias slk A text file that contains user defined global aliases directory aliases ftp ini UNIX uftp ini A text file that contains user defined FTP configura tions project vpe UNIX uproject vpe ubox ini uformat ini A text file that contains user defined extension specif ic projects A text file that contains user defined box and line comment styles A text file that contains user defined beautifier schemes uprint ini A text file that contains user defined printing schemes uscheme ini A text file that contains user define
587. to navigate from a function to its proto type and vice versa See Symbol Navigation for more information about navigating through your code e Show info for symbol under mouse When selected as the mouse cursor floats over a symbol the information and comments for that symbol are displayed e Update after ms idle The value that you type in this field contains the idle time in milliseconds be fore the List Members feature displays the list To prevent the List Members list from being displayed when you are typing fast set the idle time to 300 milliseconds Select a Tag Dialog The Select a Tag dialog is used to prompt whether you want to navigate to the symbol s definition or de claration when you use Go to Definition Ctrl Dot Navigate Go to Definition or push_tag com mand 420 File Options Dialog Figure 10 40 Select a Tag Dialog MS Select a tag T Rectangle getWidtht Cidev Rectangles Rectangle cop Rectangle getwidtht Ci dey Rectangles Rectangle hpp Always navigate to symbol definition proc dlways navigate to symbol declaration proto Do not show these options again Select the definition you want to go to You can also check the options on this dialog to set the behavior going forward When you set the Always navigate to symbol options the settings are also updated for the Go to Definition options on the Context Tagging Tab of the Extension Options dialog Window Preferences ex
588. to set the Internet Protocol IP version To access it from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Network Options setting Figure 10 60 Network Options Dialog Network Options Internet Protocol IP 1Py4 only 1Pv6 only The Internet Protocol IP setting affects how addresses are chosen when connecting to a host Select IPv6 and IPy4 the default to automatically select the address when connecting to a host Select Dud only to Force IPv4 address connections Select IPv only to Force IPv address connections Features which use this setting include FTP SFTP and Open URL The Internet Protocol IP setting affects how addresses are chosen when connecting to a host Select IPv6 and IPv4 the default for SlickEdit Core to automatically select the address when connecting to a host Select IPv4 only to force IPv4 address connections Select IPv6 only to force IPv6 address connec tions Features that use this setting include FTP and SFTP Web Browser Setup Dialog The Web Browser Setup dialog contains options for specifying the browser to use when SlickEdit Core 459 Web Browser Setup Dialog needs to launch one To access this dialog click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Web Browser Setup setting Note This configuration does not apply to the Help system Figu
589. tomatically add a DO END block e Insert blank line between DO END Indicates whether syntax expansion should insert a blank line when a DO END block is inserted Keyword case Specifies the case of keywords used by template editing If Auto case keywords is selected the case of keywords are changed to the keyword case specified when you type them For example when you type the word procedure and the Keyword case is set to Upper case the editor changes procedure to PROCEDURE Indent WHEN from SELECT Indicates whether the WHEN clause inside a SELECT statement should be indented SPF style line numbering columns 73 80 When selected expect line numbers in columns 73 through 80 when renumbering lines 304 Begin End Structure Matching for Python Python This section describes some of the advanced features that are available for the Python language Begin End Structure Matching for Python Begin End Structure Matching moves the cursor from the beginning of a code structure to the end or vice versa To place the cursor on the opposite end of the structure when the cursor is on a begin or end keyword pair press Cirl find_matching_paren command or from the menu click Search gt Go to Matching Parenthesis The find_matching_paren command supports matching parenthesis pairs and For Python SlickEdit Core supports the matching of the colon token and the end of context Note the cursor location
590. tomatically inserted In addition if you type a close parenthesis after an automatically inserted parameter it will insert a space before the close parenthesis e Insert space after comma If selected a space is inserted after the comma when a parameter name is automatically inserted such as myfun a b c Miscellaneous Options The following options appear at the bottom of the Context Tagging tab e Go to Definition navigates to symbol definition proc or declaration proto These options are mutually exclusive If neither option is selected the Select a Tag dialog is displayed prompting you for both definitions and declarations In any case if you use Ctrl Dot to jump to a symbol you can cycle through the alternate symbols by pressing Ctrl Dot repeatedly You can step backwards through the list of matches by pressing Ctrl Comma However once you reach the first match Ctrl Comma will then pop you back to your original location where you were before you pressed Citrl Dot Independent of the settings for these options in the following circumstances SlickEdit Core will jump directly to the definition or declaration e If the cursor is on the first line of a symbol s declaration it will jump directly to the definition provided it is unique e If the cursor is on the first line of a symbol s definition it will jump directly to the declaration provided it is unique This behavior is particularly convenient for C programmers
591. tracted method Generate comment for extracted method C none javadoc O smidoc Argument Mame MYCLASS amp cl Prototype void main_extracted My CLASS Sc Quick Modify Parameter List This refactoring allows you to add delete and re order parameters for a selected function The refactor ing will modify the parameter list for the selected function and all of its counterparts within the class hier archy Quick Modify Parameter List is only available for C C Java and Slick Ce Quick Replace Literal with Constant Replaces the selected literal with a constant replacing use of the literal with the new constant Quick Re place Literal with Constant is only available for C C Java and Slick Ce C Refactoring You can apply many commonly used refactorings in C Note C Refactoring is not supported for Objective C or Objective C While Objective C is closely related to C the refactoring engine cannot accommodate the syntactic differences 200 C Refactoring Available C Refactorings To access the C refactorings from the main menu click C C Refactoring The C Refactoring menu can be also be accessed from the right click menus within the Symbols and Outline views Rename Rename is used to rename variables methods and classes It uses Context Tagging to identify e The symbol under the cursor or any symbol selected in the Symbols or Outline views e All of the symbo
592. tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog select the Context Tagginge Figure 10 39 Extension Options Context Tagging Tab 417 Extension Options Dialog Extension Options Extension C k E ee Indent Word Wrap General Comments Comment Wrap Advanced Auto Complete Context Tagging Ge List members Parameter information Auto ist members Auto display parameter information Show comments Show comments C Completion on space Auto insert matching parameter Space always inserts space Auto ist compatible parameters Insert open parenthesis _ Pad parentheses E Preserve identifier to the right of cursor C Insert space after comma Auto Jet compatible values _ Go to Definition navigates to symbol definition proc C Go to Definition navigates to symbol declaration proto Show info for symbol under mouse Update after ms idle o affects all extensions Caillet sos J Cree List Members The following options apply to List Members See List Members for more information e Auto list members If selected typing a member access operator for example or gt in C will trigger SlickEdit Core to display a list of the members for the corresponding type To access this fea ture on demand press Alt Dot If you use this feature on demand and you are not in a member ex pression this feature will display a list of locals global variables curre
593. ts by Automatically add import during code help for Java Automatically add import during code help For JSP Package sort order The following settings are available e Package explicit import limit before using wildcard If more than this number of classes are ex plicitly imported from the same package in one file the imports will be replaced with a single wildcard import e Add blank line between groups of imports Organize Imports will group imports by package name or top level package name Select this option to force Organize Imports to add a blank line between 369 3 Way Merge Dialog these groups instead of having just one flat list of imports e Number of package nesting levels to group imports by If this is set to 1 import statements will be grouped by top level package name only For example all your imports from java packages would be in a separate group from your imports from com packages If set to 2 import statements will be grouped by second level package names For example all your imports from java util would be ina separate group from your imports from java awt e Automatically add import during code help for Java If selected SlickEdit Core will attempt to automatically add imports as you edit Java code e Automatically add import during code help for JSP If selected SlickEdit Core will attempt to auto matically add imports as you edit Java code embedded in HTML JSP imports are added us
594. tting of existing com ments 412 Extension Options Dialog If Maximum right column is used comment lines will be wrapped when they reach the specified column even if they have not reached the specified fixed width This is useful if coding standards mandate that text should not exceed a specified column Fixed right margin If selected lines will break before the specified number of columns in the Right column field has been reached e Preserve width on existing comments If selected when editing an existing comment SlickEdite Core preserves the width of the existing comment The width is determined by the length of the longest multi line paragraph If the width of the existing comment cannot be determined the format ting option specified under Comment width will be used instead Continue bullet list on Enter If selected when Enter is pressed inside a bulleted paragraph a new bullet will be inserted and the cursor will be placed at the text starting position e Javadoc If Use hanging indent on block tag comments is selected the second line of a block tag comment will be automatically aligned to the first non whitespace character after the first word after the tag e Sync vertical line column This button will make visible and move the vertical line column to match the hard margin column if using fixed right column margins or the maximum right column if using fixed width Advanced Tab The Advanced tab allows
595. tting of your text when XML HTML Formatting is enabled You can create different schemes for use with either XML or HTML and or different schemes for use with different individual files For example you may want one scheme for HTML and a different scheme for XML Or you may want one scheme for creating new files and another for editing existing files Schemes are stored as XML files in the format lt SchemeName gt xml and are located in the formats chemes xwschemes subdirectory of your user configuration directory Scheme files can be shared or checked into version control to ensure consistency in the formatting of your team s XML HTML files Use the XML HTML Formatting Scheme Configuration dialog to work with schemes You can access the dialog from Window Preferences SlickEdit General XML HTML Formatting or by using the xml_html_options command Available schemes are listed in the Schemes column The tags that make up each scheme are listed in the Tags column Figure 7 32 XML HTML Formatting Scheme Configuration Dialog 281 Working with Schemes XML HTML Formatting Scheme Configuration Scheme Settings html default html 1 General Content Wrap Tag Layout xhtml xml default xml preserve_content semi block End tags start_tag_only treat_as_content Has end tag a abbr Insert end tag on gt acronym address applet Match tag style of 7 no match base zg C Scheme uses case sens
596. ttings Janderson My Documents My EI Browse create a tag file using the Tag Files dialog Tools gt Tag Files V Create tag file for MET Frameworks C and VB Source C WINDOWS Microsoft NET Framework v 11 4322 Destination C Documents and Settings Yanderson My Documents My EI 67 Building Tag Files To create tag files for the languages listed enter the base directory for your package if it is not already filled in as well as the destination of your tag file Click Create tag file s and the Building Tag Files dia log box opens showing the progress as the tag file is built For source files other than these languages use the Add Tag File dialog which allows you to choose from a list of languages the source type for which to insert the tag file See Creating Extension Specific Tag Files below Creating Extension Specific Tag Files Extension specific tag files provide the same symbolic information for libraries that is provided for code in your projects A library is a pre built unit of code that is not edited as part of this development effort These tag files are accessible from any project written in the same language You need to create an extension specific tag file if your project uses a compiler whose standard libraries are not tagged by the Create Tag Files for Run Time Libraries dialog see Creating Tag Files for Run Time Libraries or if you are using a third party library Addit
597. ture from a code block select the code block or part of the code block then right click and select Unsurround or use the unsurround command The entire code block under the cursor is automatically highlighted and a dialog prompt appears to confirm the unsurround operation Click OK and the if line of the code block as well as the line containing the closing brace are removed The remaining code is unindented to the correct level Deleting Code Blocks Unsurround is also associated with the cut_line Ctrl Backspace and delete_line Ctrl Del com mands When one of these commands is invoked while the cursor is on the first line of a block statement the Delete Code Block dialog appears from which you can choose to delete the line delete the entire block or unsurround the block Figure 6 27 Delete Code Block Dialog Delete Code Block You are deleting the First line of a block statement What would you like to do Delete the line i C Always just delete line Delete the entire block Unsurround the black Note Deleted lines will be copied to the clipboard cut Cancel Each of these operations copies the removed text to the clipboard This is useful if you want to paste the 170 Bookmarks structure into a different location because as soon as the text is pasted SlickEdit Core enters Dynamic Surround mode allowing you to pull statements into the pasted block The Delete Code Block dialog also contains an
598. ues Specifies whether you want word values enclosed in double quotes after the of an attribute inside the body of a tag For example lt td align right gt would be beautified to lt td align right gt Select Preserve if you want word values left alone e Quote number values Specifies whether you want number values enclosed in double quotes after the of an attribute inside the body of a tag For example lt td width 590 gt would be beautified to lt td width 590 gt Select Preserve if you want number values left alone Quote all values When on all values will be quoted after the of an attribute inside the body of a tag For example lt td align right gt would be beautified to lt td align right gt Comments Tab Figure 7 28 HTML Beautifier Comments Tab 275 HTML HTML Beautifier Indent Tags Attributes Values Comments Advanced Schemes Beautify Trailing comments Indent stand alone comments Specific column In Sal Indent column 1 comments Original absolute column Help Cancel DESEN Original relative indent Save Settings Sync extension options The Comments tab contains the following options and settings e Indent stand alone comments When on indicates whether comments which appear on lines by themselves with no content to the left are indented to the current content indent level The following is an example of a stand alone comment lt stand alone comm
599. uffer from the main menu click Format gt Beautify or use the gui_beautify command A dialog box is displayed with functions specific to the type of project that is active If an HTML project is active then the HTML Beautifier dialog appears with op tions If a GNU C C project is active then the C C Beautifier dialog opens and so on Beautifying is supported for the languages listed below Follow the cross reference links to learn more about working with each beautifier e Ada See Ada Beautifier e C C C Java JavaScript Slick C These beautifiers contain the same options and settings See C C Beautifier e CFML HTML These beautifiers contain the same options and settings See HTML Beautifier e Javadoc See Javadoc Beautifier e XML XSD These beautifiers contain the same options and settings See XML Beautifier Reflowing Text To reflow text in the current paragraph according to your margin settings click Format Format Para graph or use the reflow_paragraph command Margin settings are defined on the Word Wrap Tab Win dow Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Exten sion Setup setting When you reflow a paragraph the cursor will be kept at the same location within the current paragraph after reflow has occurred unless the Reflow next option is selected Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the
600. ugh the current buffer for the word or selection at the cursor You can find the next occurrence of a search item by selecting a string in an existing buffer or SlickEdit Core Search view then selecting Quick Search from the right click menu or by using the quick_search command The commands find_next Ctrl G and find_prev Ctrl Shift G will find the next and previous instances of the item respectively Quick Replace Quick Replace gets the current word or selection at the cursor prompts for replacement text on the com mand line then highlights each occurrence of the word and prompts if you want to replace the text To use Quick Replace right click on any word or selection and select Quick Replace or use the quick_replace command The quick_replace command has a command line alias qr The qr command takes the replace string as an argument For example if the cursor is on the word cat the command qr dog will prompt you to re place all the instances of cat with dog in the current buffer Incremental Searching During incremental searching a string is searched for as it is typed To start a forward incremental search 182 Incremental Searching using the command line use the i_search command Ctrl I To start a reverse incremental search use the reverse_i_search command Ctrl Shift l The following key combinations based on the default CUA emulation take on a different definition during an incremental search
601. ur tag files updated when another application modifies a file This option is not on by default because it requires SlickEdit Core to con stantly perform disk I O to check dates of files on disk Start after minutes idle When Background tagging of files is selected re tagging of files on disk starts after the user has not touched the keyboard or the mouse for this number of idle minutes Maximum number of files to tag When Background tagging of files is selected this sets a limit to the number of files SlickEdit Core will re tag in one pass Maximum number of files to consider When background re tagging of files starts you cannot use the editor until it is done with the amount of processing specified by this option or the option Maximum number of files to tag The Maximum number of files to consider field specifies the number of file dates to compare Specifying smaller maximum values means you will be able to regain access to the editor quicker and re tagging will be slower Specifying larger maximum values means it will take longer to regain access to the editor but re tagging will be quicker Minutes before restarting Specifies the number of minutes to wait after background tagging has fully tagged all files until background tagging can restart again The default is 10 minutes Workspace tag file only When this option is selected background tagging will cycle through only the workspace tag file When not selected background tagg
602. ured by using the C C Compiler Properties dialog box Tools gt C Refactoring C C Compiler Options See C C Compiler Settings for more information e Java Compiler Configuration Tag Files These tag files correspond to one of the Java compiler configurations These may be configured by using the Java Compiler Properties dialog box Tools Tag Files Auto Tag and click the Browse button beside the Java Compiler drop down menu 71 Managing Tag Files e Other Extension Specific Tag Categories The tag files listed under each of the other language spe cific categories apply to that language only Use these categories to add tag files for third party librar ies Tag File Search Order When doing tag lookups the tag files are searched in a specific order which affects the tags found The following are examples of the order in which tag files are searched Example Java Tag File Search Order If a Java source file is open when a tagging related operation is performed the tag files are searched in the following order 1 Workspace tag file providing it contains other Java source files 2 Auto updated tag files containing other Java source files 3 The Java Compiler Configuration tag file corresponding to the Java environment specified for your project 4 Extension specific Java tag files in the order that they are listed in the Context Tagging Tag Files Dialog Example C C Tag File Search Order
603. use it For example to bind sur round with to Ctrl W simply press Ctrl W The key sequence you pressed is displayed in the box e For a mouse binding click the mouse button you want to use For example to bind surround_with to the right click mouse event simply right click with the mouse and RButtonDn is displayed in the box Use the red X button to clear the input field if you make a mistake If you enter a key sequence or mouse event that is already assigned to another command macro a warning prompt is displayed If you continue the previous binding is unbound and reassigned Tip e SlickEdit Core allows key sequences that are very long but shorter sequences are easier to re member and more practical to use e Do not begin key sequences with keys that are normally used in typing Otherwise these keys will launch the operation and not appear when you type For example binding a command to the A key will prevent you from using that letter in your code It is best to always begin your key sequences with a Ctrl or Alt key combination 4 The default language editing mode is the default language editing mode for new bindings which means the binding will work in all language editing modes If you want the binding to work only in a 48 Managing Bindings specific language editing mode you can change it now by clicking the Advanced button on the Bind Key dialog Click Bind to mode then from the drop down list sel
604. uto completion suggestions will be displayed This setting affects all extensions Update after ms idle The number of milliseconds the editor must be idle before auto completion suggestions will be refreshed This setting affects all extensions Show light bulb If selected displays the light bulb as a reminder when Auto Complete suggestions are available for the current word prefix Show expanded text If selected shows the rest of the word or statement being completed Show list of matches If selected shows the list of matches underneath the word prefix e Show icons If selected displays symbol icons and folder icons Turn this feature off to get a more compact list containing only completions e Show categories If selected shows completions in a categorized list for each type If not selected all completions will be shown in one flat sorted list Show symbol declaration If selected for symbol completions this will show the symbol declaration as acomment to the right of the symbol completion Show comments If selected for symbol completions this will display the symbol s comments to the right of the symbol completion Context Tagging Tab Context Tagging options can be configured for each file extension type This allows you to activate and deactivate particular features on a per language basis To change these options from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the
605. utton Click to show a side by side comparison of the original file and the file with re placements made This lets you see the changes and confirm them before committing the changes to the file 351 Find and Replace View You can use the menu items Edit gt Undo and Edit gt Redo to undo redo replacements Replace in Files Tab This tab on the Find and Replace View provides the same functionality as the Replace Tab with the ad ded ability to conduct multi file replacements It contains one additional option described below Figure 10 8 Find and Replace Replace in Files Tab 352 Find and Replace View Find and Replace Look in C dev inventory k D File types Exclude L Look in subfolders D El Search options Match case Preserve case C Match whole word Leave modified files open Wildcards wi Color Colors None El Results options Search Results window Search lt 0 gt C Output to editor window C Append to output List matching lines only C List filenames only Replace All Preview All 353 Find Symbol View e Leave modified files open Select this option to open all of the files on which a replace has been per formed The Results options are the same as those on the Find in Files Tab Tip You can use the menu items Edit Multi File Undo and Edit Multi File Redo to undo redo replacements in mult
606. ved When you type the tags in the editor the case must match exactly or the tag will not be recognized and the default tag set tings will be applied This option is appropriate for XML HTML is not case sensitive 286 Formatting Settings Content Wrap Settings The Content Wrap tab of the XML HTML Formatting dialog contains options for specifying how wrapping should occur for the selected tag s content Figure 7 35 XML HTML Formatting Content Wrap Tab General Content Wrap Tag Layout Gei Wrap tag content Tag content width Fixed width a Maximum right column Fixed right margin Right column d Include tags in width calculation Treat as content fe g lt b gt no Tag Layout Preserve content e g lt pre gt There are three main mutually exclusive options e Wrap tag content When selected content between tags is wrapped according to the settings spe cified in the Tag content width group box See Tag Content Width Settings below for details e Treat as content When selected the tag as well as its content is wrapped according to the parent tag content The tag is treated as inline with the surrounding text This could be useful for style tags such as lt b gt or lt i gt that you want to appear inline with the content For example lt div gt This is a sample paragraph with the lt b gt bold tags lt b gt being treated as content inline with the rest of the text
607. win usr inc lude c 35 2 Cool usr ince lude ct 4 3 25i686 pe cygqwin cygwin usr inc lude ct 3 2 backward cygwin lib gec lib i666 pe cygwin 3 2 include cygwin usr include cygwin usr include wizapi eh mamini nasri ine lade cuca ph Copy To Clipboard Finally the following example shows a test resulting in no errors or warnings 218 Reviewing Refactoring Changes Figure 6 51 Test Parsing Configuration Example 3 W C Refactoring Configuration Test Configuration settings to be used to parse this file Current file Cryslickeditiwi2 0 0 SampleProjects ucppicpp cpp Cwrent workspace Open Cryslickeditiyvi2 0 0 SampleProjects ucpp cpp vpw Effective project Change Ciyslickedit w12 0 0 SampleProjects ucppi cpp vp Macro Definitions Edit User Include Search Directories Edit Active C C Compiler Configuration Change Cyewitl 3 2 1686 pc cyswin Default C C Compiler Configuration Change Cyowin 3 2 1686 pc cyowin Compiler Emulation Header File Edit Cryslickeditiwie 0 0 sysconfig vsparser gt win h Compiler Include Search Directories Edit Ciycyoqwin usr include ct i3 z cygwin usr inc lude ct 3 25 i686 pe cygwin Cool usr ince Lude ct4 3 2 backward cygwin libs gec lib i666 pe cygwin 3 2 include cygwin usri include cygwin usr include wazapi Dyoygquins usr include cyqwin cygwin usr inc lude mingw Copy To Clipboard
608. wing commands are supported in ISPF emulation mode Table 11 11 Supported ISPF Commands Command Description ispf_bottom Move cursor to the end of the buffer ispf_down Move cursor to next page of text ispf_enter Handle the Enter key or Right Control key in ISPF emulation 518 Regular Expression Syntax Command Description ispf_home Place the focus on the command line in ISPF emu lation ispf_retrieve Does command line retrieval getting the next com mand line from the list ispf_retrieve_back Identical to the ispf_retrieve back command ispf_top Move cursor up to the top of the buffer ispf_up Move cursor up to the previous page of text ispf_do_lIc Immediately process all commands found in the line prefix area 519 UNIX Regular Expressions Regular Expression Syntax This section provides lists of the UNIX SlickEdit and Brief regular expression syntaxes samples and Unicode category specifications UNIX Regular Expressions UNIX regular expressions are defined in the following table Table 11 12 UNIX Regular Expression UNIX Regular Expression Definition Matches beginning of line Matches end of line Matches any character except newline X Maximal match of one or more occurrences of X See Minimal versus Maximal Matching A Maximal match of zero or more occurrences of X
609. with 1 0 Brief regular expression Search for 4 Replace with 1 0 Replace occurrences of if and while with xify and xwhiley Unmatched groups are null Note The UNIX syntax 2 SlickEdit syntax 1 Brief syn tax 1 is replaced with null Reverse text on lines containing a comma Lines with abc def will be changed to def abc Notice that the UNIX regular expression search string uses a minimal matching operator so that the comma actually matches the first comma in the line and not the last Minimal versus Maximal Matching If you are using tagged expressions or regular expressions to perform a search and replace you need to understand the difference between the minimal and maximal operators Take for example a line of text which contains a DOS file name path1 path2 path3 name ext The regular expression UNIX 4 SlickEdit or lt Brief will match the string path1 The regular expression 4 UNIX 4 SlickEdit or lt Brief which uses the maximal oper ator matches the string path path2 path3 As arule of thumb you will usually want to use the minimal matching operators UNIX SlickEdit or Brief and UNIX SlickEdit Brief after a less specific regular expression such as UNIX or SlickEdit Brief You will usually want to use the maximal matching operators after a regular expression which matches something
610. x select the name of the key that you want to configure The commands available for that key are then displayed in the Command list box Additional options can be set using the check boxes Click the Tab Options button to change the function of the Tab key The Indent tab of the Extension Op tions dialog box is displayed For more information on changing Tab key functions see Indenting with Jabs For descriptions of all the elements on the Redefine Common Keys dialog see Redefine Common Keys Dialog 38 Chapter A User Preferences 39 Global Preferences Introduction to User Preferences SlickEdite Core can be customized to accommodate your own individual preferences Most user prefer ence information is available by clicking Window Preferences expanding SlickEdit and clicking Gen eral in the tree User preferences are broken into two categories preferences that apply to all languages global prefer ences and preferences that apply to specific language extensions Tip If you are using SlickEdit Core in a multiple user environment each user must pass a local direct ory to eclipse using the command line flag vsconfig This allows each user to have their own configuration If making modifications to vslick ini make a local copy of this file and place it in the vsconfig directory file See Changing the Configuration Directory for more information Global Preferences Global preferences that can
611. x Mode Key Key Function Tab and Shift Tab Toggle cursor between hex data on left and text data on right Home Move cursor to beginning of hex text line End Move cursor to last character of hex text line Backspace Delete a byte to the left of the cursor and move the cursor to the left Delete Delete the byte under the cursor Viewing Special Characters By default many important characters are not visible in the editor like tabs spaces and line ending char acters To view these click Display Special Chars SlickEdit Core will then display a visible charac ter to represent these invisible characters When using this option with Display Line Hex the hex value for the actual character like space will be displayed not the value for the character used to repres ent it like a dot 223 Selective Display To define which characters to display from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting and select the Special Characters tab See Defining Special Characters below Note Viewing special characters is only available for ASCII files Special Character Toggles The following toggles are available on the view menu e Hex Toggle e Line Hex Toggle e Special Characters Toggle e New Line Characters Toggle e Tab Characters Toggle e Space Characters Toggle e Line Numbers Toggle
612. xpand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the Selections Tab Cutting Copying and Moving Text Dragging and Dropping Selected text can be copied or moved by dragging and dropping the selected text using the left mouse button To set this functionality from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the General setting On the General Options dialog select the More Tab Select the option Allow drag drop text Using Clipboards Use clipboards to copy or move text among files that are being edited This includes files that are being edited the command line a dialog text box or another application that supports text clipboards such as a word processor When using a cut or copy command a clipboard is created Insert this clipboard back in to the buffer by pressing Ctrl V Press Ctrl K to copy the current word to the clipboard Then use Ctrl V to paste it anywhere Pressing Ctrl K multiple times in succession creates one clipboard All clipboard related commands are available on the Edit drop down menu To move text between clipboards complete the following steps 1 Go to the beginning of a line with some text and press Ctrl E to erase the text to the end of that line 2 Press Cirl V to paste the text back in 3 Move the cursor somewhere else in the buffer and press Ctrl V You have just ma
613. y get to the top or bottom of the window before scrolling occurs Does not affect horizontal scrolling 52 Fonts Setting Fonts and Colors The SlickEdit Core editor and views do not use the Eclipse color and font settings To change the fonts and colors in the SlickEdit Core editor and views change the color and font settings using the SlickEdit Core options For information about changing the colors of code such as colors used for keywords see Color Coding Fonts SlickEdit Core provides the capability to change the fonts used by edit windows the command line status text and other screen elements Recommended fonts are listed You can also set fonts for editor windows Tip Xft fonts are supported on Linux Setting Fonts for Screen Elements To configure font settings for screen elements use the Font Configuration dialog To access this dialog from the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the Font setting Figure 4 5 Font Configuration Dialog 53 Fonts Font Configuration Element SBCSIDBCS Source Windows k E i t Fixed Fant i Fixedsys Italic HE TERMIN C Strikethrough Lucida Console 3 Underline Lucida Sans Typewriter L Fixed Fonts Only Script Default Ke Sample Line before Ae Bo Ce 11 00 Line after For descriptions of the options on this dialog see Font Configuration
614. y span mul tiple lines dqdoubles Color double quoted strings Two double quotes represent one double quote dqterminate Do not color code a double quoted string until the string is terminated This style does not support dqmultiline or dqbackslashml dqlen1 Color double quoted strings Double quoted strings contain exactly one character sqbackslash Color single quoted strings Characters following a backslash in a single quoted string are included in the string like C sqbackslashml Color single quoted strings If a double quoted string ends in a backslash it continues the string to the next line sqmultiline Color single quoted strings String may span mul tiple lines sqdoubles Color single quoted strings Two consecutive single quotes represent one single quote like Pascal sqterminate Do not color code a single quoted string until the string is terminated This style does not support sqmultiline or sqbackslashml sqlen1 Single quoted strings contain exactly one character like Ada amphhex Hexadecimal numbers are of the form amp Hdddd like BASIC ampooct Octal numbers are of the form amp Odddd like BA SIC hexh Hexadecimal numbers are of the form ddddH like 495 Creating a Lexer Name and a New VLX File Value of style Description Intel Assembler octo Octal numbers are of the form ddddO like Intel
615. y the best way to edit lines of code and they also work with SmartPastee which reindents pasted lines according to the surrounding code see SmartPaste To select lines use one of the following methods e Keyboard method Position the cursor at the beginning of the line to be selected Next enter the se lect_line command Cirl L or Edit Select Line Then move the cursor to the last line to be se lected by using the arrow keys or by using the mouse e Mouse method To select the current line triple left click within a line or click Edit Select Line To select multiple lines left click and drag in the space between the left edge of the buffer and the edit window border The mouse cursor changes to point to the upper right instead of the upper left Selection Keys The following table contains the default keyboard shortcuts CUA emulation for selection functions Table 6 4 Selection Key Key or Key Sequence Function Ctrl U Deselect text F8 Start character selection Ctrl L Start line selection Ctrl B Start block or column selection Shift Right Start or extend selection to right Shift Left Start or extend selection to left 128 Selections Key or Key Sequence Function Shift Up Start or extend selection up one line Shift Down Start or extend selection down one line Shift PgUp Start or extend selection up one page Shift PgDn Start or extend se
616. y three letter string starting with the let ter p and ending with the letter t Two possible matches are pot and pat St Matches the letter s followed by any number of characters followed by the nearest letter t Two pos sible matches are seat and st for while Matches the strings for or while A p XY Z Matches lines beginning with a file name Matches x followed by one or more occurrences of y followed by z Unicode Category Specifications for Regular Expressions The Unicode consortium standard regular expression categories are supported The syntax for specifying categories is p MainCategoryLetter Subcategories The above syntax matches the categories specified The following syntax matches all characters not in the categories specified P MainCategoryLetter Subcategories The p and P notations can only be used inside a character set specification MainCategoryLetter can be L M N P S Z or C The valid Subcategories depend on the MainCategoryLetter spe cified If no Subcategories are specified all are assumed For example e p L matches all Unicode letters e p Lul matches all uppercase and lowercase letters e P L matches all characters that are not letters 537 Unicode Category Specifications for Regular Expressions The following table lists the valid subcategories for a specific main category These character tables were generated using the file Un
617. yed You can access the List Macros dialog any time from the main menu by clicking Macro List Macros or by using the list_macros command Click Bind to Key to open the Key Bindings dialog showing a listing of only your recorded macros Note You can also display the Key Bindings dialog by clicking Window Preferences SlickEdit gt General Key Bindings or by using the gui_keybindings command However if you display the dialog in this manner it will show a list of all commands and user recorded macros To view your recorded macros click on theRecorded column header to sort and display items with a Yes which indicates these are recorded macros A more convenient method is to use the Bind to Key button on the List Macros dialog to only show recorded macros in the Key Bindings dialog Figure 9 1 Binding Recorded Macros 332 Recorded Macro Operations MB Key Bindings CUA Search by command Search by key sequence sample user macro E OR Command Mode sample user macro default Bind Key Command sample user macro Key Sequence E Ge eo Gea a eee Creating bindings for recorded macros works the same as creating bindings for SlickEdit Core com mands Click Add to initiate the binding then specify the key sequence or mouse event to use See Man aging Bindings for more information about creating editing and removing bindings Binding Macro
618. yle is selected this specifies the number of bit positions by which to increment e Pad to number of digits Specifies the digit width for each number Number is padded to at least this number of digits by adding leading zeros e Output Both the Hexadecimal and Hexadecimal flags options specify hexadecimal syntax output based on the buffers extension We determine the hexadecimal syntax based on the color coding which supports Oxhhhh C syntax amp Hdddd Basic hhhhH Intel assembler and hhhh Motorola assem bler If the buffer s extension has no color coding the hex numbers are prefixed with Ox Filter Selection Command Dialog The Command dialog is used to specify a command to run against the selected text It is displayed when you click Edit Other Filter Selection or use the filter_selection command 341 Search Dialogs Figure 10 3 Filter Selection Command Dialog Command Enter the command in the Command text box The selected text will be used as input to the command and the output from the command will replace the selected text Use the drop down arrow to the right of the Command text box to select from a history of previously entered commands 342 Find and Replace View Search Dialogs This section describes the SlickEdit Core dialogs and views associated with searching and replacing For more information about using search and replace operations see Find and Replace Note that there
619. you to set color coding extension specific project parameters and more To access these settings click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting On the Extension Options dialog select the Ad vanced tab Figure 10 37 Extension Options Advanced Tab 413 Extension Options Dialog Extension Options Extension c KA Indent Word Wrap General Comments Comment Wrap Advanced Auto Complete Context Tagging Color coding Lexer name Extension Specific Project cpp v Color Coding C Modified lines C Current line Context Menus Menu if no selection _ext_menu_default Menu if selection _ext_menu_default_sel Select first Affects all extensions Begin end pairs Word chars A Za z0 9_ _ Caillet sos Je The following options and settings are available e Color coding options The options below affect Color Coding For more information about working with this feature see Color Coding e Lexer name Use the drop down list to select the lexer to use to recognize elements to be colored e Color Coding Click this button to display the Color Coding Setup dialog allowing modification of language specific color coding for the current language e Modified lines If selected lines that have been modified are color coded e Current line Check on Current line to color code t
620. ython REXX Slick Ce 490 Modifying the VLX File to Change a Color Definition e VHDL e Visual Basic NET Modifying the VLX File to Change a Color Definition To modify an existing language specific coloring definition complete the following steps 1 Open vslick v1x for editing 2 Search for one of the section names CPP Java Delphi Pascal AWK REXX Perl HTML Modula 2 AWK COBOL Python CICS Fortran Visual Basic NET Ada or Slick C o 3 Modify the definition See below for information on the syntax of definitions 4 Invoke the cload command from the command line If the current buffer has a v1x extension it will be loaded Otherwise you will be prompted to specify a file name Specify vslick v1x including path as the file name Creating a Lexer Name and a New VLX File To create a new lexer name and thus a new section in the VLX file first complete all of the preceding steps under Modifying the VLX File to Change a Color Definition then complete the steps below 1 From the main menu click Window Preferences expand SlickEdit and click General in the tree then double click the File Extension Setup setting The Extension Options dialog box appears 2 Select the Advanced Tab 3 If this lexer definition is for a new extension create the extension with the New button Otherwise choose the appropriate extension 4 Set the Lexer Name for the new lexer definition you created 5 Turn on th

Slick V3.3 Computer Accessories User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents